2014 Murano Owner Manual PDF

®
2014 M U RAN O
OWNER’S MANUAL
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

Foreword
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN accessories with which your vehicle is could distract you.
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with equipped.
. ALWAYS use your seat belts and
confidence. It was produced using the latest Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best. appropriate child restraint systems.
techniques and strict quality control. When you require any service or have any Pre-teen children should be seated
This manual was prepared to help you under- questions, we will be glad to assist you with the in the rear seat.
stand the operation and maintenance of your extensive resources available to us.
. ALWAYS provide information about
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles of READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY the proper use of vehicle safety
driving pleasure. Please read through this
Before driving your vehicle, read your Owner’s features to all occupants of the
manual before operating your vehicle.
Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet controls and maintenance requirements, assist- . ALWAYS review this Owner’s Man-
explains details about the warranties cov- ing you in the safe operation of your vehicle. ual for important safety information.
ering your vehicle. The NISSAN Service
and Maintenance Guide explains details
about maintaining and servicing your ve- WARNING ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer DRIVING
Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION This vehicle will handle and maneuver
explain how to resolve any concerns you REMINDERS FOR SAFETY! differently from an ordinary passenger
may have with your vehicle, as well as Follow these important driving rules to car because it has a higher center of
clarify your rights under your state’s lemon help ensure a safe and comfortable trip gravity. As with other vehicles with fea-
law. for you and your passengers! tures of this type, failure to operate this
In addition to factory installed options, your vehicle correctly may result in loss of
. NEVER drive under the influence of
vehicle may also be equipped with additional control or an accident. Be sure to read
alcohol or drugs.
accessories installed by NISSAN or by your “On-pavement and off-road driving pre-
NISSAN dealer prior to delivery. It is important . ALWAYS observe posted speed lim- cautions”, “Avoiding collision and roll-
that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures, its and never drive too fast for over” and “Driving safety precautions” in
warnings, cautions and instructions concerning conditions. the “5. Starting and driving” section of
proper use of such accessories prior to operat- . ALWAYS give your full attention to this manual.
ing the vehicle and/or accessory. See a NISSAN driving and avoid using vehicle
dealer for details concerning the particular features or taking other actions that
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHI- IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
CLE THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual. They
This vehicle should not be modified.
are used in the following ways:
Modification could affect its performance,
safety or durability, and may even violate
governmental regulations. In addition, WARNING
damage or performance problems result-
ing from modification may not be covered This is used to indicate the presence of
under NISSAN warranties. a hazard that could cause death or
serious personal injury. To avoid or
WHEN READING THE MANUAL reduce the risk, the procedures must
This manual includes information for all be followed precisely.
SIC0697
options available on this model. Therefore,
you may find some information that does If you see the symbol above, it means “Do not
not apply to your vehicle. CAUTION do this” or “Do not let this happen”.
All information, specifications and illustrations in
this manual are those in effect at the time of This is used to indicate the presence of
printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change a hazard that could cause minor or
If you see a symbol similar to those above in an
specifications or design at any time without moderate personal injury or damage to
illustration, it means the arrow points to the front
notice. your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,
of the vehicle.
the procedures must be followed care-
fully.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those

above indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those

above call attention to an item in the illustration. Bluetooth® is a trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and li-
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 senced to Visteon Corporation
WARNING and Clarion Co., Ltd.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio requires
subscription, sold separately.
WARNING Not available in Alaska, Hawaii or
Guam. For more information, visit
www.siriusxm.com.
Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-
ents, and certain vehicle components
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive
harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products
of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of Cali-
fornia to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm.
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVI-

SORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-
teries, may contain perchlorate material.
*
C 2012 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.
The following advisory is provided: “Per- All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
chlorate Material - special handling may Manual may be reproduced or stored in a
apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/ retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or
by any means, electronic, mechanical, photo-
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
copying, recording or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co.,
Ltd.
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE
PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES ...

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you the following information: For U.S. customers
would like to provide NISSAN directly with . Your name, address, and telephone number Nissan North America, Inc.
comments or questions, please contact the Consumer Affairs Department
. Vehicle identification number (attached to
NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using P.O. Box 685003
the top of the instrument panel on the
our toll-free number: Franklin, TN 37068-5003
driver’s side)
For U.S. customers or via e-mail at:
. Date of purchase
1-800-NISSAN-1 [email protected]
. Current odometer reading
(1-800-647-7261) For Canadian customers
For Canadian customers . Your NISSAN dealer’s name Nissan Canada Inc.
1-800-387-0122 . Your comments or questions 5290 Orbitor Drive
OR Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
or via e-mail at:
information.centre@nissancanada.
com
If you prefer, visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and
thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
Table of Illustrated table of contents 0
Contents Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system 1
Instruments and controls 2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and
voice recognition systems 4
Starting and driving 5
In case of emergency 6
Appearance and care 7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8
Technical and consumer information 9
Index 10
0 Illustrated table of contents
Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint Passenger compartment ......................................................... 0-8
System (SRS) ............................................................................ 0-2 Hardtop models ................................................................. 0-8
Hardtop models ................................................................... 0-2 CrossCabriolet models .................................................... 0-9
CrossCabriolet models ...................................................... 0-3 Cockpit ..................................................................................... 0-10
Exterior front ............................................................................... 0-4 Instrument panel .................................................................... 0-12
Hardtop models ................................................................... 0-4 Meters and gauges ............................................................... 0-13
CrossCabriolet models ...................................................... 0-5 Engine compartment ............................................................ 0-14
Exterior rear ................................................................................ 0-6 VQ35DE engine ............................................................. 0-14
Hardtop models ................................................................... 0-6 Warning and indicator lights .............................................. 0-15
CrossCabriolet models ...................................................... 0-7
SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS)
HARDTOP MODELS
1. Rear center seat belt (P.1-23)
2. Head restraints (P.1-11)
— Front-seat Active Head Restraints (P.1-14)
3. Seat belts (P.1-15)
4. Armrest (P.1-15)
5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover
supplemental air bags (P.1-46)
6. Supplemental front-impact air bags (P.1-46)
7. Child restraint anchor points (for top tether strap
child restraint) (P.1-42)
8. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-
dren) system (P.1-31)
9. Rear seats (P.1-9)
— Child restraints (P.1-29)
10. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
air bags (P.1-46)
11. Seat belt pretensioner (P.1-59)
12. Front seats (P.1-3)
13. Occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor)
— Advanced Air Bag System (P.1-52)
JVO0063X
0-2 Illustrated table of contents

10. Front seats (P.1-3)
— Advanced Air Bag System (P.1-52)
SSI0834
CROSSCABRIOLET MODELS 5. Supplemental front-impact air bags (P.1-46)

1. Dual pop-up roll bar system (P.1-62) 6. LATCH (Lower Anchors for CHildren) system
(P.1-31)
2. Seat belts (P.1-15)
7. Rear seats
3. Head restraints (P.1-11)
— Child restraints (P.1-29)
— Front-seat Active Head Restraints (P.1-14)
8. Seat belt pretensioner (P.1-59)
4. Door-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover
supplemental air bags (P.1-46) 9. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
air bags (P.1-46)
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
EXTERIOR FRONT
8. License plate installation (P.9-12)

9. Fog lights*
— Switch operation (P.2-41)
— Bulb replacement (P.8-29)
10. Tires
— Wheel and tires (P.8-32, P.9-7)
— Flat tire (P.6-3)
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(P.2-14, P.5-4)
11. Outside mirrors (P.3-49)
12. Doors
— Keys (P.3-3)
— Door locks (P.3-5)
— Intelligent Key system (P.3-8)
— Security system (P.2-29)
13. Child safety rear door lock (P.3-8)
14. Fuel-filler door
— Operation (P.3-44)
— Fuel recommendation (P.9-3)
*: if so equipped
JVO0040X
HARDTOP MODELS — Rain-sensing auto wiper system* (P.2-34)

1. Hood (P.3-20) — Blade replacement (P.8-18)
2. Headlight and turn signal lights — Window washer fluid (P.8-13)
— Switch operation (P.2-37) 4. Roof rack (rail)* (P.2-54)
— Bulb replacement (P.8-27) 5. Moonroof* (P.2-58)
3. Windshield wiper and washer 6. Power windows (P.2-55)
— Switch operation (P.2-32) 7. Recovery hook (P.6-22)

— Switch operation (P.2-41)
9. Tires
— Wheel and tires (P.8-32, P.9-7)
— Flat tire (P.6-3)
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(P.2-14, P.5-4)
10. Outside mirrors (P.3-49)
11. Doors
— Keys (P.3-3)
— Door locks (P.3-5)
— Intelligent Key system (P.3-8)
— Security system (P.2-29)
12. Fuel-filler door
— Operation (P.3-44)
— Fuel recommendation (P.9-3)
SSI0835
CROSSCABRIOLET MODELS — Blade replacement (P.8-18)

1. Hood (P.3-20) — Window washer fluid (P.8-13)
2. Headlight and turn signal lights 4. Soft top (P.3-28)
— Switch operation (P.2-37) 5. Power windows (P.2-55)
— Bulb replacement (P.8-27) 6. Recovery hook (P.6-22)
3. Windshield wiper and washer 7. License plate installation (P.9-12)
— Switch operation (P.2-32) 8. Fog lights

EXTERIOR REAR
Object Detection (MOD)* (P.4-30)

— Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system*
(P.5-20)
— Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system* (P.5-20)
7. Rear combination light
*: if so equipped
SSI0813
HARDTOP MODELS 3. Rear window defroster (P.2-36)

1. Lift gate (P.3-20) 4. High-mounted stop light (P.8-29)
— Remote keyless entry system (P.3-16) 5. Antenna (P.4-87)
— Intelligent Key system (P.3-8) — Satellite radio antenna* (P.4-47)
2. Rear window wiper and washer 6. Rear view camera*
— Switch operation (P.2-35) — RearView monitor* (P.4-23)
— Window washer fluid (P.8-13) — Rear and rear-wide view monitor with Moving

SSI0836
CROSSCABRIOLET MODELS — Intelligent Key system (P.3-8)

1. Antenna (P.4-87) 5. Rear view camera (P.4-23)
— Satellite radio antenna (P.4-47) 6. Rear combination light
2. High-mounted stop light (P.8-29) — Bulb replacement (P.8-29)
3. Rear window defroster (P.2-36)
4. Trunk (P.3-25)
— Remote keyless entry system (P.3-16)

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
10. Sunglasses holder (P.2-48)

11. Inside rearview mirror (P.3-48)
— HomeLink® universal transceiver* (P.2-63)
— Compass* (P.2-8)
12. Cargo area
— Storages (P.2-50)
— Luggage hooks (P.2-53)
— Cargo light (P.2-63)
— Spare tire (P.6-5)
13. Rear cup holders (P.2-47)
14. Heated seat switch (rear)* (P.2-42)
15. Console box (P.2-49)
— Power outlet (P.2-45)
— Auxiliary input jacks* (P.4-83)
— iPod® connector* (P.4-81)
— USB connector* (P.4-72)
16. Front cup holders (P.2-47)
17. Storage box* (P.2-50) or Cigarette lighter/
Ashtray* (P.2-46)
*: if so equipped
SSI0815
HARDTOP MODELS — Power door lock switch (P.3-7)

1. Cargo cover* (P.2-52) — Outside mirror remote control switch
(P.3-49)
2. Rear personal light (P.2-60)
6. Sun visors (P.3-47)
3. Coat hooks (P.2-55)
7. Moonroof* (P.2-58)
4. Automatic drive positioner switch* (P.3-51)
8. Front map lights (P.2-60)
5. Door armrest
9. Mood light (P.2-62)
— Power window switch (P.2-55)
— Power outlet (P.2-45)
— Auxiliary input jacks (P.4-83)
— iPod® connector (P.4-81)
— USB connector (P.4-72)
8. Front cup holders (P.2-47)
9. Storage box (P.2-50)
*: if so equipped
SSI0837
CROSSCABRIOLET MODELS 3. Sun visors (P.3-47)

1. Door armrest 4. Front map lights (P.2-60)
— Power window switch (P.2-55) 5. Inside rearview mirror (P.3-48)
— Power door lock switch (P.3-7) — HomeLink® universal transceiver (P.2-63)
— Outside mirror remote control switch — Compass* (P.2-8)
(P.3-49) 6. Rear cup holders (P.2-47)
2. Automatic drive positioner switch (P.3-51) 7. Console box (P.2-49)

COCKPIT
7. TRIP/RESET switch (P.2-6)

8. Wiper and washer switch (P.2-32)
9. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch (P.
2-44, P.5-39)
10. Power lift gate main switch* (Hardtop models)
(P.3-20) or All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK
switch (CrossCabriolet models) (P.5-33)
11. Power rear seatback switch* (Hardtop models)
(P.1-9)
(P.1-9) or Remote walk-in switch (CrossCabrio-
let models) (P.1-7)
13. Fuel-filler door opener switch (P.3-44)
14. Manual tilting/telescopic steering wheel lever*
(P.3-46)
15. Electric tilting/telescopic steering wheel switch*
(P.3-47)
16. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)*
— Audio control* (P.4-86)
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System con-
trol (models with navigation system)* (P.4-88)
trol (models without navigation system)*
JVO0067X
(P.4-99)
1. Heated steering wheel switch* (P.2-41) — Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system* (P.5-20) 17. Steering wheel
2. Power lift gate switch* (Hardtop models) 4. Instrument brightness control switch (P.2-40) — Horn (P.2-41)
(P.3-20) or trunk lid release switch (Cross- 5. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch — Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-46)
Cabriolet models) (P.3-25) — Headlight (P.2-37) — Power steering system (P.5-37)
3. Warning systems switch* (P.2-43) — Turn signal light (P.2-40) 18. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)
— Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system* — Fog light* (P.2-41) — Cruise control switches (P.5-30)
(P.5-20) 6. Trip computer switch (P.2-25) 19. Center-console mounted controls

— Heated seat switches* (P.2-42)
— All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK switch*
(Hardtop models) (P.5-33)
— Soft top operating switch (CrossCabriolet
models) (P.3-28)
*: if so equipped

INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Bluetooth ® Hands-Free Phone System

(models without navigation system)* (P.4-99)
7. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.6-2)
8. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-46)
9. Hood release handle (P.3-20)
10. Fuse box cover (P.8-21)
11. Parking brake (P.5-19)
12. Intelligent Key port (P.5-14)
13. Audio system (P.4-46)
— Clock* (P.2-44)
14. Front passenger air bag status light (P.1-54)
15. Power outlet (P.2-45)
16. Rear window and outside mirror* defroster
switch (P.2-36)
17. Heater/air conditioner control (P.4-41) or Audio
system (P.4-46)
18. Trunk release power cancel switch (Cross-
Cabriolet models) (P.3-26)
19. Glove box (P.2-49)
*: if so equipped
**: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).
SSI0839
1. Side ventilator (P.4-40) 6. Heater/air conditioner control (P.4-41) or Center

2. Meters and gauges (P.2-5) multi-function control panel* (P.4-3)
3. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-11) — Navigation system**
4. Center ventilator (P.4-40) — Vehicle information and setting buttons*
5. Center display (P.4-9)
— Center color display* (P.4-3) — Bluetooth ® Hands-Free Phone System
— Navigation system** (models with navigation system)* (P.4-88)

METERS AND GAUGES
JVO0043X
1. Instrument brightness control switch (P.2-40) — Trip computer (P.2-40)

2. Tachometer (P.2-7) 8. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-7)
3. Speedometer (P.2-6) 9. Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-6)/Continu-
4. Fuel gauge (P.2-8) ously Variable Transmission (CVT) position
5. Warning/indicator lights (P.2-11) indicator (P.2-17)
6. Trip computer switch (P.2-25) 10. RESET switch for trip odometer (P.2-6)
7. Dot matrix liquid crystal display (P.2-20)

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
SDI2172
VQ35DE ENGINE 7. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-13)

1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-11) 8. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-7)
2. Drive belt location (P.8-15) 9. Radiator filler cap (P.8-7)
3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-8) 10. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-8)
4. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-12) 11. Battery (P.8-13)
5. Air cleaner (P.8-17)
6. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-20)
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Indicator
Warning Name Page
Name Page light
light
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning 2-17
2-12 indicator light (AWD models)*
light (AWD models)*
Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
2-17
Anti-lock Braking System light (green)*
2-12
(ABS) warning light Continuously Variable Trans-
mission (CVT) position indicator 2-17
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) light
2-13
light (orange)*
Cruise indicator light 2-17
Brake warning light 2-13 Exterior light indicator 2-17

Front passenger air bag status
2-17
light
Charge warning light 2-13
High beam indicator light 2-17
Engine oil pressure warning
2-14
light Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
2-18
light (green)*
Intelligent Key warning light 2-14
Malfunction Indicator Light
Lane Departure Warning 2-18
2-14 (MIL)
(LDW) light (orange)*
Overdrive off indicator light 2-19
Low tire pressure warning light 2-14
Soft top indicator light (Cross-
2-19
Master warning light 2-16 Cabriolet models)*
Turn signal/hazard indicator
Seat belt warning light 2-16 2-19
lights
Supplemental air bag warning Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) 2-19
2-16 off indicator light
light
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) 2-16 *: if so equipped
warning light

MEMO

1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system
Seats ............................................................................................ 1-2 Forward-facing child restraint installation using
Front seats ............................................................................ 1-3 LATCH (Hardtop models only) ................................... 1-37
Rear seats (Hardtop models) .......................................... 1-9 Forward-facing child restraint installation using the
Head restraints ................................................................. 1-11 seat belts .......................................................................... 1-39
Armrest (Hardtop models) ............................................. 1-15 Installing top tether strap (Hardtop models) .......... 1-42
Seat belts ................................................................................. 1-15 Booster seats .................................................................. 1-42
Precautions on seat belt usage .................................... 1-15 Supplemental restraint system ........................................... 1-46
Pregnant women .............................................................. 1-18 Precautions on supplemental restraint system ....... 1-46
Injured persons ................................................................. 1-18 NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats) ..................................................................... 1-52
Three-point type seat belt .............................................. 1-18
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
Seat belt extenders .......................................................... 1-26
air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
Seat belt maintenance .................................................... 1-26 rollover supplemental air bag (Hardtop models) or
Child safety .............................................................................. 1-27 door-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover
Infants .................................................................................. 1-28 supplemental air bag (CrossCabriolet
Small children .................................................................... 1-28 models) systems ............................................................ 1-58
Larger children .................................................................. 1-28 Seat belts with pretensioners (front seats) ............. 1-59
Child restraints ........................................................................ 1-29 Supplemental air bag warning labels ....................... 1-61
Precautions on child restraints ..................................... 1-29 Supplemental air bag warning light .......................... 1-61
LATCH Lower Anchors System .................................... 1-31 Repair and replacement procedure .......................... 1-61
Rear-facing child restraint installation Dual pop-up roll bar system
using LATCH ..................................................................... 1-33 (CrossCabriolet models) .............................................. 1-62
Rear-facing child restraint installation using the
seat belts ............................................................................ 1-34
SEATS
. The seatback should not be reclined

any more than needed for comfort.
Seat belts are most effective when
the passenger sits well back and
straight up in the seat. If the seat-
back is reclined, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and being injured
is increased.
CAUTION
SSS0133
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or da-
well back in the seat with both feet mages.
WARNING on the floor and adjust the seat
properly. See “Precautions on seat
. Do not ride in a moving vehicle belt usage” later in this section.
when the seatback is reclined. This
. After adjustment, gently rock in the
can be dangerous. The shoulder belt
seat to make sure it is securely
will not be against your body. In an
locked.
accident, you could be thrown into it
and receive neck or other serious . Do not leave children unattended
injuries. You could also slide under inside the vehicle. They could un-
the lap belt and receive serious knowingly activate switches or con-
internal injuries. trols. Unattended children could
become involved in serious acci-
. For the most effective protection
dents.
when the vehicle is in motion, the
seat should be upright. Always sit
1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SSS0792 JVR0034X
FRONT SEATS seatback for occupants of different sizes for Sliding front passenger seat (CrossCab-
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat riolet models):
Manual seat adjustment belt fit. (See “Precautions on seat belt usage” To slide the front passenger seat from the front
Forward and backward: later in this section.) Also, the seatback can be most position to the rear most position, push the
Pull the lever *
1 up and hold it while you slide reclined to allow occupants to rest when the bottom half of the seatback * A or the front seat
the seat forward or backward to the desired vehicle is stopped and the transmission in the P cushion * B . If you push the top half of the
position. Release the lever to lock the seat in (Park) position. seatback * C , it will lock the seat in the front
position. most position.
Reclining:
To recline the seatback, pull the lever *
2 up and
lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull
the lever up and lean your body forward. Release
the lever to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Power seat adjustment
Operating tips:
. The power seat motor has an auto-reset
overload protection circuit. If the motor
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds,
then reactivate the switch.
. Do not operate the power seat switch for a
long period of time when the engine is off.
This will discharge the battery.
See “Automatic drive positioner” in the “3. Pre-
driving checks and adjustments” section for the
seat position memory function (if so equipped).
SSS0793 SSS0684
Seat lifter (if so equipped): Lumbar support (if so equipped):

Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to The lumbar support feature provides lower back
adjust the seat height until the desired position support to the driver.
is achieved. Move the lever *1 up or down to adjust the
seatback lumbar area.

JVR0038X
Forward and backward:

Moving the switch *
A forward or backward will
slide the seat forward or backward to the
desired position.
Pushing the front *1 or back * 2 end of the
slide switch *
B will slide the driver seat forward
or backward to the desired position (Cross-
Cabriolet models driver’s seat only).

JVR0039X SSS1027
Reclining: vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the Seat lifter (if so equipped):
Move the recline switch * A backward until the P (Park) position. Push the front or rear end of the switch up or
desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback down to adjust the angle of the front portion or
forward again, move the switch * A forward. height of the seat.
Push and hold the back * 2 end of the reclining
switch *B until the desired angle is obtained.
To bring the seatback forward again, push and
hold the front *1 end of the switch (Cross-
Cabriolet models driver’s seat only).
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. (See “Precautions on seat belt usage”
later in this section.) Also, the seatback can be
reclined to allow occupants to rest when the
Walk-in function (front passenger seat,
CrossCabriolet models):
CAUTION
. When operating the walk-in func-
tion, be sure not to contact any
moving parts to avoid possible in-
juries and/or damages.
. When operating the walk-in func-
tion, be sure that the front passen-
ger seat is not occupied by a
SSS1028 SSS1172 passenger and/or any objects to
Front passenger’s seatback switch avoid possible injuries and/or da-
Lumbar support (if so equipped): mages.
The lumbar support feature provides lower back . After operating the walk-in function,
support to the driver. be sure to return the seat to the
Push the front *1 or back *2 end of the switch rearmost position and then tilt up
to adjust the seatback lumbar area. the seatback until it latches.
This feature makes it easier to get in and out of

the rear seat. Use the following procedure when
getting in and out of the rear seat on the
passenger’s side. If the sun visor is used, close it
to the original position before operating the
walk-in feature.
1. Push the front passenger’s seatback switch
SSS1175 to fold down the seatback and unlock the
Remote walk-in switch seat position.
Alternatively, you can push the remote walk-
in switch located on the instrument panel to WARNING
fold down the front passenger’s seatback
and unlock the seat position. Before using the driver’s seatback re-
2. Slide the seat forward to the foremost lease, be sure that the driver’s seat is
position manually. not occupied by a driver and/or any
objects to avoid possible injuries and/
3. Get in or out the vehicle.
or damage.
4. Return the front passenger seat to the
rearmost position. To slide the front passen-
ger seat, see “Manual seat adjustment”
earlier in this section.
SSS1173
Driver’s seatback release (CrossCabrio-

let models)
To exit the rear seat from the driver’s side, pull
the strap behind the driver’s seat to release the
driver’s seatback. The driver’s seatback will tilt
forward so that you can exit the vehicle.
NOTE:
Pulling the strap behind the driver’s seat
does not slide the driver’s seat forward.
You cannot slide the driver’s seat manu-
ally.

To fold down the seatbacks:
Pull the strap on the rear seat *
A . Pull the lever
*B beside the cargo area and fold the seat-
back.
SSS0569 SSS0821
REAR SEATS (Hardtop models) To return the seatbacks:

Folding Manual operation:
Before folding the rear seats: Lift up each seatback and push it to the upright
position until it is latched.
. Secure the seat belts on the seat belt hooks
on the side wall. (See “Seat belt hooks Power operation (if so equipped):
(Hardtop models)” later in this section.) Push and hold the corresponding switch located
. Disconnect and stow the center seat belt on the lower side of the instrument panel *B or
and tongue into the retractor base. (See the right or left side in the cargo area *
A .
“Rear center seat belt (Hardtop models)” A beep sounds once and the seatback will be
later in this section.) returned automatically.
. Always reconnect the center seat belt when A beep sounds twice when the seatback is fully
the seat is returned to the upright position. returned to the seating position.
. Remove drink containers from the rear cup If the control unit detects any obstacle or
holder. malfunctions while in the power operation, a
beep sounds for 4 seconds and the seatback . Do not fold down the rear seats center seat belt connector is com-
will return to the folded position automatically. when occupants are in the rear seat pletely secured.
Check if there are any obstacles caught that area or any luggage is on the rear
prevent seats from returning to the folded . If the rear center seat belt connector
seats. and the seatbacks are not secured
position. See a NISSAN dealer if the beep still
sounds. . When folding or returning the seat- in the correct position, serious per-
backs to the upright position, to sonal injury may result in an acci-
avoid injury to yourself and others: dent or sudden stop.
CAUTION — Make sure that the seat path is
clear before moving the seat.
When operating the rear power seat-
back return, make sure that the vehicle — Be careful not to allow hands or
is stopped and the transmission is in feet to get caught or pinched in
the P (Park) position. the seat.
. Properly secure all cargo to help
prevent it from sliding or shifting.
Do not place cargo higher than the
WARNING seatbacks. In a sudden stop or
collision, unsecured cargo could
. Never allow anyone to ride in the
cause personal injury.
cargo area or on the rear seats
when they are in the fold-down . When returning the seatbacks, be
position. In a collision, people riding sure to attach the rear center seat
in these areas are more likely to be belt connector.
seriously injured or killed. . Do not unfasten the rear center seat
. Do not allow people to ride in any belt connector except when folding
area of your vehicle that is not down the rear seat.
equipped with seats and seat belts. . When attaching the rear center seat
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is belt connector, be certain that the
in a seat and using a seat belt seatbacks are completely secured in
properly. the latched position and the rear
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING
. Do not ride in a moving vehicle WARNING
Head restraints supplement the other
vehicle safety systems. They may pro-
vide additional protection against injury
in certain rear end collisions. Adjust the
and receive neck or other serious
head restraints properly, as specified in
injuries. You could also slide under
this section. Check the adjustment after
the lap belt and receive serious
someone else uses the seat. Do not
internal injuries.
attach anything to the head restraint
. For the most effective protection stalks or remove the head restraint. Do
SSS0227A
when the vehicle is in motion, the not use the seat if the head restraint
seat should be upright. Always sit has been removed. If the head restraint
Reclining well back in the seat with both feet was removed, install and properly ad-
Pull the reclining strap * A and position the on the floor and adjust the seat belt just the head restraint before an occu-
seatback at the desired angle. Release the properly. See “Precautions on seat pant uses the seating position. Failure
reclining strap after positioning the seat at the belt usage” later in this section. to follow these instructions can reduce
desired angle.
. After adjustment, check to be sure the effectiveness of the head restraints.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the the seat is securely locked. This may increase the risk of serious
seatback for occupants of different sizes to help injury or death in a collision.
obtain proper seat belt fit. (See “Precautions on
seat belt usage” later in this section.) The
seatback may also be reclined to allow occu-
pants to rest when the vehicle is parked.

JVR0140X SSS0992 SSS0997
The illustration shows the seating positions Components Adjustment

equipped with head restraints and headrest.
1. Head restraint Adjust the head restraint so the center is level
For Hardtop models, the head restraints and the with the center of your ears.
2. Adjustment notches
headrest are adjustable.
3. Lock knob
For CrossCabriolet models, the front head
restraints are adjustable and the rear head 4. Stalks
restraints are not removable or adjustable.
Indicates the seating position is equipped
with a head restraint.
Indicates the seating position is equipped
with an adjustable headrest (for Hardtop mod-
els).

SSS0993 SSS0994 SSS0995
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push Removal
the head restraint down.
Use the following procedure to remove the
adjustable head restraints.
1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest
position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint properly in a secure
place so it is not loose in the vehicle.
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint before an occupant uses the
seating position.

Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as
described earlier in this section.
SSS0996 SSS0508
Install Front-seat Active Head Restraint

1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes The Active Head Restraint moves forward
in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint utilizing the force that the seatback receives
is facing the correct direction. The stalk with from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The
the adjustment notches * 1 must be in- movement of the head restraint helps support
stalled in the hole with the lock knob * 2 . the occupant’s head by reducing its backward
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the movement and helping absorb some of the
head restraint down. forces that may lead to whiplash-type injuries.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an Active Head Restraints are effective for colli-
occupant uses the seating position. sions at low to medium speeds in which it is said
that whiplash injury occurs most.
Active Head Restraints operate only in certain
rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head
restraints return to their original position.

SEAT BELTS
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly
adjusted, and you are sitting upright and well
back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your
chances of being injured or killed in an accident
and/or the severity of injury may be greatly
reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and
all of your passengers to buckle up every time
you drive, even if your seating position includes a
supplemental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
SSS0229A or territories specify that seat belts be
worn at all times when a vehicle is being
ARMREST (Hardtop models) driven.
Rear armrest
Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal.

SSS0136 SSS0016
SSS0134 SSS0014

. Be sure the seat belt tongue is . Once a seat belt pretensioner has
WARNING securely fastened to the proper activated, it cannot be reused and
buckle. must be replaced together with the
. Every person who drives or rides in retractor. See a NISSAN dealer.
. Do not wear the seat belt inside out
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
or twisted. Doing so may reduce its . Removal and installation of the
all times. Children should be prop-
effectiveness. pretensioner system components
erly restrained in the rear seat and,
. Do not allow more than one person should be done by a NISSAN dealer.
if appropriate, in a child restraint.
to use the same seat belt. . All seat belt assemblies, including
. The seat belt should be properly
. Never carry more people in the retractors and attaching hardware,
adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do
vehicle than there are seat belts. should be inspected after any colli-
so may reduce the effectiveness of
sion by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN
the entire restraint system and in- . If the seat belt warning light glows
recommends that all seat belt as-
crease the chance or severity of continuously while the ignition is
semblies in use during a collision be
injury in an accident. Serious injury pushed to the ON position with all
replaced unless the collision was
or death can occur if the seat belt is doors closed and all seat belts
minor and the belts show no da-
not worn properly. fastened, it may indicate a malfunc-
mage and continue to operate prop-
. Always route the shoulder belt over tion in the system. Have the system
erly. Seat belt assemblies not in use
your shoulder and across your checked by a NISSAN dealer.
during a collision should also be
chest. Never put the belt behind . No changes should be made to the inspected and replaced if either
your back, under your arm or across seat belt system. For example, do damage or improper operation is
your neck. The belt should be away not modify the seat belt, add mate- noted.
from your face and neck, but not rial, or install devices that may
. All child restraints and attaching
falling off your shoulder. change the seat belt routing or
hardware should be inspected after
. Position the lap belt as low and tension. Doing so may affect the
any collision. Always follow the
snug as possible AROUND THE operation of the seat belt system.
restraint manufacturer’s inspection
HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt Modifying or tampering with the
instructions and replacement re-
worn too high could increase the seat belt system may result in
commendations. The child restraints
risk of internal injuries in an acci- serious personal injury.
should be replaced if they are
dent.

damaged. injuries. You could also slide under
the lap belt and receive serious
PREGNANT WOMEN internal injuries.
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use . For the most effective protection
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, when the vehicle is in motion, the
and always position the lap belt as low as seat should be upright. Always sit
possible around the hips, not the waist. Place well back in the seat with both feet
the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across on the floor and adjust the seat belt
your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over properly.
your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for
specific recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use JVR0183X
seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the
WARNING seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Re-
. Every person who drives or rides in tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the
this vehicle should use a seat belt at seat belt becomes wrapped around a
all times. child’s neck with the ALR mode acti-
vated, the child can be seriously injured
. Do not ride in a moving vehicle
or killed if the seat belt retracts and
becomes tight. This can occur even if
the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat
belt to release the child. For the center
of the rear seat, the connector tongue
and receive neck or other serious
*
1 may also be released. Release the retractor.
connector tongue by inserting a suita-
ble tool (such as a key) into the
connector buckle * A . If the seat belt
cannot be unbuckled or is already
unbuckled, release the child by cutting
the seat belt with a suitable tool (such
as a knife or scissors) to release the
seat belt.
SSS0292
Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. (See “Seats” earlier in this
section.)
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the tongue into the buckle until
you hear and feel the latch engage.
. The retractor is designed to lock
during a sudden stop or on impact.
A slow pulling motion permits the
belt to move and allows you some
freedom of movement in the seat.
. If the seat belt cannot be pulled from
its fully retracted position, firmly pull
the belt and release it. Then
smoothly pull the belt out of the
of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat
belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or
during certain impacts.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode
(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for
child restraint installation.
When ALR mode is activated the seat belt
cannot be extended again until the seat belt
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode
after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional
information, see “Child restraints” later in this
SSS0290
section. SSS0326
The ALR mode should be used only for
3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug child restraint installation. During normal Unfastening the seat belts
on the hips as shown. seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR To unfasten the seat belt, push the button on the
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the mode should not be activated. If it is buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.
retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat
shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder belt tension. Checking seat belt operation
and across your chest. Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat
The front passenger seat and the rear seating belt movement by two separate methods:
WARNING
positions three-point seat belts have two modes . When the belt is pulled quickly from the
of operation: When fastening the seat belts, be retractor.
. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) certain that seatbacks are completely . When the vehicle slows down rapidly.
. Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) secured in the latched position. If they To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode are not completely secured, passengers check the operation as follows:
allows the seat belt to extend and retract to may be injured in an accident or sudden . Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
allow the driver and passengers some freedom stop. quickly. The retractor should lock and

restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check or WARNING
if you have any question about seat belt
operation, see a NISSAN dealer. When using the seat belt guide, make
sure that the seat belt guide is securely
installed to the seat. Otherwise, the
seat belt may slip and result in personal
injury.
CAUTION
SSS1181 . When entering or exiting the rear
seat, or inserting or retrieving lug-
Seat belt guide (front seats, CrossCab- gage with the seatback folded
riolet models) down, always release the seat belt
guide. Otherwise, the seat belt
When the seat belt guide is used with the front
guide may be damaged.
seat, the seat belt can easily be pulled out.
. Do not fold the seat forward or pull
Release the seat belt guide, clip the seat belt
it backward by holding the seat belt
and install the seat belt guide again.
guide in your hand. Doing so may
When using the seat belt guide, do not allow it damage the seat belt guide.
to twist.

WARNING
. After adjustment, release the ad-
justment button and try to move the
shoulder belt anchor up and down
to make sure it is securely fixed in
position.
. The shoulder belt anchor height
should be adjusted to the position
best for you. Failure to do so may
reduce the effectiveness of the
entire restraint system and increase
SSS0351A SSS0845
the chance or severity of injury in an
accident.
Shoulder belt height adjustment (Hard- Seat belt hooks (Hardtop models)
top models) When the rear seat belts are not in use and
The shoulder belt anchor height should be when folding down the rear seats, hook the rear
adjusted to the position best for you. (See outer seat belts on the seat belt hooks.
“Precautions on seat belt usage” earlier in this
section.)
To adjust, pull the adjustment button * 1 , and
then move the shoulder belt anchor to the
desired position * 2 , so that the belt passes
over the center of the shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not falling
off of your shoulder. Release the adjustment
button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into
position.

SSS0846 SSS0241 SSS0703
Rear center seat belt (Hardtop models) The center seat belt buckle and the tongue are
WARNING identified by the CENTER mark. The center seat
The rear center seat belt has a connector tongue
belt tongue can be fastened only into the center
* 1 and a seat belt tongue * 2 . Both the
seat belt buckle.
connector tongue and the seat belt tongue must . Always fasten the connector tongue
be securely latched for proper seat belt opera- and the seat belt in the order shown.
tion. . Always make sure both the connec-
tor tongue and the seat belt tongue
are secured when using the seat
belt or installing a child restraint. Do
not use the seat belt or child
restraint with only the seat belt
tongue attached. This could result
in serious personal injury in case of
an accident or a sudden stop.

Stowing rear center seat belt: in the correct position, serious per-
When folding down the rear seat, the rear center sonal injury may result in an acci-
seat belt can be retracted into a stowed position dent or sudden stop.
as follows:
1. Hold the connector tongue * 1 so that the
seat belt does not retract suddenly when the
tongue is released from the connector
buckle. Release the connector tongue by
inserting a suitable tool such as key *
A into
the connector buckle.
2. Insert the seat belt tongue into the retractor
base first *2 .
3. Then secure the connector tongue into the

retractor base *
3 .
WARNING
. Do not unfasten the rear center seat
belt connector except when folding
down the rear seat.
. When attaching the rear center seat
belt connector, be certain that the
seatbacks are completely secured in
the latched position and the rear
center seat belt connector is com-
SSS0225 pletely secured.
. If the rear center seat belt connector
and the seatbacks are not secured
Attaching rear center seat belt: seatbacks are completely secured in
Always be sure the rear center seat belt the latched position and the rear
connector tongue and connector buckle are center seat belt connector is com-
attached. Disconnect only when folding down pletely secured.
the rear seat. . If the rear center seat belt connector
To connect the buckle: and the seatbacks are not secured
1. Pull out the connector tongue from the in the correct position, serious per-
retractor base *
1 . sonal injury may result in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
2. Pull out the seat belt tongue from the
retractor base *
2 .
3. Pull the seat belt and secure the connector

buckle until it clicks *
3 .
The center seat belt connector tongue and

buckle are indicated by the ! and ~ mark.
The center seat belt connector tongue can be
attached only into the rear center seat belt
connector buckle.
To fasten the seat belt, see “Fastening the seat
belts” earlier in this section.
WARNING
. Do not unfasten the rear center seat
belt connector except when folding
SSS0232 down the rear seat.
. When attaching the rear center seat
belt connector, be certain that the
purchasing an extender if an extender is . If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
required. guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
WARNING . Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such as
. Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires
made by the same company which
and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,
made the original equipment seat
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the
belts, should be used with NISSAN
webbing is found, the entire seat belt
seat belts.
assembly should be replaced.
. Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
SSS0235 extender. Such unnecessary use
could result in serious personal
Storing rear seat belt buckles (Hardtop injury in the event of an accident.
models) . Never use seat belt extenders to
Before folding down the seat, put the buckles in install child restraints. If the child
the storage of the seat cushion to avoid restraint is not secured properly, the
dropping it under the seat cushion. child could be seriously injured in a
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS collision or a sudden stop.
If, because of body size or driving position, it is
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt
and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with . To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
the installed seat belts is available that can be mild soap solution or any solution recom-
purchased. The extender adds approximately 8 mended for cleaning upholstery or carpets.
in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
the driver or front passenger seating position. belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with seat belts to retract until they are completely
dry.
CHILD SAFETY
may also be released. Release the rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1
connector tongue * 1 by inserting a year old. Booster seats are used to help position
suitable tool (such as a key) into the a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no
connector buckle * A . If the seat belt longer use a forward-facing child restraint.
cannot be unbuckled or is already
unbuckled, release the child by cutting WARNING
the seat belt with a suitable tool (such
as a knife or scissors) to release the Infants and children need special pro-
seat belt. tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not
fit them properly. The shoulder belt may
Children need adults to help protect them. come too close to the face or neck. The
They need to be properly restrained. lap belt may not fit over their small hip
JVR0183X bones. In an accident, an improperly
In addition to the general information in this
fitting seat belt could cause serious or
manual, child safety information is available from
fatal injury. Always use appropriate
many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
WARNING child restraints.
government traffic safety offices, and community
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure
Do not allow children to play with the to learn the best way to transport your child. All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
seat belts. Most seating positions are territories require the use of approved child
There are three basic types of child restraint
equipped with Automatic Locking Re- restraints for infants and small children. See
systems:
tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the “Child restraints” later in this section.
seat belt becomes wrapped around a . Rear-facing child restraint
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle
child’s neck with the ALR mode acti- . Forward-facing child restraint by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and
vated, the child can be seriously injured . Booster seat Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle
or killed if the seat belt retracts and The proper restraint depends on the child’s size. seat belt. See “Child restraints” later in this
becomes tight. This can occur even if Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less section for more information.
the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear- NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
belt to release the child. For the center facing child restraints. Forward-facing child and children be restrained in the rear seat.
of the rear seat, the connector tongue restraints are available for children who outgrow Studies show that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than in placed in child restraints that comply with Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt
the front seat. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or is no longer on or near the face and neck, and
This is especially important because your Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You the lap belt can be positioned properly across
vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys- should choose a child restraint that fits your the lower hips or upper thighs, use the seat belt
tem (Air bag system) for the front passen- vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s without the booster seat.
ger. See “Supplemental restraint system” instructions for installation and use.
later in this section. LARGER CHILDREN WARNING
INFANTS Children should remain in a forward-facing child
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed restraint with a harness until they reach the Never let a child stand or kneel on any
in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom- maximum height or weight limit allowed by the seat and do not allow a child in the
mends that infants be placed in child restraints child restraint manufacturer. cargo area. The child could be seriously
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit injured or killed in a sudden stop or
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety of the harness-equipped forward-facing child collision.
Standards. You should choose a child restraint restraint, NISSAN recommends that the child be
that fits your vehicle and always follow the placed in a commercially available booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for installation and to obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit
use. properly, the booster seat should raise the child
SMALL CHILDREN so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned
across the chest and the top, middle portion of
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at
the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross
least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing
the neck or face and should not fall off the
child restraint as long as possible up to the
shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly across
height or weight limit of the child restraint.
the lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen.
Children who outgrow the height or weight limit
of the rear-facing child restraint and are at least A booster seat can only be used in seating
1 year old should be secured in a forward-facing positions that have a three-point type seat belt.
child restraint with a harness. Refer to the The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and
manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and have a label certifying that it complies with
maximum weight and height recommendations. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
NISSAN recommends that small children be Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RE- senger.

STRAINTS
— NISSAN recommends that all
child restraints be installed in
WARNING the rear seat. Studies show that
children are safer when properly
. CrossCabriolet models are not restrained in the rear seat than
equipped with top tethers. A child in the front seat. If you must
restraint system requiring a top install a forward-facing child
tether strap cannot be properly in- restraint in the front seat, see
stalled and should not be used in “Forward-facing child restraint
your vehicle. installation using the seat belts”
. Failure to follow the warnings and later in this section.
SSS0099 instructions for proper use and in- — Even with the NISSAN Advanced
stallation of child restraints could Air Bag System, never install a
result in serious injury or death of a rear-facing child restraint in the
child or other passengers in a front seat. An inflating air bag
sudden stop or collision: could seriously injure or kill a
— The child restraint must be used child. A rear-facing child re-
and installed properly. Always straint must only be used in the
follow all of the child restraint rear seat.
manufacturer’s instructions for — Be sure to purchase a child
installation and use. restraint that will fit the child
— Infants and children should and vehicle. Some child re-
never be held on anyone’s lap. straints may not fit properly in
Even the strongest adult cannot your vehicle.
resist the forces of a collision. — Child restraint anchor points are
SSS0100
— Do not put a seat belt around designed to withstand loads
both a child and another pas- from child restraints that are

properly fitted. This vehicle is equipped with a universal child sure the child restraint is compatible with
restraint anchor system, referred to as the your child. Choose a child restraint that is
— Never use the anchor points for LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil- designed for your child’s height and weight.
adult seat belts or harnesses. dren) system. Some child restraints include rigid Always follow all recommended procedures.
— A child restraint with a top tether or webbing-mounted attachments that can be All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
strap should not be used in the connected to these anchors. territories require that infants and small
front passenger seat. For details, see “LATCH Lower Anchors Sys- children be restrained in an approved child
tem” later in this section. restraint at all times while the vehicle is
— Keep seatbacks as upright as
being operated. Canadian law requires the
possible after fitting the child LATCH child restraints generally require the use
top tether strap on forward-facing child
restraint. of a top tether strap. If your vehicle does not
restraints to be secured to the designated
have top tether anchor locations, do not install a
— Infants and children should al- anchor point on the vehicle.
child restraint in your vehicle that requires the
ways be placed in an appropri-
use of a top tether strap.
ate child restraint while in the
vehicle. If you do not have a LATCH compatible child
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
. When the child restraint is not in
use, keep it secured with the LATCH Several manufacturers offer child restraints for
system or a seat belt. In a sudden infants and small children of various sizes. When
stop or collision, loose objects can selecting any child restraint, keep the following
injure occupants or damage the points in mind:
vehicle. . Choose only a restraint with a label certifying
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
CAUTION
. Check the child restraint in your vehicle to
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s
become very hot. Check the seating seat and seat belt system.
surface and buckles before placing a . If the child restraint is compatible with your
child in the child restraint. vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
and check the various adjustments to be
LATCH Lower Anchors SYSTEM restraint will not be secured prop-
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor erly.
points that are used with the LATCH (Lower . Inspect the lower anchors by insert-
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system ing your fingers into the lower
compatible child restraints. This system may anchor area. Feel to make sure
also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX there are no obstructions over the
compatible system. With this system, you do not anchors such as seat belt webbing
have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the or seat cushion material. The child
child restraint. restraint will not be secured prop-
The LATCH anchor points are provided to install erly if the lower anchors are ob-
child restraints in the rear outboard seating structed.
positions only.
SSS0419B LATCH lower anchor
LATCH label location (Hardtop models)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and
instructions for proper use and installa-
tion of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
. Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations
shown in the illustration.
. Do not secure a child restraint in the
SSS0933 center rear seating position using
LATCH label location (CrossCabriolet models) the LATCH lower anchors. The child
SSS0637 SSS0643 SSS0644
LATCH lower anchor location LATCH webbing-mounted attachment LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
LATCH lower anchor location Installing child restraint LATCH lower If your vehicle is equipped with a top tether
anchor attachments anchor, it must be used when installing child
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear of
restraints with the LATCH lower anchor attach-
the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is LATCH compatible child restraints include two
ments or seat belts. See “Top tether anchor
attached to the seatback to help you locate the rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
(Hardtop models)” later in this section for
LATCH anchors. be connected to two anchors located at certain
installation instructions (Hardtop models).
seating positions in your vehicle. With this
system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat When installing a child restraint, carefully read
belt to secure the child restraint. Check your and follow the instructions in this manual and
child restraint for a label stating that it is those supplied with the child restraint.
compatible with LATCH. This information may
also be in the instructions provided by the child
restraint manufacturer.

tether strap is damaged.
. Do not allow cargo to contact the
top tether strap when it is attached
to the top tether anchor. Properly
secure the cargo so it does not
contact the top tether strap. Cargo
that is not properly secured or cargo
that contacts the top tether strap
may damage the top tether strap
during a collision. Your child could
be seriously injured or killed in a
collision if the child restraint top
SSS0822 tether strap is damaged. SSS0648
Rear-facing web-mounted — step 2
Top tether anchor (Hardtop models) Top tether anchor point locations:
Anchor points are located on the back side of
the seatbacks.
WARNING
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN-
. If the cargo cover (if so equipped) STALLATION USING LATCH
contacts the top tether strap when it Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
is attached to the top tether anchor, safety” and “Child restraints” sections before
remove the cargo cover from the installing a child restraint.
vehicle or secure it on the cargo
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
floor below its attachment location.
restraint using the LATCH system:
If the cargo cover is not removed, it
may damage the top tether strap 1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
during a collision. Your child could Always follow the child restraint manufac-
be seriously injured or killed in a turer’s instructions. SSS0649
collision if the child restraint top Rear-facing rigid-mounted — step 2

5. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1
through 4.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN-
STALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING
. The three-point seat belt with Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must
be used when installing a child
SSS0639 SSS0650 restraint. Failure to use the ALR
Rear-facing — step 3 Rear-facing — step 4 mode will result in the child re-
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach- 4. After attaching the child restraint, test it straint not being properly secured.
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check before you place the child in it. Push it from The restraint could tip over or be
to make sure the LATCH attachment is side to side while holding the child restraint loose and cause injury to a child in a
properly attached to the lower anchors. near the LATCH attachment path. The child sudden stop or collision. Also, it can
restraint should not move more than 1 inch change the operation of the front
3. For child restraints that are equipped with
(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it passenger air bag. See “Front pas-
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
forward and check to see if the LATCH senger air bag and status light”
additional slack from the anchor attach-
attachment holds the restraint in place. If the later in this section.
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH . When installing a child restraint
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion attachment as necessary, or put the restraint system in the rear center position,
and seatback while tightening the webbing in another seat and test it again. You may both the center seat belt connector
of the anchor attachments. need to try a different child restraint or try tongue and buckle tongue must be
installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if secured. See “Rear center seat belt
applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all (Hardtop models)” earlier in this
types of vehicles.
section. (Hardtop models)
SSS0100 SSS0654
Rear-facing — step 1 Rear-facing — step 2
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
safety” earlier in this section and “Child re- restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
straints” earlier in this section before installing a hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
child restraint. follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child instructions for belt routing.
restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear
seats:
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the front
seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.

SSS0655 SSS0656 SSS0657
Rear-facing — step 3 Rear-facing — step 4 Rear-facing — step 5
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the 5. Remove any additional slack from the seat
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) the center of the child restraint to compress
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode pulling up on the seat belt.
when the seat belt is fully retracted.

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1
through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint
mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE-
STRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH (Hardtop models only)
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” and “Child restraints” sections before
installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
SSS0658 child restraint using the LATCH system: SSS0645
Rear-facing — step 6 Forward-facing web-mounted — step 2
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it Always follow the child restraint manufac- 2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
before you place the child in it. Push it from turer’s instructions. ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
side to side while holding the child restraint to make sure the LATCH attachment is
near the seat belt path. The child restraint properly attached to the lower anchors.
should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), If the child restraint is equipped with a top
from side to side. Try to tug it forward and tether strap, route the top tether strap and
check to see if the belt holds the restraint in secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten point. See “Installing top tether strap (Hard-
the seat belt as necessary, or put the top models)” later in this section. Do not
restraint in another seat and test it again. install child restraints that require the use of
You may need to try a different child a top tether strap in seating positions that do
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all not have a top tether anchor.
types of vehicles.
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
SSS0646 SSS0647 SSS0638
Forward-facing rigid-mounted — step 2 Forward-facing — step 4 Forward-facing — step 6
3. The back of the child restraint should be 4. For child restraints that are equipped with 6. After attaching the child restraint, test it
secured against the vehicle seatback. webbing-mounted attachments, remove any before you place the child in it. Push it from
If necessary, adjust or remove the head additional slack from the anchor attach- side to side while holding the child restraint
restraint to obtain the correct child restraint ments. Press downward and rearward firmly near the LATCH attachment path. The child
fit. If the head restraint is removed, store it in in the center of the child restraint with your restraint should not move more than 1 inch
a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it
head restraint when the child restraint and seatback while tightening the webbing forward and check to see if the LATCH
is removed. See “Head restraints” earlier in of the anchor attachments. attachment holds the restraint in place. If the
this section for head restraint adjustment 5. Tighten the tether strap according to the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
information. manufacturer’s instructions to remove any attachment as necessary, or put the restraint
slack. in another seat and test it again. You may
If the seating position does not have an
need to try a different child restraint. Not all
adjustable head restraint and it is interfering
child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
with the proper child restraint fit, try another
seating position or a different child restraint. 7. Check to make sure the child restraint is
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
through 6. Always follow the child restraint manufac-
FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE- turer’s instructions.
STRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE The back of the child restraint should be
SEAT BELTS secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint or headrest to obtain the correct
WARNING child restraint fit. If the head restraint or
headrest is removed, store it in a secure
. The three-point seat belt with Auto-
place. Be sure to reinstall the head
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must
restraint or headrest when the child
be used when installing a child
restraint is removed. See “Head re-
restraint. Failure to use the ALR
SSS0640
straints” earlier in this section for head
mode will result in the child re-
restraint or headrest adjustment, removal
straint not being properly secured. Forward-facing (front passenger seat) — step 1
and installation information.
The restraint could tip over or be Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
loose and cause injury to a child in a safety” and “Child restraints” sections before If the seating position does not have an
sudden stop or collision. Also, it can installing a child restraint. adjustable head restraint or headrest and it
change the operation of the front is interfering with the proper child restraint
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing fit, try another seating position or a different
passenger air bag. See “Front pas- child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the
senger air bag and status light” child restraint.
rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
later in this section.
1. If you must install a child restraint in
. When installing a child restraint the front seat, it should be placed in a
system in the rear center position, forward-facing direction only. Move the
both the center seat belt connector seat to the rearmost position. Child
tongue and buckle tongue must be restraints for infants must be used in
secured. See “Rear center seat belt the rear-facing direction and, therefore,
(Hardtop models)” earlier in this must not be used in the front seat.
section. (for Hardtop models)

SSS0360B SSS0651 SSS0652
Forward-facing — step 3 Forward-facing — step 4 Forward-facing — step 5
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully 5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to
instructions for belt routing. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
If the child restraint is equipped with a top when the seat belt is fully retracted.
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point (rear seat installation only, Hardtop
models). See “Installing top tether strap
(Hardtop models)” later in this section. Do
not install child restraints that require the
use of a top tether strap in seating positions
that do not have a top tether anchor.

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2
through 8.
SSS0653 SSS0641
Forward-facing — step 6 Forward-facing — step 8
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat 8. After attaching the child restraint, test it
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in before you place the child in it. Push it from
the center of the child restraint with your side to side while holding the child restraint
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion near the seat belt path. The child restraint
and seatback while pulling up on the seat should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm),
belt. from side to side. Try to tug it forward and
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the check to see if the belt holds the restraint in
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten
slack. the seat belt as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.
9. Check to make sure the child restraint is
Position the top tether strap over the top of
the seatback.
2. Secure the top tether strap to the tether
anchor point on the back of the seatback
behind the child restraint.
3. Refer to the appropriate child restraint
installation procedure steps in this section
before tightening the tether strap.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, consult your NISSAN
dealer for details.
BOOSTER SEATS
SSS0823 SSS0822
Forward-facing — step 10 Precautions on booster seats
10. If the child restraint is installed in the front
INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in (Hardtop models)
First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH
WARNING
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
status light should illuminate. If this light lower anchors (rear outboard seat positions If a booster seat and seat belt are not
is not illuminated, see “Front passenger air only) or the seat belt, as applicable. used properly, the risk of a child being
bag and status light” later in this section. 1. If necessary, raise or remove the head injured in a sudden stop or collision
Move the child restraint to another restraint or headrest to position the top greatly increases:
seating position. Have the system tether strap over the top of the seatback. If
checked by a NISSAN dealer. . Make sure the shoulder portion of
the head restraint or headrest is removed,
the belt is away from the child’s face
After the child restraint is removed and the seat store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
and neck and the lap portion of the
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child the head restraint or headrest when the child
belt does not cross the stomach.
restraint mode) is canceled. restraint is removed.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is not
See “Head restraints” earlier in this section
behind the child or under the child’s
for head restraint or headrest adjustment,
arm.
removal and installation information.
. A booster seat must only be in-
stalled in a seating position that has
a lap/shoulder belt.
LRS0455 LRS0453
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by . Make sure the child’s head will be properly
several manufacturers. When selecting any supported by the booster seat or vehicle
booster seat, keep the following points in mind: seat. The seatback must be at or above the
. Choose only a booster seat with a label center of the child’s ears. For example, if a
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor low back booster seat * 1 is chosen, the
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian vehicle seatback must be at or above the
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is
. Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be lower than the center of the child’s ears, a
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat high back booster seat * 2 should be used.
and seat belt system. . If the booster seat is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the booster seat
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the booster seat is compatible with
your child. Always follow all recommended
procedures.

when using a booster seat with the
seat belts.
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

safety” earlier in this section, “Child restraints”
earlier in this section and “Booster seats” earlier
in this section before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the
rear seat or in the front passenger seat:
LRS0464 SSS0640
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or 1. If you must install a booster seat in the
territories require that infants and small front seat, move the seat to the rear-
children be restrained in an approved child most position.
restraint at all times while the vehicle is 2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only
being operated. place it in a forward-facing direction. Always
The instructions in this section apply to booster follow the booster seat manufacturer’s
seat installation in the rear seats or the front instructions.
passenger seat.
Booster seat installation
CAUTION
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode
is interfering with the proper booster seat fit,
try another seating position or a different
booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s
instructions for adjusting the seat belt
routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
LRS0454
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat SSS0823
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
Front passenger position
seat belt routing. 7. If the booster seat is installed in the front
3. The booster seat should be positioned on passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the vehicle seat so that it is stable. 6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-
tions for properly fastening a seat belt the ON position. The front passenger air bag
If necessary, adjust or remove the head shown in “Seat belts” earlier in this section. status light may or may not illuminate
restraint or headrest to obtain the correct depending on the size of the child and the
booster seat fit. If the head restraint or type of booster seat used. See “Front
headrest is removed, store it in a secure passenger air bag and status light” later in
place. Be sure to reinstall the head this section.
restraint or headrest when the booster
seat is removed. See “Head restraints”
earlier in this section for head restraint or
headrest adjustment, removal and installa-
tion information.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint or headrest and it

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and should always be correctly worn and the
RESTRAINT SYSTEM rollover supplemental air bag system (for occupant seated a suitable distance away from
Hardtop models): This system can help the steering wheel, instrument panel and door
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
cushion the impact force to the head of finishers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this section
section contains important information concern-
occupants in front and rear outboard seating for instructions and precautions on seat belt
ing the following systems:
positions in certain side impact or rollover usage.)
. Driver and passenger supplemental front- collisions. In a side impact, the curtain and The supplemental air bags operate only
impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag rollover air bags are designed to inflate on the when the ignition switch is in the ON
System) side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, position.
. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple- the curtain and rollover air bags on both sides
mental air bag After pushing the ignition switch to the ON
are designed to inflate. Under both side-impact
position, the supplemental air bag warning
. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll- and rollover situations, the curtain air bags will
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
over supplemental air bag (for Hardtop remain inflated for a short period of time.
warning light will turn off after about 7
models) Door-mounted curtain side-impact and seconds if the systems are operational.
. Door-mounted curtain side-impact and roll- rollover supplemental air bag system (for
over supplemental air bag (for CrossCabrio- CrossCabriolet models): This system can
let models) help cushion the impact force to the heads of
. Seat belt pretensioner the driver and front passenger in certain side-
Supplemental front-impact air bag system: impact or rollover collisions. In a side impact, the
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can curtain and rollover air bags are designed to
help cushion the impact force to the head and inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
chest of the driver and front passenger in certain In a rollover, the curtain and rollover air bags on
frontal collisions. both sides are designed to inflate. Under both
side-impact and rollover situations, the curtain
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
air bags will remain inflated for a short period of
mental air bag system: This system can help
time.
cushion the impact force to the chest area of the
driver and front passenger in certain side impact These supplemental restraint systems are de-
collisions. The side air bags are designed to signed to supplement the crash protection
inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. provided by the driver and passenger seat belts
and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts
WARNING
. The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact,
rear impact, rollover, or lower se-
verity frontal collision. Always wear
your seat belts to help reduce the
risk or severity of injury in various
kinds of accidents.
. The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag
status light is lit or if the front
SSS0131
passenger seat is unoccupied. See
“Front passenger air bag and status
light” later in this section.
. The seat belts and the front air bags
are most effective when you are
sitting well back and upright in the
seat with both feet on the floor. The
front air bags inflate with great
force. Even with the NISSAN Ad-
vanced Air Bag System, if you are
unrestrained, leaning forward, sit-
ting sideways or out of position in
any way, you are at greater risk of
injury or death in a crash. You may
SSS0132 also receive serious or fatal injuries
from the front air bag if you are up
against it when it inflates. Always sit
back against the seatback and as crease the risk that they are injured
far-away as practical from the steer- if the front air bag inflates.
ing wheel or instrument panel. Al-
ways use the seat belts.
. The driver and front passenger seat
belt buckles are equipped with
sensors that detect if the seat belts
are fastened. The Advanced Air Bag
System monitors the severity of a
collision and seat belt usage then
inflates the air bags as needed.
Failure to properly wear seat belts
can increase the risk or severity of SSS0007
injury in an accident.
. The front passenger seat is
equipped with an occupant classifi-
cation sensor (pattern sensor) that
turns the front passenger air bag
OFF under some conditions. This
sensor is only used in this seat.
Failure to be properly seated and
wearing the seat belt can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an
accident. See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” later in this
section.
. Keep hands on the outside of the
SSS0006
steering wheel. Placing them inside
the steering wheel rim could in-
WARNING
. Never let children ride unrestrained
or extend their hands or face out of
the window. Do not attempt to hold
them in your lap or arms. Some
examples of dangerous riding posi-
tions are shown in the illustrations.
. Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side
air bags or curtain and rollover air
bags inflate if they are not properly
SSS0008 SSS0099
restrained. Pre-teens and children
should be properly restrained in the
rear seat, if possible.
. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front
seat. An inflating front air bag could
seriously injure or kill your child.
See “Child restraints” earlier in this
section for details.
SSS0009 SSS0100

SSS0059A SSS0140 SSS0159
Do not lean against doors or windows.
WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact sup-
plemental air bags and roof-mounted
curtain side-impact and rollover supple-
mental air bags (Hardtop models) or
door-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bags (Cross-
Cabriolet models):
. The side air bags and curtain air
bags ordinarily will not inflate in the
SSS0162 event of a frontal impact, rear im-
SSS0188A pact or lower severity side collision.
Always wear your seat belts to help
reduce the risk or severity of injury . Do not use seat covers on the front
in various kinds of accidents. seatbacks. They may interfere with
. The seat belts and air bags are most side air bag inflation.
effective when you are sitting well
back and upright in the seat with
both feet on the floor. The air bags
inflate with great force. Do not allow
anyone to place their hand, leg or
face near the side air bag on the
side of the seatback of the front
seat, near the side roof rails (Hard-
top models), or near the top of the
door finisher (CrossCabriolet mod-
els). Do not allow anyone sitting in
the front seats or rear outboard
seats to extend their hand out of
the window or lean against the
door. Some examples of dangerous
riding positions are shown in the
previous illustrations.
. When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you
may be seriously injured. Be espe-
cially careful with children, who
should always be properly re-
strained. Some examples of danger-
ous riding positions are shown in
the illustrations.

10. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
SSS0847
Hardtop models
NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG SYSTEM (front seats)
1. Crash zone sensor 6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover
2. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules supplemental air bags
3. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental 7. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover
air bag modules supplemental air bag inflators
4. Occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor) 8. Seat belt pretensioners
5. Occupant classification system control unit 9. Satellite sensors

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN
Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and
front passenger seats. This system is designed
to meet certification requirements under U.S.
regulations. It is also permitted in Canada.
However, all of the information, cautions
and warnings in this manual still apply and
must be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is
located in the center of the steering wheel; the
passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is
mounted in the instrument panel above the glove
box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in
higher severity frontal collisions, although they
may inflate if the forces in another type of
collision are similar to those of a higher severity
frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain
frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is
not always an indication of proper front air bag
operation.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has
SSS1174
dual stage air bag inflators. The system monitors
CrossCabriolet models
information from the crash zone sensor, satellite
1. Crash zone sensor 7. Door-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover
supplemental air bag inflators
sensor, Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat belt
2. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules
buckle sensors and occupant classification
3. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental 8. Door-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover
supplemental air bags sensor (pattern sensor). Inflator operation is
air bags
9. Satellite sensors
based on the severity of a collision and seat belt
4. Occupant classification system control unit
10. Seat belt pretensioners
usage for the driver. For the front passenger, the
11. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
occupant classification sensor is also monitored.
6. Dual pop-up roll bars
Based on information from the sensors, only one
front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on and chest of the front occupants. They can help
the crash severity and whether the front save lives and reduce serious injuries. However,
occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, an inflating front air bag may cause facial
the front passenger air bag may be automatically abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do
turned OFF under some conditions, depending not provide restraint to the lower body.
on the information provided by the occupant Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat
classification sensor. If the front passenger air belts should be correctly worn and the driver
bag is OFF, the passenger air bag status light and passenger seated upright as far as practical
will be illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the away from the steering wheel or instrument
light will not be illuminated, but the air bag will panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order
be off). (See “Front passenger air bag and to help protect the front occupants. Because of
status light” later in this section for further this, the force of the front air bag inflating can
details.) One front air bag inflating does not increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too
indicate improper performance of the system. close to, or is against, the air bag module during SSS0823
Front passenger air bag status light
If you have any questions about your air bag inflation.
system, contact NISSAN or a NISSAN dealer. If The front air bags will deflate quickly after a Front passenger air bag and status light
you are considering modification of your vehicle collision.
due to a disability, you may also contact
NISSAN. Contact information is contained in
The front air bags operate only when the WARNING
ignition switch is in the ON position.
the front of this Owner’s Manual.
After pushing the ignition switch to the ON The front passenger air bag is designed
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise to automatically turn OFF under some
position, the supplemental air bag warning
may be heard, followed by release of smoke. conditions. Read this section carefully
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate to learn how it operates. Proper use of
warning light will turn off after about 7
a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it the seat, seat belt and child restraints is
seconds if the system is operational.
may cause irritation and choking. Those with a necessary for most effective protection.
history of a breathing condition should get fresh Failure to follow all instructions in this
air promptly. manual concerning the use of seats,
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, seat belts and child restraints can
help to cushion the impact force on the head increase the risk or severity of injury in

an accident. below as permitted by U.S. regulations. If the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure
front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly
in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags for the most effective protection by the seat belt
Status light: in your vehicle are not part of this system. and supplemental air bag.
The front passenger air bag status light is The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-
located on the instrument panel below the air the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.
conditioner controls. After the ignition switch is to certain front passenger seat occupants, such NISSAN also recommends that appropriate
placed in the ON position, the front passenger as children, by requiring the air bag to be child restraints and booster seats be properly
air bag status light illuminates for about 7 automatically turned OFF. installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the
seconds and then turns off or illuminates occupant classification sensor is designed to
depending on the front passenger seat occu- The occupant classification sensor (pattern
sensor) is in the front passenger seat cushion operate as described above to turn the front
pied status. The light operates as follows: passenger air bag OFF for specified child
and is designed to detect an occupant and
. Unoccupied passenger seat: The objects on the seat. For example, if a child is in restraints. Failing to properly secure child
light is OFF and the front passenger air the front passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag restrains and to use the Automatic Locking
bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash. System is designed to turn the passenger air Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode)
. Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult, bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. may allow the restraint to tip or move in an
child or child restraint as outlined in this Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in accident or sudden stop. This can also result in
section: The light illuminates to the regulations is on the seat, the occupant the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead
indicate that the front passenger air bag is classification sensor can detect it and cause the of being OFF. (See “Child restraints” earlier in
OFF and will not inflate in a crash. air bag to turn OFF. this section for proper use and installation.)
. Occupied passenger seat and the passen- Front passenger seat adult occupants who are If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the
ger meets the conditions outlined in this properly seated and using the seat belt as passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a
section: The light is OFF to indicate outlined in this manual should not cause the crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
that the front passenger air bag is opera- passenger air bag to be automatically turned seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
tional. OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, the object being detected by the occupant
Front passenger air bag: however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat classification sensor. Other conditions could
properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is
The front passenger air bag is designed to
sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise standing on the seat, or if two children are on the
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is
being out of position), this could cause the seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.
operated under some conditions as described
Always be sure that you and all vehicle
occupants are seated and restrained properly. OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the . Do not place objects with sharp
Using the passenger air bag status light, you can system is OFF by using a special tool. However, edges on the seat. Also, do not
monitor when the front passenger air bag is until you have confirmed with your dealer that place heavy objects on the seat that
automatically turned OFF with the seat occu- your air bag is working properly, reposition the will leave permanent impressions in
pied. The light will not illuminate when the front occupant or child restraint in a rear seat. the seat. Such objects can damage
passenger seat is unoccupied. The air bag system and passenger air bag status the seat or occupant classification
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the light will take a few seconds to register a change sensor (pattern sensor). This can
passenger air bag status light is illuminated in the passenger seat status. However, if the affect the operation of the air bag
(indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be seat becomes unoccupied, the air bag status system and result in serious perso-
that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting light will remain off. nal injury.
on the seat properly. If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air . Do not use water or acidic cleaners
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat, bag system, the supplemental air bag warning (hot steam cleaners) on the seat.
the passenger air bag status light may or may light , located in the meter and gauges area, This can damage the seat or occu-
not be illuminated, depending on the size of the will blink. Have the system checked by a pant classification sensor. This can
child and the type of child restraint being used. If NISSAN dealer. also affect the operation of the air
the air bag status light is not illuminated bag system and result in serious
Other supplemental front-impact air bag personal injury.
(indicating that the air bag might inflate in a
precautions
crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat . Immediately after inflation, several
belt is not being used properly. Make sure that front air bag system components
the child restraint is installed properly, the seat WARNING will be hot. Do not touch them; you
belt is used properly and the occupant is may severely burn yourself.
positioned properly. If the air bag status light is . Do not place any objects on the . No unauthorized changes should be
not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child steering wheel pad or on the instru- made to any components or wiring
restraint in a rear seat. ment panel. Also, do not place any of the supplemental air bag system.
If the passenger air bag status light will not objects between any occupant and This is to prevent accidental infla-
illuminate even though you believe that the child the steering wheel or instrument tion of the supplemental air bag or
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are panel. Such objects may become damage to the supplemental air bag
properly positioned, the system may be sensing dangerous projectiles and cause system.
an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is injury if the front air bags inflate.

. Do not make unauthorized changes classification sensor. inform the buyer about the front air bag system
to your vehicle’s electrical system, and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
. No unauthorized changes should be in this Owner’s Manual.
suspension system or front end made to any components or wiring
structure. This could affect proper of the seat belt system. This may
operation of the front air bag sys- affect the front air bag system.
tem. Tampering with the seat belt system
. Tampering with the supplemental may result in serious personal in-
air bag system may result in serious jury.
personal injury. Tampering includes . Work on and around the front air
changes to the steering wheel and bag system should be done by a
the instrument panel assembly by NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec-
placing material over the steering trical equipment should also be
wheel pad and above the instrument done by a NISSAN dealer. The
panel or by installing additional trim Supplemental Restraint System
material around the air bag system. (SRS) wiring harnesses* should not
. Modifying or tampering with the be modified or disconnected. Un-
front passenger seat may result in authorized electrical test equipment
serious personal injury. For exam- and probing devices should not be
ple, do not change the front seats by used on the air bag system.
placing material on the seat cushion . A cracked windshield should be
or by installing additional trim ma- replaced immediately by a qualified
terial, such as seat covers, on the repair facility. A cracked windshield
seat that is not specifically designed could affect the function of the
to assure proper air bag operation. supplemental air bag system.
Additionally, do not stow any ob-
jects under the front passenger seat * The SRS wiring harness connectors are
or the seat cushion and seatback. yellow and orange for easy identification.
Such objects may interfere with the
proper operation of the occupant When selling your vehicle, we request that you

FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IM- Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
PACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG AND indication of proper side air bag and curtain and
ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE-IM- rollover air bag operation.
PACT AND ROLLOVER SUPPLEMEN- When the side air bags and curtain and rollover
TAL AIR BAG (Hardtop models) OR air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,
DOOR-MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE-IM- followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not
PACT AND ROLLOVER SUPPLEMEN- harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should
TAL AIR BAG (CrossCabriolet models) be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation
and choking. Those with a history of a breathing
SYSTEMS
condition should get fresh air promptly.
The side air bags are located in the outside of
the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
bags are located in the side roof rails (Hardtop help to cushion the impact force on the chest
SSS0848 models) or upper side of the door trim (Cross- and pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain
Cabriolet models). These systems are designed and rollover air bags help to cushion the impact
Hardtop models
to meet voluntary guidelines to help reduce the force to the heads of occupants in the front and
risk of injury to out-of-position occupants. rear outboard seating positions (Hardtop mod-
However, all of the information, cautions els) or the heads of the driver and front
and warnings in this manual still apply and passenger (CrossCabriolet models). They can
must be followed. The side air bags and help save lives and reduce serious injuries.
curtain and rollover air bags are designed to However, side air bags and curtain and rollover
inflate in higher severity side collisions, although air bags may cause abrasions or other injuries.
they may inflate if the forces in another type of Side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags
collision are similar to those of a higher severity do not provide restraint to the lower body.
side impact. They are designed to inflate on the The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
side where the vehicle is impacted. They may driver and passenger seated upright as far as
not inflate in certain side collisions. Curtain and practical away from the side air bags. Rear seat
rollover air bags are also designed to inflate in passengers should be seated as far away as
SSS0982 certain types of rollover collisions or near practical from the door finishers and side roof
CrossCabriolet moldels rollovers. rails. The side air bags and curtain and rollover

air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect bag (CrossCabriolet model) inflates. . Work around and on the side air bag
the occupants. Because of this, the force of the and curtain and rollover air bag
side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags . Right after inflation, several side air
bag and curtain and rollover air bag systems should be done by a
inflating can increase the risk of injury if the NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec-
occupant is too close to, or is against, these air system components will be hot. Do
not touch them; you may severely trical equipment should also be
bag modules during inflation. In a rollover, the done by a NISSAN dealer. The
curtain and rollover air bags on both sides are burn yourself.
Supplemental Restraint System
designed to inflate. Under both side-impact and . No unauthorized changes should be
(SRS) wiring harnesses* should not
rollover situations, the curtain air bags will made to any components or wiring
be modified or disconnected. Un-
remain inflated for a short period of time. of this side air bag and curtain and
authorized electrical test equipment
The side air bags and curtain and rollover rollover air bags. This is to prevent
and probing devices should not be
air bags operate only when the ignition damage to or accidental inflation of
used on the side air bag and curtain
switch is in the ON position. the side-impact air bag and curtain
and rollover air bag systems.
side-impact and rollover air bag
After pushing the ignition switch to the ON systems.
position, the supplemental air bag warning * The SRS wiring harness connectors are
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag . Do not make unauthorized changes yellow and orange for easy identification.
warning light will turn off after about 7 to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system, door panel, When selling your vehicle, we request that you
seconds if the systems are operational. inform the buyer about the side air bag and
door trim, or side panel. This could
affect proper operation of the side curtain and rollover air bag systems and guide
WARNING air bag and curtain and rollover air the buyer to the appropriate sections in this
bag systems. Owner’s Manual.
. Do not place any objects near the . Tampering with the supplemental SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS
seatback of the front seats. Also, do air bag system may result in serious (front seats)
not place any objects (an umbrella, personal injury. For example, do not
bag, etc.) between the front door change the front seats by placing
finisher and the front seat. Such material near the seatbacks or by
WARNING
objects may become dangerous installing additional trim material,
projectiles and cause injury if a side . The pretensioners cannot be reused
such as seat covers, around the side
air bag or door-mounted curtain air after activation. They must be re-
air bag.
placed together with the retractor Service Manual. Incorrect disposal system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
and buckle as a unit. procedures could cause personal When selling your vehicle, we request that you
. If the vehicle becomes involved in a injury. inform the buyer about the pretensioner system
collision but a pretensioner is not and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
activated, be sure to have the pre- The pretensioner system may activate with the in this Owner’s Manual.
tensioner system checked and, if supplemental air bag system in certain types of
necessary, replaced by a NISSAN collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor, it
dealer. helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle
becomes involved in certain types of collisions,
. No unauthorized changes should be
helping to restrain front seat occupants.
made to any components or wiring
of the pretensioner system. This is The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt
to prevent damage to or accidental retractor. These seat belts are used the same
activation of the pretensioners. way as conventional seat belts.
Tampering with the pretensioner When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-
system may result in serious perso- leased and a loud noise may be heard. The
nal injury. smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a
. Work around and on the preten- fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it
sioner system should be done by a may cause irritation and choking. Those with a
NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec- history of a breathing condition should get fresh
trical equipment should also be air promptly.
done by a NISSAN dealer. Un- After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow
authorized electrical test equipment the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to
and probing devices should not be reduce forces against the chest.
used on the pretensioner system. The supplemental air bag warning light is
. If you need to dispose of a preten- used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner
sioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a system. (See “Supplemental air bag warning
NISSAN dealer. Correct preten- light” later in this section for more details.) If the
sioner disposal procedures are set operation of the supplemental air bag warning
forth in the appropriate NISSAN light indicates there is a malfunction, have the
. The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
. The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
. The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the air bags and/or
pretensioner systems may not operate properly.
They must be checked and repaired. Take your
vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
SSS1016 SPA1097
If the supplemental air bag warning
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING light is on, it could mean that the air
LABELS LIGHT bags and/or pretensioner systems will
Warning labels about the supplemental front- The supplemental air bag warning light, display- not operate in an accident. To help
impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle ing in the instrument panel, monitors the avoid injury to yourself or others, have
as shown in the illustration. circuits for the air bag systems, pretensioner your vehicle checked by a NISSAN
seat belt system and all related wiring. dealer as soon as possible.
SRS air bag
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
The warning labels * 1 are located on the
the supplemental air bag warning light illumi- REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PRO-
surface of the sun visors.
nates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. CEDURE
This means the SRS air bag systems are The front air bags, side air bags, curtain and
operational. rollover air bags and pretensioners are designed
If any of the following conditions occur, the air to activate on a one-time-only basis. As a
bags and/or pretensioner systems need servi- reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemen-
cing: tal air bag warning light will remain illuminated
after inflation has occurred. Repair and replace-
ment of these systems should be done only by a end or side portion of the vehicle.
NISSAN dealer.
. If you need to dispose of a supple-
When maintenance work is required on the mental air bag or pretensioner sys-
vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain tems, or scrap the vehicle, contact a
and rollover air bags and pretensioners and NISSAN dealer. Correct supplemen-
related parts should be pointed out to the tal air bag and pretensioner system
person performing the maintenance. The ignition disposal procedures are set forth in
switch should always be in the LOCK position the appropriate NISSAN Service
when working under the hood or inside the Manual. Incorrect disposal proce-
vehicle. dures could cause personal injury.
WARNING
SSS1178
. Once a front air bag, side air bag or
curtain and rollover air bag has DUAL POP-UP ROLL BAR SYSTEM
inflated, the air bag module will (CrossCabriolet models)
not function again and must be The dual pop-up roll bars are designed to
replaced. Additionally, the activated deploy only during rollover collisions. The dual
pretensioners must also be re- pop-up roll bars are located behind the rear
placed. The air bag module and seatback and deploy when the Air bag Control
pretensioner system should be re- Unit (ACU) judges that the vehicle will overturn.
placed by a NISSAN dealer. The air The dual pop-up roll bars, with proper seat belt
bag modules and pretensioner sys- usage, help preserve occupant headroom in a
tem cannot be repaired. rollover collision and can help reduce the risk of
. The front air bag, side air bag and occupant injury.
curtain and rollover air bag systems,
and pretensioner system should be
inspected by a NISSAN dealer if
there is any damage to the front
the dual pop-up roll bar to not
WARNING operate properly.
. Never allow anyone other than a
Failure to follow the warnings and
NISSAN dealer to retract or repair
instructions in this section may result
the dual pop-up roll bars. Always
in serious injury or death.
contact a NISSAN dealer after dual
. The dual pop-up roll bars deploy pop-up roll bars deploy.
upward at a high speed when acti-
vated. Keep hands and other body
parts away from the dual pop-up roll
bars.
. Never place objects (such as um-
brellas or accessories) near the dual
pop-up roll bars, which deploy from
the top of rear seatback. Such
objects can become dangerous pro-
jectiles when dual pop-up roll bars
deploy.
. Tampering with the dual pop-up roll
bars may cause them to uninten-
tionally deploy or operate abnor-
mally.
. Never open the dual pop-up roll bar
covers or modify or disassemble the
dual pop-up roll bars.
. Do not sit, place a heavy object, or
apply a strong load on the dual pop-
up roll bar cover. Doing so could
cause damage to the cover or cause
MEMO

2 Instruments and controls
Cockpit ........................................................................................ 2-3 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch ....... 2-36
>
Instrument panel ........................................................................ 2-4 Headlight and turn signal switch ....................................... 2-37
Meters and gauges ................................................................... 2-5 Xenon headlights (if so equipped) ............................ 2-37
Speedometer and odometer ............................................ 2-6 Headlight switch ............................................................ 2-37
Tachometer ........................................................................... 2-7 Turn signal switch .......................................................... 2-40
Engine coolant temperature gauge ................................ 2-7 Fog light switch (if so equipped) .............................. 2-41
Fuel gauge ............................................................................ 2-8 Horn .......................................................................................... 2-41
Compass (if so equipped) ...................................................... 2-8 Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) ......................... 2-41
Zone variation change procedure ................................ 2-10 Heated seats (if so equipped) ........................................... 2-42
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ............ 2-11 Warning systems switch (if so equipped) ...................... 2-43
Checking bulbs ................................................................. 2-12 Clock ........................................................................................ 2-44
Warning lights ................................................................... 2-12 Models with color display ............................................ 2-44
Indicator lights ................................................................... 2-17 Models without color display ...................................... 2-44
Audible reminders ............................................................ 2-20 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch ................. 2-44
Dot matrix liquid crystal display .......................................... 2-20 Power outlet ............................................................................ 2-45
Operational indicators ..................................................... 2-21 Cigarette lighter and ashtray (if so equipped) .............. 2-46
Maintenance indicators ................................................... 2-24 Storage .................................................................................... 2-47
Trip computer .................................................................... 2-25 Cup holders ..................................................................... 2-47
Security systems .................................................................... 2-29 Sunglasses holder (Hardtop models) ....................... 2-48
Vehicle security system (if so equipped) ................... 2-30 Glove box ......................................................................... 2-49
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System .......................... 2-31 Console box .................................................................... 2-49
Windshield wiper and washer switch ............................... 2-32 Storage box (if so equipped) ...................................... 2-50
Rain-sensing auto wiper system (if so equipped) ..... 2-34 Cargo floor box (if so equipped for
Rear window wiper and washer switch Hardtop models) ............................................................ 2-50
(Hardtop models) ................................................................... 2-35 Luggage side box (Hardtop models) ........................ 2-51
Cargo cover (if so equipped for Mood lights (Hardtop models) .......................................... 2-62
Hardtop models) .............................................................. 2-52 Vanity mirror lights ................................................................. 2-62
Luggage hooks (Hardtop models) ............................... 2-53 Cargo lights (Hardtop models) .......................................... 2-63
Luggage cover (CrossCabriolet models) ................... 2-53 Trunk light (CrossCabriolet models) ................................ 2-63
Roof rack (if so equipped for Hardtop models) ....... 2-54 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (if so equipped) ...... 2-63
Coat hooks (Hardtop models) ...................................... 2-55 Programming HomeLink® ............................................. 2-64
Windows .................................................................................. 2-55 Programming HomeLink® for Canadian customers
Power windows ................................................................ 2-55 and gate openers ........................................................... 2-65
Moonroof (if so equipped for Hardtop models) ............. 2-58 Operating the HomeLink®
Automatic moonroof and sunshades .......................... 2-59 Universal Transceiver .................................................... 2-66
Interior lights ............................................................................ 2-60 Programming troubleshooting ..................................... 2-66
Map lights ........................................................................... 2-60 Clearing the programmed information ...................... 2-66
Personal lights (Hardtop models) ................................ 2-61 Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button .......... 2-66
Interior light control switch ............................................ 2-61 If your vehicle is stolen ................................................. 2-67
COCKPIT
9. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch

10. Power lift gate main switch* (Hardtop models) or
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK switch (Cross-
Cabriolet models)
or Remote walk-in switch (CrossCabriolet mod-
els)
13. Fuel-filler door opener switch
14. Manual tilting/telescopic steering wheel lever*
15. Electric tilting/telescopic steering wheel switch*
16. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)*
— Audio control*
trol (models with navigation system)*
trol (models without navigation system)*
17. Steering wheel
— Horn
— Driver supplemental air bag
— Power steering system
18. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)
JVO0067X — Cruise control switches
19. Center-console mounted controls
1. Heated steering wheel switch* 5. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch
— Heated seat switches*
2. Power lift gate switch* (Hardtop models) or — Headlight
— All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK switch*
trunk lid release switch (CrossCabriolet models) — Turn signal light (Hardtop models)
3. Warning systems switch* — Fog light*
— Soft top operating switch (CrossCabriolet
- Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system* 6. Trip computer switch models)
- Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system* 7. TRIP/RESET switch *: if so equipped
4. Instrument brightness control switch 8. Wiper and washer switch
Instruments and controls 2-3

INSTRUMENT PANEL
(models without navigation system)

7. Hazard warning flasher switch
8. Front passenger supplemental air bag
9. Hood release handle
10. Fuse box cover
11. Parking brake
12. Intelligent Key port
13. Audio system
— Clock*
14. Front passenger air bag status light
15. Power outlet
16. Rear window and outside mirror* defroster
switch
17. Heater/air conditioner control or Audio system
18. Trunk release power cancel switch (Cross-
Cabriolet models)
19. Glove box
*: if so equipped
**: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).
SSI0839
1. Side ventilator 6. Heater/air conditioner control or Center multi-

2. Meters and gauges function control panel*
3. Push-button ignition switch — Navigation system**
4. Center ventilator — Vehicle information and setting buttons*
5. Center display — Bluetooth ® Hands-Free Phone System*
— Center color display* (models with navigation system)
— Navigation system** — Bluetooth ® Hands-Free Phone System*
2-4 Instruments and controls

METERS AND GAUGES
LOCK position. This is not a malfunction.
CAUTION
. For cleaning, use a soft cloth, dam-
pened with water. Never use a rough
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or
any kind of solvent or paper towel
with a chemical cleaning agent.
They will scratch or cause discolora-
tion to the lens.
. Do not spray any liquid such as
water on the meter lens. Spraying
liquid may cause the system to
malfunction.
JVO0043X
1. Instrument brightness control switch — Trip computer

2. Tachometer 8. Engine coolant temperature gauge
3. Speedometer 9. Odometer/twin trip odometer/Continuously Vari-
4. Fuel gauge able Transmission (CVT) position indicator
5. Warning/indicator lights 10. RESET switch for trip odometer
6. Trip computer switch The needle indicators may move slightly
7. Dot matrix liquid crystal display after the ignition switch is pushed to the
Resetting the trip odometer:
Pushing the TRIP RESET switch * 3 for more
than 1 second resets the trip odometer to zero.
JVI0252X SIC4699
Speedometer Odometer/twin trip odometer
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Odometer/twin trip odometer
Speedometer The odometer * 1 and twin trip odometer * 2
are displayed when the ignition switch is in the
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in
ON position.
miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour
(km/h). The odometer records the total distance the
vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of
individual trips.
Changing the display:
Pushing the TRIP RESET switch *3 on the right
side of the combination meter panel changes
the display as follows:
TRIP A ? TRIP B ? TRIP A
normal range, reduce vehicle speed to
decrease temperature. If gauge is over
the normal range, stop the vehicle as
soon as safely possible and let the
engine idle. If the engine is overheated,
continued operation of the vehicle may
seriously damage the engine. See “If
your vehicle overheats” in the “6. In
case of emergency” section for immedi-
ate action required.
JVI0253X SIC4690
TACHOMETER ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

The tachometer indicates engine speed in GAUGE
revolutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev the The gauge indicates the engine coolant tem-
engine into the red zone * 1 . perature.
The engine coolant temperature is within the
CAUTION normal range when the gauge needle points
within the zone *
1 shown in the illustration.
When engine speed approaches the red The engine coolant temperature varies with the
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce outside air temperature and driving conditions.
engine speed. Operating the engine in
the red zone may cause serious engine
damage. CAUTION
If the gauge indicates engine coolant
temperature near the hot (H) end of the
COMPASS (if so equipped)
tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches “E”.

The indicates that the fuel-filler door is
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
CAUTION
. If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
malfunction indicator light (MIL)
may come on. Refuel as soon as
possible. After a few driving trips,
the light should turn off. If the
light remains on after a few driving
JVI0338X trips, have the vehicle inspected by SIC3181
a NISSAN dealer.
FUEL GAUGE When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
. For additional information, see position, the compass display * B will indicate
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”
in the tank. the direction of the vehicle’s heading.
later in this section.
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the
ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge
registers “E” (Empty).
The low fuel warning appears on the dot
matrix liquid crystal display when the fuel level in If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass
the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is by driving the vehicle in 3 complete circles at
convenient, preferably before the gauge reaches less than 5 MPH (8 km/h). You can also
“E”. There will be a small reserve of fuel in the calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle

on your everyday route. The compass will be
calibrated once it has tracked 3 complete
circles.
To turn on and off the compass manually, push
the switch *
A while the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
SIC0611B
Zone map

ZONE VARIATION CHANGE PROCE- pass point when the vehicle moves to an
DURE area where the geomagnetism is stabilized.)
The difference between magnetic north and
geographical north is known as variance. In CAUTION
some areas, this difference can sometimes be
great enough to cause false compass readings. . Do not install a ski rack, antenna,
Follow these instructions to set the variance for etc., which are attached to the
your particular location if this happens: vehicle by means of a magnet. They
1. Push the switch for more than 3 affect the operation of the compass.
seconds. The current zone number will . When cleaning the mirror, use a
appear in the display. paper towel or similar material
2. Find your current location and variance dampened with glass cleaner. Do
number on the zone map. not spray glass cleaner directly on
NOTE: the mirror as it may cause the liquid
Use zone number 5 for Hawaii. cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
3. Push the switch repeatedly until the
new zone number appears in the display,
then release the switch. After you release
the switch, the display will show a compass
direction within a few seconds.
. If the compass deviates from the correct
indication soon after repeated adjust-
ment, have the compass checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
. The compass may not indicate the
correct compass point in tunnels or while
driving up or down a steep hill.
(The compass returns to the correct com-

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning light (AWD

Low tire pressure warning light Exterior light indicator
models)*
Master warning light Front passenger air bag status light
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
light
Seat belt warning light High beam indicator light
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) light
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) light (orange)* Supplemental air bag warning light
(green)*
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning

Brake warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
light
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK indicator light

Charge warning light Overdrive off indicator light
(AWD models)
Soft top indicator light (CrossCabriolet
Engine oil pressure warning light Blind Spot Warning (BSW) light (green)* models)
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
Intelligent Key warning light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
position indicator light
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) light (or- Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator
Cruise indicator light light
ange)*

CHECKING BULBS WARNING LIGHTS malfunctioning. If the warning
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning light turns off, you can drive
and push the ignition switch to the ON position again.
light (AWD models)
without starting the engine. The following lights
The light comes on when the ignition switch is — blinks slowly (about once every
will come on (if so equipped):
pushed to ON. It turns off soon after the engine 2 seconds):
, or , , , , , is started. Pull off the road in a safe area,
The following lights come on briefly and then go If the AWD system malfunctions, or the diameter and idle the engine. Check that
off (if so equipped): of the front and the rear wheels are different, the all tire sizes are the same, tire
, or , , , , , , warning light will either remain illuminated or pressure is correct and tires are
, , blink. (See “All-Wheel Drive (AWD)” in the “5. not worn.
If any light does not come on, it may indicate a Starting and driving” section.) . If the warning light is still on after
burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the the above operations, have your
electrical system. Have the system checked by vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer
a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION as soon as possible.
Some indicators and warnings are also dis- . If the warning light comes on while
played on the dot matrix crystal display on the driving there may be a malfunction or Anti-lock Braking System
speedometer. (See “Dot matrix liquid crystal in the AWD system. Reduce the (ABS) warning light
display” later in this section.) vehicle speed and have your vehicle When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
checked by a NISSAN dealer as the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
soon as possible. light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates
. If the AWD warning light blinks the ABS is operational.
when you are driving: If the ABS warning light illuminates while the
— blinks rapidly (about twice a engine is running, or while driving, it may
second): indicate the ABS is not functioning properly.
Pull off the road in a safe area, Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
and idle the engine. The driving If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock
mode will change to 2WD to function is turned off. The brake system then
prevent the AWD system from operates normally, but without anti-lock assis-
tance. (See “Brake system” in the “5. Starting 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid . Pressing the brake pedal with the
and driving” section.) as necessary. (See “Brake fluid” in the “8. engine stopped and/or low brake
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.) fluid level may increase your stop-
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) light
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the ping distance and braking will re-
(orange; if so equipped)
warning system checked by a NISSAN quire greater pedal effort as well as
When the ignition switch is placed in the "ON" dealer. pedal travel.
position, the light will first illuminate in orange
and turn green. This indicates that the Blind Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning . If the brake fluid level is below the
Spot Warning (BSW) system is operational. indicator: minimum or MIN mark on the brake
When the parking brake is released and the fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
If the light comes on in orange and remains on, it brake system has been checked at a
may indicate that the BSW system is not brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake
warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System NISSAN dealer.
functioning properly. Have the system checked
by a NISSAN dealer. See “Blind Spot Warning (ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate
(BSW)/Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sys- the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the Charge warning light
tems” in the “5. Starting and driving” section. brake system checked, and if necessary re- If the light comes on while the engine is running,
paired, by a NISSAN dealer promptly. (See it may indicate the charging system is not
or Brake warning light “Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light” functioning properly. Turn the engine off and
This light functions for both the parking brake earlier in this section.) check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose,
and the foot brake systems. broken, missing or if the light remains on, see a
Parking brake indicator: WARNING NISSAN dealer immediately.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the light comes on when the parking brake is . Your brake system may not be
working properly if the warning light
CAUTION
applied.
is on. Driving could be dangerous. If Do not continue driving if the alternator
Low brake fluid warning light:
you judge it to be safe, drive care- belt is loose, broken or missing.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, fully to the nearest service station
the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the for repairs. Otherwise, have your
light comes on while the engine is running with vehicle towed because driving it
the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle could be dangerous.
and perform the following:
Engine oil pressure warning light stopped, it may be impossible to start the Low tire pressure warning light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the engine. If the light comes on while the engine Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
light flickers or comes on during normal driving, is running, you can drive the vehicle. However in Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire
pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine these cases, contact a NISSAN dealer for repair pressure of all tires except the spare.
immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other as soon as possible.
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low
authorized repair shop. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not
The engine oil pressure warning light is light (orange; if so equipped) functioning properly.
not designed to indicate a low oil level. When the ignition switch is placed in the ON After the ignition switch is pushed ON, this light
Use the dipstick to check the oil level. (See position, the light will come on in orange and illuminates for about 1 second and turns off.
“Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it- turn green. This indicates that the Lane Depar-
yourself” section.) Low tire pressure warning:
ture Warning (LDW) system is operational.
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
While the LDW system is on, the light will blink pressure, the warning light will illuminate. A
CAUTION in orange and a warning chime will sound if the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning also appears
vehicle is traveling close to either the left or the on the dot matrix liquid crystal display.
Running the engine with the engine oil right of a traveling lane with detectable lane
When the low tire pressure warning light
pressure warning light on could cause markers.
illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire
serious damage to the engine almost If the light comes on in orange and remains on, it pressure to the recommended COLD tire
immediately. Such damage is not cov- may indicate that the LDW system is not pressure shown on the Tire and Loading
ered by warranty. Turn off the engine as functioning properly. Have the systems checked Information label. The low tire pressure warning
soon as it is safe to do so. by a NISSAN dealer. light does not automatically turn off when the tire
See “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Lane Depar- pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to
Intelligent Key warning light ture Warning (LDW) systems” in the “5. Starting the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON and driving” section. driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to
position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire
and then turns off. pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure
gauge to check the tire pressure.
This light warns of a malfunction with the
Intelligent Key system. The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning appears
each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON
If the light comes on while the engine is
position as long as the low tire pressure warning dealer as soon as possible. remain on after 1 minute. Contact
light remains illuminated. your NISSAN dealer as soon as
. If the light illuminates while driving,
For additional information, see “Dot matrix liquid avoid sudden steering maneuvers or possible for tire replacement and/
crystal display” later in this section, “Tire abrupt braking, reduce vehicle or system resetting.
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “5. speed, pull off the road to a safe . Replacing tires with those not ori-
Starting and driving” section and “Tire Pressure location and stop the vehicle as ginally specified by NISSAN could
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of soon as possible. Driving with un- affect the proper operation of the
emergency” section. der-inflated tires may permanently TPMS.
TPMS malfunction: damage the tires and increase the
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low likelihood of tire failure. Serious
vehicle damage could occur and
tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-
may lead to an accident and could
CAUTION
mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is
result in serious personal injury.
pushed ON. The light will remain on after the 1 . The TPMS is not a substitute for the
minute. Have the system checked by a NISSAN Check the tire pressure for all four
regular tire pressure check. Be sure
dealer. The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
to check the tire pressure regularly.
does not appear if the low tire pressure warning recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading . If the vehicle is being driven at
light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
Information label to turn the low speeds of less than 16 MPH (25
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure km/h), the TPMS may not operate
tire pressure warning light OFF. If
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting correctly.
the light still illuminates while driv-
and driving” section. For the CHECK TIRE
ing after adjusting the tire pressure, . Be sure to correctly install the
PRESSURE warning, see “Dot matrix liquid
a tire may be flat. If you have a flat specified size of tires to the four
crystal display” later in this section.
tire, replace it with a spare tire as wheels.
soon as possible.
WARNING . When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not
. If the light does not illuminate with function and the low tire pressure
the ignition switch pushed ON, have warning light will flash for approxi-
the vehicle checked by a NISSAN mately 1 minute. The light will

Master warning light occupied. For approximately 5 seconds after the belts and supplemental restraint system” sec-
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, ignition switch is in the ON position, the system tion.
the master warning light illuminates if any of the does not activate the warning light for the front
following are displayed on the dot matrix liquid passenger.
WARNING
crystal display: See “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat
. No key warning belts and supplemental restraint system” section If the supplemental air bag warning
for precautions on seat belt usage.
. Low fuel warning light is on, it could mean that the air
. Low washer fluid warning Supplemental air bag warning light bags and/or pretensioner systems will
. Parking brake release warning not operate in an accident. To help
After pushing the ignition switch to the ON
avoid injury to yourself or others, have
. Door/lift gate open warning (Hardtop mod- position, the supplemental air bag warning light
your vehicle checked by a NISSAN
els) will illuminate. The supplemental air bag warning
dealer as soon as possible.
. Door/trunk open warning (CrossCabriolet light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the
models) SRS air bag systems are operational.
. Loose fuel cap warning If any of the following conditions occur, the air Vehicle dynamic control (VDC)
. Check tire pressure warning bags and/or pretensioner systems need servi- warning light
. Extended storage fuse warning cing and your vehicle must be taken to your The light will blink when the Vehicle Dynamic
nearest NISSAN dealer. Control (VDC) system or the traction control
See “Dot matrix liquid crystal display” later in this
section. . The supplemental air bag warning light system is operating, thus alerting the driver that
remains on after approximately 7 seconds. the vehicle is nearing its traction limits. The road
Seat belt warning light . The supplemental air bag warning light surface may be slippery.
The light and chime remind you to fasten seat flashes intermittently. If the VDC warning light comes on and stays on
belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition . The supplemental air bag warning light does while the VDC system is on, this light alerts the
switch is pushed to the ON position, and will not come on at all. driver to the fact that the VDC system’s fail-safe
remain illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental mode is operating, for example the VDC system
fastened. Restraint Systems (air bag systems) and/or the may not be functioning properly. Have the
The seat belt warning light for the front pretensioners may not function properly. system checked by a NISSAN dealer. If a
passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is not malfunction occurs in the system, the VDC
For additional information, see “Supplemental system function will be canceled but the vehicle
fastened when the front passenger’s seat is restraint system” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat
is still driveable. For additional information, see Continuously Variable Transmis- Exterior light indicator
“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the sion (CVT) position indicator light This indicator illuminates when the headlight
“5. Starting and driving” section of this manual. When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON switch is turned to the AUTO (if so equipped),
INDICATOR LIGHTS position, the indicator shows the automatic or position and the front parking lights,
selector shift position. (See “Continuously Vari- instrument panel lights, tail lights, license plate
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK able Transmission (CVT)” in the “5. Starting and lights or headlights are on. The indicator turns
indicator light (AWD models) driving” section.) off when these lights are turned off.
This light illuminates when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position, and turns off within 1 Cruise indicator light Front passenger air bag status light
second. Cruise main switch indicator: The front passenger air bag status light
When selecting the LOCK mode while the will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be
This light illuminates when the cruise control
engine is running, this light will illuminate. (See OFF depending on how the front passenger
main switch is pushed. The light turns off when
“All-Wheel Drive (AWD)” in the “5. Starting and seat is being used.
the main switch is pushed again. When the
driving” section.) cruise main switch indicator light illuminates, the For front passenger air bag status light opera-
cruise control system is operational. (See tion, see “NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) light “Cruise control” in the “5. Starting and driving” (front seats)” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat
(green; if so equipped) section.) belts and supplemental restraint system” section
The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) light (green) will of this manual.
Cruise malfunction:
illuminate when the BSW system is turned on.
The light turns off when the system is turned off. If the cruise indicator light blinks while the High beam indicator light
(See “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Lane Depar- engine is running, it may indicate the cruise This light comes on when the headlight high
ture Warning (LDW) systems” in the “5. Starting control system is not functioning properly. Have beam is on and goes out when the low beam is
and driving” section.) the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. (See selected.
“Cruise control” in the “5. Starting and driving”
NOTE:
section.)
This light is common with the Blind Spot
Warning (BSW) light (orange). (See “Blind
Spot Warning (BSW) light” earlier in this
section.)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) If this indicator light remains on for 20 seconds — Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH
light (green; if so equipped) and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine (72 km/h).
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) light is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not — Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
(green) will illuminate when the LDW system is ready for an emission control system inspection/ — Avoid steep uphill grades.
turned on. The light turns off when the system is maintenance test. (See “Readiness for Inspec-
— If possible, reduce the amount of cargo
turned off. (See “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/ tion/Maintenance (I/M) test” in the “9. Technical
being hauled or towed.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) systems” in the and consumer information” section.)
The malfunction indicator light may stop
“5. Starting and driving” section.) Operation: blinking and remain on.
NOTE: The malfunction indicator light will come on in Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN
This light is common with the Lane Depar- one of two ways: dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle
ture Warning (LDW) light (orange). (See . Malfunction indicator light on steady — An towed to the dealer.
“Lane Departure Warning (LDW) light” emission control system and/or CVT mal-
earlier in this section.) function has been detected. Check the fuel-
filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning
CAUTION
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
appears on the dot matrix liquid crystal
If the malfunction indicator light comes on Continued vehicle operation without
display. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or
steady or blinks while the engine is running, it having the emission control system
missing, tighten or install the cap and
may indicate a potential emission control and/or and/or CVT system checked and re-
continue to drive the vehicle. The light
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) mal- paired as necessary could lead to poor
should turn off after a few driving trips. If the
function. driveability, reduced fuel economy, and
light does not turn off after a few driving
The malfunction indicator light may also come on possible damage to the emission con-
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or trol system.
NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have
if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make your vehicle towed to the dealer.
sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed . Malfunction indicator light blinking — An
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 US engine misfire has been detected which may
gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank. damage the emission control system.
After a few driving trips, the light should To reduce or avoid emission control system
turn off if no other potential emission control damage:
system malfunction exists.
Overdrive off indicator light . When the luggage cover is pulled out and ignition switch ON, it may indicate the electric
The overdrive off indicator light illuminates when hooked so that the roof storage area is soft top control unit is not functioning properly.
the overdrive off mode is selected. separated from the trunk. Have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer
. When the shift lever is in a position other as soon as possible.
For additional information, see “Continuously
than the R (Reverse) position. For more details about the electric soft top
Variable Transmission (CVT)” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section of this manual. operation, see “Soft top (CrossCabriolet mod-
els)” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjust-
Soft top indicator light (Cross- CAUTION ments” section.
Cabriolet models)
Operate the soft top with the engine Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
This light illuminates when the soft top is being running to prevent a discharged battery.
operated or it is stopped before reaching a full The light flashes when the turn signal switch
open/close state. When the top is fully opened lever or hazard switch is turned on.
When the soft top is operating, if any of the
or closed, the light will turn off. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off
above conditions are discontinued or any of the
The light blinks while the soft top is not fully following conditions are met, the top will stop indicator light
opened or closed under the following condi- operating. The light comes on when the Vehicle Dynamic
tions: Control (VDC) off switch is pushed to OFF. This
. When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
. When the vehicle is driven. position. indicates that the VDC system is not operating.
. When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) . When the vehicle moves at a speed of 3 For additional information, see “Vehicle Dynamic
position. MPH (5 km/h) or more. Control (VDC) system” in the “5. Starting and
Be sure to fully open or close the soft top when driving” section of this manual.
. When the battery voltage is extremely low.
driving the vehicle. . When the temperature of the soft top
The soft top can be moved with the soft top system becomes extremely high.
operating switch only under all of the following Release the operating switch, and push it again
conditions: under the above conditions until the top is fully
. When the vehicle is stopped. opened or closed. The soft top indicator light will
. When the ignition switch is ON. turn off when the top operation is completely
. When the trunk is closed. finished.
If the soft top indicator light illuminates with the
DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL
DISPLAY
AUDIBLE REMINDERS Seat belt warning chime

Key reminder chime The chime will sound for about 6 seconds
unless the driver’s seat belt is securely fastened.
A chime will sound if the driver side door is
opened while the ignition switch is pushed to Brake pad wear warning
the ACC position or pushed to the OFF or The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-
LOCK position with the Intelligent Key left in the ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it
Intelligent Key port. Make sure the ignition will make a high pitched scraping sound when
switch is pushed to the OFF position, and take the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will
the Intelligent Key with you when leaving the first occur only when the brake pedal is
vehicle. depressed. After more wear of the brake pad,
Light reminder chime the sound will always be heard even if the brake
pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes
A chime will sound when the driver side door is JVI0254X
checked as soon as possible if the warning
opened with the light switch in the or
The dot matrix liquid crystal display *
sound is heard.
position and the ignition switch in the ACC 1 is
or OFF position. located in the speedometer, and it displays,
the key operation information and other warn-
Turn the light switch off when you leave the
ings and information.
vehicle.
For the detail about the Intelligent Key System,
Parking brake reminder chime see “Intelligent Key system” in the “3. Pre-
The chime will sound if the vehicle is driven at driving checks and adjustments” section.
more than 4 MPH (7 km/h) with the parking
brake applied. Stop the vehicle and release the
parking brake.

JVI0540X
OPERATIONAL INDICATORS pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal 2. Key insertion indicator
depressed. This indicator appears when the key needs to be
1. Engine start operation indicator
You can start the engine directly in any position. inserted into the key port. (For example, the
This indicator appears when the shift lever is in
Intelligent Key battery is discharged.)
the P (Park) position.
If this indicator appears, insert the key into the
This indicator means that the engine will start by
key port in the correct direction. (See “Push-
button ignition switch” in the “5. Starting and more details. 7. Key battery discharge indicator
driving” section.) This indicator appears when the key battery is
5. SHIFT “P” warning
3. Key removal indicator running out of power.
This warning appears when the ignition switch is
This indicator appears when the driver’s door is pushed to stop the engine with the shift lever in If this indicator appears, replace the battery with
opened with the ignition switch in the OFF or any position except the P (Park) position. a new one. (See “Intelligent Key battery replace-
LOCK position and the key placed in the key ment” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
If this warning appears, move the shift lever to
port. A key reminder chime also sounds. section.)
the P (Park) position or push the ignition switch
If this indicator appears, remove the key from the to the ON position. 8. Clean Rear Camera warning (if so
key port and take it with you when leaving the An inside warning chime will also sound. (See equipped)
vehicle. “Intelligent Key system” in the “3. Pre-driving This warning appears if dirt, rain or snow
4. NO KEY warning checks and adjustments” section.) accumulates on the rear camera and cannot
be removed by the automatic washer and
This warning appears in either of the following 6. “PUSH” warning
blower. See “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Lane
conditions. This warning appears when the shift lever is Departure Warning (LDW) systems” in the “5.
No key inside the vehicle: moved to the P (Park) position with the ignition Starting and driving” section.
The warning appears when the door is closed switch in the ACC position after the SHIFT “P”
with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle warning appears. 9. Parking brake release warning
and the ignition switch in the ACC or ON To push the ignition switch to the OFF position, This warning appears when the vehicle speed is
position. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is perform the following procedure: above 4 MPH (7 km/h) and the parking brake is
inside the vehicle. applied. Stop the vehicle and release the
SHIFT “P” warning ? (Move the shift lever to
parking brake.
Unregistered key: “P”) ? PUSH warning ? (Push the ignition
switch ? ignition switch position is turned to 10. Low fuel warning
The warning appears when the ignition switch is
ON) ? PUSH warning ? (Push the ignition This warning appears when the fuel level in the
pushed from the LOCK position and the key
switch ? ignition switch position is turned to tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is
cannot be recognized by the system. You cannot
OFF) convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge
start the engine with an unregistered key. Use
the registered key. reaches the empty (E) position.
See “Intelligent Key system” in the “3. Pre- There is a small reserve of fuel remaining
driving checks and adjustments” section for in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches
the empty (E) position. 15. Check tire pressure warning 18. Extended storage fuse warning
11. Low washer fluid warning This warning appears when the low tire pressure This warning may appear if the extended storage
warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire fuse switch is not pushed in (switched on).
This warning appears when the washer tank fluid
pressure is detected. The warning appears each When this warning appears, push in (switch on)
is at a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary.
time the ignition switch is placed in the ON the extended storage fuse switch to turn off the
(See “Window washer fluid” in the “8. Main-
position as long as the low tire pressure warning warning. For more information, see “Extended
tenance and do-it-yourself” section.)
light remains illuminated. If this warning appears, storage fuse switch” in the “8. Maintenance and
12. Door/lift gate open warning (ignition stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressure to do-it-yourself” section.
switch is in the ON position) (Hardtop the recommended COLD tire pressure shown
models) on the Tire and Loading Information label. (See
“Low tire pressure warning light” earlier in this
This warning appears if any of the doors and/or
section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
the lift gate are open or not closed securely. The
(TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)
vehicle icon indicates which door is open on the
display. 16. “TIMER” indicator
13. Door/trunk open warning (ignition This indicator appears when the set “TIMER”
switch is in the ON position) (Cross- indicator activates. You can set the time for up to
6 hours. (See “Trip computer” later in this
Cabriolet models)
section.)
This warning appears if any of the doors and/or
the trunk are open or not closed securely. The 17. Low outside temperature warning
vehicle icon indicates which door is open on the This warning appears if the outside temperature
display. is below 378F (38C). The warning can be set not
to be displayed. (See “Trip computer” later in
14. Loose fuel cap warning
this section.)
This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is
not tightened correctly after the vehicle has
been refueled. (See “Fuel-filler cap” in the “3.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.)

MAINTENANCE INDICATORS tires should be replaced. Setting the
1. Engine oil replacement indicator tire replacement indicator for a certain
driving distance does not mean your
This indicator appears when the customer set
tires will last that long. Use the tire
time comes for changing the engine oil. You can
replacement indicator as a guide only
set or reset the distance for changing the engine
and always perform regular tire checks.
oil. (See “Trip computer” later in this section.)
Failure to perform regular tire checks,
2. Oil filter replacement indicator including tire pressure checks could
This indicator appears when the customer set result in tire failure. Serious vehicle
time comes for replacing the oil filter. You can damage could occur and may lead to a
set or reset the distance for replacing the oil collision, which could result in serious
filter. (See “Trip computer” later in this section.) personal injury or death.
3. Tire replacement indicator

4. “OTHER” indicator
distance comes for replacing tires. You can set
time comes for replacing items other than the
or reset the distance for replacing tires. (See
engine oil, oil filter and tires. You can set or reset
“Trip computer” later in this section.)
the distance for replacing the items. (See “Trip
computer” later in this section.)
WARNING More maintenance reminders are also available
SIC4237 on the center display (if so equipped). (See
The tire replacement indicator is not a “How to use INFO button” in the “4. Monitor,
substitute for regular tire checks, in- heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice
cluding tire pressure checks. See recognition systems” section.)
“Changing wheels and tires” in the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-
tion. Many factors including tire infla-
tion, alignment, driving habits and road
conditions affect tire wear and when
Elapsed time and trip odometer ? Distance to
empty (dte) ? Outside air temperature (ICY) ?
Setting ? Warning check
SIC3580 JVI0251X
TRIP COMPUTER Current and average fuel consumption

Switches for the trip computer are located on (MPG, l (liter)/100 km)
the right side of the combination meter panel. To The current and average fuel consumption mode
operate the trip computer, push the side or front shows the current and average fuel consump-
of the switches as shown above. tion.
*
A switch
*
B switch
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position, modes of the trip computer can be
selected by pushing the switch *
A .
Each time the switch * A is pushed, the

display will change as follows:
Current and average fuel consumption ?
Average fuel consumption and speed ?

done by pushing the switch *B for longer
than 1 second. (The average fuel consumption is
also reset at the same time.)
The display is updated every 30 seconds. The
first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows
“——”.
SIC3674 SIC4701
Average fuel consumption (MPG, l/100 Elapsed time and trip odometer (miles or
km) and speed (MPH or km/h) km)
Fuel consumption: Elapsed time:
The average fuel consumption mode shows the The elapsed time mode shows the time since
average fuel consumption since the last reset. the last reset. The displayed time can be reset
Resetting is done by pushing the switch *
B by pushing the switch *B for longer than 1
for longer than 1 second. (The average speed is second. (The trip odometer is also reset at the
also reset at the same time.) same time.)
The display is updated every 30 seconds. At Trip odometer:
about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a reset, the The trip odometer mode shows the total
display shows “——”. distance the vehicle has been driven since the
Speed: last reset. Resetting is done by pushing the
The average speed mode shows the average switch * B for longer than 1 second. (The
vehicle speed since the last reset. Resetting is elapsed time is also reset at the same time.)
pushed to the OFF position may continue to
be displayed.
. When driving uphill or rounding curves, the
fuel in the tank shifts, which may momenta-
rily change the display.
SIC4702 SIC4703
Distance to empty (dte — miles or km) Outside air temperature (ICY — 8F or 8C)
The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you The outside air temperature is displayed in 8F or
with an estimation of the distance that can be 8C in the range of −22 to 1408F (−30 to 608C).
driven before refueling. The dte is constantly The outside air temperature mode includes a low
being calculated, based on the amount of fuel in temperature warning feature. If the outside air
the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption. temperature is below 378F (38C), the warning is
The display is updated every 30 seconds. displayed on the screen.
The dte mode includes a low range warning The outside temperature sensor is located in
feature. If the fuel level is low, the warning is front of the radiator. The sensor may be affected
displayed on the screen. by road or engine heat, wind directions and
When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte other driving conditions. The display may differ
display will change to “——”. from the actual outside temperature or the
temperature displayed on various signs or bill-
. If the amount of fuel added is small, the
boards.
display just before the ignition switch is
ALERT: To return to the top page of the setting mode,
Alert menu can be set to notify the following select “BACK”.
items. OPTIONS:
. TIMER The following option menus can be set to your
Select this submenu to specify when the preference.
“TIMER” indicator activates. . LANGUAGE
. ICY Select this submenu to choose English,
Select this submenu to display the low French or Spanish for display.
outside temperature warning. . UNIT
To return to the top page of the setting mode, Select this submenu to choose the unit from
select “BACK”. MPG or l/100 km.
MAINTENANCE: . EFFECTS
SIC3678
The maintenance intervals of the following items Select this menu to set the dial effects
Setting can be set or reset for the reminders. described below to on or off.
. OIL — The indicator needles sweep in the
Setting cannot be made while driving. A
Select this submenu to set or reset the meters and the ring illumination will be
message “Setting can only be operated
distance for changing the engine oil. brightened gradually when the engine is
when stopped” is also displayed on the dot
started.
matrix crystal display. . FILTER
To return to the top page of the setting mode,
The switch * A and switch *B are Select this submenu to set or reset the
select “BACK”.
used in the setting mode to select and decide a distance for replacing the oil filter.
menu. . TIRE
SKIP: Select this submenu to set or reset the
switch *
distance for replacing tires.
Push the A to move to the warning
check mode. . OTHER
switch *
Select this submenu and set or reset the
Push the B to select other menus.
distance for replacing items other than the
engine oil, oil filter and tires.

SECURITY SYSTEMS
. Check tire pressure warning

SKIP:
Push the switch *
A to exit the warning
check display.
Push the switch *
B to select DETAIL
menus.
DETAIL:
This item is available only when a warning is
displayed.
Select this menu to see the details of warnings.
SIC3993 SIC2133
Warning check Your vehicle has two types of security systems,

as follows:
To see if there are any of the following warnings
and corresponding details, select this menu. . Vehicle security system (if so equipped)
. NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
. No key warning
The security condition will be shown by the
. Low fuel warning
security indicator light.
. Low washer fluid warning
. Parking brake release warning
. Door/lift gate open warning (Hardtop mod-
els)
. Door/trunk open warning (CrossCabriolet
models)
. Loose fuel cap warning

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if so 5. Confirm that the security indicator light * A
equipped) comes on. The security indicator light stays
The vehicle security system provides visual and on for about 30 seconds. The vehicle
audio alarm signals if someone opens the doors security system is now pre-armed. After
or lift gate/trunk when the system is armed. It is about 30 seconds the vehicle security
not, however, a motion detection type system system automatically shifts into the armed
that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a phase. The security light begins to flash
vibration occurs. once every approximately 3 seconds. If,
during this 30-second pre-arm time period,
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot the door is unlocked, or the ignition switch is
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior pushed to ACC or ON, the system will not
or exterior vehicle components in all situations. arm.
Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a
brief period. Never leave your keys in the vehicle, Even when the driver and/or passengers
SIC1699A are in the vehicle, the system will activate
and always lock it when unattended. Be aware
of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit with all doors and lift gate/trunk locked
How to arm the vehicle security system with the ignition switch in the LOCK
areas whenever possible.
1. Close all windows. position. When pushing the ignition switch
Many devices offering additional protection, to the ACC or ON position, the system will
The system can be armed even if the
such as component locks, identification markers, be released.
windows are open.
and tracking systems, are available at auto
supply stores and specialty shops. Your 2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position. Vehicle security system activation
NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment. 3. Carry the Intelligent Key. The vehicle security system will give the follow-
Check with your insurance company to see if 4. Close all doors and lift gate/trunk. Lock all ing alarm:
you may be eligible for discounts for various door. The doors can be locked with: . The headlights blink and the horn sounds
theft protection features. . the lock button on the Intelligent Key intermittently.
. any request switch . The alarm automatically turns off after
. the power door lock switch approximately 1 minute. However, the alarm
. the key — master or mechanical reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with
again.
The alarm is activated by:
. Unlocking the door or opening the lift gate/ NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYS-
trunk without using the button on the TEM
Intelligent Key, the request switch or the The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
key. (Even if the door is opened by releasing allow the engine to start without the use of the
the door inside lock knob, the alarm will registered key. Never leave these keys in the
activate.) vehicle.
How to stop an activated alarm For USA:
The alarm will stop by unlocking a door by This device complies with Part 15 of the
pushing the unlock button on the Intelligent FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
Key, pushing the request switch or using the key. following two conditions:
The alarm will not stop if the ignition switch is (1) This device may not cause harmful
placed in the ACC or ON position. interference, and (2) this device must
If the system does not operate as de- accept any interference received, including SIC1699A
scribed above, have it checked by a interference that may cause undesired
NISSAN dealer. operation. Security indicator light
Note: Changes or modifications not ex- The security indicator light *
A indicates the
pressly approved by the party responsible status of the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
for compliance could void the user’s System.
authority to operate the equipment. The light blinks after the ignition switch was in
For Canada: the ACC, OFF and LOCK position. This function
indicates the security systems equipped on the
This device complies with RSS-210 of vehicle are operational.
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is
malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the
(1) this device may not cause interference, ignition switch is in the ON position.
and (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference, including interference that may If the light still remains on and/or the
cause undesired operation of the device. engine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer
for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
service as soon as possible. Please bring reservoir tank. Do not use the
all registered keys that you have when WARNING window washer reservoir tank to
visiting a NISSAN dealer for service. mix the washer fluid concentrate
In freezing temperatures the washer and water.
solution may freeze on the windshield
and obscure your vision which may lead
to an accident. Warm windshield with
the defroster before you wash the
windshield.
CAUTION
. Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
. Do not operate the washer if the
reservoir tank is empty.
. Do not fill the window washer
reservoir tank with washer fluid
concentrates at full strength. Some
methyl alcohol based washer fluid
concentrates may permanently stain
the grille if spilled while filling the
window washer reservoir tank.
. Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
with water to the manufacturer’s
recommended levels before pouring
the fluid into the window washer

washer. Then the wiper will also operate several
times.
SIC3664 SIC3922
Type A Type C
The windshield wiper and washer operates
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the
following speed:
*
1 INT (Type A or Type C) — intermittent operation
can be adjusted by turning the knob toward A*
*
(Slower) or B (Faster).
*
1 AUTO (Type B) — For models with the rain-
sensing auto wiper system, see “Rain-sensing
auto wiper system” later in this section.
*
2 LO — continuous low speed operation
*
3 HI — continuous high speed operation
Push the lever up *4 (MIST) to have one sweep
SIC4395 operation of the wiper.
Type B
Pull the lever toward you *
5 to operate the
. High — High sensitive operation . Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing
. Low — Low sensitive operation auto wiper system when you use a car
To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper system off, wash.
push up the lever to the OFF position, or pull . The rain-sensing auto wipers may not
down the lever to the LO or HI position. operate if rain does not hit the rain
sensor even if it is raining.
. Using genuine wiper blades is recom-
CAUTION mended for proper operation of the
rain-sensing auto wiper system. (See
Do not touch the rain sensor and “Windshield wiper blades” in the “8.
around it when the wiper switch is in Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-
the AUTO position and the ignition tion for wiper blade replacement.)
switch is in the ON position. The wipers
SIC4017 may operate unexpectedly and cause to
an injury or a wiper damage.
RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER SYS-
TEM (if so equipped) . The rain-sensing auto wipers are in-
The rain-sensing auto wiper system can auto- tended for use during rain. If the switch
matically turn on the wipers and adjust the wiper is left in the AUTO position, the wipers
speed depending on the rainfall and the vehicle may operate unexpectedly when dirt,
speed by using the rain sensor located on the fingerprints, oil film or insects are stuck
upper part of the windshield. on or around the sensor. The wipers
To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system, push may also operate when exhaust gas or
the lever down to the AUTO position * 1 . The moisture affect the rain sensor.
wiper will sweep once while the ignition switch . When the windshield glass is coated
is in the ON position. with water repellent, the speed of the
The rain sensor sensitivity level can be adjusted rain-sensing auto wipers may be higher
by turning the knob toward the front * 2 (High) even though the amount of the rainfall
or toward the rear *3 (Low). is small.

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH (Hardtop models)
window washer reservoir tank to

WARNING mix the washer fluid concentrate
and water.
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the rear window If the rear window wiper operation is
glass and obscure your vision. Warm interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may
the rear window with the defroster stop moving to protect its motor. If this
before you wash the rear window. occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF
position and remove the snow or ice that is
on and around the wiper arms. In approxi-
mately 1 minute, turn the switch on again
CAUTION to operate the wiper.
. Do not operate the washer continu- SIC3666
ously for more than 30 seconds. Type A
. Do not operate the washer if the
reservoir tank is empty.
methyl alcohol based washer fluid
concentrates may permanently stain
the grille if spilled while filling the
window washer reservoir tank.
. Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
with water to the manufacturer’s
recommended levels before pouring
the fluid into the window washer
SIC4019
reservoir tank. Do not use the
Type B

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH
The rear window wiper and washer operate To defog/defrost the rear window glass and
when the ignition switch is in the ON position. outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine
Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position and push the switch * 1 on. The indicator light
to operate the wiper. *2 will come on. Push the switch again to turn
*
1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation (not the defroster off.
adjustable) It will automatically turn off in approximately 15
*
2 Low (ON) — continuous low speed operation minutes.
Push the switch forward * 3 to operate the
washer. Then the wiper will also operate several
times.
CAUTION
. When cleaning the inner side of the
rear window, be careful not to
SIC3584 scratch or damage the rear window
Type A defroster.
. Do not use the rear window defros-
ter switch while the soft top is being
operated or fully opened. The heat
may damage the soft top material
and/or components (CrossCabriolet
models).
SIC3667
Type B

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
XENON HEADLIGHTS (if so equipped) off the headlights for short intervals
(for example, when the vehicle stops at
a traffic signal).
WARNING . If the xenon headlight bulb is close to
burning out, the brightness will drasti-
HIGH VOLTAGE cally decrease, the light will start
. When xenon headlights are on, they blinking, or the color of the light will
produce a high voltage. To prevent become reddish. If one or more of the
an electric shock, never attempt to above signs appear, contact a NISSAN
modify or disassemble. Always have dealer.
your xenon headlights replaced at a
NISSAN dealer.
. Xenon headlights provide consider-
SIC3668
ably more light than conventional
headlights. If they are not correctly HEADLIGHT SWITCH
aimed, they might temporarily blind
an oncoming driver or the driver Lighting
ahead of you and cause a serious *
1 Turn the switch to the position.
accident. If headlights are not aimed The front parking, side marker, tail, license plate
correctly, immediately take your ve- and instrument lights will come on.
hicle to a NISSAN dealer and have *
2 Turn the switch to the position.
the headlights adjusted correctly. Headlights will come on and all the other lights
remain on.
When the xenon headlight is initially turned on,
its brightness or color varies slightly. However,
the color and brightness will soon stabilize.
. The life of xenon headlights will be
shortened by frequent on-off opera-
tion. It is generally desirable not to turn

headlights when it is light.
If the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF
position and one of the doors is opened and this
condition is continued, the headlights remain on
for a period of time.
SIC3669 SAA0642A
Autolight system (if so equipped) Be sure not to put anything on top of the
photo sensor * A located on the top of the
The autolight system allows the headlights to be
instrument panel. The photo sensor con-
set so they turn on and off automatically.
trols the autolight; if it is covered, the
To set the autolight system: photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and the
1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the headlights will illuminate.
AUTO position *
1 . Automatic headlights off delay:
2. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. You can keep the headlights on for up to 180
3. The autolight system automatically turns the seconds after you push the ignition switch to
headlights on and off. OFF and open any door then close all the doors.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch You can adjust the period of the automatic
to the OFF, or position. headlights off delay from 0 seconds (OFF) to
The autolight system can turn on the headlights 180 seconds. The factory default setting is 45
automatically when it is dark and turn off the seconds.

For automatic headlights off delay setting, see Battery saver system
“Vehicle information and settings” in the “4. A chime will sound when the driver side door is
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone opened with the light switch in the or
and voice recognition systems” section. position and the ignition switch in the
ACC, OFF or LOCK position.
When the headlight switch is in the or
position while the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the lights will automatically turn off after
a period of time when the ignition switch has
been pushed to the OFF position.
When the headlight switch remains in the
or position after the lights automatically turn
SIC3670 off, the lights will turn on when the ignition
switch is pushed to the ON position.
Headlight beam select
*
1 To select the low beam, put the lever in the
CAUTION
neutral position as shown.
*2 To select the high beam, push the lever forward
. When you turn on the headlight
while the switch is in the position. Pull it
back to select the low beam. switch again after the lights auto-
*
3 Pulling the lever toward you will flash the matically turn off, the lights will not
headlight high beam even when the headlight turn off automatically. Be sure to
switch is in the OFF position. turn the light switch to the OFF
position when you leave the vehicle
for extended periods of time, other-
wise the battery will be discharged.
. Never leave the light switch on
when the engine is not running for
extended periods of time even if the

headlights turn off automatically.
Daytime running light system (Canada

only)
The daytime running lights automatically illumi-
nate when the engine is started with the parking
brake released. The daytime running lights
operate with the headlight switch in the OFF
position or in the position. Turn the head-
light switch to the position for full illumina-
tion when driving at night.
If the parking brake is applied before the engine
SIC3585 SIC3671
is started, the daytime running lights do not
illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
once the parking brake is released. The daytime Instrument brightness control
running lights will remain on until the ignition The instrument brightness control operates *
1 Turn signal
switch is pushed to the OFF position. when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Move the lever up or down to signal the turning
To adjust the brightness of instrument panel direction. When the turn is completed, the turn
lights, push the control switches. Pushing the signals cancel automatically.
WARNING upper switch * A will brighten the lights. When
the brightness reaches the maximum level, a *
2 Lane change signal
When the daytime running light system
beep will sound. The lower switch * B dims the To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or
is active, tail lights on your vehicle are down to the point where lights begin flashing.
lights. Repeatedly pushing the lower switch will
not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on
turn the lights off and a beep will sound.
your headlights. Failure to do so could
cause an accident injuring yourself and
others.

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so
HORN
equipped)
SIC3672 SIC3586 SIC4401
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped) To sound the horn, push the pad area *
A of the The heated steering wheel system is designed
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight steering wheel. to operate only when the surface temperature of
switch to the position, then turn the switch the steering wheel is below 688F (208C).
to the position. To turn them off, turn the WARNING Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm
switch to the OFF position. the steering wheel after the engine starts. The
The headlights must be on for the fog lights to Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so indicator light *
1 on the switch will illuminate.
operate. could affect proper operation of the If the surface temperature of the steering wheel
supplemental front air bag system. is below 688F (208C), the system will heat the
Tampering with the supplemental front steering wheel and cycle off and on to maintain a
air bag system may result in serious temperature above 688F (208C). The indicator
personal injury. light will remain on as long as the system is on.
Push the switch again to turn the heated
steering wheel system off manually. The indica-
tor light will turn off.

HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)
NOTE:
damage to the heater.
If the surface temperature of the steering WARNING
wheel is above 688F (208C) when the switch . Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
is turned on, the system will not heat the should be removed immediately
Do not use or allow occupants to use with a dry cloth.
steering wheel. This is not a malfunction. the seat heater if you or the occupants
cannot monitor elevated seat tempera- . When cleaning the seat, never use
tures or have an inability to feel pain in gasoline, thinner, or any similar
body parts that contact the seat. Use of materials.
the seat heater by such people could . If any malfunctions are found or the
result in serious injury. heated seat does not operate, turn
the switch off and have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
. The battery could run down if the
seat heater is operated while the
engine is not running.
. Do not use the seat heater for
extended periods or when no one
is using the seat.
. Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates heat, such as a
blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc.
Otherwise, the seat may become
overheated.
. Do not place anything hard or heavy
on the seat or pierce it with a pin or
similar object. This may result in

WARNING SYSTEMS SWITCH (if so
equipped)
light goes off.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
automatically turning the heater on and off.
The indicator light will remain on as long as
the switch is on.
When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, or
before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn
off the switch.
SIC2770 SSD1156
The seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The The warning systems switch is used to tem-
switches located on the center console and rear porarily turn off the warning systems (Lane
doors (if so equipped for rear seats) can be Departure Warning (LDW) and Blind Spot
operated independently of each other. Warning (BSW) systems) that are activated on
1. Start the engine. the center display.
2. Select heat range. When the warning systems switch is turned off,
the indicator * 1 on the switch is off. The
*
1 For high heat, push the HI (High) side of
indicator will also be off if all of the warning
the switch.
systems are deactivated using the center dis-
*
2 For low heat, push the LO (Low) side of play.
the switch.
The BSW system will turn on the Blind Spot
The indicator light in the switch *
3 will Indicator lights, located inside the outside
illuminate when the heater is on. mirrors, if a vehicle is located in the detection
3. To turn off the heater, return the switch to zone. If the turn signal is activated in the
the level position. Make sure the indicator direction of the detected vehicle, a chime
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
CLOCK
OFF SWITCH
sounds twice and the Blind Spot Indicator light MODELS WITH COLOR DISPLAY
will flash. For additional information, see “Blind To adjust the clock on the front color display, use
Spot Warning (BSW)/Lane Departure Warning the SETTING button on the center multi-
(LDW) systems” in the “5. Starting and driving” function control panel. See “How to use
section. SETTING button” in the “4. Monitor, heater, air
The LDW system will sound a warning chime conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition
and the LDW light (orange) in the instrument systems” section.
panel blinks to alert the driver if the vehicle is The clock settings display cannot be operated
traveling close to either the left or the right of a while driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe place
traveling lane when detected by the camera unit. and apply the parking brake before setting the
For additional information, see “Blind Spot clock.
Warning (BSW)/Lane Departure Warning
MODELS WITHOUT COLOR DISPLAY
(LDW) systems” in the “5. Starting and driving”
section. The digital clock (in the audio unit) displays the SSD1153
time when the ignition switch is in the ACC or
The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle
ON position.
Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most
To adjust the clock, see “FM-AM radio with driving conditions.
Compact Disc (CD) changer” in the “4. Monitor,
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC
heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice
system reduces the engine output to reduce
recognition systems” section.
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor.
If maximum engine power is needed to free a
stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF
switch. The indicator will illuminate.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the
engine to turn on the system. (See “Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “5.
Starting and driving” section.)
POWER OUTLET
To use the power outlet, pull the cover as

illustrated.
CAUTION
. The outlet and plug may be hot
during or immediately after use.
. Do not use with accessories that
exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power
draw. Do not use double adapters or
more than one electrical accessory.
. Use power outlet with the engine
SIC3587 SIC3652 running to avoid discharging the
Center console Console box — Type A vehicle battery.
. Avoid using power outlet when the
air conditioner, headlights or rear
window defroster is on.
. This power outlet is not designed
for use with a cigarette lighter unit.
. Push the plug in as far as it will go.
If good contact is not made, the plug
may overheat or the internal tem-
perature fuse may open.
. Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical acces-
sory being used is turned OFF.
SIC3651 SIC3653
Cargo area (Hardtop models) Console box — Type B

CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND
ASHTRAY (if so equipped)
. When not in use, be sure to close er element only. The use of the
the cap. Do not allow water or any cigarette lighter socket as a power
liquid to contact the outlet. source for any other accessory is
not recommended.
. Do not use any other power outlet
for an accessory lighter.
SIC3588
To open the ashtray lid, push the lid down and

release it *
1 .
To empty the ashtray, pull out *

2 .
The cigarette lighter operates when the ignition

switch is in the ON position.
Push the lighter in all the way *3 , then release
it. When the lighter is heated, it will spring out.
Return the lighter to its original position after
use.
CAUTION
. The cigarette lighter socket is a
power source for the cigarette light-
STORAGE
CUP HOLDERS
CAUTION
. Avoid abrupt starting and braking
when the cup holder is being used
to prevent spilling the drink. If the
liquid is hot, it can scald you or your
passenger.
. Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.
SIC3118 SIC3042
Front Hardtop models
Front Rear
To open the cup holder, push the lid *
1 . Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal.
To remove the inner tray for cleaning, pull it up as
illustrated *
2 .

. Do not leave glasses in the sun-
glasses holder while parking in
direct sunlight. The heat may da-
mage the glasses.
SIC4742 SIC3589
SUNGLASSES HOLDER (Hardtop
The cup holders are located on the center of
rear seat.
models)
WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed
while driving to prevent an accident.
To open the sunglasses holder, push *

1 .
CAUTION
. Do not use for anything other than
glasses.
SIC3590 SIC3654
Front
GLOVE BOX CONSOLE BOX
Front
WARNING When the lever * A (driver’s seat side) is pulled,
the upper case is available for storing some
Keep glove box lid closed while driving
small items. When the lever * B (front passen-
to help prevent injury in an accident or a
ger’s seat side) is pulled, the bottom case is
sudden stop.
available for storing some larger ones.
To open the glove box, pull the handle *

1 .
To close, push the lid in until the lock latches.

To lock *
2 /unlock * 3 the glove box, use the
mechanical key. For the mechanical key usage,
see “Keys” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section.

SIC3591 SIC3593 SIC3655
Rear Type A
STORAGE BOX (if so equipped)
Rear (Hardtop models) CARGO FLOOR BOX (if so equipped
To open, push the storage box lid *
1 as
To open, push the knob *
1 and pull out *.
2
illustrated.
for Hardtop models)
The inner tray can be removed *
2 as illustrated. Type A
Do not place valuable items in the storage 1. To open the cargo floor box, pull the strap
box. *A .
Do not use the storage box as an ashtray. 2. Remove the strap *

B from the back side of
the board and hang it on the lip of the lift
gate.

cargo floor box.
SIC3656 SIC3594
Type B
LUGGAGE SIDE BOX (Hardtop mod-
Type B els)
To open the cargo floor box, push * A . To close,
To open the luggage side box, pull up the strap.
push the lid until the lock latches.
The net partitions can be removed *
B to make
a larger storage space.
The cargo floor box needs to be removed when
you need a spare tire. (See “Flat tire” in the “6. In
case of emergency” section.)
CAUTION
To avoid damage, do not load more
than 22 lbs (10 kg) of cargo into the

To use the sub cover, hang the straps on the restraint top tether strap is da-
back of the head restraint *
2 .
maged.
To stow the cargo cover, remove it from the — If the cargo cover contacts the
hooks and hold until it is retracted. top tether strap when it is at-
To remove the cargo cover, stow the cover and tached to the top tether anchor,
pull the left side of the holder to the opposite remove the cargo cover from the
side * 3 . vehicle or secure it on the cargo
floor below its attachment loca-
tion. If the cargo cover is not
WARNING removed, it may damage the top
tether strap during a collision.
. Never put anything on the cargo
cover, no matter how small. Any — Do not allow cargo to contact
object on it could cause an injury the top tether strap when it is
in an accident or sudden stop. attached to the top tether an-
chor. Properly secure the cargo
. Close the cargo cover when folding
so it does not contact the top
the rear seat.
tether strap. Cargo that is not
. Do not leave the cargo cover in the properly secured or that con-
vehicle with it disengaged from the tacts the top tether strap may
holder. damage the top tether strap
SIC3595 . Properly secure all cargo with ropes during a collision.
or straps to help prevent it from
CARGO COVER (if so equipped for sliding or shifting. Do not place
Hardtop models) cargo higher than the seatbacks. In
The cargo cover keeps the contents in the cargo a sudden stop or collision, unse-
area hidden from the outside. cured cargo could cause personal
injury.
To use the cargo cover, pull it out and hang both
sides on the hooks *1 . . Your child could be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the child
. Unsecured cargo can become dan-
gerous in an accident or sudden
stop.
CAUTION
Do not apply a total load of more than
22 lb (10 kg) *
A or 7 lb (3 kg) *
B to a
single hook.
SIC4744
LUGGAGE COVER (CrossCabriolet

models)
A luggage cover is used to separate the trunk
and the top storage area.
To use the luggage cover, pull it out and hang
both sides on the hooks *
1 .
SIC3596 To stow the luggage cover, remove it from the
hooks and hold it until it is retracted.
LUGGAGE HOOKS (Hardtop models)
The luggage cover must be pulled out and hung
on hooks * 1 for the soft top to oparate. (See
WARNING “Soft top (CrossCabriolet models)” in the “3.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.)
. Always make sure that the cargo is
properly secured. Use the suitable
ropes and hooks.
information regarding GVWR and GAWR, see
WARNING “Vehicle loading information” in the “9. Technical
and consumer information” section.
. Do not place anything over the
luggage cover during soft top op-
eration.
WARNING
. Do not place or leave objects under . Drive extra carefully when the vehi-
the cover that may push the cover cle is loaded at or near the cargo
up. carrying capacity, especially if the
. Do not place items on sides that significant portion of that load is
intrude into luggage cover area. carried on the roof rack.
. Heavy loading of the roof rack has
SIC3597 the potential to affect the vehicle
stability and handling during sud-
ROOF RACK (if so equipped for Hard- den or unusual handling maneuvers.
top models) . Roof rack load should be evenly
Always distribute the luggage evenly on the roof distributed.
rack. Do not load more than 165 lb (75 kg)
. Do not exceed maximum roof rack
(black) or 220 lb (100 kg) (silver) on the roof
load weight capacity.
rails. Observe the maximum load limit shown on
the crossbars or roof carriers when you attach . Properly secure all cargo with ropes
them on the roof rails. Contact a NISSAN dealer or straps to help prevent it from
for crossbar or other equipment information. Be sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop
careful that your vehicle does not exceed the or collision, unsecured cargo could
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its cause personal injury.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front and
rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on the
F.M.V.S.S. or C.V.M.S.S. certification label (lo-
cated on the driver’s door pillar). For more

WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
CAUTION
Use care when placing or removing WARNING
items from the roof rack. If you cannot
comfortably lift the items onto the roof . Make sure that all passengers have
rack from the ground, use a ladder or their hands, etc. inside the vehicle
stool. while it is in motion and before
closing the windows. Use the win-
dow lock switch to prevent unex-
pected use of the power windows.
. Do not leave children unattended
inside the vehicle. They could un-
SIC3505 knowingly activate switches or con-
trols and become trapped in the
COAT HOOKS (Hardtop models) window. Unattended children could
The coat hooks are equipped beside the rear become involved in serious acci-
personal lights. dents.
The power windows operate when the ignition

CAUTION switch is in the ON position or for about 45
seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to
Do not place items which are more than
the OFF position. If the driver’s or front
2 lb (1 kg) on the hook.
passenger’s door is opened during this period
of about 45 seconds, power to the windows is
canceled.
The power window switches will be deactivated
during soft top operation (CrossCabriolet mod-
els).

Locking passengers’ windows
When the lock button * C is pushed in, only the
driver side window can be opened or closed.
Push it in again to cancel.
SIC3283A SIC3336
1. Driver side window

2. Front passenger side window
Passenger side power window switch
3. Rear left passenger side window The passenger side switch will open or close
4. Rear right passenger side window only the corresponding window. To open or
5. Window lock button close the window, push down or pull up the
switch and hold it.
Main power window switch (driver’s
side)
To open or close the window, push down * A or
pull up * B the switch and hold it. The main
switch (driver side switches) will open or close
all the windows.

Automatic operation Auto reverse function
The automatic function is available for the switch
that has an mark on its surface. WARNING
To fully open or close the window, completely
push down or pull up the switch and release it; it There are some small distances imme-
need not be held. The window will automatically diately before the closed position which
open or close all the way. To stop the window, cannot be detected. Make sure that all
just push or lift the switch in the opposite passengers have their hands, etc., in-
direction. side the vehicle before closing the
A light push or pull on the switch will cause the window.
window to open or close until the switch is
released. If the control unit detects something caught in
SIC3285 The rear window automatic operation is for the the window as it is closing, the window will be
Hardtop models opening function only (CrossCabriolet models). immediately lowered.
The auto reverse function can be activated when
Simultaneous operation of all four win- the window is closed by automatic operation
dows (CrossCabriolet models) when the ignition switch is in the ON position or
for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is
WARNING pushed to the OFF position.
Depending on the environment or driving
Make sure that all passengers have conditions, the auto reverse function may
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle be activated if an impact or load similar to
before closing the windows. something being caught in the window
occurs.
When the driver’s and passenger’s door window
switches (driver’s side) are pushed down or
pulled up simultaneously, all four windows are
SIC4743
opened or closed.

MOONROOF (if so equipped for
Hardtop models)
Automatic window lowering (CrossCab- . When the door is opened, the window
riolet models) lowers for approximately 0.39 in (10 mm). WARNING
When the soft top operating switch is pressed, . While the door is open, the window cannot
the power windows will automatically be low- be raised. . In an accident you could be thrown
ered completely. The windows do not rise from the vehicle through an open
If the windows do not close automatically moonroof. Always use seat belts
automatically after the soft top open/close
operation is completed. Use the power window If the power window automatic function (closing and child restraints.
only) does not operate properly, perform the
switches to raise them. . Do not allow anyone to stand up or
following procedure to initialize the power
extend any portion of their body out
Automatic adjusting function (Cross- window system.
of the moonroof opening while the
Cabriolet models) 1. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. vehicle is in motion or while the
2. Close the door and soft top (CrossCabriolet moonroof is closing.
CAUTION models).
3. Open the window completely by operating
When the battery cable is removed from the power window switch. CAUTION
the battery terminal, do not close either 4. Pull the power window switch and hold it to
of the front doors. The automatic win- close the window, and then hold the switch . Remove water drops, snow, ice or
dow adjusting function will not work more than 3 seconds after the window is sand from the moonroof before
and the side roof panel may be da- closed completely. opening.
maged.
5. Release the power window switch. Operate . Do not place any heavy object on
the window by the automatic function to the moonroof or surrounding area.
The power window has an automatic adjusting
function. When the door is being opened, the
confirm the initialization is complete. . Do not push or pull on the sun-
window is automatically lowered slightly to avoid 6. Perform steps 2 through 5 above for other shade. Doing so can damage the
contact between the window and the top side windows. sunshade.
rail. When the door is closed, the window is If the power window automatic function does
automatically raised slightly. not operate properly after performing the pro-
While the automatic adjusting function does not cedure above, have your vehicle checked by a
work, the window will be controlled as follows: NISSAN dealer.

AUTOMATIC MOONROOF AND SUN- operation, push the moonroof switch to either of
SHADES the OPEN * 1 , CLOSE * 2 or UP * 5 position.
The moonroof and sunshades only operates Tilting moonroof

when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
To tilt up the moonroof, push the moonroof
The automatic moonroof and sunshades are switch to the UP position *
5 .
operational for about 45 seconds, even if the
To tilt down the moonroof, push the switch to the
ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position. If
UP position * 5 or push the switch to the
the driver’s door or the passenger’s door is
CLOSE position * 2 .
opened during this period of about 45 seconds,
power to the moonroof and sunshades is When the moonroof is tilted up, push the
canceled. moonroof switch to the second detent to the
CLOSE position *4 . The moonroof will tilt down
and the sunshades will close.
SIC3801
Auto reverse function
Sliding sunshade and moonroof
When the moonroof switch is pushed to the
OPEN position * 1 , the front and rear sun-
WARNING
shades will fully open. When the switch is
There are some small distances imme-
pushed again, the moonroof will fully open.
diately before the closed position which
When the moonroof switch is pushed to the cannot be detected. Make sure that all
CLOSE position * 2 , the moonroof will auto- passengers have their hands, etc., in-
matically close. Push the switch again, and the side the vehicle before closing the
front and rear sunshades will close. moonroof.
When the moonroof switch is pushed to the
second detent to the OPEN * 3 or CLOSE * 4 If the control unit detects something caught in
position, both the sunshade and moonroof will the moonroof and sunshades when they are
open or close. closing, the moonroof will be immediately
To stop the sunshades or moonroof during the opened.

INTERIOR LIGHTS
The auto reverse function can be activated when 4. Push and hold the switch to the CLOSE
the moonroof and sunshades are closed by position *
2 for 10 seconds.
automatic operation when the ignition switch is 5. The moonroof and sunshades will fully open
in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after and then close.
the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF
6. Check if the moonroof switch operates
position.
normally.
If the moonroof and sunshades cannot be
If the moonroof does not operate properly after
closed automatically when the auto reverse
performing the procedure above, have your
function activates due to a malfunction, push
and hold the switch to the CLOSE position *
2 .
vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to SIC4238
something being caught in the moonroof
occurs. MAP LIGHTS
If the moonroof does not operate Push the button as illustrated to turn the light on
or off.
If the moonroof does not operate properly,
perform the following procedure to initialize the
moonroof operation system.
1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by
pushing the switch to the CLOSE position
* 2 .
2. Push and hold the switch to the CLOSE

position *
2 .
3. Release the moonroof switch after the

moonroof or sunshade moves slightly to
the closed position.

— remain on for about 15 seconds.
. doors are unlocked by pushing the UN-
LOCK button on the Intelligent Key or door
handle request switch with the ignition
switch in the LOCK position
. any door is opened and then closed with the
ignition switch in the LOCK position
. any door is opened with the ignition switch
in the ACC or ON position
— remain on while the door is opened.
SIC3250 SIC4239 When the door is closed, the lights go
off.
PERSONAL LIGHTS (Hardtop models) INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH The lights will also turn off after a period of
Rear The interior light control switch has three time when the lights remain illuminated
positions: ON, DOOR and OFF. after the ignition switch has been pushed
Push the button as illustrated to turn the light on
to the OFF or LOCK position to prevent the
or off. ON position battery from becoming discharged.
When the switch is in the ON position * 1 the
Models with color display:
map lights and rear personal lights will illumi-
nate. When the auto interior illumination is set to the
OFF position (see “Vehicle information and
DOOR position settings” in the “4. Monitor, heater, air condi-
When the switch is in the DOOR position * 2 , tioner, audio, phone and voice recognition
the map lights and rear personal lights will systems” section), the lights will illuminate under
illuminate under the following conditions: the following condition:
. ignition switch is switched to the LOCK . any door is opened with the ignition switch
position in any position

MOOD LIGHTS (Hardtop models) VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS
— remain on while the door is opened.

When the door is closed, the lights go
off.
OFF position
When the switch is in the OFF position *
3 , the
lights will not illuminate, regardless of the
condition.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could SIC3599 SIC2064
result in a discharged battery. Map lights
The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when
The mood lights * A located in the following
the cover on the vanity mirror is opened.
positions will illuminate whenever the headlight
switch is in the or position. When the cover is closed, the light will turn off.
. next to the map lights The lights will turn off after a period of
time when the lights remain illuminated to
. under the instrument panel
prevent the battery from becoming dis-
. under the driver’s power window switch
charged.
The brightness of the mood lights can be
adjusted with the illumination control buttons.
See “Instrument brightness control” earlier in
this section.

TRUNK LIGHT (CrossCabriolet HomeLink® UNIVERSAL
CARGO LIGHTS (Hardtop models)
models) TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides a
opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light convenient way to consolidate the functions of
will turn off. up to three individual hand-held transmitters into
The light will also turn off after a period of one built-in device.
time when the light remains illuminated HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:
after the ignition switch has been pushed . Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)
to the OFF or LOCK position to prevent the devices such as garage doors, gates, home
battery from becoming discharged. and office lighting, entry door locks and
security systems.
. Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No
separate batteries are required. If the
vehicle’s battery is discharged or is dis-
SIC2131A connected, HomeLink® will retain all pro-
gramming.
When the switch is in the ON position * 1 , the When the HomeLink® Universal Transcei-
light illuminates while the lift gate is opened. ver is programmed, retain the original
When the lift gate is closed, the light will turn off. transmitter for future programming proce-
When the switch is in the OFF position *
2 , the dures (Example: new vehicle purchases).
light will turn off. Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed
The lights will turn off after a period of HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons
should be erased for security purposes.
time when the light remain illuminated to
For additional information, refer to “Pro-
prevent the battery from becoming dis-
gramming HomeLink®” later in this sec-
charged.
tion.

contain colorless and odorless car-
WARNING bon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is
dangerous. It can cause uncon-
. Do not use the HomeLink® Universal sciousness or death.
Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and PROGRAMMING HomeLink®
reverse features as required by
If you have any questions or are having difficulty
federal safety standards. (These
programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to
standards became effective for
the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com
opener models manufactured after
or call 1-800-355-3515.
April 1, 1982). A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object in the NOTE:
path of a closing garage door and It is also recommended that a new battery
then automatically stop and reverse, be placed in the hand-held transmitter of JVI0428X
does not meet current federal safety the device being programmed to 2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and
standards. Using a garage door HomeLink® for quicker programming and hold the desired HomeLink® button and
opener without these features in- accurate transmission of the radio-fre- handheld transmitter button. DO NOT re-
creases the risk of serious injury or quency. lease until the HomeLink® indicator light *1
death. 1. Position the end of your hand-held transmit- flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the
. During the programming procedure ter 1-3 in (26-76 mm) away from the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons
your garage door or security gate HomeLink® surface, keeping the HomeLink® may be released. (The rapid flashing indi-
will open and close (if the transmit- indicator light *
1 in view. cates successful programming.)
ter is within range). Make sure that
NOTE:
people or objects are clear of the
Some devices to be programmed may
garage door, gate, etc. that you are
require you to replace Step 2 with the
programming.
cycling procedure noted in the “Pro-
. Your vehicle’s engine should be gramming HomeLink® for Canadian
turned off while programming the customers and gate openers” later in
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. this section.
Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
4. At the receiver located on the garage door PROGRAMMING HomeLink® FOR CA-
opener motor in the garage, locate the NADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE
“learn” or “smart” button (the name and OPENERS
color of the button may vary by manufacturer
Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans-
but it is usually located near where the
mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
seconds of transmission – which may not be
unit). If there is difficulty locating the button,
long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal
reference the garage door opener’s manual.
during programming. Similar to this Canadian
5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
button. “time-out” in the same manner.
NOTE: If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
Once the button is pressed, you have programming a gate operator or garage door
JVI0429X
approximately 30 seconds to initiate opener by using the “Programming HomeLink®”
the next step. procedures, replace “Programming HomeLink®”
3. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® 6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and Step 2 with the following:
button and observe the indicator light. hold the programmed HomeLink® button for NOTE:
. If the indicator light *1 is solid/contin- two seconds and release. Repeat the
uous, programming is complete and your When programming a garage door opener,
“press/hold/release” sequence up to 3
device should activate when the etc., unplug the device during the “cycling”
times to complete the programming pro-
HomeLink® button is pressed and re- process to prevent possible damage to the
cess. HomeLink® should now activate your
leased. garage door opener components.
rolling code equipped device.
. If the indicator light *
1 blinks rapidly for Step 2: Using both hands, simultaneously press
7. If you have any questions or are having
two seconds and then turns to a solid/ and hold the desired HomeLink® button and the
difficulty programming your HomeLink® but-
continuous light, continue with Steps 4-6 hand-held transmitter button. During program-
tons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:
for a rolling code device. A second ming, your hand-held transmitter may automati-
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
person may make the following steps cally stop transmitting. Continue to press and
3515.
easier. Use a ladder or other device. Do hold the desired HomeLink® button while you
not stand on your vehicle to perform the press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held
next steps. transmitter every two seconds until the fre-
quency signal has been learned. The HomeLink®
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly PROGRAMMING TROUBLESHOOT- CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED IN-
after several seconds upon successful program- ING FORMATION
ming. DO NOT release until the HomeLink® If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the The following procedure clears the programmed
indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly. hand-held transmitter information: information from both buttons. Individual buttons
When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both cannot be cleared. However, individual buttons
buttons may be released. The rapid flashing . replace the hand-held transmitter batteries
with new batteries. can be reprogrammed, see “Reprogramming a
indicates successful programming. single HomeLink® button” later in this section.
. position the hand-held transmitter with its
Proceed with “Programming HomeLink®” step 3
battery area facing away from the To clear all programming
to complete.
HomeLink® surface.
Remember to plug the device back in when 1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink®
. press and hold both the HomeLink® and buttons until the indicator light begins to
programming is completed. hand-held transmitter buttons without inter- flash in approximately 10 seconds. Do not
OPERATING THE HomeLink® UNIVER- ruption. hold for longer than 20 seconds.
SAL TRANSCEIVER . position the hand-held transmitter 1-3 in
2. Release both buttons.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after it is (26-76 mm) away from the HomeLink®
programmed, can be used to activate the surface. Hold the transmitter in that position HomeLink® is now in the programming mode
programmed device. To operate, simply press for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink® is not and can be programmed at any time beginning
and release the appropriate programmed programmed within that time, try holding the with “Programming HomeLink®” - Step 1.
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button. The transmitter in another position - keeping the REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
amber indicator light will illuminate while the indicator light in view at all times. HomeLink® BUTTON
signal is being transmitted. If you have any questions or are having difficulty To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Transcei-
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to ver button, complete the following.
the device may also be used at any time. the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink ®
or 1-800-355-3515.
button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20
seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink®
button, proceed with “Programming
HomeLink®” - Step 1.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink®
at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515. NOTE:
®
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver button Changes or modifications not expressly
has now been reprogrammed. The new device approved by the party responsible for
can be activated by pushing the HomeLink® compliance could void the user’s authority
button that was just programmed. This proce- to operate the equipment.
dure will not affect any other programmed For Canada:
HomeLink® buttons. This device complies with RSS-210 of
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the the following two conditions: (1) this
codes of any non-rolling code device that has device may not cause interference, and
been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the (2) this device must accept any interfer-
Owner’s Manual of each device or call the ence, including interference that may
manufacturer or retailer of those devices for cause undesired operation of the device.
additional information.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLink® Univer-
sal Transceiver with your new transmitter
information.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.

MEMO

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys .............................................................................................. 3-3 Auto closure .................................................................... 3-24

Intelligent Key system ......................................................... 3-3 Lift gate release .............................................................. 3-25
Mechanical key .................................................................... 3-4 Trunk lid (CrossCabriolet models) .................................... 3-25
Valet hand-off ....................................................................... 3-5 Trunk lid release switch ................................................ 3-25
Doors ............................................................................................ 3-5 Trunk open request switch .......................................... 3-26
Locking with mechanical key ............................................ 3-5 Trunk button .................................................................... 3-26
Opening and closing windows with the Opening with key ........................................................... 3-26
mechanical key ..................................................................... 3-6 Trunk release power cancel switch ........................... 3-26
Locking with inside lock knob .......................................... 3-6 Interior trunk lid release ................................................ 3-27
Locking with power door lock switch ............................ 3-7 Soft top (CrossCabriolet models) .................................... 3-28
Automatic door locks ......................................................... 3-7 Before operating the top .............................................. 3-28
Child safety rear door lock (Hardtop models) ............. 3-8 When operating the top ............................................... 3-32
Intelligent Key system .............................................................. 3-8 Luggage cover ................................................................ 3-33
Intelligent Key operating range ..................................... 3-10 Soft top indicator light .................................................. 3-33
Door locks/unlocks precaution ..................................... 3-10 Automatic window lowering ........................................ 3-34
Intelligent Key operation ................................................. 3-11 Opening the top ............................................................. 3-34
Battery saver system ....................................................... 3-14 Closing the top ............................................................... 3-35
Warning signals ................................................................ 3-14 Opening the top using the Intelligent Key ............... 3-35
Troubleshooting guide ..................................................... 3-15 Troubleshooting guide .................................................. 3-37
Remote keyless entry system ............................................. 3-16 If the top does not open or close electrically ......... 3-38
How to use remote keyless entry system .................. 3-17 Care of the soft top and the vehicle body .............. 3-43
Hood .......................................................................................... 3-20 Fuel-filler door ........................................................................ 3-44
Lift gate (Hardtop models) .................................................. 3-20 Opening fuel-filler door ................................................ 3-44
Operating manual lift gate ............................................. 3-21 Fuel-filler cap .................................................................. 3-44
Operating power lift gate (if so equipped) ............... 3-21
Tilt/telescopic steering .......................................................... 3-46 Mirrors ...................................................................................... 3-48
Manual operation .............................................................. 3-46 Inside mirror ..................................................................... 3-48
Electric operation ............................................................. 3-47 Outside mirrors ............................................................... 3-49
Sun visors ................................................................................ 3-47 Vanity mirror ..................................................................... 3-51
Hardtop models ................................................................ 3-47 Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) ................... 3-51
CrossCabriolet models ................................................... 3-48 Entry/exit function (for Hardtop models) ................. 3-51
Memory storage .............................................................. 3-52
System operation ........................................................... 3-53
KEYS
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep it in a safe
place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If
you lose your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for
duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN
does not record any key numbers so it is very
important to keep track of your key number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you have
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate
from. If you still have a key, this key can be
duplicated by a NISSAN dealer.
SPA2406 SPA2865
Type A Type C
1. Intelligent Key (2)
2. Mechanical key (inside the key) (2)
3. Key number plate (1)
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
Your vehicle can only be driven with the
Intelligent Keys which are registered to your
vehicle’s Intelligent Key system components and
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System compo-
nents. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be
registered and used with one vehicle. The new
keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer
prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your
SPA2431 vehicle. Since the registration process requires
Type B erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key compo-
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
nents when registering new keys, be sure to take — Do not change or modify the
all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN Intelligent Key.
dealer.
— Do not use a magnet key holder.
— Do not place the Intelligent Key
CAUTION near an electric appliance such
as a television set, personal
. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
computer or cellular phone.
with you when driving. The Intelli-
gent Key is a precision device with a — Do not allow the Intelligent Key
built-in transmitter. To avoid dama- to come into contact with water
ging it, please note the following. or salt water, and do not wash it
— The Intelligent Key is water in a washing machine. This
resistant; however, wetting may could affect the system function. SPA2033
damage the Intelligent Key. If . If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,
the Intelligent Key gets wet, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID MECHANICAL KEY
immediately wipe until it is com- code of that Intelligent Key. This will To remove the mechanical key, release the lock
pletely dry. prevent the Intelligent Key from knob at the back of the key.
— Do not bend, drop or strike it unauthorized use to unlock the To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into
against another object. vehicle. For information regarding the key until the lock knob returns to the lock
the erasing procedure, please con- position.
— If the outside temperature is tact a NISSAN dealer.
below 148F (−108C), the battery Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the
of the Intelligent Key may not doors and glove box, if they are equipped with a
function properly. key cylinder.
See “Doors” later in this section and “Storage”
— Do not place the Intelligent Key
in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.
for an extended period in a
place where temperatures ex-
ceed 1408F (608C).
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

DOORS
CAUTION WARNING
Always carry the mechanical key in- . Always have the doors locked while
stalled in the key. driving. Along with the use of seat
belts, this provides greater safety in
VALET HAND-OFF the event of an accident by helping
When you have to leave a key with a valet, give to prevent persons from being
them the Intelligent Key itself after removing the thrown from the vehicle. This also
mechanical key to protect your belongings. helps keep children and others from
unintentionally opening the doors,
To prevent the glove box or the trunk (Cross- and will help keep out intruders.
Cabriolet models) from being opened during
valet hand-off, follow the procedures below. . Before opening any door, always
SPA2432
look for and avoid oncoming traffic.
1. Push the trunk release power cancel switch
. Do not leave children unattended LOCKING WITH MECHANICAL KEY
to the OFF side (CrossCabriolet models).
inside the vehicle. They could un- The power door lock system allows you to lock
2. Remove the mechanical key from the In- knowingly activate switches or con- or unlock all doors simultaneously using the
telligent Key. trols. Unattended children could mechanical key.
3. Lock the glove box with the mechanical key. become involved in serious acci-
dents. Hardtop models
4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet, keeping
the mechanical key in your pocket or bag. . Turning the driver’s door key cylinder to the
Insert the mechanical key into the Intelligent front of the vehicle *1 will lock all doors.
Key when you retrieve your vehicle. . Turning the driver’s door key cylinder once
to the rear of the vehicle *2 will unlock the
See glove box and “Storage” in the “2. Instru-
driver’s door. After returning the key to the
ments and controls” section and “Trunk lid
neutral position * 3 , turning it to the rear
(CrossCabriolet models)” later in this section.
again within 5 seconds will unlock all doors.

Crosscabriolet models key. (See “Remote keyless entry system” later in
. Turning the driver’s door key cylinder to the this section.)
rear of the vehicle * 2 will lock all doors. To close the windows, turn the driver’s door key
. Turning the driver’s door key cylinder once cylinder to lock for longer than 1 second. The
to the front of the vehicle *1 will unlock the door is locked and the window keeps closing
driver’s door. After returning the key to the while turning the key.
neutral position * 3 , turning it to the front
again within 5 seconds will unlock all doors.
Models with color display:
You can switch the lock system to the mode that
allows you to open all the doors when the key is
turned once. (See “How to use SETTING
button” in the “4. Monitor, heater, air conditioner, SPA2465
audio, phone and voice recognition systems”
section.) LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB
OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS To lock the door individually, move the inside
WITH THE MECHANICAL KEY lock knob to the lock position *
1 then close the
door.
The driver’s door key operation also allows you
to open and close the window that is equipped To unlock, move the inside lock knob to the
with the automatic open/close function. (See unlock position *
2 .
“Power windows” in the “2. Instruments and When locking the door without Intelligent
controls” section). Key, be sure not to leave the Intelligent
To open the windows, turn the driver’s door key Key inside the vehicle.
cylinder to unlock for longer than 1 second.
The door is unlocked and the window keeps
opening while turning the key.
This function can also be performed by pushing
and holding the door UNLOCK button of the
switch to the unlock position *
2 . 3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2,
push and hold the power door lock switch to
Lockout protection the position (UNLOCK) for more than 5
When the power door lock switch (driver or front seconds.
passenger) is moved to the lock position with
4. When activated, the hazard indicator will
the Intelligent Key in the port and any door open,
flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard
all doors will lock and unlock automatically. With
indicator will flash once.
the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle (not in the
Intelligent Key port) and any door open, all doors 5. The ignition switch must be placed in the
will unlock automatically and a chime will sound OFF and ON position again between each
after the door is closed. setting change.
These functions help to prevent the Intelligent When the automatic door unlock system is
Key from being accidentally locked inside the deactivated, the doors do not unlock when the
SPA2300 vehicle. ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. To
unlock the door manually, use the inside lock
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS knob or the power door lock switch (driver’s or
SWITCH . All doors will be locked automatically when front passenger’s side).
Operating the power door lock switch will lock the vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH (24
or unlock all the doors. The switches are located km/h).
on the driver’s and front passenger’s door . All doors will be unlocked automatically
armrests. when the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position.
To lock the doors, push the power door lock
switch to the lock position *
1 with the driver’s The automatic unlock function can be
or front passenger’s door open, then close the deactivated or activated. To deactivate or
door. activate the automatic door unlock system,
perform the following procedure:
When locking the door this way, be certain
not to leave the Intelligent Key inside the 1. Close all doors.
vehicle. 2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
To unlock the doors, push the power door lock

WARNING CAUTION
. Radio waves could adversely affect . Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
electric medical equipment. Those with you when operating the vehi-
who use a pacemaker should con- cle.
tact the electric medical equipment . Never leave the Intelligent Key in
manufacturer for the possible influ- the vehicle when you leave the
ences before use. vehicle.
. The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are The Intelligent Key is always communicating with
pushed. The FAA advises that radio the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The
waves may affect aircraft navigation Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio
SPA2433
and communication systems. Do not waves. Environmental conditions may interfere
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK operate the Intelligent Key while on with the operation of the Intelligent Key system
(Hardtop models) an airplane. Make sure the buttons under the following operating conditions.
are not operated unintentionally . When operating near a location where
The child safety rear door locks help prevent
when the unit is stored for a flight. strong radio waves are transmitted, such
doors from being opened accidentally, espe-
cially when small children are in the vehicle. as a TV tower, power station and broad-
The Intelligent Key system can operate all the casting station.
When the levers are in the lock position door (including the lift gate) and the trunk lid .
*1 , the rear doors can be opened only
locks using the remote keyless function or
When in possession of wireless equipment,
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,
from the outside. pushing the request switch on the vehicle and CB radio.
To disengage, move the levers to the unlock without taking the key out from a pocket or
. When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or
position *
2 . purse. The operating environment and/or condi-
covered by metallic materials.
tions may affect the Intelligent Key system
operation. . When any type of radio wave remote control
is used nearby.
Be sure to read the following before using the
. When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
Intelligent Key system.
electric appliance such as a personal
computer. Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer. . Do not place the Intelligent Key near
. When the vehicle is parked near a parking equipment that produces a mag-
meter. netic field, such as a TV, audio
In such cases, correct the operating conditions
CAUTION
equipment, personal computer or
before using the Intelligent Key function or use cellular phone.
. Do not allow the Intelligent Key,
the mechanical key.
which contains electrical compo-
Although the life of the battery varies depending nents, to come into contact with If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is water or salt water. This could affect recommends erasing the ID code of that
approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis- the system function. Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent
charged, replace it with a new one. the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to
. Do not drop the Intelligent Key. operate the vehicle. For information regarding
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost
. Do not strike the Intelligent Key the erasing procedure, contact a NISSAN deal-
discharged, insert the Intelligent Key into the
sharply against another object. er.
Intelligent Key port to start the engine. Replace
the discharged battery with a new one as soon . Do not change or modify the Intel- The Intelligent Key function can be disabled. For
as possible. For more details, see “Push-button ligent Key. information about disabling the Intelligent Key
ignition switch” in the “5. Starting and driving” . Wetting may damage the Intelligent function, contact a NISSAN dealer.
section. Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet,
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiv- immediately wipe until it is comple-
ing radio waves, if the key is left near equipment tely dry.
which transmits strong radio waves, such as . If the outside temperature is below
signals from a TV and personal computer, the 148F (−108C), the battery of the
battery life may become shorter. Intelligent Key may not function
For information regarding replacement of a properly.
battery, see “Intelligent Key battery replacement” . Do not place the Intelligent Key for
in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” an extended period in an area where
section. temperatures exceed 1408F (608C).
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered . Do not attach the Intelligent Key
and used with one vehicle. For information about with a key holder that contains a
the purchase and use of additional Intelligent magnet.
SPA2074 SPA2407
INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING switches may not function. DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAU-
RANGE When the Intelligent Key is within the operating TION
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used range, it is possible for anyone who does not . Do not push the door handle request switch
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified carry the Intelligent Key to push the request with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as
operating range from the request switch * 1 . switch to lock/unlock the doors including the lift illustrated. The close distance to the door
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or gate and open the trunk lid. handle will cause the Intelligent Key system
strong radio waves are present near the operat- to have difficulty recognizing that the In-
ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat- telligent Key is outside the vehicle.
ing range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent . After locking with the door handle request
Key may not function properly. switch, verify the doors are securely locked
by testing them.
The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)
from each request switch * 1 . . When locking the doors using the door
handle request switch, make sure to have
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door the Intelligent Key in your possession before
glass, handle or rear bumper the request operating the door handle request switch to
prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in
the vehicle.
. The door handle request switch is opera-
tional only when the Intelligent Key has been
detected by the Intelligent Key system.
. To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left
inside the vehicle or the trunk, make sure you
carry the key with you and then lock the
doors or the trunk.
. Do not pull the door handle before pushing
the door handle request switch. The door
will be unlocked but will not open. Release
the door handle once and pull it again to
SPA2408 SPA2779
open the door.
. The Intelligent Key system (opening/closing INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION
doors with the door handle request switch) You can lock or unlock the doors without taking
can be set to remain inactive on the center the key out from your pocket or bag.
display (if so equipped). (See “Vehicle
information and settings” in the “4. Monitor,
heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and
voice recognition systems” section.)
SPA2780
Hardtop models

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you request switch with the Intelligent Key inside the are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put
can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door vehicle. inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;
handle request switch * A (driver’s or front However, when an Intelligent Key is inside the the lock will automatically unlock and the door
passenger’s) or the lift gate request switch * B vehicle, doors can be locked with another buzzer sounds.
registered Intelligent Key.
within the range of operation. NOTE:
When you lock or unlock the doors or the lift The doors may not lock when the Intelli-
gate/trunk lid, the hazard indicator will flash and CAUTION gent Key is in the same hand that is
the horn (or the outside chime) will sound as a operating the request switch to lock the
confirmation. For details, see “Setting hazard . After locking the doors using the door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse,
indicator and horn mode” later in this section. request switch, make sure that the pocket or your other hand.
doors have been securely locked by
Locking doors operating the door handles.
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position, . When locking the doors using the
CAUTION
push the ignition switch to the OFF position request switch, make sure to have
and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key The lockout protection may not function
the Intelligent Key in your posses-
with you.*1 under the following conditions:
sion before operating the request
2. Close all the doors and the lift gate.*2 switch to prevent the Intelligent Key . When the Intelligent Key is placed
3. Push the door handle request switch *A or from being left in the vehicle. on top of the instrument panel.
lift gate request switch * B while carrying . The request switch is operational . When the Intelligent Key is placed
the Intelligent Key with you.*3 only when the Intelligent Key has inside the glove box or a storage
4. All the doors and the lift gate will lock. been detected by the Intelligent Key bin.
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the
system. . When the Intelligent Key is placed
outside chime sounds twice. inside the door pockets.
*1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key while the Lockout protection: . When the Intelligent Key is placed
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. To prevent the Intelligent Key from being on or under the spare tire area.
*2: Doors will not lock by pushing the door handle accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout . When the Intelligent Key is placed
request switch while any door (including the lift protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key on the outer side of trunk area.
gate) is open. system.
*3: Doors will not lock by pushing the door handle
When the driver’s side door is open, the doors
. When the Intelligent Key is placed button on the Intelligent Key is pushed, all
inside or near metallic materials. doors will be locked automatically after another
1 minute.
Unlocking doors Power lift gate open (if so equipped)

1. Push the door handle request switch * A or 1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
the lift gate request switch * B once while 2. Push the power lift gate opener switch *
C .
carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
3. The lift gate will unlock and automatically
2. The hazard indicator flashes once and the open.
outside chime sounds once. The corre-
4. The hazard indicator flashes 4 times and the
sponding door or the lift gate will unlock.
outside chime sounds.
3. Push the request switch again within 1
To close the lift gate, push the power lift gate
minute.
button on the key, or power lift gate switch on SPA2866
4. The hazard indicator flashes once and the the instrument panel or lower part of the lift gate. CrossCabriolet models
outside chime sounds once again. All the (See “Lift gate (Hardtop models)” in the “3. Pre-
doors and the lift gate will unlock.
Opening trunk lid (CrossCabriolet mod-
driving checks and adjustments” section.)
els)
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 1 1. Push the trunk open request switch *
D for
minute after pushing the request switch while more than 1 second.
the doors are locked. If during this 1-minute time 2. The trunk will unlatch. An outside chime will
period, the request switch is pushed, all doors sound four times.
will be locked automatically after another 1 3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.
minute.
Lockout protection:
. Opening any door (including the lift gate)
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being
. Pushing the ignition switch accidentally locked in the trunk, lockout protec-
. Inserting the Intelligent Key into the Intelli- tion is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.
gent Key port
When the trunk lid is closed with the Intelligent
During this 1-minute time period, if the UNLOCK Key inside the trunk, the outside buzzer will
sound and the trunk will open.
BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM
When all the following conditions are met for a
period of time, the battery saver system will cut
off the power supply to prevent battery dis-
charge.
. The ignition switch is in the ACC position,
and
. All doors are closed, and
. The shift lever is in the P (Park) position.
WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving
unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the
Intelligent Key listed on the following chart or
to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen,
chime or beep sounds inside and outside the
vehicle and a warning displays in the dot matrix
liquid crystal display.
When a chime or beep sounds or the warning
displays, be sure to check the vehicle and
Intelligent Key.
See “Troubleshooting guide” later in this section
and “Dot matrix liquid crystal display” in the “2.
Instruments and controls” section.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom Possible cause Action to take
The SHIFT P warning appears on the display
When pushing the ignition switch The shift lever is not in the P (Park)
and the inside warning chime sounds con- Shift the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
to stop the engine position.
tinuously.
When shifting the shift lever to the The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-
The inside warning chime sounds continuously.
P (Park) position. position. tion.
The ignition switch is in the ACC Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-
When opening the driver’s door position. tion.
The inside warning chime sounds continuously.
to get out of the vehicle The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelli-
Key port. gent Key port.
The NO KEY warning appears on the display,
the outside chime sounds 3 times and the The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-
inside warning chime sounds for a few position. tion.
When closing the door after get- seconds.
ting out of the vehicle
The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position
The SHIFT P warning appears on the display
position and the shift lever is not in the P and push the ignition switch to the OFF
and the outside chime sounds continuously.
(Park) position. position.
When closing the door with the The outside chime sounds for a few seconds The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
inside lock knob turned to LOCK and all the doors unlock. or cargo/trunk room area.
When pushing the request switch The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
or the LOCK button on the The outside chime sounds for a few seconds. or cargo/trunk room area.
Intelligent Key to lock the door A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.
When closing the trunk lid The outside chime sounds for approximately 10 Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.
(CrossCabriolet models) seconds and the trunk lid opens.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
when:
WARNING . the distance between the Intelligent Key and
the vehicle is over 33 ft (10 m).
The Intelligent Key transmits radio . the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.
waves when the buttons are pushed. After locking with the remote keyless entry
The FAA advises that radio waves may function, pull the door handle to make sure the
affect aircraft navigation and commu- doors are securely locked.
nication systems. Do not operate the The LOCK/UNLOCK operating range varies
Intelligent Key while on an airplane. depending on the environment. To securely
Make sure the buttons are not operated operate the lock and unlock buttons, approach
unintentionally when the unit is stored the vehicle to about 3 ft (1 m) from the door.
for a flight.
SPA2252A
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors and the lift Type A
gate/trunk lid, activate the panic alarm and open
the windows and lift gate/trunk lid (if so
equipped) by pushing the buttons on the
Intelligent Key from outside the vehicle.
Before locking the doors, make sure the
Intelligent Key is not left in the vehicle.
The LOCK/UNLOCK button on the Intelligent
Key can operate at a distance of approximately
33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. (The effective
distance depends upon the conditions around
the vehicle.) As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can
be used with one vehicle. For information
concerning the purchase and use of additional
Intelligent Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer. SPA2436
The lock and unlock buttons will not operate Type B

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS 4. The hazard indicator flashes once again. All
ENTRY SYSTEM the doors and the lift gate will unlock.
When you lock or unlock the doors or the lift All doors will be locked automatically unless one
gate/trunk lid, the hazard indicator will flash and of the following operations is performed within 1
the horn (or the outside chime) will sound as a minute after pushing the UNLOCK button
confirmation. For details, see “Setting hazard * 2 while the doors are locked. If during this 1-
indicator and horn mode” later in this section. minute time period, the UNLOCK button *2
is pushed, all doors will be locked automatically
Locking doors after another 1 minute.
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position . Opening any door (including the lift gate) or
and push the ignition switch to the OFF trunk
position. Make sure you carry the Intelligent
. Pushing the ignition switch
Key with you.*
SPA2867
2. Close all the doors and lift gate. Opening windows
button *
Type C
*
1 LOCK button 3. Push the LOCK button *
1 . The UNLOCK 2 operation also
*
2 UNLOCK button 4. All the doors and the lift gate will lock.
allows you to open the window that is equipped
with the automatic open/close function. (See
*
3 Power lift gate button (if so equipped) 5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the “Power windows” in the “2. Instruments and
*
4 PANIC button horn chirps once. controls” section).
*
5 TRUNK button (CrossCabriolet models)
*: Doors will lock while the ignition switch is in the
To open the windows, push the door UNLOCK
button *
ACC or ON position.
2 for about 3 seconds after the
Unlocking doors door is unlocked.
1. Push the UNLOCK button *
2 once. To stop opening, release the UNLOCK
2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The button *
2 .
driver’s door will unlock. Windows cannot be closed using the button on
3. Push the UNLOCK button *
2 again the Intelligent Key.
within 1 minute. If the window open operation is stopped in mid-
operation while pushing the UNLOCK
button * 2 , release and push the UNLOCK
button *
2 again until the window opens Using panic alarm Setting hazard indicator and horn mode
completely. If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn
The door windows can be opened or closed by you can activate the alarm according to the mode when you first receive the vehicle.
turning the mechanical key in a door lock. (See following procedure to call attention. In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the
“Doors” earlier in this section.) 1. Push the PANIC button *
4 for more LOCK button *1 is pushed, the hazard
Opening/closing lift gate (if so equipped) than 1 second. indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.
When the UNLOCK button *2 is pushed,
1. Push the power lift gate button *
3 2. The theft warning alarm will sound and the
the hazard indicator flashes once.
for more than 1 second. headlights will flash for 25 seconds.
3. The panic alarm stops under either of the If horns are not necessary, the system can be
2. The lift gate will automatically open.
following conditions. switched to the hazard indicator mode.
The hazard indicator flashes 4 times and the
. It has run for 25 seconds, or In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK
outside chime sounds for approximately 3
. Any of the buttons is pushed. (Note: the button * 1 is pushed, the hazard indicator
seconds.
PANIC button * 4 should be flashes twice. When the UNLOCK button
To close the lift gate, push the power lift gate pushed for more than 1 second.) * 2 is pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor
button * 3 . the horn operates.
The lift gate will automatically close. Opening trunk lid (CrossCabriolet mod-
els)
If the power lift gate button * is pushed
3
while the lift gate is being opened or closed, the 1. Push the TRUNK button *5 on the
lift gate will reverse. Intelligent Key for more than 1 second.
The power lift gate button *3 cannot be 2. The trunk will unlatch.
operated when the ignition switch is in the ON 3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.
position.

Hazard indicator and horn mode: Switching procedure:
Push the LOCK *1 and UNLOCK *2
DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK TRUNK UNLOCK buttons simultaneously for more than 2 seconds
Intelligent Key system HAZARD - twice HAZARD - once HAZARD - none to switch the mode from one to the other.
(Using door handle or lift gate/ OUTSIDE CHIME - OUTSIDE CHIME - OUTSIDE CHIME - 4
When pushing the buttons to set the hazard
trunk request switch) twice once times
indicator mode, the hazard indicator flashes 3
Remote keyless entry sys-
HAZARD - twice HAZARD - once HAZARD - none times.
tem HORN - none
HORN - once HORN - none
(Using , or button) When pushing the buttons to set the hazard
indicator and horn mode, the hazard indicator
Hazard indicator mode: flashes once and the horn chirps once.
DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK TRUNK UNLOCK
Intelligent Key system HAZARD - twice HAZARD - none HAZARD - none
(Using door handle or lift gate/ OUTSIDE CHIME - OUTSIDE CHIME - OUTSIDE CHIME -
trunk request switch) none none none
Remote keyless entry sys-
HAZARD - twice HAZARD - none HAZARD - none
tem HORN - none
HORN - none HORN - none
(Using , or button)

HOOD LIFT GATE (Hardtop models)
WARNING
. Always be sure the lift gate has
been closed securely to prevent it
from opening while driving.
. Do not drive with the lift gate open.
This could allow dangerous exhaust
gases to be drawn into the vehicle.
See “Exhaust gas (carbon monox-
ide)” in the “5. Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
SPA2437 . Do not leave children unattended
inside the vehicle. They could un-
1. Pull the hood lock release handle * 1 knowingly activate switches or con-
located below the instrument panel; the hood to fly open and result in an
accident. trols. Unattended children could
hood will then spring up slightly. become involved in serious acci-
.
2. Pull the lever *
2 up at the front of the hood
If you see steam or smoke coming dents.
from the engine compartment, to
with your fingertips and raise the hood.
avoid injury do not open the hood. . Always be sure that hands and feet
3. When closing the hood, slowly close the are clear of the door frame to avoid
hood down and make sure it locks into injury while closing the lift gate.
place.
WARNING
. Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving.
Failure to do so could cause the
the vehicle twice.
To close the lift gate, pull down until it securely
locks.
OPERATING POWER LIFT GATE (if so
equipped)
To operate the power lift gate, the shift lever
must be in the P (Park) position.
The power lift gate will not operate if the battery
voltage is low.
SPA2438 SPA2461
OPERATING MANUAL LIFT GATE Power lift gate main switch

To open the lift gate, unlock it and push the The power lift gate operation can be turned on
opener switch *A . Pull up the lift gate to open. or off by the power lift gate main switch on the
The lift gate can be unlocked by: instrument panel.
. pushing the unlock button on the When the power lift gate main switch is pushed
Intelligent Key twice. to the “OFF” position, the power operation is not
. pushing the lift gate request switch (if so available by the power lift gate switch on the lift
equipped). gate and lift gate opener switch.
. pushing the door handle request switch
twice (if so equipped).
. pushing the power door lock switch to the
unlock position.
. inserting the mechanical key into the driver’s
door key cylinder and turning it to the rear of

Power open
When the lift gate is fully closed, the lift gate will
fully open automatically by:
. pushing the power lift gate switch * A on
the instrument panel
. pushing the lift gate opener switch * B
. pushing the power lift gate button * C on
the Intelligent Key for more than 1 second
The hazard flashes 4 times and the outside
chime sounds when the lift gate starts opening.
NOTE:
SPA2439 SPA2463
The lift gate can be opened by the power
lift gate switch *
A or the lift gate button
*C even if the lift gate is locked.
The lift gate will individually unlock and
open. Once the lift gate is closed, its lock
will align to the vehicle’s lock or unlock
status.
Power close
When the lift gate is fully opened, the lift gate
will fully close automatically by:
. pushing the power lift gate switch * A on
the instrument panel
. pushing the power lift gate switch * D on
the lower part of the lift gate
SPA2462 SPA2440 . pushing the lift gate release button *C on
the Intelligent Key for more than 1 second

The hazard flashes 4 times and the outside mode. pushed during power open or close, the power
chime sounds when the lift gate starts closing. A pinch sensor is mounted on each side of the operation will be canceled and the lift gate can
lift gate. If an obstacle is detected by the pinch be operated manually.
Reverse function
sensor during power close, the lift gate will
The power lift gate will reverse immediately if
reverse and return to the full open position
one of the following actions is performed during
immediately.
power open or power close.
NOTE:
. pushing the power lift gate switch *
A on
the instrument panel If the pinch sensor is damaged or removed,
. pushing the lift gate switch *
D on the lower
the power close function will not operate.
part of the lift gate
. pushing the lift gate button *
C on WARNING
the Intelligent Key.
The outside chime sounds when the lift gate There is a small distance immediately
starts to reverse. before the closed position that cannot
be detected. Make sure that all passen-
The power lift gate button * C on the
gers keep their hands, etc., clear from
Intelligent Key cannot be operated when the the lift gate opening before closing the
ignition switch is in the ON position. lift gate.
Auto reverse function
The auto-reverse function enables the lift gate to Manual mode
automatically reverse when something is caught If power operation is not available, the lift gate
in the lift gate as it is opening or closing. When can be operated manually. Power operation may
the control unit detects an obstacle, the lift gate not be available if multiple obstacles have been
will reverse and return to the full open or full detected in a single power cycle or if the battery
close position. voltage is low. When the power lift gate main
If a second obstacle is detected, the lift gate switch is in the OFF position, the lift gate can be
motion will stop and the drive motor will opened manually by pushing the lift gate opener
disengage. The lift gate will enter the manual switch. If the power lift gate opener switch is

CAUTION CAUTION
. If the power lift gate does not stay . The lift gate will automatically close
open or if the lift gate unexpectedly from a partly open position. To avoid
closes at any time, do not operate pinching, keep hands and fingers
the lift gate. There may be a pres- away from lift gate opening.
sure loss in one or both of the lift . Do not let children operate the lift
gate gas stays. Have the lift gate gate.
inspected by a NISSAN dealer.
. Do not activate the power lift gate if
one or both of the lift gate gas stays
are removed. Damage to the lift
SPA2464
gate or power lift gate mechanisms
may occur.
Safe Mode
If the gas stays of the lift gate *
1 lose pressure,
AUTO CLOSURE
the power lift gate safe mode is activated. When
the safe mode is activated, the lift gate If the lift gate is pulled down to a partly open
intermittently closes. Then the lift gate will be position, the lift gate will pull itself to the closed
pulled to the closed and latched position by a position.
motor. Do not apply excessive force when the
The power lift gate cannot be opened using the auto closure is operating. Excessive force
switches at any time in the safe mode. applied may cause the mechanism to
malfunction.
Do not operate the lift gate again until it is
checked by a NISSAN dealer.

TRUNK LID (CrossCabriolet models)
WARNING
. Do not drive with the trunk lid open.
This could allow dangerous exhaust
gases to be drawn into the vehicle.
See “Exhaust gas (carbon monox-
ide)” in the “5. Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
. Closely supervise children when
they are around cars to prevent
them from playing and becoming
locked in the trunk where they could
SPA1915 SPA2868
be seriously injured. Keep the car
LIFT GATE RELEASE locked, with the trunk closed, when TRUNK LID RELEASE SWITCH
If the lift gate cannot be opened due to a not in use, and prevent children’s
access to Intelligent Keys.
The trunk lid release switch *
A is located on
discharged battery, follow these steps. the instrument panel.
1. Remove the cover inside of the lift gate with To open the trunk lid, push the release switch
a suitable tool. down as illustrated. To close, push the trunk lid
2. Move the lever toward the direction *
A as down.
illustrated to open the lift gate.
Have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.

SPA2866-A SPA2871 SPA2869
TRUNK OPEN REQUEST SWITCH OPENING WITH KEY TRUNK RELEASE POWER CANCEL
The trunk lid can be opened by pushing the To open the trunk lid, insert the mechanical key SWITCH
trunk open request switch * A when the to the trunk key cylinder and turn the key to the When the switch located inside the glove box is
Intelligent Key is within the operating range of right side of the vehicle. To close, remove the in the OFF position * A , the power to the trunk
the trunk lock/unlock function regardless of the key and push the trunk lid down. lid will be canceled and the trunk lid cannot be
inside lock knob position. (See “Intelligent Key opened by the trunk lid release switch, the trunk
system” earlier in this section.) open request switch with the Intelligent Key
TRUNK BUTTON carried with you or the TRUNK button on the
Intelligent Key.
The trunk lid can be opened by pushing the
TRUNK button on the Intelligent Key for When you have to leave the vehicle with a valet
more than 1 second. and want to keep your belongings safe in the
glove box and the trunk, push this switch to OFF
and lock the glove box with the mechanical key.
Then leave the vehicle and the Intelligent Key
with the valet and keep the mechanical key with
you. become locked inside the trunk or in the event of
See “Keys” earlier in this section. the loss of electrical power such as a dis-
charged battery.
To connect the power to the trunk lid, push the
switch to the ON *
B position. Releasing inside the trunk
To open the trunk lid from the inside, pull the
release handle * 1 until the lock releases and
push up on the trunk lid. The release lever is
made of a material that glows in the dark after a
brief exposure to ambient light.
The handle is located on the back of the trunk lid
as illustrated.
SPA2870
INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE
WARNING
Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously
injured. Keep the car locked, with the
trunk lid securely latched, when not in
use, and prevent children’s access to
Intelligent Keys.
The interior trunk lid release mechanism allows

opening of the trunk lid in the event that people
SOFT TOP (CrossCabriolet models)
BEFORE OPERATING THE TOP

The soft top of this vehicle is electrically
operated. You can fully open or close the top
only by pressing the operating switch located on
the center console.
Only operate the soft top operating switch under
all of the following conditions:
. When the trunk is closed.
. When the vehicle is stopped.
. When the engine is running or when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
. When the luggage cover is pulled out and
SPA2872 hooked so that the roof storage area is
Interior/exterior view separated from the trunk.
1. Soft top indicator light (on the combination (See “Luggage cover (CrossCabriolet mod-
meter)
els)” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
2. Soft top operating switch
section.)
3. Top lock hole
. When the shift lever is in a position other
4. Soft top
than the R (Reverse) position.
5. Rear parcel shelf
6. Skylight glass
7. Rear window CAUTION
8. Top storage lid
9. Trunk lid Always keep the engine running while
operating the soft top. The top will also
operate when the ignition switch is in
the ON position, but run the engine to
prevent a discharged battery.

Be sure to follow the operating instructions, and top.
all the warnings and cautions in this section.
. Do not allow anyone to stand up or
Improper operation of the top could cause extend any portion of their body out
a system malfunction, damage, or dete- of the opening while the vehicle is in
rioration of the top material and related motion or while the top is being
parts. operated.
. In an accident you could be thrown
from the vehicle with an open top.
Always use seat belts and proper
child restraints.
SPA2873
WARNING
. Do not operate the top when there
is not enough clearance behind the
vehicle. Someone could become
trapped between the top storage
lid and another object (for example
a wall) which could result in serious
injury.
. Park the vehicle in a safe and level
place and apply the parking brake.
. Do not operate the top in a strong
wind. It could be blown by the wind,
striking someone or damaging the
CAUTION
. Make sure the parking area is clear
of obstacles and there is enough
clearance over the top (for example,
in a garage or a covered area). More
than approximately 10 ft (3 m) from
the ground * A , more than approxi-
mately 5.5 ft (1.7 m) from the top of
the roof *B and more than approxi-
mately 4.9 ft (1.5 m) from the rear of
the vehicle * C is required to open
or close the top safely. Otherwise,
the top may damage any objects
above it while moving. The top
operating system could also be
damaged.
JVP0094X

CAUTION
. Do not operate the top when the
temperature is below 328F (08C).
This may result in damage to the
top material or operating system.
. Remove water drops, snow, ice or
sand from the top, and dry the
surface of the top completely before
opening it.
. Do not open the top when it is wet
JVP0045X or damp. This may cause interior SPA2691
water damage, stains or mildew on
the top material.
WARNING . Be sure to turn off the rear window CAUTION
defroster switch. Never turn it on
. Never install a cover or film (for while the top is being operated or . Do not place any objects between
example window tint) on the sky- fully opened. The heat may damage the top cloth and the structure.
light glass. This may cause the dual the top material. Doing so could interfere with top
pop-up roll bars to operate impro- operation and cause damage to the
perly and could result in serious top operating system or the objects.
injury or death in the event of a . Do not place anything on the top,
rollover. (see “Dual pop-up roll bar rear parcel shelf, inner flaps and
system (CrossCabriolet models)” in trunk lid. Even small items may
the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts interfere with the top operation
and supplemental restraint system” and could cause damage to the top
section.) or the vehicle body.

. Do not place anything in the top vated. Extended dual pop-up roll
storage area. The top will not fit bars may interfere with top opera-
there properly, and this could da- tion and could cause damage to the
mage the top and/or the vehicle top or the vehicle body.
body.
. Do not sit or place anything on the Make sure the trunk lid is securely closed before
top, rear parcel shelf, inner flaps, operating the top.
storage lid and trunk lid, especially
when the top is being operated. The
top may be damaged.
. Do not drive the vehicle with the top
partially opened. Always make sure
the top is either fully opened or SPA2874
closed before driving.
WHEN OPERATING THE TOP
. Secure items so that they cannot be
blown from the vehicle while driving
with the top open. WARNING
. Do not operate the top manually
except for emergency cases. Manual Keep hands and other parts of the body
operation may damage the top. away from moving parts such as the
top, storage lid, inner flap * A and
. Be sure to fully open or fully close
power windows.
the top. Do not release the switch
half way through the roof opening
or closing process. If the top is only
partially opened, significant da-
mage to the top could occur.
. Do not operate the top if the dual
pop-up roll bars have been acti-

NOTE:
. In case of low battery or low tempera-
ture, the top may temporarily stop
moving during the operation. This func-
tions to protect the top control me-
chanism, and it is not a malfunction.
. The top operation may be automati-
cally stopped to protect the system
under the following conditions:
— Immediately after the engine is
started.
— If the top or power windows are
operated repeatedly in a short per-
SPA2875 iod of time. SPA1691
— If the top is left partially open for a SOFT TOP INDICATOR LIGHT
long period of time before the top is
CAUTION fully opened. The soft top indicator light in the instrument
panel shows the conditions of top operation.
Wait for approximately 5 minutes be-
. Keep all parts of the top linkage fore operating the top again.
The light illuminates when the soft top is being
clear of obstructions, or the top operated or if it is stopped before reaching the
latch may not be securely locked. LUGGAGE COVER fully opened or closed position. When the top is
The soft top can be operated only when the fully opened or closed, the light will turn off.
. Do not place anything in the top
storage area. Cargo that contacts trunk is separated by the luggage cover. The The light blinks while the soft top is not fully
the top could damage the top and/ luggage cover must be pulled out and hung on opened or closed under the following condi-
or the vehicle body. See Caution the hooks or the top will not operate. tions:
label *
B attached in the trunk. (See “Luggage cover (CrossCabriolet models)” . When the vehicle is driven.
in the “2. Instruments and controls” section). . When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
position.
Only drive the vehicle when the soft top is in the

fully opened or fully closed position. AUTOMATIC WINDOW LOWERING
When the soft top is operating, and any of the When the soft top operating switch is pressed,
following conditions occur, the top will stop the power windows will automatically be low-
operating. ered completely. The windows do not rise
. When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) automatically after the top operation is com-
position. pleted. Use the power window switches to raise
. When the vehicle moves at a speed of 3 them.
MPH (5 km/h) or more.
. When the battery voltage is extremely low.
. When the temperature of the soft top
system becomes extremely high.
Release the soft top operating switch, and push
the switch again to move the top to the fully SPA2632
opened or closed position. The soft top indicator
light will turn off when the top operation is
OPENING THE TOP
completely finished. 1. Start the engine.
If the soft top indicator light illuminates with the 2. Push OPEN on the soft top operating switch
ignition switch ON (whether the top is operated and hold it until the top is fully opened.
or not, and when the top is engaged), it may . The soft top indicator light will illuminate
indicate the top operating system is not while the top is in motion. (In about 20
functioning properly. Have your vehicle checked seconds, the opening movement will
by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. finish and the indicator light turns off.)
. Windows will automatically be fully
opened.
3. Release the switch when the top is fully
opened. (The indicator light turns off.)

NOTE: OPENING THE TOP USING THE IN-
If you release the switch and press it again TELLIGENT KEY
while the top is being opened, the top will The soft top can be opened using the door
slightly move to the closing direction, then handle request switch.
start moving to the opening direction
again. The top is designed to move in this
way. It is not a malfunction.
SPA2633
CLOSING THE TOP

1. Start the engine.
2. Push CLOSE on the soft top operating
switch and hold it until the top is fully closed.
. The soft top indicator light will illuminate
while the top is in motion. (In about 20
seconds, the closing movement will
finish.)
. Windows will automatically be fully
opened.
3. Release the switch when the top is fully
closed. (The indicator light will turn off.)

JVP0049X
Opening the soft top

Push the ignition switch to the OFF position and
make sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Make sure that the trunk luggage cover is pulled
out and hung on the hooks. Push the door
handle request switch (driver’s or passenger’s)
*A and hold it until the soft top is fully open.

If the soft top stops halfway during operation or does not operate normally, follow the procedures shown in the following table. If the procedures in the
following table do not solve the symptom, immediately contact a NISSAN dealer for the inspection.
Symptom Beep Possible cause Possible solution
The OPEN side of the soft top operating switch is Push the CLOSE side of the soft top operating
pushed while the soft top is fully open, or the switch when the soft top is fully open. Push the
Sounds twice
CLOSE side of the soft top operating switch is OPEN side of the soft top operating switch when the
pushed while the soft top is fully closed. soft top is fully closed.
The OPEN side of the soft top operating
switch is pushed, but the soft top does not Shift the shift lever to the P (Park) or N (Neutral)
Sounds twice The shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
operate. position, and then operate the soft top.
Sounds twice The trunk lid is opened. Fully close the trunk lid.
Does not sound The battery voltage is low. Start the engine again and operate the soft top.
Does not sound The operation stops to protect the system. Wait for approximately 5 minutes.
Check that an object is not trapped inside the rear
Objects are trapped in the moving structure of the parcel shelf, inner flap and soft top. After the check,
The soft top stops halfway during opera- Sounds twice
soft top. turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, start the
tion. engine again and then operate the soft top.
Sounds twice The battery voltage is low. Start the engine again and operate the soft top.
When the vehicle is being driven, the beep Sounds continu- Immediately park the vehicle in a safe location and
The soft top is partially opened. fully open or fully close the soft top.
sounds. ously

IF THE TOP DOES NOT OPEN OR
CLOSE ELECTRICALLY WARNING
If you cannot operate the soft top with the
operating switch, first check whether all the . Do not drive with the top partially
following operating conditions are met. opened.
. Vehicle is stopped . If the top cannot be operated prop-
. Ignition switch is ON (Run the engine when erly, see a NISSAN dealer as soon
operating the top.) as possible to have your vehicle
checked.
. The trunk is closed
. The shift lever is in a position other than the
R (Reverse) position
. The luggage cover is pulled out and hooked CAUTION
so that the roof storage area is separated JVP0036X
The storage lid is extremely heavy. The
from the trunk.
storage lid should be manually opened a. Remove the trunk light *
1 .
If the top still does not move under the above
or closed by two people. b. Remove the lower trim clips * 3 and
conditions or has any system malfunction, see a
remove the upper and lower trim pieces
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. When you
must close the top by yourself, in the event of 1. Open the trunk lid. In the event of a *2 .
emergency or when an immediate dealer service discharged battery, the secondary trunk c. Remove the two luggage cover hooks * 4
is not available, close the top manually accord- release mechanism should be operated. on the left and right side of the trunk.
ing to the procedures shown in this section. (See “Trunk lid (CrossCabriolet models)” Then disconnect the connector * 5 on
earlier in this section.) the left side luggage cover hook.
When closing the soft top manually:
2. Open the top storage lid. d. Remove the clips *
6 behind the luggage
. Move the vehicle to a safe place, away from
cover hooks.
traffic.
. Two people should perform this procedure,
as some of the top parts are extremely
heavy.
The top cannot be opened manually.
Pull back the left and right side trim in the
trunk room. Push linkage * A on the left and
right using the wheel nut wrench or suitable
tool to release the storage lid locks *
B .
CAUTION
Use gloves or a cloth to protect your
hands when releasing the storage lid
locks.
JVP0098X
Make sure that both the left and right locks

*B are moved to the released position as
shown.
JVP0097X
e. Release the storage lid locks.

JVP0038X JVP0039X
f. Push and hold the lever * C toward the h. With two people, manually lift the storage
front of the vehicle to release the storage lid by hand on the left and right side of
lid. the vehicle at lid edge *
D .
g. Close the trunk lid.
CAUTION
Make sure to close the trunk lid before
opening the storage lid. The storage lid
may contact the trunk lid and damage it.
JVP0040X
i. Move the storage lid in the direction

marked by the arrow to open it.
j. Move the inner flap * E and * F in the
direction of the arrows, then secure the
flaps with tape or string.
3. Close the soft top.
JVP0041X
a. Pull up the soft top simultaneously from

the right and left side of the vehicle.
JVP0042X
b. Lift the rear side of the soft top *

A until it
is out of the storage area, then open the
soft top forward all the way.
JVP0043X JVP0044X
c. Close the storage lid. d. Close the front and rear parts of the soft
top at the same time as illustrated.
CAUTION
Make sure to close the storage lid
completely. The storage lid may contact
the soft top and damage it.

locked completely, and this may . A protective clear tape is applied to the top
allow wind and rain to get into your storage lid painted surface where the soft
vehicle. top contacts the surface. When the top is
fully closed, the tape may transmit some
light, visible from the inside of the vehicle.
CARE OF THE SOFT TOP AND THE
This does not affect the water and air
VEHICLE BODY tightness of the seal.
To use your CrossCabriolet safely and comfor- . The inner surface of the trunk and top
tably, you need to observe all the warnings and storage lids may show a fibrous, or marbled
cautions shown in the previous pages. Also, to pattern. This is the normal appearance of the
maintain a good appearance of the soft top and material used in these parts.
the vehicle body, you need to care for them by
cleaning and/or washing properly.
SPA2689
4. Lock the front part of the soft top. CAUTION

a. Remove the cap *
1 as illustrated.
. Do not use an automatic car wash or
b. Insert tool *
2 (located in the trunk) into a high-pressure car wash to clean
the hole and turn clockwise. your vehicle. The top may be da-
maged and water may leak into the
inside of the vehicle.
CAUTION
. Store the vehicle with the top closed
. After closing the top manually, have if it is not to be used for long
the system checked and/or repaired periods. Keeping the top stowed
by a NISSAN dealer as soon as for long periods may cause wrinkles
possible. on the surface of the top.
. Avoid leaving the vehicle outside for
long periods or driving at high See “Cleaning exterior” in the “7. Appearance
speeds. The rear of the top is not and care” section for detailed instructions.

FUEL-FILLER DOOR
FUEL-FILLER CAP . Never pour fuel into the throttle

body to attempt to start your vehi-
WARNING cle.
. Do not fill a portable fuel container
. Gasoline is extremely flammable in the vehicle or trailer. Static elec-
and highly explosive under certain tricity can cause an explosion of
conditions. You could be burned or flammable liquid, vapor or gas in
seriously injured if it is misused or any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the
mishandled. Always stop engine risk of serious injury or death when
and do not smoke or allow open filling portable fuel containers:
flames or sparks near the vehicle — Always place the container on
when refueling. the ground when filling.
SPA2441 . Do not attempt to top off the fuel — Do not use electronic devices
tank after the fuel pump nozzle when filling.
OPENING FUEL-FILLER DOOR shuts off automatically. Continued
To open the fuel-filler door, push the opener refueling may cause fuel overflow, — Keep the pump nozzle in contact
switch located below the instrument panel. To resulting in fuel spray and possibly with the container while you are
lock, close the fuel-filler door securely. a fire. filling it.
. Use only an original equipment type — Use only approved portable fuel
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It containers for flammable liquid.
has a built-in safety valve needed
for proper operation of the fuel
system and emission control sys-
tem. An incorrect cap can result in a
CAUTION
serious malfunction and possible
. If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
injury. It could also cause the mal-
flush it away with water to avoid
function indicator light to come on.
paint damage.

. Insert the cap straight into the fuel-
filler tube, then tighten the fuel-filler
cap until a single click is heard.
Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
properly may cause the mal-
function indicator light (MIL) to
illuminate. If the light illumi-
nates because the fuel-filler cap is
loose or missing, tighten or install
the cap and continue to drive the
vehicle. The light should turn off
after a few driving trips. If the
light does not turn off after a few
SPA2442 SPA2833
driving trips, have the vehicle in-
spected by a NISSAN dealer. To remove the fuel-filler cap: LOOSE FUEL CAP warning
For additional information, see 1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears on the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” remove. dot matrix liquid crystal display when the fuel-
in the “2. Instruments and controls” 2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder *
A filler cap is not tightened correctly after the
section. while refueling. vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few
. The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will To install the fuel-filler cap: driving trips for the message to be displayed. To
appear if the fuel-filler cap is not turn off the warning, perform the following steps:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-
properly tightened. It may take a few 1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as soon
filler tube.
driving trips for the message to be as possible. (See “Fuel-filler cap” earlier in
displayed. Failure to tighten the 2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a
this section.)
fuel-filler cap properly after the single click is heard.
2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until a single click
LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears
is heard.
may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate. 3. Push the reset switch *A on the right side
of the combination meter for about 1 second

TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING
to turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning

after tightening the fuel cap. WARNING
. Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving. You could lose control
of your vehicle and cause an acci-
dent.
. Do not adjust the steering wheel
any closer to you than is necessary
for proper steering operation and
comfort. The driver’s air bag inflates
with great force. If you are unrest-
rained, leaning forward, sitting side-
SPA2443
ways or out of position in any way,
you are at greater risk of injury or MANUAL OPERATION
death in a crash. You may also
receive serious or fatal injuries from Manual operation
the air bag if you are up against it Pull the lock lever *
1 down and adjust the
when it inflates. Always sit back steering wheel forward or rearward to the
against the seatback and as far desired position.
away as practical from the steering Push the lock lever up securely to lock the
wheel. Always use the seat belts. steering wheel in place.
Pull the lock lever *
2 and adjust the steering
wheel up or down to the desired position.
Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheel
in place.

SUN VISORS
HARDTOP MODELS
CAUTION
. Do not store the main sun visor
before storing the extension sun
visor.
. Do not pull the extension sun visor
forcedly downward.
1. To block out glare from the front, swing

down the main sun visor *
1 .
SPA2444A
2. To block glare from the side, remove the
ELECTRIC OPERATION main sun visor from the center mount and
swing it to the side *
2 .
Tilt or telescopic operation 3. Draw out the extension sun visor *
3 from
Move the lever to adjust the steering wheel up or the main sun visor to block from further
down, forward or rearward to the desired glare.
position.
Entry/Exit function operation:
The automatic drive positioner system will make
the steering wheel move up automatically when
the driver’s door is opened with the ignition
switch in the LOCK position. This lets the driver
get into and out of the seat more easily.
For more information, see “Automatic drive
positioner” later in this section.
SIC3451
MIRRORS
SPA2447 SPA2143
INSIDE MIRROR Manual anti-glare type

Adjust the height and the angle of the inside The night position *1 will reduce glare from the
mirror to the desired position. headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
Use the day position *
2 when driving in daylight
hours.
SIC2872
WARNING
CROSSCABRIOLET MODELS
1. To block out glare from the front, swing Use the night position only when ne-
down the sun visor *
1 . cessary, because it reduces rear view
2. To block glare from the side, remove the sun clarity.
visor from the center mount and swing it to
the side *2 .

Automatic anti-glare type For the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver opera-
The inside mirror is designed so that it tion, see “HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in
automatically changes reflection according to the “2. Instruments and controls” section.
the intensity of the headlights of the following OUTSIDE MIRRORS
vehicle.
The anti-glare system will be automatically WARNING
turned on when the ignition switch is pushed
to the ON position. Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
When the anti-glare system is turned on, the the passenger side are closer than they
indicator light *
A will illuminate and excessive appear. Be careful when moving to the
glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind right. Using only this mirror could cause
you will be reduced. an accident. Use the inside mirror or
SPA2422A Type A: Push the switch * B to make the glance over your shoulder to properly
Type A inside rearview mirror operate normally and the judge distances to other objects.
indicator light will turn off. Push the switch
again to turn the system on.
Type B: Push the “*” switch * C to make the
inside rearview mirror operate normally. The
indicator light will turn off. Push the “I” switch
* D to turn the system on.
Do not allow any object to cover the

sensors * E or apply glass cleaner on
them. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity
of the sensor, resulting in improper opera-
tion.
For the compass (if so equipped) operation, see
SPA2450 “Compass” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
Type B section.

Defrosting outside mirrors (if so
equipped)
The outside mirrors will be heated when the rear
window defroster switch is operated.
SPA2319 SPA1829
Adjusting outside mirrors Foldable outside mirrors

The outside mirror control switch is located on Fold the outside mirror by pushing it toward the
the armrest. rear of the vehicle.
The outside mirror will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
Turn the switch right or left to select the right or
left side mirror *
1 , then adjust using the control
switch * 2 .

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if
so equipped)
The automatic drive positioner system has two Cancel or activate entry/exit function
features:
The shift lever must be in the P (Park) position
. Entry/exit function (for Hardtop models) with the ignition switch in the OFF position.
. Memory storage The entry/exit function can be activated or
ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION (for Hardtop canceled by pressing and holding the SET
models) switch for more than 10 seconds.
This system is designed so that the driver’s seat The indicator lights on the memory switches (1
and steering column will automatically move and 2) will blink once when the function is
when the shift lever is in the P (Park) position. canceled, and the indicator lights will blink twice
This allows the driver to get into and out of the when the function is activated. Note that the
driver’s seat more easily. indicator lights may illuminate after 5 seconds
The driver’s seat will slide backward and the while holding the SET switch. This indicates
SIC2064 steering wheel will move up when the driver’s readiness for linking the Intelligent Key to a
door is opened with the ignition switch in the stored memory position. Keep the SET switch
VANITY MIRROR LOCK position and the Intelligent Key not pressed for more than 10 seconds to turn on or
To use the front vanity mirror, pull down the sun inserted in the Intelligent Key port. off the entry/exit function.
visor and pull up the cover. The entry/exit function can also be activated or
The driver’s seat and steering wheel will return
to the previous positions when the ignition canceled if the “Lift Steering Wheel on Exit” key
switch is pushed to the ACC position. or “Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit” key is turned
to ON or OFF in the “Comfort” settings. (See
The driver’s seat will not return to the previous
“Vehicle information and settings” in the “4.
positions if the seat or steering adjusting switch
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone
is operated when the seat is at the exit position.
and voice recognition systems” section.)

Initialize entry/exit function system” section and “Tilt/telescopic steer-
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse ing” earlier in this section and “Outside
opens, the entry/exit function will not work mirrors” earlier in this section.
though this function was set on before. In such 4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,
a case, after connecting the battery or replacing push the memory switch (1 or 2).
with a new fuse, open and close the driver’s The indicator light for the pushed memory
door more than two times after the ignition switch will stay on for approximately 5
switch is placed in the LOCK position from the seconds after pushing the switch.
ON position. The entry/exit function will be
If memory is stored in the same memory
activated.
switch, the previous memory will be deleted.
Linking Intelligent Key to a stored mem-
SPA2756
ory position
The Intelligent Key can be linked to a stored
MEMORY STORAGE memory position with the following procedure.
Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering 1. Follow one of the steps for storing a memory
column (if so equipped) and outside mirrors can position.
be stored in the automatic drive positioner
. While the indicator light for the memory
memory. Follow these procedures to use the
switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec-
memory system.
onds, push the button on the Intelligent
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position. Key.
2. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. . Push the ignition switch to the OFF position,
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering column (if and then push the SET switch. Push the
so equipped) and outside mirrors to the button while pushing the memory button
desired positions by manually operating while the indicator light stays on for approxi-
each adjusting switch. For additional infor- mately 5 seconds.
mation, see “Seats” in the “1. Safety — If the indicator light blinks, the Intelligent Key is
Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint linked to that memory setting.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF position, and Selecting the memorized position . When the seat, steering column (if so
then push the button on the Intelligent Key. 1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position. equipped) and outside mirrors have already
The driver’s seat, steering wheel (if so equipped) been moved to the memorized position.
2. Use one of the following methods to move
and outside mirrors will move to the memorized . When no position is stored in the memory
position. the driver’s seat, the outside mirrors and the
switch.
steering wheel (if so equipped) .
Confirming memory storage . Push the ignition switch to the ON . When the engine is started while moving the
automatic drive positioner.
. Push the ignition switch to the ON position position and push the memory switch (1
or 2). . When the shift lever is moved from the P
and push the SET switch. If the main
. Within 45 seconds of opening the (Park) position to any other position. (How-
memory has not been stored, the indicator
driver’s door, push the memory switch ever, it will not be canceled while the seat
light will come on for approximately 0.5
(1 or 2). and steering column are returning to the
second. When the memory has stored in
previous positions (entry/exit function).)
position, the indicator light will stay on for The driver’s seat, steering column (if so
approximately 5 seconds. . When the driver’s door remains open for
equipped) and outside mirrors will move to
more than 45 seconds and the ignition
. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the the memorized position with the indicator
switch is not in the ON position.
fuse opens, the memory will be canceled. In light flashing, and then the light will stay on
this case, reset the desired position using for approximately 5 seconds.
the previous procedure.
SYSTEM OPERATION
. If optional keys are added to your vehicle,
The automatic drive positioner system will not
the memory storage procedure to switch 1
work or will stop operating under the following
or 2 and linking Intelligent Key procedure to
conditions:
a stored memory position should be per-
formed again for each Intelligent Key. For . When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7
additional Intelligent Key information, see km/h) (entry/exit function).
“Keys” earlier in this section. . When the vehicle is driven (memory sto-
rage).
. When the adjusting switch for the driver’s
seat and steering column (if so equipped) is
turned on while the automatic drive posi-
tioner is operating.
MEMO

4 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone
and voice recognition systems
Safety note .................................................................................. 4-3 How to adjust the screen ............................................ 4-37
Center multi-function control panel (models with color Operating tips ................................................................. 4-37
display screen) .......................................................................... 4-3 Moving Object Detection (MOD) function .............. 4-37
How to use multi-function controller .............................. 4-5 Ventilators ................................................................................ 4-40
How to use touch screen (models with Heater and air conditioner .................................................. 4-41
navigation system) .............................................................. 4-5 Automatic operation ...................................................... 4-43
Menu options (models with navigation system) .......... 4-7 Manual operation ............................................................ 4-44
How to select menus on the screen .............................. 4-8 To turn the system ON/OFF ....................................... 4-45
Vehicle information and settings (if so equipped) ............ 4-9 Operating tips ................................................................. 4-45
How to use STATUS button ............................................. 4-9 In-cabin microfilter ......................................................... 4-45
How to use brightness control and display Servicing air conditioner .............................................. 4-45
ON/OFF button ................................................................... 4-9 Audio system .......................................................................... 4-46
How to use INFO button .................................................. 4-9 Audio operation precautions ....................................... 4-46
How to use SETTING button ....................................... 4-13 FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD) changer ..... 4-60
RearView monitor (if so equipped) ................................... 4-23 FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc
How to read the displayed lines .................................. 4-24 (CD) player ...................................................................... 4-65
How to park with predictive course lines .................. 4-24 DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) player operation
Difference between predictive and (models with navigation system) ................................ 4-69
actual distances ................................................................ 4-26 USB memory operation (if so equipped) ................ 4-72
Predictive course line settings .................................... 4-28 Bluetooth® streaming audio (models with
How to adjust the screen ............................................. 4-28 navigation system) ......................................................... 4-76
Operating tips ................................................................... 4-28 iPod® player operation (if so equipped) .................. 4-81
Rear and rear-wide view monitor with Moving Object Auxiliary input jacks (if so equipped) ........................ 4-83
Detection (MOD) (if so equipped) .................................... 4-30 CD/DVD/USB memory care and cleaning .............. 4-84
How to switch the display ............................................. 4-31
How to park with predictive course lines .................. 4-33
Steering-wheel-mounted controls for audio (if Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
so equipped) ..................................................................... 4-86 (models without navigation system) (if
Antenna ............................................................................... 4-87 so equipped) .......................................................................... 4-99
Car phone or CB radio ........................................................ 4-88 Regulatory information ............................................... 4-100
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (models with Control buttons ............................................................ 4-101
navigation system) ................................................................. 4-88 Voice recognition system .......................................... 4-101
Regulatory information .................................................... 4-90 Pairing procedure ....................................................... 4-105
Voice commands .............................................................. 4-90 Phonebook registration .............................................. 4-106
Control buttons ................................................................. 4-90 Making a call ................................................................ 4-106
Connecting procedure .................................................... 4-91 Receiving a call ........................................................... 4-107
Phone selection ................................................................ 4-91 During a call ................................................................. 4-107
Quick Dial ........................................................................... 4-91 Phone settings ............................................................. 4-108
Making a call ..................................................................... 4-94 Voice adaptation mode .............................................. 4-111
Receiving a call ................................................................. 4-95 NISSAN voice recognition system (models with
During a call ...................................................................... 4-96 navigation system) ............................................................. 4-112
Phone setting .................................................................... 4-96 NISSAN voice recognition Standard Mode ......... 4-112
Troubleshooting guide ..................................................... 4-98 Using the system ........................................................ 4-115
NISSAN voice recognition Alternate
Command Mode ......................................................... 4-124
Using the system ........................................................ 4-133
Troubleshooting guide ............................................... 4-138
CENTER MULTI-FUNCTION
SAFETY NOTE CONTROL PANEL (models with
color display screen)
WARNING
. Do not disassemble or modify this
system. If you do, it may result in
accidents, fire, or electric shock.
. Do not use this system if you notice
any abnormality, such as a frozen
screen or lack of sound. Continued
use of the system may result in
accident, fire or electric shock.
. In case you notice any foreign
object in the system hardware, spill SAA1845
liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell With navigation system
coming from it, stop using the 1. “STATUS” status display button (P.4-9)
system immediately and contact 2, 6, 7, 8, 9.
For navigation system control buttons (Refer to
your nearest NISSAN dealer. Ignor-
the separate Navigation System Owner’s Man-
ing such conditions may lead to ual.)
accidents, fire, or electric shock. 3. Multi-function controller (P.4-5)
. Park the vehicle in a safe location 4. “PHONE” Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-
and apply the parking brake to view tem button (P.4-88)
the images on the front center dis- 5. “ OFF” brightness control and display ON/
play screen. OFF button (P.4-9)
10. “INFO” vehicle and navigation information but-
Do not attempt to operate the system in ton (P.4-9)
extreme temperature conditions [below 11. “SETTING” button (P.4-13)
−48F (−208C) and above 1588F (708C)].
Operating this system under these condi-
tions may result in system malfunctions.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3
SAA2268 SAA1847
Without navigation system With navigation system
1. “INFO” vehicle and navigation information but-
ton (P.4-9)
2. “STATUS” status display button (P.4-9)
3. Multi-function controller (P.4-5)
4. “ OFF” brightness control and display ON/
OFF button (P.4-9)
5. “SETTING” button (P.4-13)
When you use this system, make sure the
engine is running.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will discharge the battery and the
engine may not start.
JVH0386X
Without navigation system
4-4 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
HOW TO USE MULTI-FUNCTION . To clean the display, use a soft, dry vehicle and cause an accident.
CONTROLLER cloth. If additional cleaning is ne-
Choose an item on the display using the main cessary, use a small amount of Touch screen operation
directional buttons *
2 (or additional directional neutral detergent with a soft cloth.
buttons * 6 with navigation system) or center Never use a rough cloth, alcohol, With this system, the same operations as those
dial *3 , and push the ENTER button * 1 for benzine, thinner or any kind of for the multi-function controller are possible
solvent or paper towel with a che- using the touch screen operation.
operation.
If you push the BACK button * 4 before the mical cleaning agent. They will
setup is completed, the setup will be canceled scratch or deteriorate the panel.
and/or the display will return to the previous . Do not splash any liquid such as
screen. This button can also be used to delete water or car fragrance on the dis-
characters that have been input. play. Contact with liquid will cause
After the setup is completed, push the BACK the system to malfunction.
button *4 and return to the previous screen.
To ensure safe driving, some functions cannot
For the VOICE button *5 functions, refer to the
be operated while driving.
separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
The on-screen functions that are not available
HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.
(models with navigation system)
Park the vehicle in a safe location and then
operate the navigation system.
CAUTION
. The glass screen on the liquid WARNING
crystal display may break if it is hit
. ALWAYS give your full attention to
with a hard or sharp object. If the
driving.
glass screen breaks, do not touch it.
Doing so could result in an injury. . Avoid using vehicle features that
could distract you. If distracted,
you could lose control of your
SAA2473 SAA2474 SAA2475
Selecting the item: Adjusting an item: Inputting characters:

Touch an item to select it. To select the “Audio” Touch the + * 1 or − *
2 key to adjust the Touch the letter or number *
1 .
settings, touch the “Audio” area * 1 on the settings. There are some options available when inputting
screen. Touch the *3 or *
4 key to move to characters.
Touch the BACK *
2 key to return to the the previous or next item. . Uppercase:
previous screen. Touch the *5 or *
6 key to move to Shows uppercase characters.
the previous or next page. . Lowercase:
Shows lowercase characters.
. Symbols:
Shows symbols such as the question mark
(?).
. Space:
Inserts a space.
. Delete:
Deletes the last character that has been
input with one touch. Push and hold the
button to delete all of the characters.
. OK:
Completes character inputs.
Touch screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft
cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a
small amount of neutral detergent with a soft
cloth. Never spray the screen with water or
detergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then wipe
the screen. SAA1860 SAA2476
MENU OPTIONS (models with naviga- Available items

tion system)
Destination/Route:
The start menu can be displayed using the menu
These items are for the navigation system. See
control switch on the steering-wheel-mounted
the separate Navigation System Owner’s Man-
controls.
ual for details.
1. While the MAP or STATUS screen is
displayed, push and hold the menu control Info:
switch until the “Menu Options” screen Displays the information screen. It is the same
appears. screen that appears when you push the INFO
2. Highlight the preferred item by tilting the button.
menu control switch up or down, and then Settings:
push the menu control switch to select it. Displays the settings screen. It is the same
screen that appears when you push the
SETTING button.
HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE about the menu selection currently high-
SCREEN lighted. (for example, adjust head lamp on
Vehicle functions are viewed on the display time after shut-off.)
screen in menus. To select each key item,
highlight the preferred item using the multi-
function controller and push the ENTER button.
Whenever a menu selection is made or menu
item is highlighted, different areas on the screen
provide you with important information. See the
following for details.
1. Header:
Shows the path used to get to the current
SAA2477 screen. (for example, push SETTING button
Models with navigation system > choose “Comfort” menu item.)
2. Menu Selections:
Shows the options to choose within that
menu screen.
3. UP/DOWN Movement indicator:
Shows that the multi-function controller may
be used to move UP/DOWN on the screen
and select more options.
4. Menu Items Counter:
Shows the total number of items listed
across all pages for the current menu (for
example, 3/7).
JVH0179M 5. Footer/Information Line:
Models without navigation system Provides more information (if available)
VEHICLE INFORMATION AND
SETTINGS (if so equipped)
HOW TO USE STATUS BUTTON HOW TO USE INFO BUTTON
You can check information related to the audio, The display screen shows vehicle and navigation
climate control system, fuel consumption and information for your convenience.
navigation system (if so equipped) by pushing
The information shown on the screen should be
the STATUS button repeatedly.
a guide to determine the condition of the vehicle.
HOW TO USE BRIGHTNESS CON- See the following for details.
TROL AND DISPLAY ON/OFF BUTTON
Push the “ OFF” button to switch the display
brightness to the daytime mode or the nighttime
mode, and to adjust the display brightness using
the multi-function controller while the indicator is
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
The display brightness can also be adjusted SAA2478
using the brightness UP button (+) or bright- Models with navigation system
ness DOWN button (−).
Push and hold the “ OFF” button for more
than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Push the
button again to turn the display on.
SAA1511
Models without navigation system
Vehicle information display
1. Push the INFO button on the control panel.
2. Select an item from the INFO menu.
3. After viewing or adjusting the information on
the following screens, push the BACK
button to return to the INFO menu.
See the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual for the following items:
. Where am I?
. Traffic Info
. Weather Info
. Map Update SAA2479 SAA2480
. Navigation Version Models with navigation system Models with navigation system
*When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the “Navigation Version” key is displayed after
selecting the “Others” key.
JVH0180M JVH0181M
Models without navigation system Models without navigation system
Fuel Economy information Maintenance information
The approximate distance to empty, average fuel The maintenance intervals can be displayed for
economy and current fuel economy will be the engine oil, oil filter, tire and other reminders.
displayed for reference. To set a maintenance interval, select a preferred
To reset the average fuel economy (Avg Fuel item from the list.
Econ or Average Fuel Economy), select the You can also set to display a message to remind
“Reset Fuel Eco” or “Reset” key. you that the maintenance needs to be per-
If the “Fuel Eco History” or “View” key is formed.
selected, the average fuel consumption history The following example shows how to set the
will be displayed in graph form along with the engine oil maintenance information. Use the
average for the previous Reset-to-Reset period. same steps to set the other maintenance
The unit can be converted between “US” and information.
“Metric”. (See “How to use SETTING button” SAA2481
later in this section.) Models with navigation system
The fuel economy information may differ from the

information displayed on the dot matrix liquid
crystal display. This is due to the timing
difference in updating the information and does
not indicate a malfunction.
JVH0183M
1. Set the interval (mileage) of the maintenance
schedule. To determine the recommended
maintenance interval, refer to your “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide”.
2. To display the reminder automatically when
the desired distance is reached, select the
“Reminder” key.
3. Reset the driving distance to the new
maintenance schedule.
4. To return to the previous screen, push the
BACK button.
The unit can be converted between “US” and
SAA2482 “Metric”. (See “How to use SETTING button” SAA3003
Models with navigation system later in this section.) Example
The Reminder will be automatically displayed
when the specified distance has been driven
and every time the ignition switch is pushed to
the ACC or ON position. The reminder will not
appear while driving.
Select the “OK” key to hide the reminder for the
rest of the current drive.
To stop the reminder from appearing, perform
one of the following actions:
. Select the “Reset Distance”.
. Deactivate the “Reminder”.
. Increase the “Interval” distance to be more
JVH0184M than the current distance being tracked.
HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON
The display as illustrated will appear when the
SETTING button is pushed.
Items displayed on the screen may vary depend-
ing on the model.
For navigation settings, refer to the separate
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
SAA2483 JVH0365X
Models with navigation system
Others information (models with naviga-
tion system)
The Others information display will appear when
pushing the INFO button and selecting the
“Others” key.
GPS Position:
For the details of this item, see the separate
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
Voice Recognition:
For the details of this item, see “NISSAN voice
recognition system (models with navigation
system)” later in this section.
JVH0494X
Audio settings Display Album Cover Art (models with
The display as illustrated will appear when navigation system):
pushing the SETTING button and selecting the When this item is turned to ON, the album cover
“Audio” key. image is displayed when playing iPod® or MP3
music files through a CD, DVD or USB memory.
Bass/Treble/Balance/Fade:
When the image is not properly embedded in
To adjust the speaker tone quality and sound the file or device, the image will not be
balance, select the “Bass”, “Treble”, “Balance” displayed.
or “Fade” key and adjust it with the multi-
function controller. Phone settings (models with navigation
These items can also be adjusted by pushing system)
and turning the AUDIO knob. For details of the “Phone” settings, see “Blue-
tooth® Hands-Free Phone System (models with
SAA2485 Speed Sensitive Vol.:
navigation system)” later in this section.
Models with navigation system The audio system’s volume is increased with the
vehicle speed. Select the “Speed Sensitive Vol.” Bluetooth® settings (models with navi-
and adjust the effect level with the multi-function gation system)
controller. The Speed Sensitive Volume function For details of the “Bluetooth” settings, see
is turned off when the level is set to “OFF”. “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (models
Increasing the value will cause the volume to with navigation system)” later in this section or
increase faster with vehicle speed. “Bluetooth® streaming audio (models with navi-
DivX® Registration Code (models with gation system)” later in this section.
navigation system):
The registration code for a device that is used to
download DivX® files will be displayed on the
screen. If a disc is loaded or a USB memory is
connected to the audio system, this function will
not be activated.
SAA2740
“Guidance Volume” and adjust it with the multi-
function controller.
You can also adjust the guidance voice volume
by turning the VOLUME control knob while voice
guidance is being announced.
Ringtone/Incoming Call/Outgoing Call:
For the details of these items, see “Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System (models with navi-
gation system)” later in this section.
Switch Beeps:
When this item is turned to ON, you will hear a
SAA2554
beep sound when you use a button. JVH0176M
Example Guidance Voice:
Volume and Beeps settings (models with When this item is turned to ON, you will hear Switch Beeps settings (models without
navigation system) voice guidance in the navigation operation or in navigation system)
other operations. The “Switch Beeps” screen will appear when
The display as illustrated will appear when
pushing the SETTING button, selecting the NOTE: pushing the SETTING button, selecting the
“Switch Beeps” key with the multi-function
“Volume & Beeps” key. When the voice guidance is being an-
controller and pushing the ENTER button.
Audio Volume: nounced during audio playback, turning
the volume knob does not adjust the music Switch Beeps:
To increase or decrease the audio volume,
level; it adjusts the guidance volume level. When this item is turned to ON, you will hear a
select the “Audio Volume” and adjust it with
If voice guidance is not being heard, beep sound when you use a button.
the multi-function controller. You can also adjust
please check the Guidance Volume level.
the audio volume by turning the VOLUME
control knob.
Guidance Volume:
To adjust the guidance voice volume, select the
Driver Assistance settings (if so When any mode button is pushed with the
equipped) screen off, the screen turns on for further
For the details of the “Driver Assistance” operation. The screen will turn off automatically
settings, see the following items: 5 seconds after the operation is finished.
. “BSW system operation” in the “5. Starting To turn on the screen, set this item to the ON
and driving” section. position, or push and hold the “ OFF”
button.
. “LDW system operation” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section. . Brightness/Contrast/Background Color
. “Moving Object Detection (MOD) function” To adjust the brightness and contrast of the
later in this section. screen, select the “Brightness” or “Contrast”
key.
Then, you can adjust the brightness and the
SAA2486 contrast using the multi-function controller.
For information on the “Background Color” key,
Display settings (models with navigation refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
system) er’s Manual.
The display as illustrated will appear when For CrossCabriolet models:
pushing the SETTING button and selecting the
Depending on the driver’s seat position, the
“Display” key.
display could be hard to read. Adjust the
Display Adjustment: brightness and contrast of the display on the
To adjust the display settings, select the “Dis- setting screen.
play Adjustment” key. The following settings are Color Theme:
available.
Choose the theme color of the menu screen
. Display from “Black”, “Blue” or “Red”.
To turn off the screen, push the ENTER button
and turn the “Display” indicator off. The other
method is to push and hold the “ OFF”
button for more than 2 seconds.
Brightness/Contrast/Background Color:
To adjust the brightness, contrast and back-
ground color of the screen, select the appro-
priate “Brightness”, “Contrast” or “Background
Color” key and push the ENTER button.
You can then adjust the brightness and contrast
using the multi-function controller. Switch the
background color to the daytime mode or the
nighttime mode by pushing the ENTER button.
SAA2115 JVH0383M
Display settings (models without navi- Others settings (models with navigation
gation system) system)
The “Display” screen will appear when pushing The Others settings display will appear when
the SETTING button on the control panel. pushing the SETTING button and selecting the
“Others” key.
Display:
To turn off the screen, push the ENTER button The following items are available:
and turn the “ON” indicator off. . Comfort
When any mode button is pushed with the . Clock
screen off, the screen turns on for further . Language & Units
operation. The screen will turn off automatically . Voice Recognition
5 seconds after the operation is finished. . Camera
To turn on the screen, set this item to the “ON” . Image Viewer
position or push the “ OFF” button.
Lift Steering Wheel on Exit (if so
equipped):
When this item is turned to ON, the steering
wheel moves upward for easy exit if the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position and the driver’s
door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and
pushing the ignition switch to the ACC position,
the steering wheel moves to the previous
position.
Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit (if so
equipped):
When this item is turned to ON, the driver’s seat
SAA3151 SAA3150 moves backward for easy exit if the ignition
Models with navigation system Models without navigation system switch is in the OFF position and the driver’s
The display as illustrated will appear when door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and
Comfort settings pushing the ignition switch to the ACC position,
pushing the SETTING button and selecting the
The display as illustrated will appear when the driver’s seat moves to the previous position.
“Comfort” key. This key does not appear on the
pushing the SETTING button, selecting the
display until the ignition switch is pushed to the Light Off Delay:
“Others” key and then selecting the “Comfort”
ON position. Choose the duration of the automatic headlight
key. This key does not appear on the display until
the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. Auto Interior Illumination: off timer from 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150 and
When this item is turned to ON, the interior 180 second periods.
lights will illuminate if any door is unlocked. Selective Door Unlock:
Light Sensitivity: When this item is turned to ON, only the driver’s
Adjust the sensitivity of the automatic headlights door is unlocked first after the door unlock
higher (right) or lower (left). operation. When the door handle request switch
on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is
pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding
door is unlocked first. All the doors can be
unlocked if the door unlock operation is per-
formed again within 60 seconds.
When this item is turned to OFF, all the doors
will be unlocked after the door unlock operation
is performed once.
Intelligent Key Lock/Unlock:
When this item is turned to ON, door lock/
unlock function by pushing the door handle
request switch will be activated.
Return All Settings to Default:
Select this item and then select “YES” to return
all settings to the default. SAA2487 SAA3675
Clock settings Models with navigation system Models without navigation system
The clock settings display cannot be operated The display as illustrated will appear when The display as illustrated will appear when
while driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe place pushing the SETTING button and selecting the pushing the SETTING button and selecting the
and apply the parking brake before setting the “Others” key, and then selecting the “Clock” key. “Clock” key.
clock. On-screen Clock:
When this item is turned to ON, a clock is
always displayed in the upper right corner of the
screen.
This clock will indicate the time almost exactly
because it is always adjusted by the GPS
system (models with navigation system).
Clock Format (24h):
When this item is turned to ON, the 24-hour
clock is displayed. When this item is not turned
to ON, the 12-hour clock is displayed. . Pacific
Offset (hour)/(min) (models with naviga-
tion system)/Clock Adjust (models without
navigation system):
Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing per
hour or per minute.
Daylight Saving Time:
Turn this item to ON for daylight saving time
application.
Time Zone:
Choose the time zone from the following
Models with navigation system SAA2490
. Pacific
. Mountain Language & Units settings
. Central The Language & Units settings display will
. Eastern appear when pushing the SETTING button,
. Atlantic selecting the “Others” key, and then selecting
the “Language & Units” key.
. Newfoundland
. Hawaii
. Alaska
. Eniwetok, Kwajalein
. Midway Island, Samoa
. Hawaii
. Alaska
Select Units:
Select the “Select Units” key. Choose “US”
(Mile, 8F, MPG) or “Metric” (km, 8C, L/100 km)
for your favorite display appearance.
Voice Recognition settings (models with
navigation system)
For details about the “Voice Recognition”
settings, see “NISSAN voice recognition system
(models with navigation system)” later in this
section.
CAMERA settings (if so equipped)
SAA1092 The “CAMERA” screen will appear when select- SAA2491
Models without navigation system ing the “Camera” key.
The display illustrated will appear when pushing For the details about the camera system Image Viewer (models with navigation
the SETTING button and selecting the “Lan- operation, see “RearView monitor” later in this system)
guage & Units” key. section. The image files in the USB memory will be
Select Language: displayed. To display the Image Viewer, push the
SETTING button, select the “Other” key and
Select the “Select Language” key. Choose
then select the “Image Viewer” key. The image of
“English”, “Français” or “Español” for your
the selected file is displayed on the right side of
favorite display appearance.
the screen.
If you select the “Français” key, the French
When a number of folders are included in the
language will be displayed, so please use the
USB memory, select a folder from the list to
French Owner’s Manual. To obtain a French
display the file list.
Owner’s Manual, see “Owner’s Manual/Service
Manual order information” in the “9. Technical Images will not be shown on the display while
and consumer information” section. the vehicle is in any drive position to reduce
driver distraction. To view images, stop the
vehicle in a safe location and apply the parking . (Previous)
brake. Select the “ ” key to display the previous
file.
Setting the Image Viewer:
The Image Viewer setting display will appear
when selecting the “Settings” key on the full
screen display. The following settings are
available for the full screen display.
. Slideshow Speed
Select the “Slideshow Speed” key. From the
following display, select the changing time
from 5, 10, 30, 60 seconds or “No Auto
SAA2492 Change”.
. Slideshow Order
Full Screen Display:
Select the “Slideshow Order” key. From the
The full screen display will appear when select-
following display, select “Random” or “Order
ing the “Full Screen Display” key.
List”. For “Order List”, the image order is the
To operate the Image Viewer or to change the order of the files as stored on the USB
settings, select the desired key using the multi- memory.
Operating tips:
. (Start)
. Only files that meet the following conditions
Select the “ ” key to start playing the
will be displayed.
slideshow.
— Image type: JPEG
. (Stop)
— File Extensions: *.jpg, *jpeg
Select the “ ” key to stop the slideshow.
— Maximum Resolution: 2048 6 1536
. (Next)
pixels
Select the “ ” key to display the next file.
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)
— Maximum Size: 2-MB The system isdesigned as an aid to the driver in

because of its monitoring range
— Colors: 32768 (15-bit) situations such as slot parking or parallel
limitation.
— Maximum File Name lengths: 253-Bytes parking.
. Do not put anything on the Rear-
— Maximum Folders: 500 When the shift lever is shifted into the R
View camera. The RearView camera
— Maximum Images per Folder: 1024 (Reverse) position, the monitor display shows a
is installed above the license plate.
rearward view from the vehicle.
. If an electronic device (such as a digital . When washing the vehicle with
camera) is directly connected to the vehicle high-pressure water, be sure not to
using a USB cable, no image will be WARNING spray it around the camera. Other-
displayed on the screen. wise, water may enter the camera
. If the file name is too long, some file names . The RearView Monitor is a conve- unit causing water condensation on
may not be entirely displayed. nience but it is not a substitute to the lens, a malfunction, fire or an
. When the total number of characters in the check behind the vehicle when electric shock.
file name exceeds 100 or if 1 file name in a backing up. . Do not strike the camera. It is a
directory exceeds 100 characters, all files . The driver is always responsible for precision instrument. Otherwise, it
will show a shortened 8-character version. safety during parking and other may malfunction or cause damage
The image will still be displayed when maneuvers. resulting in a fire or an electric
selected. . Objects viewed in the RearView shock.
Monitor differ from actual distance
because a wide-angle lens is used.
Objects in the RearView Monitor CAUTION
will appear visually opposite than
when viewed in the rearview and Do not scratch the camera lens when
outside mirrors. cleaning dirt or snow from the lens.
. Make sure that the lift gate or trunk
is securely closed when backing up.
. Underneath the bumper and the
corner areas of the bumper cannot
be viewed on the RearView Monitor
Predictive course lines *
6 :
actual course line.
Indicate the predictive course when backing up. . The displayed lines will appear
The predictive course lines will be displayed on slightly off to the right because the
the monitor when the shift lever is in the R RearView camera is not installed in
(Reverse) position and the steering wheel is the rear center of the vehicle.
turned. The predictive course lines will move
depending on how much the steering wheel is . The distance guide line and the
turned and will not be displayed while the vehicle width line should be used
steering wheel is in the neutral position. as a reference only when the vehicle
is on a level paved surface. The
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTIVE distance viewed on the monitor is
COURSE LINES for reference only and may be
different than the actual distance
SAA1896 between the vehicle and displayed
WARNING objects.
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
. Always turn and check that it is safe . When backing-up the vehicle up a
LINES hill objects viewed in the monitor
to do so before backing up. Always
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width back up slowly. are further than they appear. When
and distances to objects with reference to the backing-up the vehicle down a hill,
vehicle body line *A are displayed on the . Use the displayed lines as a refer-
ence. The lines are highly affected objects viewed in the monitor are
monitor. closer than they appear. Use the
by the number of occupants, fuel
Distance guide lines: level, vehicle position, road condi- inside mirror or glance over your
Indicate distances from the bumper. tion and road grade. shoulder to properly judge dis-
tances to other objects.
. Red line * 1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) . If the tires are replaced with differ-
. Yellow line *2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m) ent sized tires, the predictive course The vehicle width and predictive course
. Green line * 3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m) line may be displayed incorrectly. lines are wider than the actual width and
. Green line * 4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m) . On a snow-covered or slippery road, course.
Vehicle width guide lines * 5 : there may be a difference between
the predictive course line and the
Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space
completely, move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position and apply the parking brake.
SAA1897 SAA1898
1. Visually check that the parking space is safe 3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the
before parking your vehicle. steering wheel so that the predictive course
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on lines *B enter the parking space * C .
the screen *A when the shift lever is moved 4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the
to the R (Reverse) position. vehicle width guide lines *D parallel to the
parking space * C while referring to the
predictive course lines.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTIVE
AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown closer than the actual distance.
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1 m) to the
place * A , but the actual 3 ft (1 m) distance on
the hill is the place *
B . Note that any object on
the hill is viewed in the monitor further than it
appears.
SAA1978 SAA1979
Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
lines are shown further than the actual distance.
the hill is viewed in the monitor closer than it
appears.
SAA1923 SAA1980
Backing up near a projecting object Backing up behind a projecting object

The predictive course lines *
A do not touch the The position * C is shown further than the
object in the display. However, the vehicle may position * B in the display. However, the
hit the object if it projects over the actual position *C is actually at the same distance
backing up course. as the position * A . The vehicle may hit the
object when backing up to the position * A if
the object projects over the actual backing up
course. PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE SETTINGS
To turn ON or OFF the predictive course line
display, push the SETTING button, select the
“Camera” key and push the ENTER button.
. Predictive Course Lines
When this item is turned to ON, the predictive
course lines will be displayed on the monitor
when the shift lever is in the “R” (Reverse)
position.
HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN
To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness, Tint,
Color, Contrast and Black Level of the RearView
SAA2404 Monitor, push the SETTING button with the
Models with navigation system RearView Monitor on, select the item key and
adjust the level using the multi-function con-
troller.
Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color,
Contrast and Black Level of the RearView
Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure
the parking brake is firmly applied.
OPERATING TIPS
. When the shift lever is shifted to the R
(Reverse) position, the monitor screen auto-
matically changes to the RearView Monitor
mode. However, the radio can be heard.
. When the view is switched, the display
SAA2606 images on the screen may be displayed with
Models without navigation system some delay.
. When the temperature is extremely high or water.
low, the screen may not clearly display
objects. This is not a malfunction.
. When strong light is directly coming on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly. This is not a malfunction.
. Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
screen. This is due to strong reflected light
from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.
. The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light. This is not a malfunction.
. The colors of objects on the RearView
Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual
color of objects. This is not a malfunction.
. Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a
dark environment. This is not a malfunction.
. If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the
camera, the RearView Monitor may not
display object clearly. Clean the camera.
. Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to
clean the camera. This will cause discolora-
tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth
dampened with diluted mild cleaning agent
and then wipe with a dry cloth.
. Do not damage the camera as the monitor
screen may be adversely affected.
. Do not use wax on the camera window.
Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth
dampened with mild detergent diluted with
REAR AND REAR-WIDE VIEW
MONITOR WITH MOVING OBJECT
DETECTION (MOD) (if so equipped)
When the shift lever is shifted into the R Monitor appear visually opposite,
(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows just like ones viewed in the inside CAUTION
view to the rear of the vehicle. and outside rearview mirrors.
Do not scratch the camera lens when
The system is designed as an aid to the driver in . Make sure that the lift gate is
detecting large stationary objects to help avoid cleaning dirt or snow from the camera
securely closed when backing up.
damaging the vehicle. The system will not detect lens.
. Underneath the bumper and the
small objects below the bumper and may not
corner areas of the bumper cannot
detect objects close to the bumper or on the
be viewed on the RearView Monitor
ground.
because of its monitoring range
Available views: limitation.
. Rear View . Do not put anything on the Rear-
An approximately 150-degree view of the View camera. The RearView camera
rear of the vehicle. is installed above the license plate.
. Rear-Wide View . When washing the vehicle with
An approximately 180-degree view of the high-pressure water, be sure not to
rear of the vehicle. spray it around the camera. Other-
wise, water may enter the camera
unit causing water condensation on
WARNING the lens, a malfunction, fire or an
electric shock.
. The RearView Monitor is a conve-
nience but it is not a substitute for . Do not strike the camera. It is a
proper backing up. Always turn and precision instrument. Otherwise, it
check that it is safe to do so before may malfunction or cause damage
backing up. Always back up slowly. resulting in a fire or an electric
shock.
. Objects viewed in the RearView
Monitor differ from actual distance
because a wide-angle lens is used.
Objects viewed in the RearView
. When the shift lever is moved into the R
(Reverse) position *1 while another screen
* A is displayed, RearView Monitor oper-
ates and the rear-wide view * B is dis-
played.
. When selecting the “View” key on the
screen using the multi-function controller
and pushing the ENTER button * 3 , the
view on the screen will change to the
rearview screen * C . When the “View” key
is pushed again *3 , the rear-wide view * B
is displayed.
. The rear-wide view screen and/or rear view
screen switches to another screen * A
when the shift lever is moved out of the R
(Reverse) position *2 .
JVH0364X
HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY position

*
A : Original screen before the RearView *
2 : Shift lever is moved out of the R (Reverse)
Monitor is operated position
* : Rear-wide view screen
B *
3 : Select the “View” key on the screen
* : Rear view screen

C
*
1 : Shift lever is moved into the R(Reverse)
only):
Indicate the predictive course when backing up.
The predictive course lines will be displayed on
the monitor when the shift lever is in the R
(Reverse) position and the steering wheel is
turned. The predictive course lines will move
depending on how much the steering wheel is
turned and will not be displayed while the
steering wheel is in the neutral position.
SAA1896 JVH0371X
Rear view Rear-wide view

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width The rear-wide view displays an approximately
and distances to objects with reference to the 180-degree area. The predictive course lines
bumper line *A are displayed on the monitor. are not displayed on the rear-wide view.
Distance guide lines: Distance guide lines:
Indicate distances from the bumper. Indicates distances from the bumper.
. Red line * : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
1 . Red line * 1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
. Yellow line *
2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m) . Yellow line *2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m)
. Green line *3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m) . Green line * 3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)
. Green line *4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m) . Green line * 4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m)
Vehicle width guide lines * 5 : Vehicle width guide lines * 5 :
Indicate the vehicle width when backing up. Indicates the vehicle width when backing up.
Predictive course lines *
6 (Rear view
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTIVE . When the steering wheel is turned course.
COURSE LINES with the ignition switch in the “ACC”
position, the predictive course lines
may not be displayed correctly.
WARNING
. The displayed lines will appear
. Always turn and check that it is safe slightly off to the right because the
to park your car before backing up. RearView camera is not installed in
Always back up slowly. the rear center of the vehicle.
. Use the displayed lines as a refer- . The distance guide line and the
ence. The lines are highly affected vehicle width guide line should be
by the number of occupants, fuel used as a reference only when the
level, vehicle position, road condi- vehicle is on a level paved surface.
tion and road grade. The distance viewed on the monitor
is for reference only and may be
. If the tires are replaced with differ-
different than the actual distance
ent sized tires, the predictive course
between the vehicle and displayed
line may not be displayed correctly.
objects.
. On a snow-covered or slippery road,
. When backing up the vehicle up a
there may be a difference between
hill, objects viewed in the monitor
the predictive course line and the
are further than they appear. When
actual course line.
backing up the vehicle down a hill,
. If the battery is disconnected or objects viewed in the monitor are
becomes discharged, the predictive closer than they appear. Use the
course lines may not be displayed inside mirror or glance over your
correctly. If this occurs, perform the shoulder to properly judge dis-
following procedures. tances to other objects.
— Drive the vehicle on a straight
road for more than 5 minutes. The vehicle width and predictive course
lines are wider than the actual width and
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space
completely, move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position and apply the parking brake.
SAA1897 SAA1898
1. Visually check that the parking space is safe 3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the
before parking your vehicle. steering wheel so that the predictive course
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on lines *B enter the parking space * C .
the screen * A as illustrated when the shift 4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the
lever is moved to the R (Reverse) position. vehicle width guide lines *D parallel to the
parking space * C while referring to the
predictive course lines.
the hill is viewed in the monitor further than it
appears.
SAA1978 SAA1979
Difference between predictive and actual Backing up on a steep downhill:

distances When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
Backing up on a steep uphill:
lines are shown further than the actual distance.
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the For example, the display shows 3 ft (1 m) to the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide place * A , but the actual 3 ft (1 m) distance on
lines are shown closer than the actual distance. the hill is the place *
the hill is viewed in the monitor closer than it
appears.
SAA1923 SAA1980
Backing up near a projecting object: Backing up behind a projecting object:

The predictive course lines *
A do not touch the The position * C is shown further than the
object in the display. However, the vehicle may position * B in the display. However, the
hit the object if it projects over the actual position *C is actually at the same distance
backing up course. as the position * A . The vehicle may hit the
object when backing up to the position * A if
the object projects over the actual backing up
course. . The colors of objects on the RearView MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD)
HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual FUNCTION
color of objects. This is not a malfunction. The Moving Object Detection (MOD) system
To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness, Tint,
. Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a can inform the driver of moving objects when
Color, Contrast and Black Level of the RearView
dark environment. This is not a malfunction. driving out of garages, maneuvering into parking
Monitor, push the SETTING button with the
RearView Monitor on, select the item key and . If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the lots and in other such instances.
adjust the level using the multi-function con- camera, the RearView Monitor may not The MOD system detects moving objects by
troller. display object clearly. Clean the camera. using image processing technology on the
. Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to image shown in the display. The RearView
Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color,
clean the camera. This will cause discolora- camera is equipped with the automatic washer
Contrast and Black Level of the RearView
tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth function using window washer fluid.
Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure
dampened with diluted mild cleaning agent
the parking brake is firmly applied. When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
and then wipe with a dry cloth.
OPERATING TIPS position and the vehicle speed is approximately
. Do not damage the camera as the monitor 5 MPH (8 km/h) or less, the MOD system
. When the shift lever is shifted to the R screen may be adversely affected. detects moving objects in the RearView Monitor.
(Reverse) position, the monitor screen auto- . Do not use wax on the camera window. The MOD system will not operate if the lift gate/
matically changes to the RearView Monitor Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth trunk is open or the washer fluid is at a low level.
mode. However, the radio can be heard. dampened with mild detergent diluted with
. When the temperature is extremely high or water.
low, the screen may not clearly display . The MOD system will not operate if the WARNING
objects. This is not a malfunction. washer fluid is at a low level. Refill the
. When strong light directly enters the cam- washer fluid if the level is low. (See . The MOD system is not a substitute
era, objects may not be displayed clearly. “Window washer fluid” in the “8. Mainte- for proper vehicle operation and
This is not a malfunction. nance and do-it-yourself” section.) does not prevent contact with the
. Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the objects surrounding the vehicle.
screen. This is due to strong reflected light When maneuvering, always use the
from the bumper. This is not a malfunction. outside mirror and RearView mirror
. The screen may flicker under fluorescent and turn and look to check the
light. This is not a malfunction. surroundings to make sure it is safe
to maneuver.
. The MOD system is not designed to chime sound, and it may not be moving objects.
detect surrounding stationary ob- heard. . If your vehicle sustains damage to
jects. . The MOD system performance will the parts where the camera is
be limited according to environmen- installed, leaving it misaligned or
If the MOD system detects moving objects tal conditions and surrounding ob- bent, the sensing zone may be
behind the vehicle, a yellow frame will be jects such as: altered and the MOD system may
displayed on the camera image and a chime not detect objects properly.
— When there is low contrast be-
sounds.
tween background and the mov-
When the MOD system detects a moving object ing objects
behind the vehicle, the yellow frame will be
displayed on the view where the objects are — When there is blinking source of
detected and a chime will sound once. While the light.
MOD system continues to detect moving — When strong light such as an-
objects, the yellow frame continues to be other vehicle’s headlight or sun-
displayed. light is present.
When dirt is detected on the camera during — When there is dirt, water drops
driving, a camera washer operates automatically. or snow on the camera lens.
The washer will stop operation after a period of
time. — When the position of the moving
objects in the display is not
changed.
WARNING . The MOD system might detect
something like flowing water dro-
. Do not use the MOD system when plets on the camera lens, white
towing a trailer. The system may not smoke from the muffler, moving
function properly. shadows, etc.
. Excessive noise (for example, audio . The MOD system may not function
system volume or open vehicle properly depending on the speed,
window) will interfere with the direction, distance or shape of the
JVH0365X JVH0345X JVH0344X
Turning the MOD system on or off 2. Then select the “Moving Object Detection When the MOD system is turned on, the MOD
(MOD)” key and push the ENTER button. icon *
1 is displayed.
1. Push the SETTING button, select the “Driver
Assistance” key and push the ENTER MOD malfunction
button. When the yellow MOD icon is displayed in the
view, the system is not functioning properly. This
will not hinder normal driving operation but the
system should be inspected by a NISSAN
dealer.
VENTILATORS
Camera maintenance
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera,
the MOD system may not operate properly.
Clean the camera.
The camera washer operates automatically
when dirt is detected on the camera during
driving. The washer then stops operation after a
period of time.
SAA1991 SAA1066
Center ventilators Rear ventilators (for Hardtop models)
SAA1990 SAA0564B
Side ventilators Rear ventilators (for CrossCabriolet models)
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction

of ventilators. WARNING
: This symbol indicates that the ventilators are
closed. . The air conditioner cooling function
: This symbol indicates that the ventilators are operates only when the engine is
open. running.
. Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the support
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should not be left alone either. On
hot, sunny days, temperatures in a
closed vehicle could quickly become
high enough to cause severe or
SAA2723
possibly fatal injuries to people or
animals.
. Do not use the recirculation mode
for long periods as it may cause the
interior air to become stale and the
windows to fog up.
Start the engine and operate the heater and air

conditioner system.
You can individually set the driver and front
passenger side temperature using each tem-
perature control buttons.
SAA1520
For the models with the color display screen,
push the “STATUS” button to display the heater
and air conditioner status screen. (See “How to
use STATUS button” earlier in this section.)
SAA2040
Type A
1. Temperature control button (driver side)
2. “AUTO” automatic air conditioner ON button
3. “ ” front defroster button
4. “ ” fan speed control dial/OFF button
5. “ ” intake air control button
6. “MODE” manual air flow control button
7. Temperature control button (passenger side)
8. “A/C” air conditioner ON/OFF button
9. “ ” rear window defroster button (See “Rear
window and outside mirror defroster switch” in
the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)
10. “ ” upper vent system button
11. “DUAL” zone control ON/OFF button
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating
(AUTO)
This mode may be used all year round. The
system works automatically to control the inside
temperature, air flow distribution and fan speed
after the preferred temperature is set manually.
1. Push the “AUTO” button on. (The indicator
on the button will illuminate and AUTO will
be displayed.)
2. Operate the driver side temperature control
SAA2834
buttons (type A) or dial (type B) to set the
desired temperature.
Type B
1. “AUTO” automatic air conditioner ON button/ Adjust the temperature to about 758F
Temperature control dial (driver side) (248C) for normal operation.
2. “A/C” air conditioner ON/OFF button . The temperature of the passenger com-
3. “ ” intake air control button partment will be maintained automati-
4. “ ” fan speed control dial/ON/OFF button cally. Air flow distribution and fan speed
5. “ ” upper vent system button will also be controlled automatically.
6. “DUAL” zone control ON/OFF button/Tempera-
3. You can individually set driver and front
ture control dial (passenger side)
passenger side temperature using each
7. “ ” front defroster button
temperature control buttons (type A) or dial
8. “ ” rear window defroster button (See “Rear
(type B). When the “DUAL” button is pushed
window and outside mirror defroster switch” in
the “2. Instruments and controls” section.) or the passenger side temperature control
9. “MODE” manual air flow control button
buttons (type A) or dial (type B) is/are
operated, the DUAL indicator will come on.
To turn off the passenger side temperature
control, push the “DUAL” button.
A visible mist may be seen coming from the . To quickly remove ice from the outside of the mode “ ”.
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is windows, turn the “ ” fan speed control
cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal- dial and set it to the maximum position. Outside air circulation
function. . As soon as possible after the windshield is Push the intake air control button “ ” to
clean, push the “AUTO” button to return to change the air circulation from the intake air to
Heating (A/C OFF) the outside air. The indicator light “ ” will turn
the auto mode.
The air conditioner does not activate in this off.
. When the “ ” front defroster button is
mode. When you need to heat only, use this
pushed, the air conditioner will automatically Automatic air intake control
mode.
be turned on at outside temperatures above
In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be
1. Push the “A/C” button. (The A/C indicator 238F (−58C) to defog the windshield, and
controlled automatically. To manually control
will turn off.) the air recirculate mode will automatically be the intake air, push the intake air control button
2. Operate the temperature control buttons turned off. “ ”. To return to the automatic control mode,
(type A) or dial (type B) to set the desired Outside air is drawn into the passenger push the intake air control button “ ” for
temperature. compartment to improve the defogging about 2 seconds. The indicator lights will flash
. The temperature of the passenger compart- performance. twice, and then the intake air will be controlled
ment will be maintained automatically. Air MANUAL OPERATION automatically.
flow distribution and fan speed are also
Fan speed control Air flow control
controlled automatically.
. Do not set the temperature lower than the Turn the “ ” fan speed control dial to Pushing the “MODE” manual air flow control
outside air temperature. Otherwise the manually control the fan speed. button selects the air outlet to:
system may not work properly. Push the “AUTO” button to return to automatic : Air flows from center and side ventilators.
. Not recommended if windows fog up. control of the fan speed. : Air flows from center and side ventilators
and foot outlets.
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging Air recirculation : Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
1. Push the “ ” front defroster button. (The Push the intake air control button “ ” to : Air flows from defroster and foot outlets.
indicator light on the button will come on.) recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The
indicator light “ ” will come on.
2. Operate the temperature control buttons
(type A) or dial (type B) to set the desired The air recirculation mode cannot be activated
temperature. when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting
Upper vent system extremely decreased or when windows fog
When the “ ” upper vent system button is up easily when operating heater or air
pushed, the air flow against the driver’s or conditioning system.
passenger’s upper body becomes gentle. The SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
indicator light on the button will come on. The air conditioning system in your NISSAN is
In this mode, air from the center ventilators flows charged with a refrigerant designed with the
both straight and upward in order to control the environment in mind. This refrigerant will not
cabin temperature without blowing air directly harm the earth’s ozone layer. However,
on the occupants. special charging equipment and lubricant are
If you want strong air flow against your upper required when servicing your NISSAN air con-
body, push the “ ” button to turn the indicator ditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubri-
light off. cants will cause severe damage to your air
SAA1989
conditioning system. (See “Capacities and
TO TURN THE SYSTEM ON/OFF recommended fuel/lubricants” later in this sec-
Push the “OFF” or “ON·OFF” button when the OPERATING TIPS tion in the “9. Technical and consumer informa-
heater and air conditioner is off. The system will
The sunload sensor * A on the instrument panel tion” section for air conditioning system
turn on with the settings that were used refrigerant and lubricant recommendations.)
helps maintain a constant temperature. Do not
immediately before the system was turned off. Your NISSAN dealer will be able to service your
put anything on or around this sensor.
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER environmentally friendly air conditioning system.
The air conditioning system is equipped with an
in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, pollen, WARNING
dust, etc. To make sure the air conditioner heats,
defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace the The system contains refrigerant under
filter in accordance with the maintenance high pressure. To avoid personal injury,
schedule in the NISSAN Service and Mainte- any air conditioner service should be
nance Guide. To replace the filter, contact a done only by an experienced technician
NISSAN dealer. with the proper equipment.
The filter should be replaced if air flow is
AUDIO SYSTEM
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS function in your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change
Radio
because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON signal distance and interference from other
position and push the radio band select button vehicles can work against ideal reception.
to turn on the radio. If you listen to the radio with Described below are some of the factors that
the engine not running, the ignition switch can affect your radio reception.
should be pushed to the ACC position.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
Radio reception is affected by station signal cause interference or a buzzing noise to come
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build- from the audio system speakers. Storing the
ings, bridges, mountains and other external device in a different location may reduce or
influences. Intermittent changes in reception eliminate the noise.
quality normally are caused by these external
influences. SAA0306
Using a cellular phone in or near the FM radio reception:

vehicle may influence radio reception Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30
quality. miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single
Radio reception: channel) FM having slightly more range than
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with stereo FM. External influences may sometimes
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance interfere with FM station reception even if the
radio reception. These circuits are designed to FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). The
extend reception range, and to enhance the strength of the FM signal is directly related to the
quality of that reception. distance between the transmitter and receiver.
FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting
However there are some general characteristics
many of the same characteristics as light. For
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
example they will reflect off objects.
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even
when the finest equipment is used. These Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from
characteristics are completely normal in a given a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
reception area, and do not indicate any mal- and/or drift.
Static and flutter: During signal interference from Satellite radio reception (if so equipped):
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position, When the satellite radio is used for the first time
usually in conjunction with increased distance or the battery has been replaced, the satellite
from the station transmitter, static or flutter can radio may not work properly. This is not a
be heard. This can be reduced by lowering the malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with the
treble setting to reduce the treble response. satellite radio ON and the vehicle outside of any
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective metal or large building for the satellite radio to
characteristics of FM signals, direct and re- receive all of the necessary data.
flected signals reach the receiver at the same The satellite radio mode requires an active
time. The signals may cancel each other, SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription. The sa-
resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound. tellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and
AM radio reception: Guam.
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna
bend around objects and skip along the ground. can affect satellite radio performance. Remove
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the the ice to restore satellite radio reception.
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of For Hardtop models: The satellite radio perfor-
these characteristics. AM signals are also mance may be affected if cargo carried on the
subject to interference as they travel from roof blocks the satellite radio signal. If possible,
transmitter to receiver. do not put cargo near the satellite antenna.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas with SAA0480
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in Compact Disc (CD) player
areas where no obstacles exist. . Do not force a compact disc into the CD
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical insert slot. This could damage the CD and/
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights. or CD changer/player.
. Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed
could damage the CD and/or CD changer.
. During cold weather or rainy days, the player . This audio system can only play prerecorded
may malfunction due to the humidity. If this CDs. It has no capabilities to record or burn
occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or CDs.
ventilate the player completely. . If the CD cannot be played, one of the
. The player may skip while driving on rough following messages will be displayed.
roads. CHECK DISC:
. The CD player sometimes cannot function — Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly
when the passenger compartment tempera- (the label side is facing up, etc.).
ture is extremely high. Decrease the tem- — Confirm that the CD is not bent or
perature before use. warped and it is free of scratches.
. Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) round PUSH EJECT:
discs that have the “COMPACT disc DIGI-
This is an error due to the temperature inside
TAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or packaging.
the player is too high. Remove the CD by
. Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight. pushing the EJECT button, and after a short
. CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, scratched, time reinsert the CD. The CD can be played
covered with fingerprints, or that have pin when the temperature of the player returns
holes may not work properly. to normal.
. The following CDs may not work properly: UNPLAYABLE:
— Copy control compact discs (CCCD) The file is unplayable in this audio system
— Recordable compact discs (CD-R) (only MP3 or WMA CD). LHA0484
— Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
. Do not use the following CDs as they may DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) player
cause the CD player to malfunction. (models with navigation system)
— 3.1 in (8 cm) discs . Do not force a compact disc into the CD/
— CDs that are not round DVD insert slot. This could damage the CD/
DVD player.
— CDs with a paper label
. During cold weather or rainy days, the player
— CDs that are warped, scratched, or have
may malfunction due to humidity. If this
abnormal edges
occurs, remove the CD/DVD and dehumidify
or ventilate the player completely. — 3.1 in (8 cm) discs — The file is not MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A or
. The player may skip while driving on rough — CD/DVDs that are not round DivX® type.
roads. — CD/DVDs with a paper label Region Invalid:
. The CD/DVD player sometimes cannot — CD/DVDs that are warped, scratched or — The DVD is not for region 1 or all regions.
function when the passenger compartment have abnormal edges Use DVDs with a region code “1”, “ALL”
temperature is extremely high. Decrease the — This audio system can only play pre- or “1 included” for your DVD entertain-
temperature before use. recorded CD/DVDs. It has no capabilities ment system. (The region code * A is
. Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) round to record or burn CD/DVDs. displayed as a small symbol printed on
discs that have the “COMPACT disc DIGI- the top of the DVD * B .) This vehicle-
. If the CD/DVD cannot be played, one of the
TAL AUDIO” or “DVD Video” logo on the following messages will be displayed. installed DVD player cannot play DVDs
disc or packaging. with a region code other than “1” or
Disc Read Error:
. Do not expose the CD/DVD to direct “ALL”.
— Confirm that the CD/DVD is inserted
sunlight. correctly (the label side is facing up, Copyright and trademark:
. CD/DVDs that are of poor quality, dirty, etc.). . The technology protected by the U.S. patent
scratched, covered with fingerprints, or that — Confirm that the CD/DVD is not bent or and other intellectual property rights owned
have pinholes may not work properly. warped and it is free of scratches. by Macrovision Corporation and other right
. The following CD/DVDs are not guaranteed Please Eject Disc: holders is adopted for this system.
to play: . This copyright protected technology cannot
— This may be an error due to the
— Copy control compact discs (CCCD) temperature inside the player being too be used without a permit from Macrovision
— Recordable compact discs (CD-R) high. Remove the CD/DVD by pushing Corporation. It is limited to be personal use,
— Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) the EJECT button, and after a short time etc., as long as the permit from Macrovision
— Recordable DVDs (DVD±R, DVD±R DL) reinsert the CD/DVD. The CD/DVD can Corporation is not issued.
— Rewritable DVDs (DVD±RW, DVD±RW be played when the temperature of the . Modifying or disassembling is prohibited.
DL) player returns to normal. If the error . Dolby digital is manufactured under license
. Do not use the following CD/DVDs as they persists, consult your local dealership. from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.
may cause the CD/DVD player to malfunc- Unplayable File: . Dolby and the double D mark “ ” are
tion. — The file may be copy protected. trademarks of Dolby Laboratories, Inc.
. DTS and DTS 2.0 “ ” are registered — Do not pull or drop the cable.
trademarks of DTS, Inc. CAUTION — Do not hit or press the USB port
Parental level (parental control): or USB device with hands, feet,
. Do not force the USB device into the
DVDs with the parental control setting can be or objects.
USB port. Inserting the USB device
played with this system. Please use your own
tilted or up-side-down into the port — Do not store objects with sharp
judgement to set the parental control with the
may damage the USB device and edges in the storage area where
system.
the port. Make sure that the USB the cable is stored.
Disc selection: device is connected correctly into — Do not leave the USB device and
The following disc formats can be played with the USB port. attached devices in the vehicle
the DVD drive. . Do not grab the USB port cover (if compartment. When not in use
. DVD-VIDEO so equipped) when pulling the USB for extended periods of time,
. VIDEO-CD device out of the port. This could store the cable and USB device
. CD-DA (Conventional Compact Disc) damage the port and the cover. in a clean, dust free environment
. DTS-CD . Do not leave the USB cable in a at room temperature and with-
place where it can be pulled unin- out direct sun exposure.
USB (Universal Serial Bus) (if so tentionally. Pulling the cable may — Do not use the cable for any
equipped) break the wire, USB device or the other purposes than its intended
port. use in the vehicle.
WARNING . To avoid damage and loss of func-
tion when using a USB device, note The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device.
Do not connect or disconnect the USB the following precautions. USB devices should be purchased separately
device while driving. Doing so can be a — Do not bend the cable exces- as necessary.
distraction. If distracted you could lose sively 1.6 in (40 mm) radius This system cannot be used to format USB
control of your vehicle and cause an minimum. devices. To format a USB device, use a personal
accident or serious injury. computer.
— Do not twist the cable exces-
sively (more than 180 degrees). In some states/area, the USB device for the
front seats plays only sound without images for
regulatory reasons, even when the vehicle is exposed to fluids other than water, evapora- . An iPod nano® (2nd Generation) will con-
parked. tive residue may cause a short circuit tinue to fast-forward or rewind if it is
This system supports various USB memory between the connector pins and USB port. disconnected during a seek operation.
devices, USB hard drives and iPod® players. In this case, replace the cable and USB port. . An incorrect song title may appear when the
Some USB devices may not be supported by Otherwise damage to the USB device and a Play Mode is changed while using an iPod
this system. loss of function may occur. nano® (2nd Generation)
. If the cable is damaged (insulation cut, . Audiobooks may not play in the same order
. Partitioned USB devices may not be played
correctly.
connectors cracked, contamination such as as they appear on an iPod®.
liquids, dust, dirt, etc. in the connectors), do . Large video files cause slow responses in an
. Some characters used in other languages
not use the cable. Replace the cable with a iPod®. The vehicle center display may
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear
new one. momentarily black out, but will soon recover.
properly in the display. Using English lan-
. Do not put a USB device in a location where . If an iPod® automatically selects large video
guage characters with a USB device is
static electricity occurs, electrical noise is files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle
recommended.
generated or hot air from the air conditioner center display may momentarily black out,
General notes for USB use: blows directly on it. Doing so may cause the but will soon recover.
. The USB device may not function when the data stored on the USB device to be
passenger compartment temperature is ex- corrupted. Compressed Audio Files (MP3/WMA/
tremely high. Lower the temperature before ®
Notes for iPod use:
AAC)
use. Explanation of terms:
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
. During cold weather or rainy days, the player . MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
the U.S. and other countries.
may malfunction due to humidity. If this Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
occurs, remove the USB device and dehu- . Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause
a checkmark to be displayed on and off most well known compressed digital audio
midify or ventilate the USB player comple- file format. This format allows for near “CD
tely. (flickering). Always make sure that the iPod®
is connected properly. quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
. Do not connect a USB device if a connector, normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
cable or USB port is wet. Allow the . An iPod nano® (1st Generation) may remain
audio track can reduce the file size by
connector, cable, and USB port to dry in fast forward or rewind mode if it is
approximately a 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1
completely before connecting the USB connected during a seek operation. In this
kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no
device. (Wait for 24 hours or more until it case, please manually reset the iPod®.
perceptible loss in quality. The compression
is dry.) If the connector and USB port are
reduces certain parts of sound that seem . ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
inaudible to most people. part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
. WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a contains information about the digital music
compressed audio format created by Micro- file such as song title, artist, album title,
soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.
codec offers greater file compression than ID3 tag information is displayed on the
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.
digital audio tracks in the same amount of * Windows® and Windows Media® are regis-
space when compared to MP3s at the same tered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
level of quality. Corporation in the United States of America
. AAC/M4A — Advanced Audio Coding and/or other countries.
(AAC) is a lossy audio compression format.
Audio files that have been encoded with
AAC are generally smaller in size and deliver
a higher quality of sound than MP3.
. Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
. Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal SAA2494
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
Playback order:
conversion) per second.
. The folder names of folders not containing
. Multisession — Multisession is one of the
compressed audio files are not shown in the
methods for writing data to media. Writing
display.
data once to the media is called a single
session, and writing more than once is . If there is a file in the top level of a disc/USB,
called a multisession. “Root Folder” is displayed.
. The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software, so
the files might not play in the desired order.
. Music playback order of compressed audio
files is as illustrated.
Specification chart (for FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD) changer):
Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

CD, CD-R, CD-RW: ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
Supported file systems
* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not
supported.
Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
MP3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Supported Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4
versions*1 Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
WMA*2 Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)
Tag information (Song title and Artist name)
WMA tag (WMA only)
With navigation system:
Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Folder levels
Without navigation system:
Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM
Displayable character codes*3 Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.
*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.
Specification chart (for FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD) player):
Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM*5, DVD±R*5, DVD±RW*5, DVD±R DL*5, USB2.0
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM*5, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±R DL: ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2,
Romeo, Joliet
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
Supported file systems * Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported.
UDF Bridge (UDF1.02+ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0
* VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.
USB memory: FAT16, FAT32
Version MPEG1 Audio Layer 3
MP3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
Supported
WMA*2 Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz
versions*1
Version MPEG-AAC
AAC*5 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 96 kHz
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)
Tag information (Song title and Artist name)
WMA tag (WMA only)
Models with navigation system:
Folder levels: 8, Folders: 512 (including root folder), Files: 5,000
Folder levels
Models without navigation system:
Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big
Displayable character codes*3 Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian), 07: SHIFT-JIS
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.
*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.
*5 Models with navigation system
Troubleshooting guide:
Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Check if the disc or USB device was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the
player.
If an error occurs due to an increase in temperature, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will
be played.
Cannot play
Files with extensions other than “.MP3 (.mp3)”, “.WMA (.wma)”, “.AAC (.aac)”, “.M4A (.m4a)”, or “.AA3 (.aa3)” cannot be played. In
addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the
specifications.
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of
compressed audio writing applications or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization processes, such as session close and disc close, have been performed for the disc.
Check if the disc or USB device is protected by copyright.
Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
It takes a relatively long time before
If there are many folder or file levels on the disc or USB device, some time may be required before the music starts playing.
the music starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not
Music cuts off or skips
match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
System skips immediately to the next If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like .MP3, or when play is prohibited by copyright
song when playing. protection, the player will skip to the next song.
The songs do not play back in the The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the desired order.
desired order. Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on a USB device.
Compressed Video Files (models with Requirement for Supporting Video Playback:
navigation system)
Media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±RW DL, USB 2.0 Memory
Explanation of terms: CD,
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet, UDF Bridge
. DivX® - DivX® refers to the DivX® codec CD-R,
(UDF1.02+ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0
owned by DivX, Inc. used for a lossy CD-RW,
- ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
DVD,
compression of video based on MPEG-4. File Systems DVD±R,
- Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows
Vista-based computer) are not supported.
. AVI - AVI stands for Audio Video Interleave. DVD±RW,
- VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.
It is a standard file format originated by DVD±RW DL
Microsoft Corporation. A “.divx” encoded file USB Memory FAT16, FAT32
can be saved into the “.avi” file format for Video Codecs DivX3, DivX4, DivX5, DivX6
.divx, .avi
playback on this system if it meets the Audio Codecs MP3, MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3, AC3, LPCM
requirements stated in the table in this File Types
Video Codec ISO-MPEG4
section. However, not all the “.avi” files are .asf
Audio Codec G.726
playable on this system since different
Maximum Average 4Mbps
encodings can be used than the DivX® Bit Rates .divx, .avi
Maximum Peak 8Mbps
codec.
Minimum 32 6 32
. ASF - ASF stands for Advanced Systems .divx, .avi
Format. It is a file format owned by Microsoft Maximum 720 6 480
Resolution
Corporation. Note: Only “.asf” files that meet Minimum 32 6 32
.asf
the requirements stated in the table in this Maximum 720 6 576
section can be played.
. Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital video file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
Bluetooth® Audio player (models with . While an audio device is connected through
navigation system) a Bluetooth® wireless connection, the bat-
Bluetooth® is a trademark owned
tery power of the device may discharge
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and li- quicker than usual.
censed to Clarion Co., Ltd. . This system supports the Bluetooth® Audio
Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).
. ®
Some Bluetooth audio devices may not be
recognized by the in-vehicle audio system. . Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Bluetooth®
functions share the same frequency band
. It is necessary to set up the wireless
(2.4 GHz). Using the Bluetooth® and the
connection between a compatible Blue-
wireless LAN functions at the same time may
tooth® audio device and the in-vehicle
slow down or disconnect the communica-
Bluetooth® module before using the Blue-
tion and cause undesired noise. It is
tooth® audio player.
recommended that you turn off the wireless
. Operating procedure of the Bluetooth ® LAN (Wi-Fi) when using the Bluetooth®
audio player will vary depending on the functions.
device. Make sure you understand how to
operate an audio device before using it with
this system.
. The Bluetooth ® audio player may be
stopped under the following conditions:
— Receiving a hands-free call.
— Checking the connection to the hands-
free phone.
. Do not place a Bluetooth® audio device in
an area surrounded by metal or far away
from the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module to
prevent tone quality degradation and wire-
less connection disruption.
12. REW (rewind) button for SEEK/TRACK
13. FF (fast forward) button for SEEK/TRACK
14. AUX IN jack
For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-
tion precautions” earlier in this section.
Audio main operation
Head unit:
The radio has an FM diversity reception system,
which employs two antennas printed on the rear
window (for Hardtop models). This system
automatically switches to the antenna which is
receiving less interference.
The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and
high frequency ranges automatically in both
radio reception and CD playback.
ON·OFF/Volume control:
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position, and then push the ON·OFF/VOLUME
control knob while the system is off to call up the
SAA3473 mode (radio, CD or AUX) which was playing
immediately before the system was turned off.
FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC 5. CD LOAD button
While the system is on, pushing the ON·OFF/
(CD) CHANGER 6. AM·FM band select button VOLUME control knob turns the system off.
1. CD EJECT button 7. DISC button
8. AUX button
Turn the ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob to
2. ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob adjust the volume.
3. Radio station and CD selector buttons 9. DISP (display) change/CLOCK button
4. Radio tuning / MP3/WMA folder selector / 10. Radio/CD SCAN (tuning) button Adjusting sound quality:
AUDIO control knob 11. CD RPT (repeat)/RDM (random) play button Push the Audio control knob to change the
selecting mode as follows. “Hour Adjust”. If another audio source is playing when the radio
Bass ? Treble ? Fade ? Balance ? Speed 2. Turn the AUDIO knob *
4 to adjust hours. band select button is turned to ON, the audio
Sensitive Volume ? Beep source will automatically be turned off and the
3. Push the CLOCK button * 9 or AUDIO
last radio station played will come on.
Rotate the Audio control knob to adjust Bass, knob * 2 to enter. The display will show
Treble, Fade and Balance to the desired level. “Minute Adjust”. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the
radio will automatically change from stereo to
Fade adjusts the sound level between the front 4. Turn the AUDIO knob *
4 to adjust minutes.
and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the monaural reception.
sound between the right and left speakers.
5. Push the CLOCK button *
9 or AUDIO
knob *
4 to enter.
TUNE (Tuning):
These items can also be adjusted by pushing Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob for manual tuning.
The display will return to the regular clock
the AUDIO button.
display after 10 seconds.
. Speed Sensitive Vol. SEEK tuning:
If the power supply is disconnected, the clock
Sound volume is increased according to the Push the SEEK·CAT or TRACK button or
will not indicate the correct time.
vehicle speed. Choose the effect level from to tune from low to high or high to low
“HIGH”, “MID”, “LOW” or “OFF”. Readjust the time. frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting
. Beep tuning AM-FM radio operation station.
When this item is turned to ON, you will hear
a beep sound when you use a button. radio (FM/AM) band select: SCAN tuning:
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the Pushing the radio band select button will Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low
desired level, push the Audio control knob change the band as follows: to high frequencies and stops at each broad-
repeatedly until the radio or CD display re- casting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the
AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM
appears. Otherwise, the radio or CD display will button again during this 5 seconds period will
automatically reappear after about 5 seconds. When the radio band select button is pushed stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain
while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON tuned to that station.
CLOCK adjust: position, the radio will come on at the station last
If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5
played.
Push the CLOCK adjust button for more than seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next
1.5 seconds to turn on the CLOCK display. The last station/channel played will also come station.
on when the ON·OFF/VOL control knob is
1. Push and hold the CLOCK button * 9 for
pushed to ON.
more than 2 seconds until the display shows
*1 to * 6 Station memory operations: Compact Disc (CD) changer operation PLAY:
12 stations/channels can be set for the FM band Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
When the DISC (CD play) button is pushed with
(6 for FM1, 6 for FM2) and 6 stations can be set position, push the LOAD button and insert the
the system off and the compact disc loaded, the
for the AM band. compact disc into the slot with the label side
system will turn on and the compact disc will
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2 facing up. The compact disc will be guided
start to play.
using the radio band select button. automatically into the slot and start playing.
When the DISC button is pushed with the
2. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK, After loading the disc, the number of tracks on
compact disc loaded and the radio playing, the
SCAN or TUNE button. the disc and the play time will appear on the
radio will automatically be turned off and the
display.
3. Select the desired station/channel and keep compact disc will start to play.
pushing any of the desired station preset If the radio is already operating, it will auto-
buttons * 1 to * 6 until a beep sound is matically turn off and the compact disc will play. CD PLAY INFORMATION:
heard. (The radio mutes when the select If the system has been turned off while the When the DISP button is pushed for less than
button is pushed.) compact disc was playing, pushing the 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the
4. The channel indicator will then come on and ON·OFF/VOL control knob will start the com- disc information display will change as follows:
the sound will resume. Memorizing is now pact disc.
CD:
complete.
5. Other buttons can be set in the same CD LOAD:
manner. To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select
the loading position by pushing the CD insert CD with MP3 or WMA:
blows, the radio memory will be erased. In that
case, reset the desired stations. select button *
1 to * 6 , then insert the CD.
To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer in

succession, push the LOAD button for more
than 1.5 seconds.
The inserted slot numbers will illuminate on the
display.
(CD with MP3 or WMA) played, the first program in all the CDs will be
FF (Fast Forward), REW (Re-
played for 10 seconds.
wind)/APS (Automatic Program Search)
FF, APS REW: Pushing the button again during this 10 second
period will stop SCAN tuning.
Push the FF or REW button for more than 1.5
seconds while a CD is being played to fast If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within
CD EJECT:
forward or rewind through the track. When the 10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next
When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the disc program.
button is released, the compact disc will return
compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
to normal play speed. AUX (Auxiliary) input
ejected.
When the or button is pushed for less
To eject the discs selected by the CD select
than 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is AUX (Auxiliary) button:
button, push the EJECT button for less than 1.5
being played, the next track or the beginning of The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit.
seconds.
the current track on the CD will be played. The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any
To eject all the discs, push the EJECT button for
CD PLAY selection: standard analog audio input such as from a
more than 1.5 seconds.
To change to another CD already loaded into the portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or
When this button is pushed while the compact
player, push the CD play select buttons * 1 to laptop computers.
disc is being played, the compact disc will come
*6 .
out and the system will turn off.
Push the AUX button to play a compatible
device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.
REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM): If the compact disc comes out and is not
NISSAN strongly recommend using a stereo
removed, it will be pulled back into the slot
When the RPT button is pushed while the mini plug cable when connecting your music
to protect it.
compact disc is played, the play pattern can be device to the audio system. Music may not be
changed as follows: played properly when you use a monaural cable.
SCAN tuning:
(CD)
When the SCAN tuning button is pushed for
less than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being
played, the beginning of all the tracks of CDs will
be played for 10 seconds in sequence.
When the SCAN tuning button is pushed for
more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being
SAA1851
With navigation system
1. AM·FM band select button
2. SAT button
3. DISC·AUX button
SAA3474
1. CD EJECT button 8. FF (fast forward) button for SEEK/TRACK

2. ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob
3. Radio station and CD selector buttons
4. Radio tuning/AUDIO control knob
5. Radio SCAN (tuning) button
6. CD RPT (repeat)/RDM (random) play button
7. Radio CAT (category)/REW (rewind) button for
SEEK/TRACK
available channel list will be automatically follows:
updated in the radio. Push the ignition switch . Speed Sensitive Vol.
from LOCK to ACC to update the channel list. For more details, see “Vehicle information and
Audio main operation settings” earlier in this section.
Head unit: Switching the display:
The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and . Models with navigation system
high frequency ranges automatically in both Pushing the DISC·AUX button will switch
radio reception and CD playback. the displays as follows:
ON·OFF/Volume control: iPod®/USB ? CD/DVD ? Bluetooth ®
Audio ? AUX ? iPod®/USB
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position, and then push the ON·OFF button . Models without navigation system
SAA1852 while the system is off to turn on the last audio Pushing the AUX button will switch the
Without navigation system source, which was playing immediately before display as follows:
1. AM·FM band select button the system was turned off. While the system is USB/iPod® ? XM1 ? XM2 ? XM3 ?
2. DISC button on, pushing the ON·OFF button turns the system USB/iPod®
3. AUX/SAT band select button off.
FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.
DISC (CD) PLAYER Adjusting tone quality and speaker bal-
For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera- ance:
tion precautions” earlier in this section. To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, push
The satellite radio mode requires an active the Audio control knob. When the display shows
SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription. The sa- the setting you want to change (Bass, Treble,
tellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Balance and Fade), rotate the Audio control
Guam. knob to set the desired setting. For the other
It may take some time to receive the activation setting methods, see “How to use SETTING
signal after subscribing the SiriusXM Satellite button” earlier in this section.
Radio. After receiving the activation signal, an This vehicle has some sound effect functions as
FM-AM-SAT radio operation . OFF AIR (Broadcasting signed off)
radio (SAT) band select (models
. CHECK ANTENNA (Antenna connection
without navigation system):
radio (FM/AM) band select: error)
Push the satellite band select button to select
Pushing the radio band select button will . LOADING (When the initial setting is
the satellite radio mode XM1, XM2 or XM3.
change the band as follows: performed)
TUNE (Tuning): . UPDATING (When the satellite radio sub-
AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM
. For AM and FM radio scription is not active)
radio (SAT) band select (models with Turn the radio TUNE knob for manual tuning.
navigation system): . For SiriusXM Satellite Radio SCAN tuning:
Pushing the radio band select button will Turn the radio TUNE knob to seek channels Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low
change the band as follows: from all of the categories when any category to high frequencies and stop at each broad-
is not selected. casting station/channel for 5 seconds. Pushing
XM1 ? XM2 ? XM3 ? XM1
the button again during this 5 seconds period
When the radio band select button is pushed SEEK tuning/CATEGORY will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain
while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON (CAT): tuned to that station/channel.
position, the radio will come on at the channel
last played. . For AM and FM radio If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5
Push the SEEK button or to tune seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next
The last channel played will also come on when station/channel.
from low to high or high to low frequencies
the ON·OFF button is pushed to ON.
The satellite radio is not available in Alaska,
and to stop at the next broadcasting station. *1 to * 6 Station memory operations:
. For SiriusXM Satellite Radio 12 stations/channels can be set for the FM band
Hawaii and Guam.
Push the SEEK button or to tune (6 each for FM1 and FM2), 18 for SiriusXM
If another audio source is playing when the radio to the first channel of the next or previous Satellite Radio (6 each for XM1, XM2 and XM3)
band select button is turned to ON, the audio category. and 6 stations can be set for the AM band.
source will automatically be turned off and the During satellite radio reception, the following 1. Choose the radio band using the radio band
last radio channel played will come on. notices will be displayed under certain condi- select button.
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the tions.
2. Tune to the desired station/channel using
radio will automatically change from stereo to . NO SIGNAL (No signal is received while the the SEEK/TRACK, SCAN button or the
monaural reception. SAT tuner is connected.) radio TUNE knob.
3. Push and hold the desired station preset the current station will be stored as the new . Name
button *
1 to *6 until the radio mutes. preset. . Title
4. The station indicator will then come on and . Customize Channel List . Other
the sound will resume. Memorizing is now Selects specific channels to skip while using
complete. the TUNE, SEEK/CATEGORY or Menu- Compact Disc (CD) player operation
Categories feature. Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
5. Other buttons can be set in the same
. Favorite Artists & Songs position and insert the Compact Disc (CD) into
manner.
the slot with the label side facing up. The CD will
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse Stores the current artist or song that is being
be guided automatically into the slot and start
opens, the radio memory will be erased. In that played. Touch the “Alert” key to be reminded
playing.
case, reset the desired stations/channels. when the stored artist or song is playing on a
station while listening to SiriusXM Satellite After loading the CD, the number of tracks on
List (AM and FM radio) (models with Radio. the CD and the play time will appear on the
navigation system): display.
. Categories
When the “List” key on the display is selected Selecting a category will go to the first If the radio is already operating, it will auto-
while the FM or AM radio is being played, the channel in that category as defined by matically turn off and the CD will play.
preset station list will be displayed. SiriusXM Satellite Radio. If the system has been turned off while the CD
If 1 of the 6 preset stations listed is touched and . Direct Tune was playing, pushing the ON·OFF button will
held, the current station will be stored as the Inputs the channel number by using a start the CD.
new preset. keypad. Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.
Menu (SiriusXM Satellite Radio) (models Text (models without navigation system):
with navigation system): or PLAY:
When the “Text” key is selected with the multi-
When the “Menu” key on the display is selected function controller on the display and then the When the DISC·AUX or DISC (CD play) button
while the SiriusXM Satellite Radio is being ENTER button is pushed while the satellite radio is pushed with the system off and the CD
played, the menu list will be displayed. is being played, the text information listed below loaded, the system will turn on and the CD will
The following items are available. will be displayed on the screen. start to play.
. Preset List . CH Name When the DISC·AUX or DISC button is pushed
Displays the preset channel list. If 1 of the 6 . Category with the CD loaded and the radio playing, the
preset stations listed is touched and held, radio will automatically be turned off and the CD
will start to play. CD:
REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):
Menu (models with navigation system): . Disc title
When the RPT button is pushed while the CD is
When the “Menu” key on the display is selected . Track title played, the play pattern can be changed as
while the CD is being played, the menu screen CD with compressed audio files: follows:
will be displayed. The following menu options . Folder title (CD)
are available. . File title
. Folder List (for CD with compressed audio . Song title
files) . Album title
Displays the folder list. . Artist (CD with compressed audio files)
. Track List
Displays the track list. Next/Previous Track and Fast
. Play Mode Forward/Rewind:
Select a play mode from the following items. Push the FF or REW button for more than 1.5
— Normal seconds while a CD is being played to fast CD EJECT:
— 1 Folder Repeat (for CD with com- forward or rewind through the track. When the
When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the
pressed audio files) button is released, the CD will return to normal
CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.
— 1 Track Repeat play speed.
When this button is pushed while the CD is
— 1 Disc Random When the FF button is pushed for less than 1.5
being played, the CD will be ejected.
— 1 Folder Random (for CD with com- seconds while a CD is being played, the next
track on the CD will be played. If the CD comes out and is not removed, it
pressed audio files)
will be pulled back into the slot to protect
When the REW button is pushed for less than
Text (models without navigation system): it.
1.5 seconds within 3 seconds after the current
When the “Text” key is selected in the screen track started playing, the previous track will be
using the multi-function controller and then the played.
ENTER button is pushed while the CD is being
played, the music information below will be When the REW button is pushed for less than
displayed on the screen. 1.5 seconds after 3 seconds from when the
current track started playing, the beginning of
the current track will be played.
DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) PLAYER
OPERATION (models with navigation CAUTION
system)
. Only operate the DVD while the
Precautions vehicle engine is running. Operating
Start the engine when using the DVD entertain- the DVD for extended periods of
ment system. time with the engine OFF can dis-
Movies will not be shown on the front display charge the vehicle battery.
while the vehicle is in any drive position to . Do not allow the system to get wet.
reduce driver distraction. Audio is available Excessive moisture such as spilled
when a movie is played. To view movies in the liquids may cause the system to
front display, stop the vehicle in a safe location, malfunction.
move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and
. While playing VIDEO-CD media, this SAA2497
apply the parking brake. DVD player does not guarantee
complete functionality of all VI- Playing a DVD
WARNING DEO-CD formats.
DISC·AUX button:
Park the vehicle in a safe location for the
. The driver must not attempt to Display settings front seat occupants to operate the DVD
operate the DVD system or wear To adjust the front display mode, push the drive while watching the images.
the headphones while the vehicle is SETTING button while the DVD is being played.
in motion so that full attention may Push the DISC·AUX button on the instrument
be given to vehicle operation. To adjust the display ON/OFF, brightness, tint, panel and turn the display to the DVD mode.
color and contrast, select the “Display Adjust-
. Do not attempt to modify the system ment” key and then select each key.
When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed
to display a movie on the front automatically.
screen while the vehicle is being Then you can adjust each item using the multi-
The operation screen will be turned on when the
driven. Doing so may distract the function controller. After changes have been
DISC·AUX button located on the instrument
driver and may cause a collision and made push the BACK button to save the setting.
panel is pushed while a DVD is being played,
serious personal injury or death. and it will turn off automatically after a period of
time. To turn it on again, push the DISC·AUX
button again.
/ Commercial Skip:
DVD operation keys:
This function is only for DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR.
When the DVD is playing without the operation Select the “ ” or “ ” key to skip forward or
screen being shown, you may use the touch backwards by the set amount as defined in the
screen to select items from the displayed video. DVD Settings menu.
You may also use the multifunction controller to
select an item from the displayed video. When Top Menu:
the operation screen is being shown, use the When the “Top Menu” key is selected in the
multifunction controller or touch screen to select screen while a DVD is being played, the top
an item from the displayed menus. menu specific to each disc will be displayed. For
details, see the instructions on the disc.
PAUSE:
Select the “ ” key to pause the DVD. To SAA2498
resume playing the DVD, use the “PLAY” key. Example
DVD settings
PLAY:
Select the “Settings” key to adjust the following
Select the “ ” key to start playing the DVD, settings.
for example, after pausing the DVD.
Key (DVD-VIDEO):
STOP: Keys for the DVD menu operation are displayed.
Select the “ ” key to stop playing the DVD. : Move the cursor to select a DVD menu.
Enter: Enter the selected menu.
/ Next/Previous Chapter: Move: Change the display location by moving
Select the “ ” or “ ” key to skip the the operation key.
chapter(s) of the disc forward/backward. The Back: Return to the previous screen.
chapters will advance/go back the number of Hide: Hide the operation key.
times this key is selected.
Title Menu (DVD-VIDEO): “−” side is selected. Display:
Some menus specific to each disc will be Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO): To adjust the image quality of the screen, select
shown. For details, see the instructions on the the preferred adjustment items.
When this item is turned on, an angle mark will
disc. be shown on the bottom of the screen if the Audio:
Title Search (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR): scene can be seen from a different angle. Select the preferred language for audio.
The scene with the specified title will be Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO): Subtitle (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR):
displayed each time the “+” side or “−” side is DVD menus are automatically configured and
selected. Select the preferred language for subtitles.
the contents will be played directly when the
Group Search (VIDEO CD): “Menu Skip” key is turned on. Note that some Display Mode (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD,
discs may not be played directly even if this item DVD-VR):
A scene in the specified group will be displayed
each time the “+” side or “−” side is selected. is turned on. Select from the “Full”, “Wide”, “Normal” or
“Cinema” modes.
10 Key Search (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD, CM Skip (DVD-VIDEO):
CD-DA, DVD-VR): Select the “CM Skip” key. Choose the setting Title List (DVD-VR):
Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the time from 15, 30 or 60 seconds by selecting the Select the preferred title from the list.
number entry screen. Input the number to be “+” side or “−” side. Play Mode:
searched and select the “OK” key. The specified DRC (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR): Select the preferred play mode.
Title/Chapter or Group/Track will be played. DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) automati- PG/PL Mode (DVD-VR):
Select No. (VIDEO-CD): cally adjusts the soundtrack volume level to
Select the “PG” or “PL” mode.
Select the “Select No.” key to open the number maintain a more even sound to the speakers.
entry screen. Input the number to be searched DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD):
and select the “OK” key. The specified scene Select the “DVD Language” key to open the
will be played. number entry screen. Input the number corre-
Angle (DVD-VIDEO): sponding to the preferred language and select
If the DVD contains different angles (such as the “OK” key. The DVD top menu language will
moving images), the current image angle can be be changed to the one specified.
switched to another one. Select the “Angle” key.
The angle will change each time the “+” side or
CAUTION
. Depending on size and shape of
USB device, the console lid may not
fully close. Do not force console lid
closed as this may damage USB
device.
. Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the USB device and
the port. Make sure that the USB
SAA3557 SAA2500
device is connected correctly into
USB MEMORY OPERATION (if so the USB port. (Some USB devices
File selection (models with navigation
equipped) come with a mark as a guide.
Make sure that the mark is facing
system)
Audio main operation the correct direction before insert- When there are both audio and movie files in the
Open the console lid and connect a USB ing the device.) USB memory, the mode select screen is
displayed. Select the preferred content to play.
memory as illustrated. Then, push the DISC·AUX . Do not locate objects near the USB
or AUX button repeatedly to switch to the USB device to prevent the objects from When there is only one type of file, the audio or
memory mode. leaning on the USB device and the movie operation screen is displayed and the file
If the system has been turned off while the USB port. Pressure from the objects may will start to play.
memory was playing, pushing the ON·OFF/VOL damage the USB device and the If playback of a video file is restricted to a
control knob will start the USB memory. port. specific number of times, a confirmation screen
will appear asking you if you want to play the file.
Answer yes or no as requested by the display.
Audio file operation current track started playing, the beginning of
the current track will be played.
or PLAY: The multi-function controller can also be used to
When the DISC·AUX or AUX button is pushed select tracks when the USB memory is being
with the system off and the USB memory played.
inserted, the system will turn on. Folder selection:
If another audio source is playing and a USB To change to another folder on the USB
memory is inserted, push the DISC·AUX or AUX memory, turn the folder selector or choose a
button repeatedly until the center display folder displayed on the screen using the multi-
changes to the USB memory mode. function controller.
Next/Previous File and Fast REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):

SAA2501 Forward/Rewind:
When the RPT button is pushed while the USB
Models with navigation system Push the FF or REW button for more than 1.5 memory is played, the play pattern can be
seconds while a USB memory is being played to changed as follows.
fast forward or rewind through a track. When the
To change the play mode, push the RPT button
button is released, the USB memory will return
repeatedly and the mode will change as follows.
to normal play speed.
Normal ? 1 Folder Repeat ? 1 Track Repeat ?
When the FF button is pushed for less than 1.5
All Random ? 1 Folder Random ? Normal
seconds while a USB memory is being played,
the next track on the USB memory will be
played.
1.5 seconds within 3 seconds after the current
track started playing, the previous track will be
played.
SAA2611
1.5 seconds after 3 seconds from when the
. Play Mode
Select the preferred play mode.
Text (models without navigation system):
When the “Text” key is selected on the screen
using the multi-function controller and then the
ENTER button is pushed while a USB memory is
being played, the music information listed below
will be displayed on the screen.
. Folder title
. File title
. Song title
. Album Title
SAA2502 SAA2503
. Artist
Menu (models with navigation system): Movie file operation (models with navi-
There are some options available during play- gation system)
back. Select one of the following options that Park the vehicle in a safe location for the
are displayed on the screen if necessary. Refer front seat occupants to operate the USB
to the following information for each item. memory while watching the images.
. Movie Playback
Switch to the movie playback mode. This PLAY:
item is displayed only when a USB memory When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with the
contains movie files. system off and the USB memory inserted, the
. Folder List/Track List system will turn on.
Displays the folder or track list. The “Movie If another audio source is playing and a USB
Playback” key is also displayed in this list memory is inserted, push the DISC·AUX button
screen, and enables switching to the movie repeatedly until the center display changes to
playback mode. the USB memory mode.
Operation keys: List:
To operate the USB memory, select the desired Select the “List” key on the movie file operation
key displayed on the operation screen using the screen to display the file list.
multi-function controller.
Pause
Select the “ ” key to pause the movie file. To
resume playing the movie file, select the “ ”
key.
Play
Select the “ ” key to start playing a movie file,
for example, after pausing a movie file. SAA2504
Example
STOP Settings:
Select the “ ” key to stop playing a movie file. Select the “Settings” key to adjust the following
settings.
Skip (Next chapter) . Audio File Playback
Select the “ ” key to skip the chapter(s) of Switch to the audio playback mode. This
the disc forward. The chapters will advance the item is displayed only when the USB
number of times the ENTER button is pushed. memory contains the audio files.
. Play Mode
Skip (Previous chapter) Select the “Normal” or “1 Track Repeat” play
Select the “ ” key to skip the chapter(s) of mode.
the disc backward. The chapters will go back . 10 Key Search
the number of times the “ ” key is selected. Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the
number entry screen.
Input the number to be searched and select
the “OK” key. Bluetooth® STREAMING AUDIO (mod- Bluetooth® functions.
The specified folder/file will be played. els with navigation system) Regulatory information
. Display Your NISSAN is equipped with Bluetooth ®
Streaming Audio. If you have a compatible FCC Regulatory information:
To adjust the image quality of the screen,
select the preferred adjustment items. Bluetooth® device with streaming audio (A2DP . CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
. DRC profile), you can set up the wireless connection FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only
between your Bluetooth® device and the in- the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) auto-
vehicle audio system. This connection allows modification, or attachments could damage
matically adjusts the soundtrack volume
you to listen to the audio from the Bluetooth® the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
level to maintain a more even sound to the
device using your vehicle speakers. It also may tions.
speakers.
allow basic control of the device for playing and . Operation is subject to the following two
. Audio
skipping audio files using the AVRCP Blue- conditions:
Select the preferred language for audio. tooth® profile. All Bluetooth® Devices do not 1) This device may not cause interference
. Subtitle have the same level of controls for AVRCP. and
Select the preferred language for subtitle. Please consult the manual for your Bluetooth® 2) This device must accept any interfer-
. Display Mode Device for more details. ence, including interference that may
Select the “Normal”, “Wide”, “Cinema” or Once your Bluetooth® device is connected to cause undesired operation of the device
“Full” mode. the in-vehicle audio system, it will automatically IC Regulatory information:
reconnect whenever the device is present in the
. Operation is subject to the following two
vehicle and you select Bluetooth® Audio from
conditions:
your audio system. You do not need to manually
reconnect for each usage. 1) This device may not cause interference,
and
Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Bluetooth ®
2) This device must accept any interfer-
functions share the same frequency band (2.4
ence, including interference that may
GHz). Using the Bluetooth® and the wireless
cause undesired operation of the device.
LAN functions at the same time may slow down
or disconnect the communication and cause . This Class B digital apparatus meets all
undesired noise. It is recommended that you requirements of the Canadian Interference-
turn off the wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) when using the Causing Equipment Regulations.
Bluetooth trademark:
Bluetooth® is a trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and li-
censed to Clarion Co., Ltd.
SAA2505 SAA2506
Connecting procedure 2. Select the “Connect Bluetooth” key.

1. Push the SETTING button and select the
“Bluetooth” key.
SAA2507 SAA3005 SAA3006
3. A confirmation screen will be displayed. 4. Choose a PIN code to use with the 5. The standby message screen will appear.
Select “No”. compatible Bluetooth® audio device using Operate the compatible Bluetooth® audio
Note: Selecting “Yes” will only connect the the number input screen. The PIN code will device. For the connecting procedure of the
hands free phone portion of a Bluetooth® need to be entered into the Bluetooth® audio device, see the Bluetooth® audio
device. audio device after step 5. Select the “OK” instructions.
key. When the connecting is completed, the
screen will return to the Bluetooth® setup
display.
select tracks when the Bluetooth® audio is
DISC·AUX button:
playing.
When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with the
system off and the Bluetooth® audio device REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):
connected, the system will turn on. If another
To change the play mode, push the button
audio source is playing and the Bluetooth®
repeatedly and the mode changes as follows.
audio device is connected, push the DISC·AUX
button repeatedly until the display changes to Normal ? Shuffle All Tracks ? Shuffle Group
the Bluetooth® audio mode. ? Repeat 1 Track ? Repeat All Tracks ?
Repeat Group ? Normal
Next/Previous Track and Fast Operation keys:
Forward/Rewind: To operate a Bluetooth® audio device, select a
Push the FF or REW button for more than 1.5 key displayed on the operation screen using the
SAA2510 seconds while a Bluetooth® file is being played multi-function controller.
to fast forward or rewind through the track.
Audio main operation When the button is released, the Bluetooth® Play
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON audio device will return to the normal play speed.
Select the “ ” key to start playing when
position. Then, push the DISC·AUX button When the FF button is pushed for less than 1.5 pausing. Select this key again to pause the
repeatedly to switch to the Bluetooth® audio seconds while the Bluetooth® audio device is audio play.
mode. If the system has been turned off while being played, the next track will be played.
the Bluetooth® audio device was playing, push-
When the REW button is pushed for less than Pause
ing the ON·OFF/VOL control knob will start the
1.5 seconds within 3 seconds after the current ” key to pause the Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® audio device. Select the “
track started playing, the previous track will be audio device. Select this key again to resume
The ability to pause, change tracks, fast forward, played. playing.
rewind, randomize and repeat music may be
different between devices. Some or all of these Play Mode:
1.5 seconds after 3 seconds from when the
functions may not be supported on each device. The play mode setting display will appear when
current track started playing, the beginning of
the current track will be played. the “Menu” key is selected.
The multi-function controller can also be used to Choose the preferred play mode from the
following items. Connected Devices:
. Shuffle Registered devices are shown on the list. Select
Choose “Shuffle OFF”, “Shuffle All Tracks” a Bluetooth® device from the list, the following
and “Shuffle Group”. options will be available.
. Repeat . Select
Choose from “Repeat OFF”, “Repeat 1 Select “Select” to connect the selected
Track”, “Repeat All Tracks” and “Repeat device to the vehicle. If there is a different
Group”. device currently connected, the selected
device will replace the current device.
. Edit
Rename the selected Bluetooth® device
using the keypad displayed on the screen.
SAA2511 (See “How to use touch screen (models
with navigation system)” earlier in this
Bluetooth® settings section.)
To set up the Bluetooth® device system to the . Delete
preferred settings, push the SETTING button Delete the selected Bluetooth® device.
and select the “Bluetooth” key.
Edit Bluetooth Info:
Bluetooth: Change the name broadcasted by this system
If this setting is turned off, the connection over Bluetooth®. Change the PIN code that is
between the Bluetooth® devices and the in- entered when connecting a hands free device to
vehicle Bluetooth® module will be canceled. this system.
Connect Bluetooth: Replace Connected Phone:
Connects to the Bluetooth® device. See “Con- Replace the Bluetooth® connection with a
necting procedure” earlier in this section. Up to connected Bluetooth® cellular phone. For de-
5 devices can be registered. tails about Hands-Free Phone System, see
“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (models
with navigation system)” later in this section.
the U.S. and other countries. Compatibility
The following models are available:
CAUTION Models with navigation system:
. Fifth generation iPod® (firmware 1.2.3 or
. Depending on size and shape of later)
iPod® and iPod® cable, the console . iPod classic® (firmware 1.1.1 or later)
lid may not fully close. Do not force
. First generation iPod touch® (firmware 2.0.0
console lid closed as this may
or later)
damage iPod® and iPod® cable.
. Second generation iPod touch® (firmware
. Do not force the iPod® cable into 1.2.3 or later)
the USB port. Inserting the iPod®
. First generation iPod nano® (firmware 1.3.1
cable tilted or up-side-down into the
or later)
SAA3344 port may damage the iPod® cable
and the port. Make sure that the . Second generation iPod nano® (firmware
iPod® PLAYER OPERATION (if so iPod® cable is connected correctly 1.1.3 or later)
equipped) into the USB port. (Some iPod® . Third generation iPod nano® (firmware 1.1
cable come with a mark as a or later)
Connecting iPod®
guide. Make sure that the mark is . Fourth generation iPod nano® (firmware
Open the console lid and connect the iPod® 1.0.2 or later)
facing the correct direction before
cable to the USB connector. If compatible, the
inserting the iPod® cable.) Models without navigation system:
battery of the iPod® is charged while the
connection to the vehicle. . Do not locate objects near the iPod® . Fifth generation iPod® (firmware version 1.3)
cable to prevent the objects from
Depending on the version of the iPod®, the . First generation iPod classic® (firmware
leaning on the iPod® cable and the
display on the iPod® shows a NISSAN or version 1.1.2 PC)
port. Pressure from the objects may
Accessory Attached screen when the connec- . Second generation iPod classic® (firmware
damage the iPod® cable and the
tion is completed. When the iPod® is connected version 2.0 PC)
port.
to the vehicle, the iPod® music library can only . First generation iPod touch® (firmware ver-
be operated by the vehicle audio controls. sion 2.1)
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
. Second generation iPod touch® (firmware Interface:
Next/Previous Track and Fast
version 2.1.1) The interface for iPod® operation shown on the Forward/Rewind:
. First generation iPod nano® (firmware ver- vehicle center display is similar to the iPod®
sion 1.3.1) Push the FF or REW button for more than 1.5
interface. Use the multi-function controller and
seconds while the iPod® is playing to fast
. Second generation iPod nano® (firmware the ENTER or BACK button to play the iPod®
forward or rewind through a track. When the
version 1.1.3) with your favorite settings.
button is released, the iPod® will return to the
. Third generation iPod nano® (firmware ver- The following items can be chosen from the normal play speed.
sion 1.1 PC) menu list screen. For further information about
When the FF button is pushed for less than 1.5
. Third generation iPhone® (firmware version each item, see the iPod® Owner’s Manual.
seconds while the iPod® is being played, the
2.1) . Now Playing next track will be played.
Make sure that the iPod® firmware is updated. . Playlists
Audio main operation . Artists 1.5 seconds within 3 seconds after the current
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON . Albums track started playing, the previous track will be
position. Then, push the DISC·AUX button . Songs played.
repeatedly to switch to the iPod® mode. . Podcasts When the REW button is pushed for less than
If the system has been turned off while the iPod® . Genres 1.5 seconds after 3 seconds from when the
was playing, pushing the ON·OFF button will . Composers current track started playing, the beginning of
start the iPod®. . Audiobooks the current track will be played.
. Shuffle Songs The multi-function controller can also be used to
or play: The following touch-panel buttons shown on the select tracks when the iPod® is playing.
When the DISC·AUX or AUX button is pushed screen are also available:
with the system off and the iPod® connected, . : returns to the previous screen.
the system will turn on. If another audio source is
. : plays/pauses the music selected.
playing and the iPod® is connected, push the
DISC·AUX or AUX button repeatedly until the
center display changes to the iPod® mode.
. Red - right channel audio input
REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):
Before connecting a device to a jack, turn off the
When the RPT button is pushed while a track is power of the portable device.
being played, the play pattern can be changed
as follows: With a compatible device connected to the
jacks, push the DISC·AUX or AUX button
repeatedly until the display switches to the
AUX mode.
SAA3342
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS (if so

equipped)
The auxiliary input jacks are located in the center
console. NTSC compatible devices such as
video games, camcorders and portable video
players can be connected to the auxiliary jacks.
Compatible audio devices, such as some MP3
players, can also be connected to the system
through the auxiliary jacks.
The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identifica-
tion purposes.
. Yellow - video input
. White - left channel audio input
AUX Menu
When the “Menu” key on the display is selected
while in the AUX mode, the menu screen will be
displayed.
Display Mode:
Choose the display mode from the following
items.
. Normal
. Wide
. Cinema
Volume Settings (models with navigation
SAA2496 system): SAA0451
Models with navigation system Choose the volume setting from the following
CD/DVD/USB MEMORY CARE AND
items.
CLEANING
. Low
. Medium CD/DVD
. High . Handle a CD/DVD by its edges. Never touch
the surface of the disc. Do not bend the
Display (models with navigation system): disc.
Adjust the image quality of the screen, select the . Always place the discs in the storage case
preferred adjustment items. when they are not being used.
. To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion.
SAA1567 Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.
. A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.
USB memory
. Do not touch the terminal portion of the USB
memory.
. Do not place heavy objects on the USB
memory.
. Do not store the USB memory in highly
humid locations.
. Do not expose the USB memory to direct
sunlight.
. Do not spill any liquids on the USB memory.
Refer to the USB memory Owner’s Manual for
the details.
SAA1854 SAA1855
With navigation system Without navigation system
1. Source select switch
2. Menu control switch (models with navigation
system) or audio tuning switch (models without
navigation system)
3. Volume control switch
4. BACK switch
STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED CON- . Pushing the menu control switch will show . Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
TROLS FOR AUDIO (if so equipped) the XM Menu. will skip up or down through the folders.
iPod®: . Pushing the menu control switch will show
Menu control switch (models with navi- the USB Menu.
gation system) or audio tuning switch . Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds
(models without navigation system) will skip up or down through the tracks. Bluetooth® Audio (models with navigation
. Pushing the menu control switch will show system):
While the display is showing a MAP (navigation
systems only), STATUS or Audio screen, tilt the the iPod Menu. . Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds
switch upward or downward to select a station, will skip up or down through the tracks.
CD:
track, CD or folder. For most audio sources, . Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds BACK switch (models with navi-
tilting the switch up/down for more than 1.5 will skip up or down through the tracks. gation system)
seconds provides a different function than tilting
. Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds Push this switch to go back to the previous
up/down for less than 1.5 seconds.
will skip up or down through the folders (if screen or cancel the selection if it is not
AM and FM radio: playing compressed audio files). completed.
. Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds . Pushing the menu control switch will show
will skip up or down through the preset the CD Menu. Volume control switches
stations. Push the upper (+) or lower (−) side switch to
DVD (models with navigation system):
. Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds increase or decrease the volume.
. Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds
will seek up or down to the next station. Source select switch
will skip up or down through the tracks.
. Pushing the menu control switch will show
. Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds Push the source select switch to change the
the list of preset stations. mode to available audio source.
will skip up or down through the titles.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio: . Pushing the menu control switch will select
. Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds an item from the DVD display.
will skip up or down through the preset . When the transparent operation menu ap-
channels. pears, the switch will control the menu.
. Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds USB:
will go to the next or previous category.
. Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds
will skip up or down through the tracks.
ANTENNA
Window antenna (for Hardtop models) CAUTION
The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear . To avoid damaging or deforming the
window. antenna, be sure to remove the
antenna under the following condi-
tions.
CAUTION
— The vehicle enters an automatic
. Do not place metalized film near the car wash (for Hardtop models).
rear window glass or attach any — The vehicle enters a garage with
metal parts to it. This may cause a low ceiling.
poor reception or noise.
— The vehicle is covered with a car
. When cleaning the inside of the rear SAA2102 cover.
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window antenna. Roof antenna (for Hardtop models) and . Always properly tighten the antenna
Lightly wipe along the antenna with trunk mounted antenna (for CrossCab- rod during installation. Otherwise,
a dampened soft cloth. riolet models) the antenna rod may break during
vehicle operation.
Removing the antenna:
You can remove the antenna if necessary.
Hold the bottom of the antenna and remove by
turning counterclockwise.
To install the antenna, turn the antenna clock-
wise and tighten.
Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE PHONE
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO SYSTEM (models with navigation
system)
When installing a car phone or a CB radio in
your vehicle, be sure to observe the following CAUTION WARNING
cautions, otherwise the new equipment may
adversely affect the electronic control modules . Keep the antenna as far away as . Use a phone after stopping your
and electronic control system harness. possible from the electronic control vehicle in a safe location. If you
modules. have to use a phone while driving,
WARNING . Keep the antenna wire more than 8 exercise extreme caution at all
in (20 cm) away from the electronic times so full attention may be given
. A cellular phone should not be used control system harness. Do not to vehicle operation.
for any purpose while driving so full route the antenna wire next to any . If you find yourself unable to devote
attention may be given to vehicle harness. full attention to vehicle operation
operation. Some jurisdictions prohi- . Adjust the antenna standing-wave while talking on the phone, pull off
bit the use of cellular phones while ratio as recommended by the man- the road to a safe location and stop
driving. ufacturer. your vehicle before doing so.
. If you must make a call while your . Connect the ground wire from the
vehicle is in motion, the hands-free CB radio chassis to the body.
cellular phone operational mode (if
. For details, consult a NISSAN deal- CAUTION
so equipped) is highly recom-
er.
mended. Exercise extreme caution To avoid draining the vehicle battery,
at all times so full attention may be use a phone after starting the engine.
given to vehicle operation.
. If a conversation in a moving vehicle Your NISSAN is equipped with Bluetooth ®
requires you to take notes, pull off Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an owner
the road to a safe location and stop of a compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular
your vehicle before doing so. phone, you can set up the wireless connection
between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle
phone module. With Bluetooth® wireless tech-
nology, you can make or receive a telephone call
with your cellular phone in your pocket.
Once a cellular phone is connected to the in- . Set up the wireless connection between a . Do not place the cellular phone in an area
vehicle phone module, no phone connecting compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle surrounded by metal or far away from the in-
procedure is required anymore. Your phone is phone module before using the Bluetooth® vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality
automatically connected with the in-vehicle Hands-Free Phone System. degradation and wireless connection dis-
phone module when the ignition switch is . Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones ruption.
pushed to the ON position with the registered may not be recognized by the in-vehicle . While a cellular phone is connected through
cellular phone turned on and carried in the phone module. Please visit the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
vehicle. www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom- battery power of the cellular phone may
You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth® mended phone list. discharge quicker than usual.
cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module. . You will not be able to use a hands-free . If the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone phone under the following conditions: seems to be malfunctioning, please visit
at a time. — Your vehicle is outside of the telephone www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system sup- service area. shooting help.
ports the phone commands, so dialing a phone — Your vehicle is in an area where it is . Some cellular phones or other devices may
number using your voice is possible. For more difficult to receive radio waves; such as in cause interference or a buzzing noise to
details, see “NISSAN voice recognition system a tunnel, in an underground parking come from the audio system speakers.
(models with navigation system)” later in this garage, behind a tall building or in a Storing the device in a different location
section; page 4-112. mountainous area. may reduce or eliminate the noise.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone — Your cellular phone is locked in order not . Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
System, refer to the following notes. to be dialed. regarding the telephone pairing procedure
specific to your phone, battery charging,
. Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Bluetooth® . When the radio wave reception is not ideal
cellular phone antenna, etc.
functions share the same frequency band or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
. The antenna display on the monitor will not
(2.4 GHz). Using the Bluetooth® and the difficult for the other party to hear your voice
during a call. Please close the windows if coincide with the antenna display of some
possible. cellular phones.
tion and cause undesired noise. It is . Immediately after the ignition switch is . Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
recommended that you turn off the wireless pushed to the ON position, it may be possible to hear the caller’s voice clearly as
LAN (Wi-Fi) when using the Bluetooth® impossible to receive a call for a short well as to minimize its echoes.
functions. period of time.
. If reception between callers is unclear, Bluetooth trademark:
adjusting the incoming or outgoing call Bluetooth® is a trademark owned
volume may improve the clarity. by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and li-
REGULATORY INFORMATION censed to Clarion Co., Ltd.
FCC Regulatory information VOICE COMMANDS

. CAUTION: To maintain compliance with You can use voice commands to operate various
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System features
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system.
modification, or attachments could damage For more details, see “NISSAN voice recogni-
the transmitter and may violate FCC regulation system (models with navigation system)”
tions. later in this section; page 4-112.
conditions:
1. this device may not cause interference and
2. this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause un-
desired operation of the device
IC Regulatory information
conditions: (1) this device may not cause SAA3556
interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference that
CONTROL BUTTONS
may cause undesired operation of the 1. PHONE button
device. 2. TALK /PHONE SEND button
. This Class B digital apparatus meets all
requirements of the Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Regulations.
PHONE SELECTION
Up to 5 cellular phones can be registered to the
system. To switch to connect another cellular
phone, push PHONE button and select the
“Connected Phones” key. The registered cellular
phones are shown on the list. If you select a
cellular phone that is different from the one
currently connected, the newly selected phone
will be connected to the system.
QUICK DIAL
This vehicle has two phonebooks available for
hands-free use. Depending on the phone, the
JVH0473X SAA2520 system may automatically download the entire
cell phone’s phonebook into the “Phonebook”.
CONNECTING PROCEDURE 2. When a PIN code appears on the screen, For the details about downloading a phonebook,
1. Push the PHONE button or the button, operate the compatible Bluetooth® cellular see “Phone setting” later in this section. If a
and select the “Connect Phone” key. phone to enter the PIN code. phonebook does not automatically download, up
The connecting procedure of the cellular to 1.000 entries may be set in the navigation
phone varies according to each cellular system as the Quick Dial. This Quick Dial allows
phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s the recording of a name to speak while using
Manual for the details. You can also visit voice recognition.
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or call
NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for
instructions on pairing NISSAN recom-
mended cellular phones.
When the connection process is completed,
the screen will return to the Phone menu
display.
JVH0474X JVH0475X JVH0476X
1. Push the PHONE button and select the 3. Choose the method for entering the phone- 5. Select the “Voicetag” key to record a name
“Quick Dial” key. book entry. For this example, select “Enter to speak when using the NISSAN Voice
2. Select the “Add New” key at the top of the Number by Keypad”. Recognition system.
screen. 4. Enter the digits and select the “OK” key. 6. Select the “Store” key and prepare to speak
(See “How to use touch screen (models the name after the tone.
with navigation system)” earlier in this 7. When the voicetag is successfully saved,
section.) select the “OK” key to save the Quick Dial
entry.
8. After the Quick Dial entry is saved, it will
show a screen that is ready to call the
number. Press the BACK button to return to
the Quick Dial.
There are different methods to input a phone
number. Select one of the following options
instead of “Enter Number by Keypad” in step 3.
. Copy from Call History
The system will show a list of incoming,
outgoing or missed calls that were down-
loaded from the connected cellular phone
(depending on the phone’s compatibility).
Select one of these entries to save in the
Quick Dial.
. Copy from the Handset
The system will show the connected cellular
phone’s phonebook that was downloaded
(depending on the phone’s compatibility).
Select one of these entries to save in the JVH0477X JVH0478X
Quick Dial.
Editing the Quick Dial The following editing items are available:
1. Push the PHONE button and select the . Entry #
“Quick Dial” key. Changes the displayed number of the
selected entry.
2. Select the desired entry from the displayed
list. . Name
Edit the name of the entry using the keypad
3. Select the “Edit” key.
displayed on the screen.
4. Select the desired item to change.
. Number
Edit the phone number using the keypad
displayed on the screen.
. Type
Select an icon from the icon list.
. Voicetag
Confirm and store the voicetag. Voicetags
allow easy dialing using the NISSAN Voice
Recognition system. (See “NISSAN voice
recognition system (models with navigation
system)” later in this section.)
To delete an entry, select the “Delete” key at
step 3.
JVH0479X JVH0495X
MAKING A CALL 5. Select the “Call” key to start dialing the

To make a call, follow this procedure. number.
1. Push the PHONE button on the instrument There are different methods to make a call.
panel or the button on the steering Select one of the following options instead of
wheel. The “Phone” screen will appear on “Phonebook” in step 2 above.
the display. . Quick Dial
2. Select the “Phonebook” key on the Phone Select an entry stored in the Quick Dial.
menu. . Call History
3. Select the desired entry from the list. Select an outgoing, incoming or missed call
downloaded from your cell phone (depend-
4. Confirm the correct entry by selecting for the
ing on your phone’s compatibility).
correct number from the list.
. Dial Number
Input the phone number manually using the
keypad displayed on the screen. (See “How
to use touch screen (models with navigation . Hold Call
system)” earlier in this section.) Put an incoming call on hold.
. Reject Call
Reject an incoming call.
To finish the call, perform one of the
following procedures listed below.
1. Select the “Hang up” key.
2. Push the PHONE button on the instrument
panel.
3. Push the button on the steering wheel.
SAA2525
RECEIVING A CALL
When you hear a phone ring, the display will
change to the incoming call mode. To receive a
call, perform one of the following procedures
listed below.
1. Select the “Answer” key.
2. Push the PHONE button on the instrument
panel.
There are some options available when receiving
a call. Select one of the following displayed on
the screen.
. Answer
Accept an incoming call to talk.
. Cancel Mute
This will appear after “Mute” is selected.
Mute will be canceled.
. Switch Call*
Select "Switch Call" to answer another
incoming call. By selecting “Hang up”, you
can end a call and can speak to a caller who
is on hold again.
* This function may not be usable, depend-
ing on the model of phone.
To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or
quieter, push the volume control switch (+ or −)
SAA3587 on the steering wheel or turn the volume control JVH0480X
knob on the instrument panel while talking on
DURING A CALL the phone. This adjustment is also available in PHONE SETTING
There are some options available during a call. the SETTING mode. To set up the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
Select one of the following displayed on the System to your preferred settings, push the
screen if necessary. SETTING button on the instrument panel and
. Hang up select the “PHONE” key.
Finish the call. Edit Quick Dial
. Use Handset To edit the Quick Dial, use the same procedure
Transfer the call to the cellular phone. as described in “Quick Dial” earlier in this
. Mute section.
Mute your voice to the person.
. Keypad
Using the touch tone, send digits to the
connected party for using services such as
voicemail.
Delete Quick Dial Auto Download
The Quick Dial entries can be deleted all at the When this item is activated, the phonebook of a
same time or one by one. hands-free phone is automatically downloaded
at the same time that the hands-free phone is
Download Phonebook connected.
Download the contacts registered in a Blue-
tooth® cellular phone. Availability of this function
depends on each cellular phone. The memory
downloading procedure from the cellular phone
also varies according to each cellular phone.
See cellular phone Owner’s Manual for details.
Volume & Ringtone
The following kinds of phone volume can be set.
Pushing the PHONE button and selecting the
“Volume & Ringtone” key can also operate the
same settings.
. Ringtone/Incoming Call/Outgoing Call
To increase or decrease the volume, select
the “Ringtone”, “Incoming Call” or “Out-
going Call” key and adjust it with the multi-
. Automatic Hold
When this function is activated, an incoming
phone call is automatically held.
. Vehicle Ringtone
When this function is activated, a specific
ringtone that is different from the cellular
phone will sound when receiving a call.
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. (See “NISSAN voice recognition system (models with navigation system)” later in this
section; page 4-112.)
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
The system fails to interpret the command
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
correctly.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to
use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
The system consistently selects the 1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “Quick Dial” earlier in this section.)
wrong voicetag. 2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
The system cannot be operated. Close the soft top (for CrossCabriolet models).
Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM (models without
navigation system) (if so equipped)
Once your cellular phone is paired to the in- recommended that you turn off the wireless
vehicle phone module, no phone connecting LAN (Wi-Fi) when using the Bluetooth®
WARNING procedure is required. Your phone is automati- functions.
. Use a phone after stopping your
cally connected with the in-vehicle phone . Set up the wireless connection between a
module when the ignition switch is pushed to cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone
vehicle in a safe location. If you
have to use a phone while driving,
the “ON” position with the registered cellular module before using the Bluetooth ®
phone turned on and carried in the vehicle. Hands-Free Phone System.
exercise extreme caution at all
times so full attention may be given You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth® . Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones
to vehicle operation. cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module. may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone phone module.
. If you find yourself unable to devote
full attention to vehicle operation
at a time. . You will not be able to use a hands-free
while talking on the phone, pull off When a call is active, the audio system and phone under the following conditions:
the road to a safe location and stop microphone (located in the ceiling in front of the — Your vehicle is outside of the telephone
your vehicle before doing so. rearview mirror) are used for the handsfree service area.
communications. — Your vehicle is in an area where it is
If the audio system is being used at the time, the difficult to receive radio waves; such as in
audio mode will mute and will stay muted until a tunnel, in an underground parking
CAUTION the active call is ended. garage, behind a tall building or in a
mountainous area.
To avoid draining the vehicle battery, The NISSAN Voice Recognition system sup-
ports the phone commands, so dialing a phone — Your cellular phone is locked in order not
use a phone after starting the engine.
number using your voice is possible. to be dialed.
. When the radio wave condition is not ideal
Your vehicle is equipped with Bluetooth ® Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an owner System, refer to the following notes.
difficult to hear the other person’s voice
of a Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you can . Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Bluetooth® during a call.
set up the wireless connection between your functions share the same frequency band
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module. . Immediately after the ignition switch is
(2.4 GHz). Using the Bluetooth® and the
With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can pushed to the “ON” position, it may be
make or receive a telephone call with your impossible to receive a call for a short period
cellular phone in your pocket. of time.
tion and cause undesired noise. It is
. Do not place the cellular phone in an area volume may improve the clarity. IC Regulatory information
surrounded by metal or far away from the in- . This wireless hands free car kit is based on . Operation is subject to the following two
vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality Bluetooth® technology, conditions: (1) this device may not cause
degradation and wireless connection dis- — Frequency: 2402 MHz - 2480 MHz interference, and (2) this device must accept
ruption. any interference, including interference that
— Output Power: 4.14 dBm E.I.R.P
. While a cellular phone is connected through may cause undesired operation of the
— Modulation: FHSS GFSK 8DPSK, p/
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the device.
4DQPSK
battery power of the cellular phone may . This Class B digital apparatus meets all
— Number of Channel: 79
discharge quicker than usual. requirements of the Canadian Interference-
— This wireless equipment can’t be used
. If the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System Causing Equipment Regulations.
for any services related to safety because
seems to be malfunctioning, please contact Bluetooth trademark:
there is the possibility of radio interfer-
a NISSAN dealer.
ence. Bluetooth® is a trademark owned
. Some cellular phones or other devices may by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and li-
cause interference or a buzzing noise to REGULATORY INFORMATION censed to Visteon Corporation.
come from the audio system speakers. FCC Regulatory information
Storing the device in a different location . CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
may reduce or eliminate the noise.
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only
. Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
regarding the telephone pairing procedure modification, or attachments could damage
specific to your phone, battery charging, the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
cellular phone antenna, etc. tions.
. The antenna display on the monitor will not . Operation is subject to the following two
coincide with the antenna display of some conditions:
cellular phones. 1) this device may not cause interference
. Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as and
possible to hear the caller’s voice clearly as
2) this device must accept any interference,
well as to minimize its echoes.
including interference that may cause
. If reception between callers is unclear, undesired operation of the device
adjusting the incoming or outgoing call
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM Using system
You can also use the Bluetooth® hands-free Initialization:
phone system with Voice Recognition System. When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
INFO position, Voice Recognition System is initialized,
. The available voice commands are only which may take up to one minute. When
applicable to the relevant language set in completed, the system is ready to accept voice
the LANGUAGE setting screen. (See “How commands. If the switch on the steering
to use SETTING button” earlier in this wheel is pushed before the initialization com-
section.) pletes, the system will not accept any command.
. If the vehicle is in motion, some commands Before starting:
may not be available so full attention may be To get the best performance out of the Voice
given to vehicle operation. Recognition System, observe the following:
SAA1858 . The voice recognition system cannot be
. Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
operated when the soft top (CrossCabriolet
CONTROL BUTTONS models) is open.
possible. Close the windows to eliminate the
1. PHONE SEND button surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
Manual command selection sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
Push the button to initiate a VR session or from recognizing the voice commands cor-
answer an incoming call. You can also use Commands can be selected manually. While the
rectly.
the button to skip through system feedback commands are displayed on the screen, select a
command by operating the Tune switch, and . Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a
and to enter commands during a call.
then push the PHONE SEND button. Once command.
2. PHONE END button . Speak a voice command within 5 seconds
a command is manually selected, the voice
Push the button to cancel a VR session or command function is cancelled. To return to after the beep sound. If no voice command
end a call. voice command mode, push the PHONE END is given, the system will ask you for a
button to cancel the current operation, and number. If no further command is given,
then perform the first procedure of voice the session ends.
command. . Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.
4. The system acknowledges the command
and announces the next set of available
commands.
5. After the tone sounds, speak the phone
number.
6. When you have finished speaking the phone
number, the system repeats it back and
announces the available commands.
7. After system responds, speak “Dial” and the
system dials the spoken numbers.
Operating tips:
. Voice commands cannot be accepted when
SAA1858 SAA2574
the icon is .
Giving voice command: 2. A list of commands appears on the screen, . If the command is not recognized, the
1. Push and release the switch located on and the system announces, “Please say a system announces, “Please say again”.
the steering wheel. command after the beep. Available com- Repeat the command in a clear voice.
mands are: Call, Phonebook, Recent Calls, . Push the switch or the BACK button
Connect Phone or Help”. once to return to the previous screen.
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the . If you want to cancel the command, push the
screen changes from to , speak a switch. The message “Voice input is
command. See the “Using system” later in canceled” will be announced. If you want to
this section for the voice command list. adjust the volume of the system feedback,
Speak “Call” for example. push the volume control buttons [+] or [−]
INFO on the steering wheel or use the audio
system volume knob while the system is
Voice commands cannot be recognized as
making an announcement.
long as the screen icon is not in the
command recognition mode .
How to speak commands: Personal vocabulary (voicetags): is classified as one in the phonebook.
The Voice Recognition System requires a Voice Recognition System is equipped with the If the system cannot understand your
certain way to speak voice commands. Speak function called “voicetags”, which can be command, repeat it according to the re-
normally and clearly in the direction of the associated with the phone number and name commendations mentioned in “Using sys-
microphone (located in front of the rearview in the phonebook. Using the voice tag will tem” earlier in this section.
mirror). Every digit of the number must be automatically generate a speed dial to the 4. If the given name (voice tag) is correct, the
spoken individually and in a normal manner. registered number. phone system will dial the number registered
The hands-free mode will work best when the See “Phonebook registration” earlier in this for “John”.
telephone number is spoken in blocks of three to section.
five digits. After each spoken block is termi- INFO
You can call the identified number using the To end the voice command phase at any stage
nated, the system will repeat the three to five
following command: “Dial” followed by the voice of the procedure, push the switch once in
digits and wait for you to speak the next digit or
tag. order to activate the cancel command.
block of digits required for the telephone
number. Dialling a name with a voice tag:
See “Using system” later in this section for the It is possible to call up a name via a voice tag
appropriate commands that can be spoken for instead of a number, provided the name and
the hands-free mode system. number of your correspondent has been pre-
Example: viously stored in the phonebook.
In order to initiate a call, speak “Phonebook”. Dial via a voice tag, according to the following
procedure.
INFO
1. Push the switch.
. If you are controlling the telephone system
by voice command for the first time or do not 2. The system replies “please say a command
know the appropriate voice command, after the beep. Available commands are:
speak “Help”. The system announces the Call, Phonebook, Recent Calls, Connect
available commands. Phone or Help”.
. When you speak numbers, you can speak 3. Give your instructions to the system by
both “zero” or “oh” for “0”. saying: “Dial John” for example (“John” must
have been previously set as a voice tag for
John’s phone number) or “Dial One” if John
List of voice commands:
COMMAND ACTION
“Call/Dial” “<name>” Dials the specified <name>.
“Call/Dial” “Redial” Dials the last number.
“Call” “Number” “<number>” Dials the specified <number>.
“Phonebook” “<name>” Displays the specified <name> in the phonebook.
“Phonebook” “List Names” Displays all the names in the phonebook.
“Phonebook” “Transfer Entry” Transfers the phonebook data to the system.
“Phonebook” “Delete Entry” Deletes the phonebook registered in the system.
“Connect Phone” “Add Phone” Connects a cellular phone to the system.
“Connect Phone” “Select Phone” Selects a registered cellular phone.
“Connect Phone” “Delete Phone” Deletes a registered cellular phone.
“Connect Phone” “Bluetooth Off” Turns the Bluetooth ® connection off.
“Connect Phone” “Replace Phone” Changes the registered order of the cellular phones.
“Connect Phone” “Delete Phone” “All Phones” Deletes all registered cellular phones.
“Connect Phone” “Delete Phone” “List Phones” Selects a registered cellular phone and deletes it.
SAA2575 SAA2576 SAA2577
PAIRING PROCEDURE 3. Speak: “Add Phone”. The system acknowl- 4. When asked to enter a PIN code to connect
Up to 5 cellular phones can be registered. edges the command and asks you to initiate a Bluetooth® cellular phone, enter the code
connecting from the phone handset. “1234”.
The system announces the available com- INFO: The code is always “1234” regardless of the
mands. The Add Phone command is not available number of phones paired.
2. Speak: “Connect Phone”. The system ac- when the vehicle is moving. The connecting procedure of a cellular
knowledges the command and announces phone varies according to each cellular
the next set of available commands. phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for more information.
SAA2578 SAA2579 SAA2580
5. The system asks the user to speak a name PHONEBOOK REGISTRATION MAKING A CALL
for the phone. When the cellular phone is connected to the in- To make a call, follow the procedures below.
Speak: “Yes”. The system acknowledges the vehicle module, the data stored in the cellular 1. Push the button on the steering wheel.
command and registers the cellular phone. phone such as phonebook, outgoing call logs, A tone will sound.
If the name is too long or too short, the system incoming call logs and missed call logs is
2. Speak: “Call”. The system acknowledges
tells the user, then prompts the user for a name automatically transferred and registered to the
the command and announces the next set of
again. system.
available commands.
Also, if more than one phone is connected and The availability of this function depends on each
3. Speak the registered person’s name. The
the name sounds too much like a name already cellular phone. The copying procedure also
system acknowledges the command and
used, the system tells the user, then prompts the varies according to each cellular phone. See
announces the next set of available com-
user for name again. cellular phone Owner’s Manual for more infor-
mands.
mation.
4. Speak: “Yes”. The system acknowledges the
Up to 1,000 phone numbers per registered
command and makes the call.
cellular phone can be stored in the phonebook.
5. Once the call has ended, press the . “Mute on/off” — Use the Mute command to
button on the steering wheel. mute the user’s voice so the other party
RECEIVING A CALL cannot hear it.
Use the mute command again to unmute the
When the ring tone is heard, press the button on
user’s voice.
the steering wheel.
. “Transfer Handset” — Use the Transfer
Once the call has ended, press the button on
Handset command to transfer the call from
the steering wheel.
the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
NOTE: to a cellular phone when privacy is desired.
To reject a call when the ring tone is heard, The system announces, “Transfer Handset.
press the button on the steering wheel. The call is transferred to the handset only.”
The system then ends the VR session.
The Transfer Call command can also be
SAA2581
issued again to return to a hands-free call
DURING A CALL through the vehicle.
During a call there are several command options . “Help” — The system announces the avail-
available. Press the button on the steering able commands.
wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter NOTE:
commands. If the other party ends the call or the
. “(digits)” — Use the Send command to enter cellular phone network connection is lost
numbers during a call. For example, if while the Mute feature is on, the Mute
directed to dial an extension by an auto- feature may need to be reset to “off.”
mated system:
Speak: “Sending one two three four.”
The system acknowledges the command
and sends the tones associated with the
numbers. The system then ends the VR
session and returns to the call.
Once the name and location are confirmed,
the system begins the call.
. Number
When prompted by the system, speak the
number to call.
. Redial
Use the Redial command to call the last
number of outgoing calls. The system
acknowledges the command, repeats the
number and begins dialing. If a redial
number does not exist, the system an-
nounces, “There is no number to redial”
SAA2582
and ends the VR session. SAA2583
. Callback
PHONE SETTINGS Use the Callback command to call the last Phonebook
Call number in incoming calls. The system . (a name)
acknowledges the command, repeats the
. (a name) number and begins dialing. If an incoming
Use the name command to seek the name
If there are entries stored in the Phone Book, and locations registered in the phonebook in
call number does not exist, the system
a number associated with a name and alphabetical order. When the system ac-
announces, “There is no number to call
location can be dialed. See “Phone book knowledges the alphabet the user spoke,
back” and ends the VR session.
registration” in this section to learn how to the system announces all registered names
. Help and locations beginning with that alphabet.
store entries. When prompted by the
The system announces the available com- Playback of the list can be stopped at any
system, say the name of the phone book
mands. time by pressing a button on the steering
entry to call.
The system acknowledges the name. If there wheel. The system ends the VR session.
are multiple locations associated with the . List Names
name, the system asks the user to choose Use the List Names command to hear the
the location. names and locations registered in the
phonebook. When the system acknowl- specific number or all numbers in the
edges the command, the system announces phonebook. The system announces the
all voicetags registered in the system. names of the phone numbers already stored
Playback of the list can be stopped at any in the system. The system then gives the
time by pressing a button on the steering option to delete a specific number or all
wheel. The system ends the VR session. numbers. Once the user chooses to delete a
. Transfer Entry number or all numbers, the system asks the
user to confirm.
Use the Transfer Entry command to transfer
the phonebook data stored in a cellular . Help
phone to the system. The system announces the available com-
The system acknowledges the command mands.
and asks the user to initiate a transfer from
the phone handset. The new contact phone SAA2584
number will be transferred from the cellular
phone via a Bluetooth® communication link. Recent Calls
The transfer procedure varies according to
. Incoming
each cellular phone. See the cellular phone
Owner’s Manual for more information. The Use the Incoming command to make a call
system repeats the number and prompts the viewing the list of incoming calls.
user for the next command. After entering . Missed
numbers, choose “Store.” Use the Missed command to make a call
The system confirms the name, location and viewing the list of missed calls.
number. The system then asks if the user . Outgoing
would like to store another location for the Use the Outgoing command to make a call
same name. If the user does not wish to viewing the list of outgoing calls.
store another location, the system ends the . Redial
VR session. Use the Redial command to dial the last
. Delete Entry outgoing call.
Use the Delete Entry command to delete a
. Callback already been connected to the vehicle
Use the Callback command to dial the last system, the system announces the name
incoming call. that the phone is already using. The
. Help connecting procedure will then be can-
celled.
The system announces the available com-
mands. The Add Phone command is not available
when the vehicle is moving.
. Select Phone
Use the Select Phone command to select a
phone of lesser priority when two or more
phones connected with Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System are in the vehicle at the
same time.
SAA2585
The system asks the user to name the phone
Connect Phone and confirm the selection.
Once the selection is confirmed, the se-
. Add Phone
lected phone remains active until the ignition
Use the Pair Phone command to connect a switch is placed in the OFF position or a
compatible phone to the Bluetooth® Hands- new phone is selected.
Free Phone System.
. Delete Phone
When asked to enter a PIN code to connect
Use the Delete Phone command to delete a
a Bluetooth® cellular phone, enter the code
specific phone or all phones from Blue-
“1234”.
tooth® Hands-Free Phone System. The
The code is always “1234” regardless of the system announces the names of the phones
number of phones connected. Up to 5 already paired with the system and their
phones can be connected. If the user tries priority level. The system then gives the
to connect a sixth phone, the system option to delete a specific phone, all phones
announces that the user must first delete or listen to the list again. Once the user
one phone or replace an existing phone. If chooses to delete a phone or all phones, the
the user tries to connect a phone that has
system asks the user to confirm. . Bluetooth On/Off 5. Speak: "Voice Adaptation". The system
NOTE: Use the Bluetooth On/Off command to turn acknowledges the command and displays
on/off Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys- the voice adaptation mode screen.
When the user deletes a phone, the
tem. 6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected
associated phone book for that phone will
also be deleted. . Help automatically. If both memory locations are
The system announces the available com- already in use, the system will prompt you to
. Replace Phone
mands. overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-
Use the Replace Phone command to vided by the system.
change the priority level of the active phone. VOICE ADAPTATION MODE
The Voice Adaptation mode allows up to two 7. When preparation is complete and you are
The priority level determines which phone is
users with different dialects to train the system ready to begin, press the button.
active when more than one paired Blue-
tooth® phone is in the vehicle. to improve recognition accuracy. By repeating a 8. The voice adaptation mode will be ex-
number of commands, the users can create a plained. Follow the instructions provided by
The system states the priority level of the
voice model of their own voice that is stored in the system.
active phone and asks for a new priority level
(1, 2, 3, 4, 5). the system. The system is capable of storing a 9. When training is finished, the system will tell
different voice adaptation model for each con- you an adequate number of phrases have
If the new priority level is already being used
nected phone. been recorded.
for another phone, the two phones will swap
priority levels. Training procedure 10. The system will ask you to say your name.
For example, if the current priority levels are: 1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet Follow the instructions to register your
name.
. Priority Level 1 = Phone A outdoor location.
. Priority Level 2 = Phone B 2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine 11. The system will announce that voice adapta-
tion has been completed and the system is
. Priority Level 3 = Phone C running, the parking brake on, and the
transmission in Park. ready.
and you change the priority level of Phone C to
Level 1, then: 3. Press the button. The voice adaptation mode will stop if:
. Priority Level 1 = Phone C 4. Speak: “Help”. The system acknowledges . The button is pressed in voice adapta-
tion mode.
. Priority Level 2 = Phone B the command and announces the next set of
available commands. . The vehicle is driven during voice adaptation
. Priority Level 3 = Phone A
mode.
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
SYSTEM (models with navigation
system)
. The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or NISSAN Voice Recognition allows hands-free Alternate Command Mode be turned off and
LOCK position. operation of the Phone, Navigation, Information Standard Mode be used for the best recognition
and Audio systems in one of two modes, performance.
Standard Mode or Alternate Command Mode. For the voice commands for the navigation
In Standard Mode, commands that are available system, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s
are always shown on the display and announced Manual of your vehicle.
by the system. You can complete your desired For CrossCabriolet models:
operation by simply following the prompts given
by the system. (See “NISSAN voice recognition The voice recognition system cannot be oper-
Standard Mode” later in this section for details.) ated when the soft top is open.
For advanced operation, you can use the NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
Alternate Command Mode. (See “NISSAN voice STANDARD MODE
recognition Alternate Command Mode” later in The following section is applicable when the
this section for details.) When this mode is Standard Mode is activated.
active, an expanded list of commands can be The Standard Mode enables you to complete
spoken after pushing the TALK switch, and the desired operation by simply following the
the voice command menu prompts are turned prompts that appear on the display and also are
off. Review the expanded command list, which is announced by the system.
available when this mode is active. Note that in
this mode the recognition success rate may be
affected as the number of available commands
and the ways of speaking each command are
increased.
To switch one mode to another, see each mode
description later in this section.
To improve the recognition success rate when
Alternate Command Mode is active, try using the
Speaker Adaptation Function available in that
mode. Otherwise, it is recommended that
SAA2529 SAA2530 SAA2531
Activating Standard Mode 4. Select the “Alternate Command Mode” key. 1. Push the INFO button on the instrument
5. The indicator turns off and the Standard panel.
When the Alternate Command Mode is active,
perform the following steps to switch to the Mode activates. 2. Select the “Others” key.
Standard Mode. Displaying user guide 3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument If you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition 4. Select the “User Guide” key.
panel. system for the first time or you do not know 5. Select a preferred item.
2. Select the “Others” key. how to operate it, you can display the User You can skip steps 1 and 3 above if you say
3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key. Guide for confirmation. “Help”.
You can confirm how to use voice commands by Available items:
accessing a simplified User Guide, which
contains basic instructions and tutorials for . Getting Started
several voice commands. Describes the basics of how to operate the
NISSAN Voice Recognition system.
. Let’s Practice
Mode that allows practicing by following the
instructions of the system voice.
. Using the Address Book
Tutorial for entering a destination by using
the Address Book.
. Finding a Street Address (if so equipped)
Tutorial for entering a destination by street
address.
. Placing Calls
Tutorial for making a phone call by voice
command operation.
. Help on Speaking SAA2532 SAA2534
Displays useful tips of speaking for correct
command recognition by the system. Getting Started Let’s Practice
Note that the Command List feature is only Before using the NISSAN Voice Recognition This mode helps learn how to use the NISSAN
available when Alternate Command Mode is system for the first time, you can confirm how to Voice Recognition system.
active. use commands by viewing the Getting Started 1. Select the “Let’s Practice” key.
section of the User Guide.
2. After the message screen appears, push the
1. Select the “Getting Started” key. TALK switch on the steering wheel.
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the 3. Speak the displayed number after the tone.
screen using the multi-function controller. The evaluation screen will be displayed and
Tutorials on the operation of the NISSAN the result can be confirmed.
Voice Recognition system
If you choose “Using the Address Book”,
“Finding a Street Address” or “Placing Calls”,
you can view tutorials on how to perform these
operations using NISSAN Voice Recognition.
USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initia-
lized, which may take up to one minute. When
completed, the system is ready to accept voice
commands. If the TALK switch is pushed
before the initialization completes, the display
will show the message: “System not ready.” or a
beep sounds.
Before starting
SAA2533 To get the best recognition performance from SAA1859
NISSAN Voice Recognition, observe the follow-
Useful tips for correct operation ing: Giving voice commands
You can display useful speaking tips to help the . The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet 1. Push the TALK switch located on the
system recognize your voice commands cor- as possible. Close the windows to eliminate steering wheel.
rectly. the surrounding noises (traffic noise and
vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent
Select “Help on Speaking” to start display.
the system from correctly recognizing the
voice commands.
. Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command.
. Speak in a natural conversational voice
without pausing between words.
. If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”, the fan
speed is automatically lowered so that your
commands can be recognized more easily.
detailed information of the each command. How to speak numbers:
Operating tips: NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
way to speak numbers when giving voice
. Say a command after the tone.
commands. Refer to the following examples.
. Commands that are available are always
shown on the display and spoken through General rule
voice menu prompts. Commands other than Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. (For
those that are displayed are not accepted. example, if you would like to say 500, “five zero
Please follow the prompts given by the zero” can be used, but “five hundred” cannot.)
system. Examples
. If the command is not recognized, the
. 1-800-662-6200
system announces, “Please say again”.
— “One eight zero zero six six two six two
Repeat the command in a clear voice.
zero zero”
SAA2535 . Push the BACK button once to return to the
Improving Recognition of Phone numbers
previous screen.
2. A list of commands appears on the screen, You can improve the recognition of phone
. To exit the voice recognition system, push
and the system announces, “Would you like numbers by saying the phone number in three
and hold the TALK switch. The mes-
to access Phone, Navigation, Information, groups of numbers. For example, when you try to
sage, “Voice canceled” will be announced.
Audio or Help?”. call 800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first,
. To skip the voice guidance function and give
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the and the system will then ask you for the next
the command immediately, press the TALK
screen changes from to , speak a three digits. Then, say “six six two”. After
switch to interrupt the system. Remem-
command. recognition, the system will then ask for the last
ber to speak after the tone.
Selecting the “Practice” key will start the four digits. Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this
. If you want to adjust the volume of the method of phone digit entry can improve
practice mode. See “Let’s Practice” earlier system feedback, push the volume control
in this section. recognition performance.
buttons [+] or [−] on the steering switch or
4. Continue to follow the voice menu prompts use the audio system volume knob while the When speaking a house number, speak the
and speak after the tone sounds until your system is making an announcement. number “0” as “zero”. If the letter “o (oh)” is
desired operation is completed. included in the house number, it will not be
recognized as the number “0 (zero)” even if you
Selecting the “Help” key can display the
speak “oh” instead of “zero”. Please speak
“zero” for the number “0 (zero)”, “oh” for
the letter “o (oh)”.
Send digits using dial tone:
. Press the TALK switch during a phone
call.
. The menu will be launched and you will be
provided with the following guidance:
"Please say the digits to dial".
. After guidance, say the digits of the number
you want to send. After this, the digits that
have been recognized will be read out.
. If you press the ENTER button on the
steering wheel or on the multifunction
controller, the selected digits will be sent.
Command List
Category Command:
Command Action
Phone Operates the Phone function
Navigation Operates the Navigation function
Information Displays the vehicle Information function
Audio Operates the Audio function.
Help Displays User Guide
. Phone Command:
Command Action
Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.
Quick Dial Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Quick Dial.
Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the mobile phone.
Call history Incoming Calls Makes a call to the incoming call number.
Outgoing Calls Makes a call to the dialed number.
Missed Calls Makes a call to the Missed calls number.
International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken.
Change Number Corrects the recognized phone number (available during phone number entry).
. Navigation Command:
Command Action
Destination Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.
Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route to the location.
Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.
Address Book Searches for stored information in the Address Book.
Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.
. Information Command:
Command Action
Fuel Economy Displays fuel economy information.
Maintenance Displays maintenance information.
Traffic Information Turns the traffic information system ON and OFF.
Where am I? Displays your current location.
. Audio Command:
Command Action
AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.
FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.
XM Turns to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio band, selecting the channel last played.
CD Starts to play a CD.
. General Commands
Command Action
Go back Corrects the last recognition result to return to the previous screen.
Exit Cancels Voice Recognition.
Voice command examples
To use the NISSAN Voice Recognition function,
speaking one command is sometimes sufficient,
but at other times it is necessary to speak two or
more commands. As examples, some additional
basic operations by voice commands are
described here.
For navigation system commands, see the
separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
SAA1859 SAA2535
Example 1 - Placing a call to the phone 2. The system announces, “Would you like to
number 800-662-6200: access Phone, Navigation, Information,
1. Push the TALK switch located on the Audio or Help?”
steering wheel. 3. Speak “Phone”.
JVH0481X SAA2537 SAA2538
4. Speak “Dial Number”. 5. Speak “8 0 0”. 6. The system announces, “Please say the next
Selecting the “Manual Controls” key three digits or dial, or say change number.”
switches the screen to the keypad to input 7. Speak “6 6 2”.
the phone number manually.
the “International Call” command for
all other formats.
. If you say “Change Number” during
phone number entry, the system will
automatically request that you repeat
the number using the 3-3-4 format. In
this case please say the area code first
and then follow the prompts.
. Do not add a “1” in front of the area
code when speaking phone numbers.
. If the system does not recognize your
command, please try repeating the
command using a natural voice. Speak-
SAA2539 SAA2540
ing too slow or too loudly may further
8. The system announces, “Please say the last 10. The system announces, “Dial or Change decrease recognition performance.
four digits” or say change number. Number?”
9. Speak “6 2 0 0”. 11. Speak “Dial”.
12. The system makes a call to 800-662-6200.
NOTE:
. You can also speak “800-662-6200” (10
continuous digits) or “662-6200” (7
continuous digits), if the area code is
not necessary. However, the 3-3-4 digit
grouping is recommended for im-
proved recognition. (See “Giving voice
commands” earlier in this section.)
. You can only say a phone number using
the 3-3-4 grouping, 7 digits, and 10
digits using this command. Please use
SAA1859 SAA2535 JVH0481X
Example 2 - Placing an international call to 2. The system announces, “Would you like to 4. Speak “International Call”.
the phone number 011-81-111-222-3333: access Phone, Navigation, Information or
1. Push the TALK switch located on the Help?”
steering wheel. 3. Speak “Phone”.
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION AL-
TERNATE COMMAND MODE
The following section is applicable when Alter-
nate Command Mode is activated.
When Alternate Command Mode is activated,
an expanded list of commands can be used after
pressing the TALK switch. In this mode,
available commands are not fully shown on the
display or prompted. Review the expanded
command list when this mode is active. See
examples of Alternate Command Mode screens.
Please note that in this mode the recognition
SAA2541 SAA2542 success rate may be affected as the number of
available commands and ways of speaking each
5. Speak “011811112223333”. 6. Speak “Dial”. command are increased. To improve the recog-
7. System makes a call to 011-81-111-222- nition success rate, try using the Speaker
3333. Adaptation Function available in that mode.
NOTE: (See “Speaker adaptation function (for Alternate
Command Mode)” later in this section.) Other-
Any digit input format is available in the
wise it is recommended that Alternate Com-
International Number input process.
mand Mode be turned OFF and Standard Mode
be used for the best recognition performance.
SAA2529 SAA2543 SAA2544
Activating Alternate Command Mode 4. Highlight the “Alternate Command Mode” 1. Push the INFO button on the instrument
key. panel.
When the Standard Mode is active, perform the
following steps to switch to the Alternate 5. The confirmation message is displayed on 2. Select the “Others” key.
Command Mode. the screen. Push the “OK” key to activate 3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
the Alternate Command Mode.
1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument 4. Select the “Command List” key.
panel. Displaying command list
2. Highlight the “Others” key. If you are controlling the system by voice
3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key. commands for the first time or do not know the
appropriate voice command, perform the follow-
ing procedure for displaying the voice command
list (available only in Alternate Command Mode).
SAA2545 JVH0483X
5. Select a category from the list. 6. Select an item.

7. If necessary, scroll the screen using the
multi-function controller to view the entire
list.
8. Press the BACK button to return to the
previous screen.
Command List
The words in italics are variable.
Phone Commands:
Command Action
Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number.
Quick Dial Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Quick Dial.
Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the mobile phone.
Call History Incoming Calls Makes a call to the incoming call number.
Outgoing Calls Makes a call to the dialed number.
Missed Calls Makes a call to the Missed calls number.
International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken.
Call <name> Makes a call to a contact that is stored in either Quick Dial or Phonebook. Please say “Call” followed by a stored
name.
Change Number Corrects the recognized phone number (available during phone number entry).
Navigation Commands:
Command Action
Destination Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.
Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route to the location.
Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.
Address Book Searches for stored information in the Address Book.
Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.
Previous Start Point Sets a route to a previous starting point.
Delete Destination Deletes a destination.
Information Commands:
Command Action
Fuel Economy Displays fuel economy information.
Maintenance Displays maintenance information.
Where am I? Displays your current location.
Traffic Information Turns the traffic information system ON and OFF.
Weather Information Displays weather information.
Weather Map Displays a weather map.
Audio Commands:
Command Action
CD Starts to play a CD.
FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.
AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.
XM Turns to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio band, selecting the channel last played.
USB Turns on the USB memory.
Bluetooth Audio Turns on the Bluetooth® audio player.
Help Commands:
Command Action
Command List Navigation Commands Displays the navigation command list.
Phone Commands Displays the phone command list.
Audio Commands Displays the audio command list.
Information Commands Displays the information command list.
Help Commands Displays the help command list.
User Guide Displays the User Guide.
Speaker Adaptation The system can memorize the voices of up to three persons.
General Commands:
Command Action
Go back Corrects the last recognition result to return to the previous screen
Exit Cancels Voice Recognition
4. Highlight the “User Guide” key using the settings.
multi-function controller and push the . Adapting the System to Your Voice
ENTER button. Tutorial adapting the system to your voice.
5. Highlight an item using the multi-function USING THE SYSTEM
controller and push the ENTER button.
Initialization
Available items:
. Getting Started position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initia-
Describe the basics of how to operate the lized, which may take up to one minute. When
NISSAN Voice Recognition system. completed, the system is ready to accept voice
. Let’s Practice commands. If the TALK switch is pushed
Mode that allows practicing by following the before the initialization completes the display will
instructions of the system voice. show the message: “System not ready.” or a
SAA2547
. Using the Address Book beep sounds.
Displaying user guide Refer to Navigation System Owner’s Man- Before starting
ual.
You can confirm how to use voice commands by To get the best performance from NISSAN
. Finding a Street Address (if so equipped) Voice Recognition, observe the following.
accessing a simplified User Guide, which
contains basic instructions and tutorials for Refer to Navigation System Owner’s Man-
. Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
several voice commands. ual.
possible. Close the windows to eliminate the
. Placing Calls surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
1. Push the INFO button on the instrument
panel. Tutorial for making a phone call by voice sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
command operation. from recognizing the voice commands cor-
2. Select the “Others” key using the multi-
. Help on Speaking rectly.
function controller and push the ENTER
button. Displays useful tips for how to correctly . When the air conditioner is in the AUTO
speak commands in order for them to be mode, the fan speed decreases automati-
3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key using
properly recognized by the system. cally for easy recognition.
the multi-function controller and push the
. Voice Recognition Settings . Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a
ENTER button.
Describes the available voice recognition command.
. Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.
SAA1859 SAA2548
Giving voice command 2. A list of commands appears on the screen,

and the system announces, “Please say a
1. Push and release the TALK switch
command”.
located on the steering wheel.
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the
screen changes from to , speak a
command.
Operating tips:
. Voice commands cannot be accepted when
the icon is .
. The list displayed can be scrolled by tilting
the menu control switch on the steering
wheel.
. If the command is not recognized, the
system announces, “Please say again”.
Repeat the command in a clear voice. . 1-800-662-6200
. Push the BACK button once to return to the — “Dial one eight zero zero six six two six
previous screen. two zero zero.”
. If you want to cancel the command, push Note 1: For the best voice recognition phone
and hold the TALK switch for 1 second. dialing results, say phone numbers as single
The message “Voice canceled” will be digits.
announced. Note 2: You cannot say 555-6000 as “five five
. To skip the voice guidance function and give five six thousands”.
the command immediately, press the TALK Note 3: When speaking a house number, speak
switch to interrupt the system. Remem- the number “0” as “ zero”. If the letter “o (oh)” is
ber to speak after the tone. included in the house number, it will not be
. If you want to adjust the volume of the recognized as the number “0 (zero)” even if you
system feedback, push the volume control speak “oh” instead of “zero”. Please speak SAA2549
switch (+ or −) on the steering wheel or use “zero” for the number “0 (zero)”, “oh” for the
the audio system volume knob while the letter “o (oh)”. Speaker adaptation function (for Alter-
system is making an announcement.
Send digits using dial tone: nate Command Mode)
How to speak numbers:
. Press the TALK switch during a phone The voice recognition system has a function to
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain call. learn the user’s voice for better voice recognition
way to speak numbers when giving voice performance. The system can memorize the
. The menu will be launched and you will be
commands. Refer to the following examples. voices of up to three persons.
provided with the following guidance:
General rule "Please say the digits to dial". Having the system learn the user’s voice:
Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. (For . After guidance, say the digits of the number 1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument
example, if you would like to say 500, “five zero you want to send. After this, the digits that panel and select the “Others” key.
zero” can be used, but “five hundred” cannot. have been recognized will be read out.
2. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
Phone numbers . If you press the ENTER button on the
3. Select the “Speaker Adaptation” key.
steering wheel or on the multi-function
Speak phone numbers according to the follow-
controller, the selected digits will be sent.
ing examples:
SAA2550 SAA2551 SAA2552
4. Select the user whose voice is memorized 6. Select a category to be learned by the 8. The system requests that you repeat a
by the system. system from the following list. command after a tone.
5. Select the “Start Speaker Adaptation Learn- . Phone Commands 9. After the tone sounds and the icon on the
ing” key. . Navigation Commands screen changes from to , speak the
. Information Commands command that the system requested.
. Audio Commands
10. When the system has recognized the voice
. Help Commands
command, the voice of the user is learned.
The voice commands in the category are Push the switch or BACK button to return
displayed. to the previous screen.
7. Select a voice command and then push the If the system has learned the command cor-
ENTER button. rectly, the voice command status on the right
The voice recognition system starts. side of the command turns from “None” to
“Stored”.
Minimize voice feedback (for Alternate
Command Mode)
To minimize the voice feedback from the system,
perform the following steps.
1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument
panel.
2. Select the “Others” key.
3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
4. Select the “Minimize Voice Feedback” key.
5. The setting is turned to ON and the voice
guidance will now be reduced when using
SAA2553 the Voice Recognition system.
Speaker Adaptation function settings:

Edit User Name
Edit the user name using the keypad displayed
on the screen.
Delete Voice Data
Resets the user’s voice that the voice recogni-
tion system has learned.
Continuous Learning
When this item is turned to ON, you can have
the system learn the voice commands in
succession, without selecting commands one
by one.
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given in this guide for the
appropriate error.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom/error message Solution
The system fails to interpret the command correctly. 1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see “Command List” earlier in this section.
2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.
NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.
The system consistently selects the wrong voicetag in 1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “Bluetooth ® Hands-Free Phone
the phonebook. System (models with navigation system)” earlier in this section; page 4-88.)
2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.
The system cannot be operated. 1. Make sure that the soft top (for CrossCabriolet models) is usable. If the soft top is not working, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
2. Close the soft top (for CrossCabriolet models).
3. Open and close the soft top (for CrossCabriolet models) before operating the system.
5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving ................................ 5-3 Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Lane Departure Warning
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ...................................... 5-3 (LDW) systems (if so equipped) ....................................... 5-20
Three-way catalyst .............................................................. 5-4 BSW system operation ................................................ 5-22
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .................... 5-4 BSW driving situations ................................................. 5-25
Avoiding collision and rollover ......................................... 5-7 LDW system operation ................................................. 5-26
On-pavement and off-road driving precautions .......... 5-7 BSW/LDW temporary disabled status .................... 5-29
Off-road recovery ................................................................ 5-7 BSW/LDW automatic deactivation ........................... 5-29
Rapid air pressure loss ...................................................... 5-8 BSW/LDW malfunction ............................................... 5-29
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ................................. 5-8 Camera unit maintenance ............................................ 5-29
Driving safety precautions ................................................. 5-9 Cruise control ......................................................................... 5-30
Push-button ignition switch ................................................. 5-11 Precautions on cruise control ..................................... 5-30
Intelligent Key system ...................................................... 5-11 Cruise control operations ............................................ 5-30
Push-button ignition switch operation ........................ 5-12 Break-in schedule ................................................................. 5-31
Push-button ignition switch positions ......................... 5-13 Fuel efficient driving tips ..................................................... 5-32
Emergency engine shut off ............................................ 5-13 Increasing fuel economy ...................................................... 5-33
Intelligent Key battery discharge .................................. 5-14 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) (if so equipped) ........................ 5-33
Before starting the engine ................................................... 5-14 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) lock switch operations ..... 5-33
Starting the engine ................................................................ 5-15 AWD warning light ........................................................ 5-35
Driving the vehicle ................................................................. 5-16 Parking/parking on hills ........................................................ 5-36
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) ................ 5-16 Power steering ....................................................................... 5-37
Parking brake .......................................................................... 5-19
Brake system ........................................................................... 5-37 Anti-freeze ........................................................................ 5-41
Braking precautions ......................................................... 5-37 Battery ............................................................................... 5-41
Parking brake break-in .................................................... 5-37 Draining of coolant water ............................................. 5-41
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) .................................. 5-38 Tire equipment ................................................................ 5-41
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .......................... 5-39 Special winter equipment ............................................ 5-41
Cold weather driving ............................................................. 5-41 Driving on snow or ice ................................................. 5-41
Freeing a frozen door lock ............................................. 5-41 Engine block heater (if so equipped) ....................... 5-42
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
access to car keys (CrossCabriolet 1. Open all the windows.

WARNING models).
2. Set the air recirculation to off
. Do not leave children or adults who EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) and the fan control to high to
would normally require the support circulate the air.
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets . If electrical wiring or other cable
should not be left alone either. They
WARNING connections must pass to a trailer
could accidentally injure themselves through the seal on the lift gate/
. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they trunk or the body, follow the manu-
or others through inadvertent op-
contain colorless and odorless car- facturer’s recommendation to pre-
eration of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
bon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is vent carbon monoxide entry into the
sunny days, temperatures in a
dangerous. It can cause uncon- vehicle.
closed vehicle could quickly become
sciousness or death.
high enough to cause severe or . If a special body, camper or other
possibly fatal injuries to people or . If you suspect that exhaust fumes equipment is added for recreational
animals. are entering the vehicle, drive with or other usage, follow the manufac-
all windows fully open, and have the
. Properly secure all cargo with ropes turer’s recommendation to prevent
vehicle inspected immediately. carbon monoxide entry into the
sliding or shifting. Do not place . Do not run the engine in closed vehicle. (Some recreational vehicle
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In spaces such as a garage. appliances such as stoves, refrig-
a sudden stop or collision, unse- . Do not park the vehicle with the erators, heaters, etc. may also gen-
cured cargo could cause personal engine running for any extended erate carbon monoxide.)
injury (Hardtop models). length of time. . The exhaust system and body
. Closely supervise children when . Keep the lift gate/trunk closed should be inspected by a qualified
they are around cars to prevent while driving, otherwise exhaust mechanic whenever:
them from playing and becoming gases could be drawn into the — The vehicle is raised for service.
locked in the trunk where they could passenger compartment. If you
be seriously injured. Keep the car — You suspect that exhaust fumes
must drive with the lift gate/trunk
locked with the trunk closed when are entering into the passenger
open, follow these precautions:
not in use, and prevent children’s compartment.
Starting and driving 5-3

— You notice a change in the TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-
sound of the exhaust system. CAUTION TEM (TPMS)
— You have had an accident invol- Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
. Do not use leaded gasoline. Depos- should be checked monthly when cold and
ving damage to the exhaust
its from leaded gasoline will ser- inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
system, underbody, or rear of
iously reduce the three-way by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
the vehicle.
catalyst’s ability to help reduce ex- placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
haust pollutants. vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
THREE-WAY CATALYST . Keep your engine tuned up. Mal- indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
The three-way catalyst is an emission control functions in the ignition, fuel injec- pressure label, you should determine the proper
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust tion, or electrical systems can cause tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at overrich fuel flow into the three-way As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
high temperatures to help reduce pollutants. catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
not keep driving if the engine mis- System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
fires, or if noticeable loss of perfor- pressure telltale when one or more of your tires
WARNING mance or other unusual operating is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
conditions are detected. Have the the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
. The exhaust gas and the exhaust
vehicle inspected promptly by a should stop and check your tires as soon as
system are very hot. Keep people,
NISSAN dealer. possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
animals or flammable materials
away from the exhaust system com- . Avoid driving with an extremely low sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
ponents. fuel level. Running out of fuel could causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
cause the engine to misfire, dama- failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-
. Do not stop or park the vehicle over
ging the three-way catalyst. ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
flammable materials such as dry
. Do not race the engine while warm- vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
grass, waste paper or rags. They
may ignite and cause a fire. ing it up. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
. Do not push or tow your vehicle to proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
start the engine. responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
5-4 Starting and driving

pressure telltale. flat tire while driving). the air inside the tire which can cause a
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a . The low tire pressure warning light does not lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the automatically turn off when the tire pressure the low tire pressure warning light to
system is not operating properly. The TPMS is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the illuminate. If the warning light illuminates in
malfunction indicator is combined with the low recommended pressure, the vehicle must be low ambient temperature, check the tire
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) pressure for all four tires.
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi- to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire For additional information, see “Low tire pres-
mately one minute and then remain continuously pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure sure warning light” in the “2. Instruments and
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon gauge to check the tire pressure. controls” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the . The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning also System (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of emer-
malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi- appears on the dot matrix liquid crystal gency” section.
cator is illuminated, the system may not be able display when the low tire pressure warning
to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. light is illuminated and low tire pressure is
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of detected. The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
WARNING
reasons, including the installation of replace- warning turns off when the low tire pressure
. If the low tire pressure warning light
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle warning light turns off.
illuminates while driving, avoid sud-
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning den steering maneuvers or abrupt
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale appears each time the ignition switch is braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull
after replacing one or more tires or wheels on placed in the ON position as long as the low off the road to a safe location and
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or tire pressure warning light remains illumi- stop the vehicle as soon as possi-
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to nated. ble. Driving with under-inflated tires
continue to function properly. The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning may permanently damage the tires
Additional information does not appear if the low tire pressure and increase the likelihood of tire
warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS failure. Serious vehicle damage
. The TPMS does not monitor the tire
malfunction. could occur and may lead to an
pressure of the spare tire.
. Tire pressure rises and falls depending on accident and could result in serious
. The TPMS will activate only when the
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation personal injury. Check the tire pres-
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
and the outside temperature. Low outside sure for all four tires. Adjust the tire
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect
temperature can lower the temperature of pressure to the recommended COLD
a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a
tire pressure shown on the Tire and gency tire puncture repair kit). pressure sensors, and the TPMS will
Loading Information label to turn . If you used the Emergency Tire not function properly.
the low tire pressure warning light Sealant to repair a minor tire punc-
OFF. If the light still illuminates ture, your NISSAN dealer will also Some devices and transmitters may temporarily
while driving after adjusting the tire need to replace the TPMS sensor in interfere with the operation of the TPMS and
pressure, a tire may be flat. If you addition to repairing or replacing cause the low tire pressure warning light to
have a flat tire, replace it with a the tire (for models equipped with illuminate. Some examples are:
spare tire as soon as possible. (See the emergency tire puncture repair . Facilities or electric devices using similar
“Flat tire” in the “6. In case of kit). radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
emergency” section for changing a
. NISSAN recommends using only . If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
flat tire.)
NISSAN Genuine Emergency Tire being used in or near the vehicle.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a Sealant provided with your vehicle. . If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/
wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not Other tire sealants may damage the AC converter is being used in or near the
function and the low tire pressure valve stem seal which can cause the vehicle.
warning light will flash for approxi- tire to lose air pressure (for models FCC Notice:
mately 1 minute. The light will equipped with the emergency tire
remain on after 1 minute. Contact For USA:
puncture repair kit).
your NISSAN dealer as soon as This device complies with Part 15 of the
possible for tire replacement and/ FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
or system resetting. following two conditions: (1) This device
. Replacing tires with those not ori-
CAUTION may not cause harmful interference, and
ginally specified by NISSAN could (2) this device must accept any interfer-
. The TPMS may not function properly ence received, including interference that
affect the proper operation of the
when the wheels are equipped with may cause undesired operation.
TPMS.
tire chains or the wheels are buried
. Do not inject any tire liquid or Note: Changes or modifications not ex-
in snow.
aerosol tire sealant into the tires, pressly approved by the party responsible
. Do not place metalized film or any for compliance could void the user’s
as this may cause a malfunction of
metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the authority to operate the equipment.
the tire pressure sensors (for mod-
windows. This may cause poor re-
els not equipped with the emer-
ception of the signals from the tire
For Canada: (including prescription or over-the-counter abrupt maneuvers, particularly at high speeds.
This device complies with RSS-210 of drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to wear your seat belt as outlined in the “Seat operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss
the following two conditions: (1) this belts” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and of control or vehicle rollover. Seat belts help
device may not cause interference, and supplemental restraint system” section of this reduce the risk of injury in collisions and
(2) this device must accept any interfer- manual, and also instruct your passengers to do rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted or
ence, including interference that may so. improperly belted person is significantly more
cause undesired operation of the device. Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in likely to be injured or killed than a person
collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an properly wearing a seat belt.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLL-
unbelted or improperly belted person is Be sure to read “Driving safety precautions”
OVER
significantly more likely to be injured or later in this section.
killed than a person properly wearing a OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
WARNING seat belt.
If the right side or left side wheels unintentionally
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD leave the road surface, maintain control of the
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe DRIVING PRECAUTIONS vehicle by following the procedure below.
and prudent manner may result in loss
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher Please note that this procedure is only a general
of control or an accident.
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate
They have higher ground clearance than pas- based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey traffic.
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, senger cars to make them capable of performing
high speed cornering, or sudden steering in a variety of on-pavement and off-road 1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
maneuvers, because these driving practices applications. This gives them a higher center of 2. Do not apply the brakes.
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. gravity than ordinary cars. An advantage of
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
As with any vehicle, a loss of control could higher ground clearance is a better view of the
with both hands and try to hold a straight
result in a collision with other vehicles or road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
course.
objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover, However, they are not designed for cornering
at the same speeds as conventional passenger 4. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-
particularly if the loss of control causes the
cars any more than low-slung sports cars are erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all
times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road 5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the
when under the influence of alcohol or drugs conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or vehicle to follow the road while the vehicle
speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive while driving maintain control of the vehicle by 3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-
the vehicle back onto the road surface until following the procedure below. Please note that erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
vehicle speed is reduced. this procedure is only a general guide. The 4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on off the road and away from traffic if possible.
steering wheel until both tires return to the the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually
road surface. When all tires are on the road stop the vehicle.
surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the WARNING 6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
appropriate driving lane.
. If you decide that it is not safe to return
either contact a roadside emergency service
The following actions can increase the to change the tire or see “Changing a flat
the vehicle to the road surface based on chance of losing control of the vehicle if tire (Hardtop models)” in the “6. In case of
vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradu- there is a sudden loss of tire air emergency” section of this Owner’s Manual.
ally slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe pressure. Losing control of the vehicle
place off the road. may cause a collision and result in
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS personal injury. DRIVING
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can . The vehicle generally moves or pulls
occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due in the direction of the flat tire. WARNING
to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure . Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
loss can also be caused by driving on under- Never drive under the influence of
inflated tires. . Do not rapidly release the accelera- alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the blood-
tor pedal. stream reduces coordination, delays
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling
and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway . Do not rapidly turn the steering reaction time and impairs judgement.
speeds. wheel. Driving after drinking alcohol increases
the likelihood of being involved in an
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by main- accident injuring yourself and others.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
taining the correct air pressure and visually Additionally, if you are injured in an
inspect the tires for wear and damage. See 2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight accident, alcohol can increase the se-
“Wheels and tires” in the “8. Maintenance and verity of the injury.
do-it-yourself” section of this manual. course.
If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-out” NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,
you must choose not to drive under the influence . If your engine stalls or you cannot
of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are WARNING make it to the top of a steep hill,
injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. never attempt to turn around. Your
Although the local laws vary on what is . Drive carefully when off the road vehicle could tip or roll over. Always
considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is and avoid dangerous areas. Every back straight down in R (Reverse)
that alcohol affects all people differently and person who drives or rides in this range. Never back down in N (Neu-
most people underestimate the effects of vehicle should be seated with their tral), using only the brake, as this
alcohol. seat belt fastened. This will keep could cause loss of control.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And you and your passengers in position
. Heavy braking going down a hill
that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, when driving over rough terrain.
could cause your brakes to overheat
prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if . Do not drive across steep slopes. and fade, resulting in loss of control
your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by Instead drive either straight up or and an accident. Apply brakes
alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition. straight down the slopes. Off-road lightly and use a low range to
DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS vehicles can tip over sideways much control your speed.
more easily than they can forward or
Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and . Unsecured cargo can be thrown
backward.
off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep around when driving over rough
water or mud as your NISSAN is mainly . Many hills are too steep for any terrain. Properly secure all cargo
designed for leisure use, unlike a conventional vehicle. If you drive up them, you so it will not be thrown forward
off-road vehicle. may stall. If you drive down them, and cause injury to you or your
you may not be able to control your passengers.
Remember that Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) mod-
speed. If you drive across them, you
els are less capable than All-Wheel Drive . To avoid raising the center of gravity
may roll over.
(AWD) models for rough road driving and excessively, do not exceed the rated
extrication when stuck in deep snow, mud, or . Do not shift ranges while driving on capacity of the roof rack (if so
the like. downhill grades as this could cause equipped) and evenly distribute the
loss of control of the vehicle. load. Secure heavy loads in the
Please observe the following precautions:
. Stay alert when driving to the top of cargo area as far forward and as
a hill. At the top there could be a low as possible. Do not equip the
drop-off or other hazard that could vehicle with tires larger than speci-
cause an accident. fied in this manual. This could cause
your vehicle to roll over. expected vehicle movement which passenger car. The vehicle is not
. Do not grip the inside or spokes of could result in serious vehicle da- designed for cornering at the same
the steering wheel when driving off- mage or personal injury. speeds as conventional passenger
road. The steering wheel could . Do not attempt to test an AWD cars. Failure to operate this vehicle
move suddenly and injure your equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dy- correctly could result in loss of
hands. Instead drive with your fin- namometer (such as the dynam- control and/or a rollover accident.
gers and thumbs on the outside of ometers used by some states for . Always use tires of the same type,
the rim. emissions testing), or similar equip- size, brand, construction (bias, bias-
. Before operating the vehicle, ensure ment even if the other two wheels belted or radial), and tread pattern
that the driver and all passengers are raised off the ground. Make sure on all four wheels. Install tire chains
have their seat belts fastened. you inform test facility personnel on the front wheels when driving on
that your vehicle is equipped with slippery roads and drive carefully.
. Always drive with the floor mats in
AWD before it is placed on a . Be sure to check the brakes imme-
place as the floor may became hot.
dynamometer. Using the wrong test diately after driving in mud or water.
. Lower your speed when encounter- equipment may result in drivetrain See “Brake system” later in this
ing strong crosswinds. With a higher damage or unexpected vehicle section for wet brakes.
center of gravity, your NISSAN is movement which could result in
more affected by strong side winds. . Avoid parking your vehicle on steep
serious vehicle damage or personal
Slower speeds ensure better vehicle hills. If you get out of the vehicle
injury. (AWD models)
control. and it rolls forward, backward or
. When a wheel is off the ground due sideways, you could be injured.
. Do not drive beyond the perfor- to an unlevel surface, do not spin
mance capability of the tires, even . Whenever you drive off-road
the wheel excessively.
with AWD engaged. through sand, mud or water as deep
. Accelerating quickly, sharp steering as the wheel hub, more frequent
. For AWD equipped vehicles, do not maneuvers or sudden braking may maintenance may be required. See
attempt to raise two wheels off the cause loss of control. the maintenance information in the
ground and shift the transmission to
. If at all possible, avoid sharp turning “NISSAN Service and Maintenance
any drive or reverse position with
maneuvers, particularly at high Guide”.
the engine running. Doing so may
speeds. Your vehicle has a higher
result in drivetrain damage or un-
center of gravity than a conventional
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
. Spinning the front wheels on slip- cle.

pery surfaces may cause the AWD WARNING . Never leave the Intelligent Key in-
warning light to flash and the AWD side the vehicle when you leave the
system to automatically switch from Do not operate the push-button ignition vehicle.
the AWD mode to the 2WD mode. switch while driving the vehicle except
This could reduce traction. Be espe- in an emergency. (The engine will stop
cially careful when towing a trailer. when the ignition switch is pushed 3
(AWD models) consecutive times in quick succession
or the ignition switch is pushed and
held for more than 2 seconds.) If the
engine stops while the vehicle is being
driven, this could lead to a crash and
serious injury.
Before operating the push-button ignition

switch, be sure to move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position.
The Intelligent Key system can operate the
ignition switch without taking the Intelligent
Key out from your pocket or purse. The
operating environment and/or conditions may
affect the Intelligent Key system operation.
CAUTION
. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you when operating the vehi-

. The cargo/trunk area is not included in the
operating range, but the Intelligent Key may
function.
. If the Intelligent Key is placed on the
instrument panel, rear parcel shelf, inside
the glove box or door pocket, the Intelligent
Key may not function.
. If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door
or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent
Key may function.
SSD0436 SSD1021
Operating range for engine start function PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
OPERATION
for starting the engine when the Intelligent Key is When the ignition switch is pushed without
within the specified operating range * 1 . depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch
position will change as follows:
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost
discharged or strong radio waves are present . Push center once to change to ACC.
near the operating location, the Intelligent Key . Push center two times to change to ON.
system’s operating range becomes narrower . Push center three times to change to OFF.
and may not function properly. (No position illuminates.)
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating . Push center four times to return to ACC.
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone . Open or close any door to return to LOCK
who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push during the OFF position.
the ignition switch to start the engine. The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
switch position cannot be switched to LOCK

until the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
position. POSITIONS CAUTION
When the ignition switch cannot be pushed
LOCK (Normal parking position) Do not leave the vehicle with the push-
toward the LOCK position, proceed as follows:
The ignition switch can only be locked in this button ignition switch in ACC or ON
1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
position. positions when the engine is not run-
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is ning for an extended period. This can
2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position. pushed to the ACC position while carrying the discharge the battery.
(The ignition switch position indicator will Intelligent Key or with the Intelligent Key inserted
not illuminate.) in the Intelligent Key port. EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
3. Open the door. The ignition switch will
ACC (Accessories) To shut off the engine in an emergency situation
change to the LOCK position.
while driving, perform the following procedure:
The shift lever can be moved from the P This position activates electrical accessories
such as the radio, when the engine is not . Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in
running. 3 consecutive times in less than 1.5
the ON position and the brake pedal is
seconds, or
depressed. ON (Normal operating position) . Push and hold the push-button ignition
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, This position turns on the ignition system and switch for more than 2 seconds.
the push-button ignition switch cannot be electrical accessories.
turned from the LOCK position.
Some indicators and warnings for operation are OFF
displayed on the dot matrix liquid crystal display The engine can be turned off in this position.
between the speedometer and tachometer. (See The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
“Dot matrix liquid crystal display” in the “2. switch cannot be switched to the LOCK position
Instruments and controls” section.) until the shift lever is moved to the P (Park)
position.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
the Intelligent Key out of the port. . Make sure the area around the vehicle is
NOTE: clear.
. Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-
The key port does not charge the key
ant, brake fluid and window washer fluid as
battery. If you see the low battery indicator
frequently as possible, or at least whenever
in the dot matrix liquid crystal display,
you refuel.
replace the battery as soon as possible.
(See “Intelligent Key battery replacement” . Check that all windows and lights are clean.
in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” . Visually inspect tires for their appearance
section.) and condition. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
. Lock all doors.
CAUTION . Position seats and adjust head restraints/
. Never place anything except the headrests.
SSD0837
Intelligent Key in the key port. Doing . Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DIS- so may cause damage to the equip- . Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to
CHARGE ment. do likewise.
If the battery of the Intelligent Key is almost . Make sure the Intelligent Key is in . Check the operation of warning lights when
discharged, the guide light * B of the key port the correct direction when inserting the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
* A blinks and the indicator appears on the dot it to the key port. The engine may position. (See “Warning/indicator lights and
matrix liquid crystal display. (See “Dot matrix not start if it is in the incorrect audible reminders” in the “2. Instruments
liquid crystal display” in the “2. Instruments and direction. and controls” section.)
controls” section.)
. Remove the Intelligent Key from the
In this case, inserting the Intelligent Key into the key port after the ignition switch is
port * A allows you to start the engine. Make pushed to the OFF position.
sure that the key ring side faces backward as
illustrated. Insert the Intelligent Key in the port
until it is latched and secured.
To remove the Intelligent Key from the port, push
the ignition switch to the OFF position and pull
STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Apply the parking brake. depressing the brake pedal and pushing NOTE:
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) or N the push-button ignition switch to start Care should be taken to avoid situations
(Neutral) position. (P is recommended.) the engine. If the engine starts, but fails that can lead to potential battery discharge
to run, repeat the above procedure. and potential no-start conditions such as:
The starter is designed not to operate unless
1. Installation or extended use of electro-
the shift lever is in either of the above
nic accessories that consume battery
positions. CAUTION power when the engine is not running
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players,
Depress the brake pedal and push the Do not operate the starter for more etc.)
ignition switch to start the engine. than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
To start the engine immediately, push and does not start, push the ignition switch
only driven short distances.
release the ignition switch while depressing to OFF and wait 10 seconds before
the brake pedal with the ignition switch in cranking again, otherwise the starter In these cases, the battery may need to be
any position. could be damaged. charged to maintain battery health.
. If the engine is very hard to start in
extremely cold weather or when restart- 4. Warm-up
ing, depress the accelerator pedal a little Allow the engine to idle for at least 30
(approximately 1/3 to the floor) and while seconds after starting. Do not race the
holding, crank the engine. Release the engine while warming it up. Drive at
accelerator pedal when the engine starts. moderate speed for a short distance first,
. If the engine is very hard to start because especially in cold weather. In cold weather,
it is flooded, depress the accelerator keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 -
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. 3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and
Push the ignition switch to the ON stopping the engine over a short period of
position to start cranking the engine. time may make the vehicle more difficult to
After 5 or 6 seconds, stop cranking by start.
pushing the ignition switch to OFF. After 5. To stop the engine, shift the shift lever to the
cranking the engine, release the accel- P (Park) position and push the ignition
erator pedal. Crank the engine with your switch to the OFF position.
foot off the accelerator pedal by
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS- 2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and
MISSION (CVT) move the shift lever to a driving position. CAUTION
The Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) 3. Release the parking brake and foot brake
in your vehicle is electronically controlled to pedal, and then gradually start the vehicle in . Except in an emergency, do not shift
produce maximum power and smooth operation. motion. to the N (Neutral) position while
driving. Coasting with the transmis-
The recommended operating procedures for this sion in the N (Neutral) position may
transmission are shown on the following pages. WARNING cause serious damage to the trans-
Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle mission.
performance and driving enjoyment. . Do not depress the accelerator
. When stopping the vehicle on an
Engine power may be automatically re- pedal while shifting from P (Park)
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle
duced to protect the CVT if the engine or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D
by depressing the accelerator pedal.
speed increases quickly when driving on (Drive) or L (Low) position. Always
The foot brake should be used for
slippery roads or while being tested on depress the brake pedal until shift-
this purpose.
some dynamometers. ing is completed. Failure to do so
could cause you to lose control and . Do not downshift abruptly on slip-
Starting the vehicle have an accident. pery roads. This may cause a loss of
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the control.
. Cold engine idle speed is high, so
foot brake pedal before moving the shift use caution when shifting into a
lever out of the P (Park) position. forward or reverse gear before the
This CVT is designed so that the foot engine has warmed up.
brake pedal must be depressed before . Never shift to P (Park) or R (Re-
shifting from P (Park) to any driving verse) while vehicle is moving. Fail-
position while the ignition switch is in ure to do so could cause you to lose
the ON position. control and have an accident.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of
the P (Park) position and into any of
the other positions if the ignition
switch is pushed to the LOCK, OFF or
ACC position.
R (Reverse):
WARNING Use this position to back up. Make sure the
vehicle is completely stopped before selecting
Apply the parking brake if the shift lever the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal
is in any position while the engine is must be depressed and the shift lever
not running. Failure to do so could button pushed in to move the shift lever
cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any driving
or roll away and result in serious position to R (Reverse).
personal injury or property damage.
N (Neutral):
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged.
The engine can be started in this position. You
CAUTION may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled
SSD0691 engine while the vehicle is moving.
Use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position
To move the shift lever, D (Drive):
only when the vehicle is completely
: *
Push the button A while depressing the stopped. Use this position for all normal forward driving.
brake pedal. L (Low):
: *
Push the button A . P (Park): Use this position for maximum engine braking on
: Just move the shift lever. steep downhill gradients/climbing steep slopes
Use this position when the vehicle is parked or
Shifting when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle and whenever approaching sharp bends. Do not
is completely stopped. The brake pedal must use the L position in any other circumstances.
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake
be depressed and the shift lever button
pedal, push the shift lever button and move the
pushed in to move the shift lever from N
shift lever from the P (Park) position to any of the
(Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park).
desired shift positions.
Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill,
apply the parking brake first, then move the shift
lever to the P (Park) position.

Accelerator downshift — In D position — switch in the OFF position and wait for 10
For passing or hill climbing, fully depress the seconds. Then place the ignition switch
accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the back in the ON position. The vehicle should
transmission down into a lower gear, depending return to its normal operating condition. If
on the vehicle speed. it does not return to its normal operating
condition, have a NISSAN dealer check the
High fluid temperature protection mode transmission and repair if necessary.
This transmission has a high fluid temperature
protection mode. If the fluid temperature be-
comes too high (for example, when climbing
WARNING
steep grades in high temperature with heavy
When the high fluid temperature pro-
loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine
tection mode or fail-safe operation
power and, under some conditions, vehicle
SSD0692 occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually
speed will be decreased automatically to reduce
reduced. The reduced speed may be
the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle
Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch lower than other traffic, which could
speed can be controlled with the accelerator
increase the chance of a collision. Be
When the O/D OFF switch is pushed with the pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be
especially careful when driving. If ne-
shift lever in the D (Drive) position, the limited.
cessary, pull to the side of the road at a
indicator light in the instrument panel illuminates.
Fail-safe safe place and allow the transmission
Use the overdrive off mode when you need to return to normal operation, or have it
If the vehicle is driven under extreme
improved engine braking. repaired if necessary.
conditions, such as excessive wheel spin-
To turn off the overdrive off mode, push the O/D ning and subsequent hard braking, the
OFF switch again. The indicator light will fail-safe system may be activated. The MIL
turn off. may illuminate to indicate the fail-safe
Each time the engine is started, or when the shift mode is activated. (See “Malfunction In-
lever is shifted to any position other than the D dicator Light (MIL)” in the “2. Instruments
(Drive) position, the overdrive off mode will be and controls” section.) This will occur even
automatically turned off. if all electrical circuits are functioning
properly. In this case, place the ignition

PARKING BRAKE
4. Push down the shift lock release *

B using a
suitable tool. WARNING
5. Push the shift lever button *
C and move the
shift lever to the N (Neutral) position * D . Be sure the parking brake is fully
while holding down the shift lock release. released before driving. Failure to
The vehicle may be moved to the desired do so can cause brake failure and
location. lead to an accident.
Replace the removed shift lock release cover . Do not release the parking brake
after the operation. from outside the vehicle.
If the shift lever cannot be moved out of the P . Do not use the gear shift in place of
(Park) position, have a NISSAN dealer check the the parking brake. When parking, be
CVT system as soon as possible. sure the parking brake is fully
SSD0693 engaged.
. Do not leave children unattended in
Shift lock release WARNING a vehicle. They could release the
If the battery charge is low or discharged, the parking brake and cause an acci-
If the shift lever cannot be moved from dent.
shift lever may not be moved from the P (Park)
the P (Park) position while the engine is
position even with the brake pedal depressed
running and the brake pedal is de-
and the shift lever button pushed.
pressed, the stop lights may not work.
To move the shift lever, perform the following Malfunctioning stop lights could cause
procedure: an accident injuring yourself and
1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK others.
position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Remove the shift lock release cover *
A
using a suitable tool.

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW)/
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)
SYSTEMS (if so equipped)
The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system helps
alert the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes
when changing lanes.
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system
helps alert the driver when the vehicle is
traveling close to either the left or the right of a
traveling lane.
SPA2331 JVS0152X
To apply: Fully depress the parking brake pedal The BSW/LDW systems use the RearView
*1 . Monitor camera unit *
1 with automatic washer
To release: and blower.

1. Firmly apply the foot brake *
2 .
2. Depress the parking brake pedal *

1 and WARNING
the parking brake will be released.
. The BSW system is not a replace-
3. Before driving, be sure the brake warning
ment for proper driving procedure
light goes out.
and is not designed to prevent
contact with vehicles or objects.
When changing lanes, always use
the side and rear mirrors and turn
and look in the direction you will
move to ensure it is safe to change
lanes. Never rely solely on the BSW
system. . Excessive noise (for example, audio
. The LDW system is only a warning system volume, open vehicle win-
device to help inform the driver of a dow) will interfere with the chime
potential unintended lane depar- sound, and it may not be heard.
ture. It will not steer the vehicle or
prevent loss of control. It is the
driver’s responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely, keep the vehicle in the
traveling lane, and be in control of
the vehicle at all times.
. The camera unit may not function
properly under the following condi-
tions: SSD1086
— When towing a trailer. Blind Spot Indicator light
— When strong light enters the

camera unit. (for example, light
directly shines on the rear of the
vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
— When ambient brightness
changes suddenly. (for example,
when the vehicle enters or exits
a tunnel or passes under a
bridge.)
. If the camera lens is excessively
dirty, the automatic washer may not
be able to completely clean the lens.
This could result in the camera not SSD1029
detecting vehicles or lane markers. BSW light (orange, green)

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION brightness of the ambient light.
The BSW system operates above approximately A chime sounds if the camera unit has already
20 MPH (32 km/h). detected vehicles when the driver activates the
When the camera unit detects vehicles in the turn signal. If a vehicle comes into the detection
detection zone, the Blind Spot Indicator light zone after the driver activates the turn signal,
located inside the outside mirrors will illuminate. then only the Blind Spot Indicator light flashes
If the turn signal is then activated, the system and no chime sounds. (See “BSW driving
chimes (twice). situations” later in this section.)
Turning on or off the BSW system
The BSW system can be turned on or off using
the setting menu on the center display.
SSD1026
SYSTEM ON:
The BSW light (green) on the instrument panel
Detection zone will light up.
The camera unit can detect vehicles on either SYSTEM OFF:
side of your vehicle when part of another vehicle The BSW light (green) on the instrument panel
is within the detection zone shown as illustrated. will go out.
This detection zone typically starts from the
outside mirror of your vehicle and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) behind the rear
bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3 m) sideways.
NOTE:
The Blind Spot Indicator light will illumi-
nate for a few seconds when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
The brightness of the Blind Spot Indicator lights
is adjusted automatically depending on the
Perform the following steps to enable or disable
the BSW system.
1. Push the SETTING * 1 button and highlight
the “Driver Assistance” key on the display
using the multi-function controller. Then
push the ENTER * 2 button.
JVS0159X JVH0345X
2. Highlight the “Blind Spot Warning” key,

select ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled) and
push the ENTER * 2 button.
SSD0885
Example

— Some types of small vehicles lanes away.
such as motorcycles and very . The camera unit is designed to
short length vehicles ignore most stationary objects,
— Oncoming vehicles however objects such as guardrails,
walls, foliage and parked vehicles
— A vehicle approaching rapidly
may occasionally be detected. This
from behind. (See “BSW driving
is a normal operating condition.
situations” later in this section.)
. The camera unit may detect the
— A vehicle which your vehicle reflected image of vehicles or road-
overtakes rapidly. (See “BSW side objects that are not actually in
driving situations” later in this the detection zone, especially when
section.) the road is wet.
SSD1156 — A vehicle that merges or
Warning systems switch changes lanes rapidly directly
The warning systems switch is used to tem- next to your vehicle.
porarily turn off the warning systems (Lane . The camera unit may not be able to
Departure Warning (LDW) and Blind Spot detect properly when your vehicle
Warning (BSW) systems) that are activated travels beside the middle section of
using the settings menu. a vehicle with long wheelbase (for
example, trailer truck, semi-trailer,
tractor).
WARNING
. The camera detection zone is de-
. The camera unit may not be able to signed based on a standard lane
detect when certain objects are width. When driving in a wider lane,
present such as: the camera unit may not detect
— Pedestrians, bicycles, animals vehicles in an adjacent lane. When
driving in a narrow lane, the camera
unit may detect vehicles driving two

SSD1026 SSD1031 SSD1033
BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS If the driver activates the turn signal, then the Overtaking other vehicles
Blind Spot Indicator light flashes and a chime
Another vehicle approaching from be- will sound twice.
The Blind Spot Indicator light illuminates if you
hind overtake a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the
NOTE: detection zone for approximately 3 seconds.
The Blind Spot Indicator light illuminates if a
vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in If the driver activates the turn signal before The camera unit may not detect slower moving
an adjacent lane. a vehicle enters the detection zone, the vehicles if they are passed quickly.
Blind Spot Indicator light will flash but no
However, if the overtaking vehicle is traveling chime will sound when the other vehicle is
much faster than your vehicle, the indicator light detected.
may not illuminate before the detected vehicle is
beside your vehicle. Always use the side and
rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction
your vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to
change lanes.

LDW SYSTEM OPERATION
The LDW system operates above approximately
43 MPH (70 km/h).
When the vehicle approaches either the left or
the right of the traveling lane, the LDW system
will chime a sound and the LDW light (orange)
on the instrument panel will blink to alert the
driver.
The LDW system is not designed to operate
under the following conditions.
. When you operate the lane change signal
and change traveling lanes in the direction of
SSD1034 JVS0154X the signal. (The LDW system will become
operable again approximately 2 seconds
If the driver activates the turn signal while
after the lane change signal is turned off.)
another vehicle is in the detection zone, then
the Blind Spot Indicator light flashes and a . When the vehicle speed is less than
chime will sound twice. approximately 43 MPH (70 km/h).
After the above conditions have finished and the
necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the
LDW functions will resume.
SSD0672
LDW light (orange, green)

Turning on or off the LDW system Perform the following steps to enable or disable
The LDW system is turned on or off using the the LDW system.
setting menu on the center display. 1. Push the SETTING * 1 button and highlight
the “Driver Assistance” key on the display
SYSTEM ON:
using the multi-function controller. Then
The LDW light (green) on the instrument panel push the ENTER * 2 button.
will light up.
SYSTEM OFF:
The LDW light (green) on the instrument panel
will go out.
JVS0159X
SSD0885
Example

painted clearly; yellow painted
lane markers; nonstandard lane
markers; or lane markers cov-
ered with water, dirt, snow, etc.
— On roads where the discontin-
ued lane markers are still de-
tectable.
— On roads where there are sharp
curves.
— On roads where there are shar-
ply contrasting objects, such as
JVH0345X SSD1156
shadows, snow, water, wheel
Warning systems switch
ruts, seams or lines remaining
2. Highlight the “Lane Departure Warning” key, after road repairs. (The LDW
The warning systems switch is used to tem-
select ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled) and system could detect these items
push the ENTER *
porarily turn off the warning systems (Lane
2 button. as lane markers.)
Departure Warning (LDW) and Blind Spot
Warning (BSW) systems) that are activated — On roads where the traveling
using the settings menu. lane merges or separates.
— When the vehicle’s traveling di-
rection does not align with the
WARNING lane marker.
. The camera unit may not be able to — When the road surface is very
detect properly under the following dark due to weak ambient light
conditions: or impaired tail lamp.
— On roads where there are multi- . When driving on a curved road,
ple parallel lane markers; lane warning will be late on the outside
markers that are faded or not
of the curve. safe place, clean the camera unit with a soft
cloth. Then turn off and restart the engine.
BSW/LDW TEMPORARY DISABLED BSW/LDW MALFUNCTION
STATUS When the BSW and/or LDW system malfunc-
When the lift gate is open and/or the low washer tions, they will be turned off automatically, the
fluid is detected, the BSW and/or LDW system BSW light (orange) and/or LDW light (orange)
is turned off temporarily. The BSW light (green) will illuminate.
and/or the LDW light (green) will blink, and Action to take:
either of the following message will appear on Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn off and
the dot matrix liquid crystal display: restart the engine. If the BSW light (orange)
. “Back Door Open” and/or LDW light (orange) continues to illumi-
. “Low Washer” nate, have the BSW and/or LDW system
checked by a NISSAN dealer. JVS0155X
When the above conditions are corrected, the
BSW and/or LDW system will resume auto- CAMERA UNIT MAINTENANCE
matically.
The rear camera unit * 1 for the LDW/BSW
BSW/LDW AUTOMATIC DEACTIVA- systems is located above the rear licence plate.
TION To maintain the proper operation of the LDW/
When dirt, rain or snow cannot be removed by BSW systems and help keep the system
the automatic washer and blower and accumu- functioning, be sure to observe the following:
lates on the camera, making it impossible to . Always keep the camera unit clean. Be
detect the vehicles or the lane markers, the careful not to damage the nozzle of auto-
BSW and/or LDW system will be turned off matic washer and blower.
automatically. The BSW light (green) and/or . Do not attach “license plate accessories”
LDW light (green) will blink, and the “Unavail- that reflect light.
able : Clean rear camera” will appear in the dot
. Do not strike or damage the areas around
matrix liquid crystal display.
the camera unit.
Action to take:
If the message appears, park the vehicle in a
CRUISE CONTROL
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CON- . on winding or hilly roads

TROL . on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,
. If the cruise control system malfunctions, it etc.)
will cancel automatically. The CRUISE in- . in very windy areas
dicator light on the meter panel will then
blink to warn the driver. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.
. If the engine coolant temperature becomes
excessively high, the cruise control system
will cancel automatically.
. If the CRUISE indicator light blinks, turn the
cruise control main switch off and have the
system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
. The CRUISE indicator light may blink when SSD0694
the cruise control main switch is turned ON
1. ACCEL/RES switch
while pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/
2. COAST/SET switch
SET or CANCEL switch. To properly set the
3. CANCEL switch
cruise control system, perform the following
4. MAIN (ON·OFF) switch
procedures.
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a speed
WARNING between 25 to 90 MPH (40 to 144 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the accelerator
Do not use the cruise control when pedal.
driving under the following conditions:
To turn on the cruise control, push the MAIN
. when it is not possible to keep the switch on. The CRUISE indicator light will
vehicle at a set speed illuminate.
. in heavy traffic or in traffic that To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle
varies in speed to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET
switch and release it. Take your foot off the
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the . Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
set speed. vehicle attains the desired speed, push and CAUTION
. To pass another vehicle, depress the release the COAST/SET switch.
accelerator pedal. When you release the . Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch. During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously When the vehicle attains the desired speed, follow these recommendations to ob-
set speed. release the switch. tain maximum engine performance and
. The vehicle may not maintain the set speed . Push, then quickly release the ACCEL/RES ensure the future reliability and econo-
on winding or hilly roads. If this happens, switch. Each time you do this, the set speed my of your new vehicle. Failure to
drive without the cruise control. will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). follow these recommendations may
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one result in shortened engine life and
following methods: of the following methods: reduced engine performance.
1. Push the CANCEL switch. . Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push the . Avoid driving for long periods at constant
2. Tap the brake pedal. speed, either fast or slow. Do not run the
COAST/SET switch and release it.
3. Turn the MAIN switch off. The CRUISE light engine over 4,000 rpm.
. Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.
will turn off. . Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
Release the switch when the vehicle slows
. If you depress the brake pedal while pushing down to the desired speed. . Avoid quick starts.
the ACCEL/RES or COAST/SET switch and . Push, then quickly release the COAST/SET . Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
reset at the cruising speed, the cruise switch. Each time you do this, the set speed . Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles
control will disengage. Turn the MAIN switch will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). (800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts
off once and then turn it on again. could be damaged.
To resume the preset speed, push and
. The cruise control will automatically cancel if release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle
the vehicle slows more than 8 MPH (13 will resume the last set cruising speed when the
km/h) below the set speed. vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).
. If you move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
position, the cruise control will be canceled.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
of the following methods:

FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS
Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving . Recirculating the cool air in the cabin fuel and reduces emissions.
Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy when the A/C is on reduces cooling load.
8. Buy an automated pass for toll roads.
from your vehicle. 4. Drive at economical speeds and distances. . Automated passes permit drivers to use
1. Use smooth accelerator and brake pedal . Observing the speed limit and not ex-
special lanes to maintain cruising speed
application. ceeding 60 MPH (97 km/h) (where through the toll and avoid stopping and
. Avoid rapid starts and stops. legally allowed) can improve fuel effi- starting.
. Use smooth, gentle accelerator and ciency due to reduced aerodynamic
9. Winter warm up.
brake application whenever possible. drag.
. Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel
. Maintain constant speed while commut- . Maintaining a safe following distance
economy.
ing and coast whenever possible. behind other vehicles reduces unneces-
. Vehicles typically need no more than 30
sary braking.
2. Maintain constant speed. seconds of idling at start-up to effectively
. Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate
. Look ahead to try and anticipate and circulate the engine oil before driving.
changes in speed permits reduced brak-
minimize stops. . Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating
. Synchronizing your speed with traffic
ing and smooth acceleration changes.
. Select a gear range suitable to road
temperature more quickly while driving
lights allows you to reduce your number versus idling.
conditions.
of stops. 10. Keeping your vehicle cool.
. Maintaining a steady speed can minimize 5. Use cruise control.
. Park your vehicle in a covered parking
red light stops and improve fuel effi- . Using cruise control during highway
area or in the shade whenever possible.
ciency. driving helps maintain a steady speed.
. When entering a hot vehicle, opening the
. Cruise control is particularly effective in
3. Use air conditioning (A/C) at higher vehicle windows will help to reduce the inside
speeds. providing fuel savings when driving on
temperature faster, resulting in reduced
. Below 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more flat terrains.
demand on your A/C system.
efficient to open windows to cool the 6. Plan for the shortest route.
vehicle due to reduced engine load. . Utilize a map or navigation system to
. Above 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more determine the best route to save time.
efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle 7. Avoid idling.
due to increased aerodynamic drag. . Shutting off your engine when safe for
stops exceeding 30-60 seconds saves

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (if so
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
equipped)
. Keep your engine tuned up.
. Follow the recommended scheduled main- WARNING
tenance.
. Keep the tires inflated to the correct . For AWD equipped vehicles, do not
pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire attempt to raise two wheels off the
wear and lowers fuel economy. ground and shift the transmission to
. Keep the wheels in correct alignment. any drive or reverse position with
Improper alignment increases tire wear and the engine running. Doing so may
lowers fuel economy. result in drivetrain damage or un-
. Use the recommended viscosity engine oil. expected vehicle movement which
(See “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda- could result in serious vehicle da-
tion” in the “9. Technical and consumer mage or personal injury.
information” section.) . Do not attempt to test an AWD
SSD0418
equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dy-
namometer (such as the dynam- ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) LOCK
ometers used by some states for SWITCH OPERATIONS
emissions testing) or similar equip-
The AWD LOCK switch is located on the lower
ment even if the other two wheels
side of the instrument panel (CrossCabriolet
are raised off the ground. Make sure
models) or on the center console (Hardtop
that you inform the test facility
models). This switch is used to select the AUTO
personnel that your vehicle is
or LOCK mode depending on the driving
equipped with AWD before it is
conditions.
placed on a dynamometer. Using
the wrong test equipment may re- Each time you push the lower part of the switch
sult in drivetrain damage or unex- *A , the AWD mode will switch:
pected vehicle movement which AUTO ? LOCK ? AUTO.

could result in serious vehicle da-
mage or personal injury.

LOCK mode *3: LOCK mode will automatically be cancelled
when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF ning.
The AWD LOCK indicator light will position. . Engine idling speed is high while
illuminate.
. If the AWD LOCK switch is operated while warming up the engine. Be espe-
AUTO mode accelerating or decelerating, or if the ignition cially careful when starting or driv-
switch is turned off, you may feel a jolt. This ing on slippery surfaces.
The AWD LOCK indicator light will turn off.
is normal. . When turning the vehicle in LOCK
AWD . The oil temperature of power train parts will mode on paved roads, you may feel
AWD LOCK Use condi-
Wheel driven increase if the vehicle is continuously a braking effect. This is a normal
mode indica- tions
tor light operated under conditions where the differ- condition of the AWD model.
Distribution of tor- ence in rotation between the front and rear
que to the front and wheels is large (wheel slip), such as when
rear wheels changes driving the vehicle on rough roads through
automatically, de- sand, mud or freeing a stuck vehicle. In
For driving
pending on road
AUTO conditions encoun-
Turns on paved these cases, the AWD warning light blinks
off. or slippery rapidly and the AWD mode changes to
tered
roads
[100:0] ↔ [50:50]. 2WD to protect the powertrain parts. If you
This results in im- stop driving with the engine idling and wait
proved driving stabi-
until the warning light stops blinking, the
lity.*1
AWD returns to the AUTO mode.
AWD For driving
LOCK All-wheel drive*2, *3 LOCK on rough
roads
WARNING
*1: When the rotation difference between the front
and rear wheels is large, the AWD mode may . When driving straight, shift the AWD
change from AUTO to LOCK for a while, LOCK switch to AUTO. Do not oper-
however, this is not a malfunction.
ate the AWD LOCK switch when
*2: LOCK mode will change to AUTO mode making a turn or backing up.
automatically when the vehicle has been driven
at a high speed. The AWD LOCK indicator light . Do not operate the AWD LOCK
turns off. switch with the front wheel spin-

while the engine is running, the warning light will checked by a NISSAN dealer as
come on. soon as possible.
The warning light may blink rapidly (about twice . The powertrain may be damaged if
per second) while trying to free a stuck vehicle you continue driving with the warn-
due to high powertrain oil temperature. The ing light blinking.
driving mode may change to 2WD. The AUTO
mode may change to the LOCK mode before the . Never drive on dry hard surface
warning light blinks. If the warning light blinks roads in the LOCK mode, as this
rapidly during operation, stop the vehicle with will overload the powertrain and
the engine idling in a safe place immediately. may cause a serious malfunction.
Then if the light turns off after a while, you can
continue driving.
A large difference between the diameters of
front and rear wheels will make the warning light
blink slowly (about once per two seconds). Pull
off the road in a safe area, and idle the engine.
Check that all tire sizes are the same, tire
pressure is correct and tires are not worn.
CAUTION
SSD0336B
. If the warning light remains on after
AWD WARNING LIGHT the above operation, have your
The AWD warning light is located in the meter. vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer
The AWD warning light illuminates when the as soon as possible.
ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. It . If the warning light comes on while
turns off soon after the engine is started. driving there may be a malfunction
If any malfunction occurs in the AWD system in the AWD system. Reduce the
vehicle speed and have your vehicle
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into

traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good
practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
. HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: * 1
Turn the wheels into the curb and move
the vehicle forward until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
. HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: * 2
Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
. HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
CURB: * 3
SSD0488 Turn the wheels toward the side of the
road so the vehicle will move away from
the center of the road if it moves.
and cannot be moved without de-
WARNING pressing the foot brake pedal. 4. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
. Never leave the engine running
. Do not stop or park the vehicle over
while the vehicle is unattended.
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They . Do not leave children unattended
may ignite and cause a fire. inside the vehicle. They could un-
knowingly activate switches or con-
. Safe parking procedures require
trols. Unattended children could
that both the parking brake be set
become involved in serious acci-
and the transmission placed into P
dents.
(Park). Failure to do so could cause
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
roll away and result in an accident.
Make sure the shift lever has been 2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
pushed as far forward as it can go
POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM
BRAKING PRECAUTIONS ing or downshifting. Abrupt braking

WARNING The brake system has two separate hydraulic or accelerating could cause the
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still wheels to skid and result in an
If the engine is not running or is turned have braking at two wheels. accident.
off while driving, the power assist for . If the engine is not running or is
the steering will not work. Steering will
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine turned off while driving, the power
be harder to operate. assist for the brakes will not work.
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the
vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, Braking will be harder.
The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic
greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be
pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.
required to stop the vehicle and the stopping Wet brakes
If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you distance will be longer. When the vehicle is washed or driven through
will still have control of the vehicle. However,
Using the brakes water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your
much greater steering effort is needed, espe-
braking distance will be longer and the vehicle
cially in sharp turns and at low speeds. Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while may pull to one side during braking.
driving. This will cause overheating of the
brakes, wearing out the brake and pads faster To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed
and reduce gas mileage. while lightly tapping the brake pedal to heat-up
the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and until the brakes function correctly.
downshift to a lower gear before going down a
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may PARKING BRAKE BREAK-IN
reduce braking performance and could result in Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the
loss of vehicle control. stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened
or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or
drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the
WARNING best braking performance.
This procedure is described in the vehicle
. While driving on a slippery surface,
service manual and can be performed by a
be careful when braking, accelerat-
NISSAN dealer.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) Tire and Loading Information
label. See “Tire and Loading WARNING
WARNING Information label” in the “9.
Technical and consumer infor- Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
mation” section of this manual. may result in increased stopping dis-
. The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
tances.
is a sophisticated device, but it — For detailed information, see
cannot prevent accidents resulting “Wheels and tires” in the “8.
from careless or dangerous driving Maintenance and do-it-yourself” Self-test feature
techniques. It can help maintain section of this manual. The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric
vehicle control during braking on pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
slippery surfaces. Remember that The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that
stopping distances on slippery sur- the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard tests the system each time you start the engine
faces will be longer than on normal braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward
surfaces even with ABS. Stopping The system detects the rotation speed at each or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may
distances may also be longer on wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the
rough, gravel or snow covered prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By brake pedal. This is normal and does not
roads, or if you are using tire chains. preventing each wheel from locking, the system indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses
Always maintain a safe distance helps the driver maintain steering control and a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and
from the vehicle in front of you. helps to minimize swerving and spinning on illuminates the ABS warning light on the
Ultimately, the driver is responsible slippery surfaces. instrument panel. The brake system then oper-
for safety. ates normally, but without anti-lock assistance.
. Tire type and condition may also Using the system
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the
affect braking effectiveness. Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. self-test or while driving, have the vehicle
Depress the brake pedal with firm steady checked by a NISSAN dealer.
— When replacing tires, install the
pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The
specified size of tires on all four
ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from
wheels.
locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
— When installing a spare tire,
make sure that it is the proper
size and type as specified on the
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
Normal operation The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system keep the vehicle on the steered path.
uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs . You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal
The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6 MPH
and vehicle motion. Under certain driving con- and hear a noise or vibration from under the
(5 to 10 km/h). The speed varies according to
ditions, the VDC system helps to perform the hood. This is normal and indicates that the
road conditions.
following functions. VDC system is working properly.
When the ABS senses that one or more wheels
. Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel . Adjust your speed and driving to the road
are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly
slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is conditions.
applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This
transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on See “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) warning
action is similar to pumping the brakes very
the same axle. light” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or . Controls brake pressure and engine output section and “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
feel a vibration from the actuator when it is to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle off indicator light” in the “2. Instruments and
operating. This is normal and indicates that the speed (traction control function). controls” section.
ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsa- . Controls brake pressure at individual wheels If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
tion may indicate that road conditions are and engine output to help the driver maintain warning light comes on in the instrument panel.
hazardous and extra care is required while control of the vehicle in the following The VDC system automatically turns off when
driving. conditions: the warning light is on.
— understeer (vehicle tends to not follow The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC
the steered path despite increased system. The VDC off indicator illuminates to
steering input) indicate the VDC system is off. When the VDC
— oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to switch is used to turn off the system, the VDC
certain road or driving conditions). system still operates to prevent one drive wheel
The VDC system can help the driver to maintain from slipping by transferring power to a non
control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss slipping drive wheel. The warning light
of vehicle control in all driving situations. flashes if this occurs. All other VDC functions
When the VDC system operates, the are off and the warning light will not flash.
warning light in the instrument panel flashes so The VDC system is automatically reset to on
note the following: when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position then back to the ON position.
. The road may be slippery or the system may
determine some action is required to help The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start the ing light may flash or illuminate. ing may flash or illuminate.
engine and move the vehicle forward or in
reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test . If brake related parts such as brake . The VDC system is not a substitute
occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel pads, rotors and calipers are not for winter tires or tire chains on a
a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and NISSAN recommended or are extre- snow covered road.
is not an indication of a malfunction. mely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly and the
warning light may illuminate.
WARNING . If engine control related parts are
not NISSAN recommended or are
. The VDC system is designed to help extremely deteriorated, the
the driver maintain stability but warning light may illuminate.
does not prevent accidents due to
. When driving on extremely inclined
abrupt steering operation at high
surfaces such as higher banked
speeds or by careless or dangerous
corners, the VDC system may not
driving techniques. Reduce vehicle
operate properly and the warn-
speed and be especially careful
ing light may flash or illuminate. Do
when driving and cornering on slip-
not drive on these types of roads.
pery surfaces and always drive care-
fully. . When driving on an unstable sur-
face such as a turntable, ferry,
. Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-
elevator or ramp, the warning
sion. If suspension parts such as
light may flash or illuminate. This is
shock absorbers, struts, springs,
not a malfunction. Restart the en-
stabilizer bars, bushings and
gine after driving onto a stable
wheels are not NISSAN recom-
surface.
mended for your vehicle or are
extremely deteriorated the VDC sys- . If wheels or tires other than the
tem may not operate properly. This NISSAN recommended ones are
could adversely affect vehicle hand- used, the VDC system may not
ling performance, and the warn- operate properly and the warn-

COLD WEATHER DRIVING
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK TIRE EQUIPMENT SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide It is recommended that the following items be
deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes superior performance on dry pavement. How- carried in the vehicle during winter:
frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the ever, the performance of these tires will be . A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove
key hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob. substantially reduced in snowy and icy condi- ice and snow from the windows and wiper
ANTI-FREEZE tions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy blades.
roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD &
In the winter when it is anticipated that the . A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the
SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.
outside temperature will drop below 328F (08C), jack to give it firm support.
Consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size,
check the anti-freeze to assure proper winter . A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-
speed rating and availability information.
protection. For additional information, see “En- drifts.
gine cooling system” in the “8. Maintenance and For additional traction on icy roads, studded
. Extra window washer fluid to refill the
do-it-yourself” section. tires may be used. However, some U.S. states
reservoir tank.
and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.
BATTERY DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
Check local, state and provincial laws before
If the battery is not fully charged during installing studded tires.
extremely cold weather conditions, the battery
fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To
Skid and traction capabilities of studded WARNING
snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be
maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should
poorer than that of non-studded snow . Wet ice (328F, 08C and freezing rain),
be checked regularly. For additional information,
tires. very cold snow or ice can be slick
see “Battery” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-
Tire chains may be used. For details, see “Tire and very hard to drive on. The
yourself” section.
chains” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it- vehicle will have much less traction
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER or “grip” under these conditions. Try
yourself” section of this manual.
If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti- to avoid driving on wet ice until the
freeze, drain the cooling system, including the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) model road is salted or sanded.
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. If you install snow tires, they must also be the . Whatever the condition, drive with
For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern caution. Accelerate and slow down
“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section. on all four wheels. with care. If accelerating or down-
shifting too fast, the drive wheels
will lose even more traction.

. Allow more stopping distance under ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
these conditions. Braking should be equipped) WARNING
started sooner than on dry pave- Engine block heaters are used to assist with
ment. cold temperature starting. . Do not use your engine block heater
with an ungrounded electrical sys-
. Allow greater following distances The engine block heater should be used when
tem or a 2-pronged adapter. You can
on slippery roads. the outside temperature is 208F (−78C) or lower.
be seriously injured by an electrical
. Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). To use the engine block heater shock if you use an ungrounded
These may appear on an otherwise connection.
clear road in shaded areas. If a 1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine . Disconnect and properly store the
patch of ice is seen ahead, brake
block heater cord. engine block heater cord before
before reaching it. Try not to brake
starting the engine. Damage to the
while on the ice, and avoid any 3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a cord could result in an electrical
sudden steering maneuvers. grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord. shock and can cause serious injury.
. Do not use cruise control on slip- 4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault . Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged
pery roads. Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110- extension cord rated for at least
. Snow can trap dangerous exhaust volt AC (VAC) outlet. 10A. Plug the extension cord into a
gases under your vehicle. Keep 5. The engine block heater must be plugged in Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) pro-
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on tected, grounded 110-VAC outlet.
from around your vehicle. outside temperatures, to properly warm the Failure to use the proper extension
engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to cord or a grounded outlet can result
turn the engine block heater on. in a fire or electrical shock and
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and cause serious personal injury.
properly store the cord to keep it away from
moving parts.

MEMO

MEMO

6 In case of emergency
Hazard warning flasher switch .............................................. 6-2 Jump starting .......................................................................... 6-15
Emergency engine shut off ..................................................... 6-2 Push starting ........................................................................... 6-17
Flat tire ......................................................................................... 6-3 If your vehicle overheats ...................................................... 6-17
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .................... 6-3 Towing your vehicle .............................................................. 6-19
Changing a flat tire (Hardtop models) .......................... 6-4 Towing recommended by NISSAN ........................... 6-20
Repairing flat tire (CrossCabriolet models) ............... 6-10 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ............... 6-22
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
SWITCH
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation
to other traffic.
while driving perform the following procedure:
. Turn signals do not work when the
. Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch
hazard warning flasher lights are
3 consecutive times in less than 1.5
on.
seconds, or
The flasher can be actuated with the ignition . Push and hold the push-button ignition
switch in any position. switch for more than 2 seconds.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.
SIC2574
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when

you must stop or park under emergency condi-
tions. All turn signal lights will flash.
WARNING
. If stopping for an emergency, be
sure to move the vehicle well off the
road.
. Do not use the hazard warning
flashers while moving on the high-
way unless unusual circumstances
force you to drive so slowly that
your vehicle might become a hazard
6-2 In case of emergency

FLAT TIRE
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS- may permanently damage the tires . Do not inject any tire liquid or
TEM (TPMS) and increase the likelihood of tire aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure failure. Serious vehicle damage as this may cause a malfunction of
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire could occur and may lead to an the tire pressure sensors (for mod-
pressure of all tires except the spare. When accident and could result in serious els not equipped with the emer-
the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the personal injury. Check the tire pres- gency tire puncture repair kit).
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning appears on sure for all four tires. Adjust the tire . If you used the Emergency Tire
the dot matrix liquid crystal display, one or more pressure to the recommended COLD Sealant to repair a minor tire punc-
of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the tire pressure shown on the Tire and ture, your NISSAN dealer will also
vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the Loading Information label to turn need to replace the TPMS sensor in
TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low the low tire pressure warning light addition to repairing or replacing
tire pressure warning light. This system will OFF. If the light still illuminates the tire (for models equipped with
activate only when the vehicle is driven at while driving after adjusting the tire the emergency tire puncture repair
speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For more pressure, a tire may be flat. If you kit).
details, see “Warning/indicator lights and audi- have a flat tire, replace it with a
ble reminders” in the “2. Instruments and . NISSAN recommends using only
spare tire as soon as possible.
controls” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring NISSAN Genuine Emergency Tire
. When a spare tire is mounted or a Sealant provided with your vehicle.
System (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving” wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not
section. Other tire sealants may damage the
function and the low tire pressure valve stem seal which can cause the
warning light will flash for approxi- tire to lose air pressure (for models
WARNING mately 1 minute. The light will equipped with the emergency tire
remain on after 1 minute. Contact puncture repair kit).
. If the low tire pressure warning light your NISSAN dealer as soon as
illuminates while driving, avoid sud- possible for tire replacement and/
den steering maneuvers or abrupt or system resetting.
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull . Replacing tires with those not ori-
off the road to a safe location and ginally specified by NISSAN could
stop the vehicle as soon as possi- affect the proper operation of the
ble. Driving with under-inflated tires TPMS.
In case of emergency 6-3

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE (Hardtop . Never change tires when the vehicle
models) is on a slope, ice or slippery areas.
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions This is hazardous.
below. . Never change tires if oncoming
Stopping the vehicle traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait
for professional road assistance.
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
brake. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position.
4. Turn off the engine. MCE0001A
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to

signal professional road assistance person- Blocking wheels
nel that you need assistance. Place suitable blocks * 1 at both the front and
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
jacked up.
and clear of the vehicle.
WARNING WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the
. Make sure the parking brake is
vehicle may move and result in personal
securely applied and the transmis-
injury.
sion is shifted into the P (Park)
position.

Getting the spare tire and tools 4. Type A:
1. Open the lift gate. Remove the cargo floor board.
2. Remove the cargo cover (if so equipped). Type B:
(See “Cargo cover (if so equipped for Turn the clips counterclockwise and remove
Hardtop models)” in the “2. Instruments the cargo floor box.
and controls” section.)
3. Open the cargo floor board.
(See “Cargo floor box (if so equipped for
Hardtop models)” in the “2. Instruments and
controls” section.)
SCE0854
Type A
SCE0715
Type B

SCE0853 SCE0716 SCE0700
Type B Jacking tools Spare tire (if so equipped)
5. Type B: 6. Remove the jacking tools and the spare tire. Spare tire: Turn the clamp to remove the tire.
Open the cargo floor board. Jacking tools: Remove the jack by turning it,
then remove the other tools.

Jacking up the vehicle and removing the Carefully read the caution label attached
damaged tire to the jack body and the following instruc-
tions.
WARNING
. Never get under the vehicle while it
is supported only by the jack. If it is
necessary to work under the vehicle,
support it with safety stands.
. Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use
the jack provided with your vehicle
SCE0630 on other vehicles. The jack is de-
signed for lifting only your vehicle
Removing wheel cover (if so equipped) during a tire change.
. Use the correct jack-up points.
WARNING Never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
Never use your hands to remove the . Never jack up the vehicle more than
wheel cover. This may cause personal necessary.
injury. . Never use blocks on or under the
jack.
To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod *
1
. Do not start or run the engine while
as illustrated. vehicle is on the jack, as it may
Apply cloth *2 between the wheel and jack rod cause the vehicle to move.
to prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover. . Do not allow passengers to stay in
the vehicle while it is on the jack.

SCE0572
SCE0751
Jack-up point
1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up 2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by
point as illustrated so the top of the jack turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts
Align the jack head between the two until the tire is off the ground.
notches in the front or the rear as shown. 3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever
Also fit the groove of the jack head between and rod with both hands as shown above.
the notches as shown. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears
The jack should be used on level firm the ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and
ground. then remove the tire.

than 2 times, until they are tight. is recommended that wheel nuts be
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire tightened to specifications at each
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel lubrication interval.
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely . Adjust tire pressure to the COLD
in the sequence as illustrated. Lower the pressure.
vehicle completely. COLD pressure:
After the vehicle has been parked
WARNING for three hours or more or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
. Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
COLD tire pressures are shown on
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
the Tire and Loading Information
wheel to become loose or come off.
label affixed to the driver side center
JVE0028X This could cause an accident.
pillar.
. Do not use oil or grease on the
Installing the spare tire wheel studs or nuts. This could Stowing the damaged tire and the tools
The spare tire is designed for emergency cause the nuts to become loose. 1. Securely store the damaged tire, jack and
use. (See specific instructions under the tools in the storage area.
. Retighten the wheel nuts when the
heading “Wheels and tires” in the “8.
vehicle has been driven for 600 2. Replace the cargo box.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)
miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a 3. Close the cargo floor board.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface flat tire, etc.).
between the wheel and hub. 4. Close the lift gate.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten . As soon as possible, tighten the
the wheel nuts finger tight. Check that all the wheel nuts to the specified torque WARNING
wheel nuts contact the wheel surface with a torque wrench.
horizontally. Wheel nut tightening torque: . Always make sure that the spare tire
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel 80 ft-lb (108 N·m) and jacking equipment are properly
nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence secured after use. Such items can
The wheel nuts must be kept tigh-
as illustrated (*
1 ,*2 ,* 3 ,* 4 ,* 5 ), more
tened to specification at all times. It
become dangerous projectiles in an

accident or sudden stop. . If you used the Emergency Tire
. The T-type spare tire and small size Sealant to repair a minor tire punc- CAUTION
spare tire are designed for emer- ture, your NISSAN dealer will also
need to replace the TPMS sensor in . To avoid the emergency tire punc-
gency use. See specific instructions
addition to repairing or replacing ture kit being damaged during sto-
under the heading “Wheels and
the tire. rage or use:
tires” in the “8. Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section. . NISSAN recommends using only — Only use the emergency tire
NISSAN Genuine Emergency Tire puncture repair kit on your ve-
REPAIRING FLAT TIRE (CrossCabriolet Sealant provided with your vehicle. hicle. Do not use it on other
models) Other tire sealants may damage the vehicles.
valve stem seal which can cause the — Only use the kit to inflate the
tire to lose air pressure. tires of your vehicle and to
WARNING check the vehicle’s tire pressure.
This vehicle does not have a spare tire. The
. After using Emergency Tire Sealant emergency tire puncture repair kit (Emergency — Only plug the compressor into a
to repair a minor tire puncture, do Tire Sealant) is supplied with the vehicle instead 12V DC car power point.
not drive the vehicle at speeds of a spare tire. It can be used to temporarily — Keep the kit free of water and
faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h). repair minor tire punctures. dirt.
. Immediately after using the Emer- If possible, have the vehicle towed to a facility — Do not disassemble or modify
gency Tire Sealant to repair a minor that can repair or replace the flat tire. Using the the kit.
tire puncture, take your vehicle to a emergency tire puncture repair kit may cause a
NISSAN dealer to inspect, and re- malfunction of the tire pressure sensor and — Do not drop the kit or allow hard
pair or replace the tire. The Emer- cause the low tire pressure warning light to impacts to the kit.
gency Tire Sealant cannot illuminate. . Do not use the emergency tire
permanently seal a punctured tire. puncture repair kit under the follow-
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions
Continuing operation of the vehicle ing conditions. Contact a NISSAN
below.
without a permanent tire repair can dealer or professional road assis-
lead to a crash. tance.

— when the sealant has passed its 5. Turn off the engine.
expiration date (shown on the 6. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to
label attached to the bottle) signal professional road assistance person-
nel that you need assistance.
— when the cut or the puncture is
approximately 0.25 in (6 mm) or 7. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
longer and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
and clear of the vehicle.
— when the tire sidewall is da-
maged
— when the vehicle has been dri- WARNING
ven with extremely low tire
pressure Make sure the parking brake is securely
applied and the automatic transmission
— when the tire has come off the into P (Park). SCE0866
inside or the outside of the
wheel. . Never repair tires when the vehicle Getting emergency tire puncture repair
is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. kit
— when the tire wheel is damaged This is hazardous.
Take out the emergency tire puncture repair kit
— when two or more tires are flat . Never repair tires if oncoming traffic located in the trunk. The repair kit consists of the
is close to your vehicle. Wait for following items:
Stopping the vehicle professional road assistance.
*
1 Tire sealant bottle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and *
2 Air compressor
away from traffic. *
3 Speed restriction sticker
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
brake.
4. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

Before using emergency tire puncture pressure sensors and cause the low
repair kit tire pressure warning light to illumi-
. If any foreign object (for example, a screw or nate. Have the tire pressure sensor
nail) is embedded in the tire, do not remove replaced as soon as possible.
it.
. Check the expiration date of the sealant NOTE:
(shown on the label attached to the bottle). Do not remove any nails or screws that
Never use a sealant whose expiration date have penetrated the tire when performing
has passed. repairs.
Repairing tire
WARNING SCE0867
Observe the following precautions 1. Open the lid of the air compressor and take
when using the tire repair compound. out the speed restriction sticker, then put it
in a location where the driver can see it while
. Swallowing the compound is dan-
driving.
gerous. Immediately drink as much
water as possible and seek prompt
medical assistance. CAUTION
. Rinse well with lots of water if the
compound comes into contact with Do not put the speed restriction label
skin or eyes. If irritation persists, on the steering wheel pad, the speed-
seek prompt medical attention. ometer or the warning light locations.
. Keep the repair compound out of
the reach of children.
. The emergency repair compound
may cause a malfunction of the tire

SCE0869 SCE0870
3. Remove the cap from the tire sealant bottle, 5. Remove the protective cap * A of the hose
and screw the bottle clockwise onto the and screw the hose securely onto the tire
bottle holder. (Leave the bottle seal intact. valve. Make sure that the pressure release
Screwing the bottle onto the bottle holder valve * B is securely tightened. Make sure
will pierce the seal of the bottle.) that the air compressor switch is in the OFF
4. Remove the cap from the tire valve on the (*) position, and then insert its power plug
flat tire. into the power outlet in the vehicle.
SCE0868
2. Take the hose * 1 and the power plug * 2

out of the air compressor. Remove the cap
of the bottle holder from the air compressor.

NOTE: kPa (26 psi) within 10 minutes, the tire
The compressor tire pressure gauge may be seriously damaged and the tire
may show a pressure reading of 87 psi cannot be repaired with this tire repair
(600 kPa) for about 30 seconds while kit. Contact a NISSAN dealer.
inflating the tire. The pressure gauge is
7. When the tire pressure is at the specified
indicating the pressure inside the sea-
amount, turn the air compressor off. If the
lant can. When the sealant has been
pressure cannot be inflated to the specified
injected into the tire the pressure
amount, the air compressor can be turned
gauge will drop and indicate actual tire
off at the minimum of 180 kPa (26 psi).
pressure.
Remove the power plug from the power
outlet and quickly remove the hose from the
WARNING tire valve. Attach the protective cap and
valve cap. Properly stow the emergency tire
SCE0871 . To avoid serious personal injury puncture repair kit in the trunk.
while using the emergency tire
6. Push the ignition switch to the “ACC”
puncture repair kit:
position. Then turn the compressor switch CAUTION
to the ON (−) position and inflate the tire up — Securely tighten the compressor
to the pressure that is specified on the tire hose to the tire valve. Failure to
do so can cause the sealant to To avoid serious personal injury when
and loading information label affixed to the stowing the emergency tire puncture
driver’s side center pillar if possible, or to the spray into the air and get into
your eyes or on the skin. repair kit:
minimum of 180 kPa (26 psi). Turn the air
compressor off briefly in order to check the . Do not stand directly beside the . Keep the sealant bottle screwed
tire pressure with the pressure gauge. damaged tire while it is being into the compressor. Failure to do
inflated because of the risk of the so can cause the sealant to spray
If the tire is inflated to higher than the
rupture. If there are any cracks or into the air and get into your eyes or
specified pressure, lower the tire pressure
bumps, turn the compressor off on the skin.
by releasing air with the pressure release
valve. immediately.
8. Immediately drive the vehicle for 10 minutes
or 3 km (2 miles) at a speed of 80 km/h (50
If the tire pressure does not increase to 180
MPH) or less.
JUMP STARTING
9. After driving, make sure that the air com- To start your engine with a booster battery, the
. Immediately after using Emergency
pressor switch is in the OFF position, then instructions and precautions below must be
Tire Sealant to repair a minor tire
screw the hose securely onto the tire valve. followed.
puncture, take your vehicle to a
Check the tire pressure with the pressure NISSAN dealer to inspect, and re-
gauge. The temporary repair is completed if
the tire pressure does not drop.
pair or replace the tire. The Emer- WARNING
gency Tire Sealant cannot
Make sure the pressure is adjusted to the permanently seal a punctured tire. . If done incorrectly, jump starting
pressure that is specified on the tire and Continuing operation of the vehicle can lead to a battery explosion,
loading information label before driving. without a permanent tire repair can resulting in severe injury or death.
10. If the tire pressure drops, repeat the steps lead to a crash. It could also damage your vehicle.
from 5 to 9. If the pressure drops again or . If you used Emergency Tire Sealant . Explosive hydrogen gas is always
under 130 kPa (19 psi), the tire cannot be to repair a minor tire puncture, your present in the vicinity of the battery.
repaired with this tire repair kit. Contact NISSAN dealer will also need to Keep all sparks and flames away
a NISSAN dealer. replace the TPMS sensor in addition from the battery.
The sealant bottle and hose can not be to repairing or replacing the tire.
. Do not allow battery fluid to come
reused to repair another punctured tire. . NISSAN recommends using only into contact with eyes, skin, clothing
Contact a NISSAN dealer to purchase NISSAN Genuine Emergency Tire or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is
replacements. Sealant provided with your vehicle. a corrosive sulfuric acid solution
Other tire sealants may damage the which can cause severe burns. If
After repairing tire valve stem seal which can cause the the fluid should come into contact
See a NISSAN dealer for tire repair/replacement tire to lose air pressure. with anything, immediately flush the
as soon as possible. contacted area with water.
. Keep the battery out of the reach of
WARNING children.
. The booster battery must be rated at
. After using Emergency Tire Sealant 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
to repair a minor tire puncture, do battery can damage your vehicle.
not drive the vehicle at speeds
faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).
. Whenever working on or near a 2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever
battery, always wear suitable eye to the P (Park) position. Switch off all
protectors (for example, goggles or unnecessary electrical systems (lights, hea-
industrial safety spectacles) and ter, air conditioner, etc.).
remove rings, metal bands, or any 3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so
other jewelry. Do not lean over the equipped). Cover the battery with a firmly
battery when jump starting. wrung out moist cloth to reduce explosion
. Do not attempt to jump start a hazard.
frozen battery. It could explode 4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as
and cause serious injury. illustrated (*
1 ? *
2 ? * 3 ? * 4 ).
. Your vehicle has an automatic en- If the battery is discharged, the ignition
gine cooling fan. It could come on at switch cannot be moved from the OFF
any time. Keep hands and other SCE0719 position. Connect the jumper cables to
objects away from it. the booster vehicle * B before pushing
the ignition switch.
WARNING
Always follow the instructions below. CAUTION
Failure to do so could result in damage
. Always connect positive (+) to posi-
to the charging system and cause
personal injury. tive (+) and negative (−) to body
ground (for example, as illustrated),
not to the battery.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle
.
* B , position the two vehicles (* A and * B ) Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine
to bring their batteries into close proximity to
each other. compartment and that the cable
clamps do not contact any other
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. metal.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle *

B Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing.
and let it run for a few minutes. CAUTION
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster CAUTION
vehicle *B at about 2,000 rpm, and start . Do not continue to drive if your
the engine of the vehicle *
A being jump
Continuously Variable Transmission vehicle overheats. Doing so could
started. (CVT) models cannot be push-started cause engine damage or a vehicle
or tow-started. Attempting to do so may fire.
cause transmission damage. . To avoid the danger of being
CAUTION scalded, never remove the radiator
Do not keep the starter motor engaged cap while the engine is still hot.
for more than 10 seconds. If the engine When the radiator cap is removed,
does not start right away, place the pressurized hot water will spurt out,
ignition switch in the OFF position and possibly causing serious injury.
wait 10 seconds before trying again. . Do not open the hood if steam is
coming out.
7. After starting your engine, carefully discon-
nect the negative cable and then the positive If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an
cable (*4 ? * 3 ? * 2 ? * 1 ). extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if
you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal
8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be
noise, etc., take the following steps:
sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover
the vent holes as it may be contaminated 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply
with corrosive acid. the parking brake and move the shift lever to
the P (Park) position.
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air conditioner
temperature control to maximum hot and fan
control to high speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for cooling fan can start at any time.
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator
before opening the hood. (If steam or
6. After the engine cools down, check the
coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.)
coolant level in the reservoir tank with the
Do not open the hood further until no steam
engine running. Add coolant to the reservoir
or coolant can be seen.
tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired
4. Open the engine hood. at a NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the
engine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or

looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is
running. The radiator hoses and radiator
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,
the water pump belt is missing or loose, or
the cooling fan does not run, stop the
engine.
WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or
the engine cooling fan. The engine

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in . Always attach safety chains before
Canada) and local regulations for towing must towing.
be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could
damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are For information about towing your vehicle behind
available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service a recreational vehicle (RV), see “Flat towing” in
operators are familiar with the applicable laws the “9. Technical and consumer information”
and procedures for towing. To assure proper section of this manual.
towing and to prevent accidental damage to
your vehicle, NISSAN recommends that you
have a service operator tow your vehicle. It is
advisable to have the service operator carefully
read the following precautions.
WARNING
. Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
. Never get under your vehicle after it
has been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
. When towing, make sure that the
transmission, axles, steering system
and drivetrain are in working condi-
tion. If any unit is damaged, dollies
must be used.

SCE0439
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be
used when towing your vehicle or place the
vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.
CAUTION
Never tow AWD models with any of the
wheels on the ground as this may cause
serious and expensive damage to the
drivetrain.

— Move the shift lever to the N
(Neutral) position.
. When towing a CVT model with the
rear wheels on the ground (if you do
not use towing dollies): Always
release the parking brake.
SCE0438
Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models
Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models
four wheels on the ground (forward
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be or backward), as this may cause
towed with the driving (front) wheels off the serious and expensive damage to
ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as the drivetrain. If it is necessary to
illustrated. tow the vehicle with the rear wheels
For All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models, see “All- raised, always use towing dollies
Wheel Drive (AWD) models” earlier in this under the front wheels.
section. . When towing CVT models with the
front wheels on towing dollies:
CAUTION — Push the ignition switch to the
ACC or ON position, and secure
. Never tow Continuously Variable the steering wheel in a straight-
Transmission (CVT) models with ahead position with a rope or
the front wheels on the ground or similar device.
Pulling a stuck vehicle
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use a tow strap or other device designed
specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery
device.
Front:
Securely install the vehicle recovery hook
(stored in the cargo area) as illustrated. Make
sure that the hook is properly secured in the
original place after use.
SCE0718
Tie down and recovery hook CAUTION
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck . Tow chains or cables must be at-
vehicle) tached only to the main structural
members of the vehicle or the
WARNING recovery hook. Otherwise, the vehi-
cle body will be damaged.
SCE0717 . Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. . Never tow a vehicle using the vehi-
Front . Do not spin your tires at high speed. cle tie downs or recovery hooks.
This could cause them to explode . Always pull the cable straight out
and result in serious injury. Parts of from the front of the vehicle. Never
your vehicle could also overheat pull on the vehicle at an angle.
and be damaged. . Pulling devices should be routed so
they do not touch any part of the
suspension, steering, brake or cool-
ing systems.
. Pulling devices such as ropes or
canvas straps are not recommended
for use in vehicle towing or recov-
ery.
Rocking a stuck vehicle

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
system.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the
vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear
an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-
ward.
. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
and D (Drive).
. Apply the accelerator as little as possible
to maintain the rocking motion.
. Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R and D.
. Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55
km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few
tries, contact a professional towing service
to remove the vehicle.

MEMO

7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior ....................................................................... 7-2 Cleaning interior ....................................................................... 7-5

Washing ................................................................................. 7-2 Air fresheners ..................................................................... 7-5
Soft top care and cleaning Floor mats ........................................................................... 7-5
(CrossCabriolet models) ................................................... 7-3 Seat belts ............................................................................ 7-6
Waxing ................................................................................... 7-3 Corrosion protection ................................................................ 7-7
Removing spots ................................................................... 7-3 Most common factors contributing to
Underbody ............................................................................. 7-3 vehicle corrosion ............................................................... 7-7
Glass ...................................................................................... 7-3 Environmental factors influence the rate
Aluminum alloy wheels ....................................................... 7-4 of corrosion ........................................................................ 7-7
Chrome parts ....................................................................... 7-4 To protect your vehicle from corrosion ....................... 7-7
Tire dressing ......................................................................... 7-4
CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your — Do not use an automatic car

vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it. CAUTION wash or a high pressure car
To protect the paint surface, wash your vehicle wash. The soft top may be
as soon as you can: . Do not use car washes that use acid damaged.
in the detergent. Some car washes,
. after a rainfall to prevent possible damage — Avoid applying direct water
especially brushless ones, use some
from acid rain pressure, such as high pres-
acid for cleaning. The acid may react
. after driving on coastal roads with some plastic vehicle compo-
sured water from household
. when contaminants such as soot, bird hoses, on the lining of the soft
nents, causing them to crack. This
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs top and vehicle body. Avoid
could affect their appearance, and
get on the paint surface applying continuous water on
also could cause them not to func-
. when dust or mud builds up on the surface the parts around the soft top
tion properly. Always check with
and the windows. These may
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle your car wash to confirm that acid
cause water to leak into the
inside a garage or in a covered area. is not used.
inside of your vehicle.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a . Do not wash the vehicle with strong
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body household soap, strong chemical
Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of clean
cover. detergents, gasoline or solvents.
water.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface . Do not wash the vehicle in direct
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,
when putting on or removing the body sunlight or while the vehicle body is
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to
cover. hot, as the surface may become
the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas
water-spotted.
WASHING must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the
Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and . Avoid using tight-napped or rough drain holes in the lower edge of the door are
plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly cloths, such as washing mitts. Care open. Spray water under the body and in the
using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or must be taken when removing wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away
general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with caked-on dirt or other foreign sub- road salt.
clean, lukewarm (never hot) water. stances so the paint surface is not
Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface
scratched or damaged.
by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.
. For CrossCabriolet models, observe
the following:
7-2 Appearance and care
SOFT TOP CARE AND CLEANING . If glass cleaner gets on the soft top, damage the vehicle finish.
(CrossCabriolet models) immediately wash it off with clean Machine compound or aggressive polishing on a
Proper care and handling should be observed to water. base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the
maintain a good appearance of the soft top. finish or leave swirl marks.
. Do not apply direct water pressure,
Improper care may cause the top cloth’s surface such as high pressured water from REMOVING SPOTS
to stiffen, stain, or mat. Follow the instructions household hoses, on the lining of Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,
shown in this section. the soft top and vehicle body, as this insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible
It is not necessary to wash the soft top every may cause water to leak into the from the paint surface to avoid lasting damage
time you wash the vehicle body, but clean the inside of your vehicle. or staining. Special cleaning products are
top regularly before it becomes quite dirty. available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive
Leaving the soft top dirty or soiled for a long After cleaning, always be sure the top and its accessory stores.
period will cause deterioration to the quality of storage are completely dry before opening the UNDERBODY
the top material. top. Opening the top while it is wet or damp may
cause interior water damage, water stains or In areas where road salt is used in winter, the
Remove dust or dirt on the soft top with a soft underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will
brush or sponge, then rinse it with plenty of mildew on the top.
prevent dirt and salt from building up and
clean water. When the top is quite dirty, wash WAXING causing the acceleration of corrosion on the
using a mild detergent, such as a general Regular waxing protects the paint surface and underbody and suspension. Before the winter
cleaner especially made for a cloth top or a helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing period and again in the spring, the underseal
general purpose dish-washing liquid, mixed with is recommended to remove built-up wax residue must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.
clean, lukewarm (never hot) water. Rinse the top and to avoid a weathered appearance before
again with plenty of clean water to remove all GLASS
reapplying wax.
traces of soap. Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass
proper product. to become coated with a film after the vehicle is
CAUTION . Wax your vehicle only after a thorough parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft
washing. Follow the instructions supplied cloth will easily remove this film.
. Do not use strong household soap, with the wax.
strong chemical detergents, gaso- . Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
line or solvents. cutting compounds or cleaners that may
Appearance and care 7-3

. Do not apply wheel cleaners to the . Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
CAUTION wheels when they are hot. The towel. Make sure the tire dressing is
wheel temperature should be the completely removed from the tire tread/
. When cleaning the inside of the same as ambient temperature. grooves.
windows, do not use sharp-edged . Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-
. Rinse the wheel to completely re-
tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine- mended by tire dressing manufacturer.
move the cleaner within 15 minutes
based disinfectant cleaners. They
after the cleaner is applied.
could damage the electrical conduc-
tors, radio antenna elements or rear
window defroster elements.
CHROME PARTS
Clean chrome parts regularly with a non-
. If glass cleaner gets on the soft top,
abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
immediately wash it off with clean
water (CrossCabriolet models). TIRE DRESSING
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to
Wash regularly with a sponge dampened in a the tires to help reduce discoloration of the
mild soap solution, especially during winter rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it
months in areas where road salt is used. Salt may react with the coating and form a com-
could discolor the wheels if not removed. pound. This compound may come off the tire
while driving and stain the vehicle paint.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
CAUTION following precautions:
. Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels: ing on the tire dissolves more easily with an
oil-based tire dressing.
. Do not use a cleaner that uses . Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
strong acid or alkali contents to prevent it from entering the tire tread/
clean the wheels. grooves (where it would be difficult to
remove).
CLEANING INTERIOR
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior AIR FRESHENERS

trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum CAUTION Most air fresheners use a solvent that could
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and
affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dam- . For cleaning, use a soft cloth, dam- freshener, take the following precautions:
pened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean pened with water. Never use a rough
with a dry soft cloth. . Hanging-type air fresheners can cause
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or
permanent discoloration when they contact
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to any kind of solvent or paper towel vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air
maintain the appearance of the leather. with a chemical cleaning agent. freshener in a location that allows it to hang
Before using any fabric protector, read the They will scratch or cause discolora-
free and not contact an interior surface.
manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric tion to the lens.
. Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on
protectors contain chemicals that may stain or . Do not spray any liquid such as the ventilators. These products can cause
bleach the seat material. water on the meter lens. Spraying immediate damage and discoloration when
Use a cloth dampened only with water, to clean liquid may cause the system to spilled on interior surfaces.
the meter and gauge lens. malfunction.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s
. Small dirt particles can be abrasive instructions before using air fresheners.
and damaging to the leather sur-
WARNING FLOOR MATS
faces and should be removed
promptly. Do not use saddle soap,
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning WARNING
fluids, solvents, detergents or am-
damage the seat or occupant classifica- monia-based cleaners as they may To avoid potential pedal interference
tion sensor. This can also affect the damage the leather’s natural finish. that may result in a collision or injury:
operation of the air bag system and
result in serious personal injury. . Only use fabric protectors approved . NEVER place a floor mat on top of
by NISSAN. another floor mat in the driver front
. Do not use glass or plastic cleaner position.
on meter or gauge lens covers. It . Use only genuine NISSAN floor
may damage the lens cover. mats specifically designed for use
in your vehicle model. See your
NISSAN dealer for more informa-
tion. SEAT BELTS
. Properly position the mats in the The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
floorwell using the floor mat posi- with a sponge dampened in a mild soap
tioning aid. See “Floor mat posi- solution. Allow the belts to dry completely before
tioning aid” later in this section. using them.
See “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat
The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can belts and supplemental restraint system” sec-
extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it tion.
easier to clean the interior. Mats should be
maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if
they become excessively worn. WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in
SAI0038 the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or
chemical solvents to clean the seat
Floor mat positioning aid belts, since these materials may se-
This model includes front floor mat brackets to verely weaken the seat belt webbing.
act as floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor
mats have been specially designed for your
vehicle model. The front floor mats have
grommet holes in them. To install, simply
position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket
through the floor mat grommet hole while
centering the mat in the floorwell.
Periodically check to make certain that the mats
are properly positioned.

CORROSION PROTECTION
MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRI- Temperature Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
BUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION A temperature increase will accelerate the rate . Never allow water or other liquids to
. The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt of corrosion to those parts which are not well come in contact with electronic
and debris in body panel sections, cavities, ventilated. components inside the vehicle as
and other areas. this may damage them.
. Damage to paint and other protective coat-
Air pollution
ings caused by gravel and stone chips or Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air
Chemicals used for road surface deicing are
minor traffic accidents. in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion
accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLU- and deterioration of underbody components
also accelerate the disintegration of paint
ENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
surfaces.
lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
Moisture TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the CORROSION periodically.
vehicle body underside can accelerate corro- . Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the
sion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely For additional protection against rust and
vehicle clean. corrosion, which may be required in some areas,
inside the vehicle, and should be removed for
. Always check for minor damage to the paint consult a NISSAN dealer.
drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.
and repair it as soon as possible.
Relative humidity . Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high open to avoid water accumulation.
relative humidity, especially those areas where . Check the underbody for accumulation of
the temperatures stay above freezing where sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
atmospheric pollution exists, or where road salt as soon as possible.
is used.
CAUTION
. NEVER remove dirt, sand or other
debris from the passenger compart-
ment by washing it out with a hose.

MEMO

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Maintenance requirement ........................................................ 8-2 Air cleaner ............................................................................... 8-17

Scheduled maintenance .................................................... 8-2 Windshield wiper blades ..................................................... 8-18
General maintenance ......................................................... 8-2 Cleaning ........................................................................... 8-18
Where to go for service .................................................... 8-2 Replacing ......................................................................... 8-18
General maintenance ............................................................... 8-2 Rear window wiper blade (if so equipped) .................... 8-19
Explanation of maintenance items ................................... 8-2 Brakes ...................................................................................... 8-19
Maintenance precautions ........................................................ 8-5 Self-adjusting brakes .................................................... 8-19
Engine compartment check locations .................................. 8-6 Brake pad wear warning .............................................. 8-19
VQ35DE engine .................................................................. 8-6 Fuses ........................................................................................ 8-20
Engine cooling system ............................................................. 8-7 Engine compartment ..................................................... 8-20
Checking engine coolant level ......................................... 8-8 Passenger compartment .............................................. 8-21
Changing engine coolant .................................................. 8-8 Intelligent Key battery replacement ................................... 8-22
Engine oil .................................................................................... 8-8 Lights ........................................................................................ 8-25
Checking engine oil level .................................................. 8-8 Hardtop models .............................................................. 8-25
Changing engine oil and filter .......................................... 8-9 CrossCabriolet models ................................................. 8-26
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid ............ 8-11 Headlights ........................................................................ 8-27
Power steering fluid ............................................................... 8-11 Exterior and interior lights ............................................ 8-29
Brake fluid ................................................................................ 8-12 Wheels and tires ................................................................... 8-32
Window washer fluid ............................................................ 8-13 Tire pressure ................................................................... 8-32
Battery ....................................................................................... 8-13 Tire labeling ..................................................................... 8-36
Jump starting ..................................................................... 8-15 Types of tires ................................................................... 8-38
Variable voltage control system (if so equipped) .......... 8-15 Tire chains ....................................................................... 8-39
Drive belt .................................................................................. 8-15 Changing wheels and tires .......................................... 8-40
Spark plugs ............................................................................. 8-16 Emergency tire puncture repair kit
Replacing spark plugs .................................................... 8-16 (if so equipped) .............................................................. 8-43
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is These checks or inspections can be done by During the normal day-to-day operation of the
essential to maintain your vehicle’s fine mechan- yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a vehicle, general maintenance should be per-
ical condition, as well as its emission and engine NISSAN dealer. formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
performance. you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
smell, be sure to check for the cause or have a
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that If maintenance service is required or your vehicle NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general appears to malfunction, have the systems should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that
maintenance, is performed. checked and serviced by a NISSAN dealer. repairs are required.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists When performing any checks or maintenance
can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper and are kept up-to-date with the latest service work, see “Maintenance precautions” later in
maintenance. You are a vital link in the main- information through technical bulletins, service this section.
tenance chain. tips, and in-dealership information systems.
They are completely qualified to work on EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
NISSAN vehicles before work begins. ITEMS
For your convenience, both required and op-
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s Additional information on the following
tional scheduled maintenance items are de-
service department performs the best job to items with “*” is found later in this section.
scribed and listed in your “NISSAN Service and
Maintenance Guide”. You must refer to that meet the maintenance requirements on your Outside the vehicle
guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is vehicle.
The maintenance items listed here should be
performed on your vehicle at regular intervals. performed from time to time, unless otherwise
GENERAL MAINTENANCE specified.
General maintenance includes those items Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors
which should be checked during normal day- and the engine hood operate properly. Also
to-day operation. They are essential for proper ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate
vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if
perform these procedures regularly as pre- necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch
scribed. keeps the hood from opening when the primary
Performing general maintenance checks re- latch is released.
quires minimal mechanical skill and only a few When driving in areas using road salt or other
general automotive tools. corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis. For additional information regarding tires, refer Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the War- steep hill, check that the vehicle is held securely
operating properly and installed securely. Also ranty Information Booklet. with the shift lever in the P (Park) position
check headlight aim. Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular without applying any brakes.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking basis. Check the windshield at least every six Parking brake: Check the parking brake
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, months for cracks or other damage. Have a operation regularly. The vehicle should be
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if damaged windshield repaired by a qualified securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the
necessary. repair facility. parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks adjustment, see a NISSAN dealer.
7,500 miles (12,000 km). or wear if they do not wipe properly. Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters
Inside the vehicle and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,
and always prior to long distance trips. If
The maintenance items listed here should be and are installed securely. Check the belt
necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires,
checked on a regular basis, such as when webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
including the spare, to the pressure specified.
performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning
Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive Seats: Check seat position controls such as
the vehicle, etc.
wear. seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for they operate smoothly and that all latches lock
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
smooth operation and make sure the pedal securely in every position. Check that the head
transmitter components: Replace the TPMS
does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep restraints/headrests move up and down
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap
the floor mat away from the pedal. smoothly and that the locks (if so equipped)
when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth hold securely in all latched positions.
Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle
operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes Steering wheel: Check for changes in the
should pull to either side while driving on a
down further than normal, the pedal feels steering conditions, such as excessive free play,
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or
spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to hard steering or strange noises.
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for
stop, see a NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep
wheel alignment. Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that
the floor mat away from the pedal.
If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal all warning lights and chimes are operating
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the properly.
highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
vehicle to one side when applied.
needed.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3
Windshield defroster: Check that the air In these cases, the battery may need to be Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and charged to maintain battery health. the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine
in sufficient quantity when operating the heater Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,
or air conditioner. fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines on cracks, etc.
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that the reservoir. Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the
the wipers and washer operate properly and that Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,
the wipers do not streak. when the engine is cold. etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the
hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose
Under the hood and vehicle Engine drive belts*: Make sure that the drive
connections.
The maintenance items listed here should be belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently ex-
checked periodically (for example, each time you Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking
posed to corrosive substances such as those
check the engine oil or refuel). the vehicle on a level surface and turning off the
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very
Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to
important to remove these substances, other-
drain back into the oil pan.
It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. wise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose lines and around the exhaust system. At the end
severe condition require frequent checks of the supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly
battery fluid level. exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of flushed with plain water, being careful to clean
exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust those areas where mud and dirt may accumu-
NOTE:
system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. (See late. For additional information, see “Cleaning
Care should be taken to avoid situations “Precautions when starting and driving” in the exterior” in the “7. Appearance and care”
that can lead to potential battery discharge “5. Starting and driving” section for exhaust gas section.
and potential no-start conditions such as: (carbon monoxide).)
Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there is
1. Installation or extended use of electro-
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, adequate fluid in the reservoir.
oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has
power when the engine is not running
been parked for a while. Water dripping from the
(Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players,
air conditioner after use is normal. If you should
etc.)
notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or check for the cause and have it corrected
only driven short distances. immediately.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or mainte-

. If you must run the engine in an ways conform to local regulations
nance work on your vehicle, always take care
enclosed space such as a garage, be for disposal of vehicle fluid.
to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or
sure there is proper ventilation for . Never leave the engine or the CVT
damage to the vehicle. The following are general
exhaust gases to escape. related component harnesses dis-
precautions which should be closely observed.
. Never get under the vehicle while it connected while the ignition switch
is supported only by a jack. If it is is in the ON position.
WARNING necessary to work under the vehicle, . Never connect or disconnect the
support it with safety stands. battery or any transistorized com-
. Park the vehicle on a level surface, . Keep smoking materials, flame and ponent while the ignition switch is
apply the parking brake securely sparks away from fuel tank and the in the ON position.
and block the wheels to prevent battery.
the vehicle from moving. Move the . Your vehicle is equipped with an
shift lever to P (Park). . The fuel filter or fuel lines should be automatic engine cooling fan. It may
serviced by a NISSAN dealer become on at any time without warn-
. Be sure the ignition switch is in the cause the fuel lines are under high ing, even if the ignition key is in the
OFF or LOCK position when per- pressure even when the engine is OFF position and the engine is not
forming any parts replacement or off. running. To avoid injury, always
repairs. disconnect the negative battery
. If you must work with the engine cable before working near the fan.
running, keep your hands, clothing,
hair and tools away from moving CAUTION This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
fans, belts and any other moving gives instructions regarding only those items
. Do not work under the hood while
parts. which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.
the engine is hot. Turn the engine
. It is advisable to secure or remove off and wait until it cools down. A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also
any loose clothing and remove any available. (See “Owner’s Manual/Service Man-
. Avoid direct contact with used en-
jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. ual order information” in the “9. Technical and
gine oil and coolant. Improperly
before working on your vehicle. consumer information” section.)
disposed engine oil, and engine
. Always wear eye protection when- coolant and/or other vehicle fluids You should be aware that incomplete or
ever you work on your vehicle. can damage the environment. Al- improper servicing may result in operating

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
difficulties or excessive emissions, and could

affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about
any servicing, we recommend that it be
done by a NISSAN dealer.
SDI2172
VQ35DE ENGINE 7. Window washer fluid reservoir

1. Power steering fluid reservoir 8. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Drive belt location 9. Radiator filler cap
3. Engine oil filler cap 10. Engine oil dipstick
4. Brake fluid reservoir 11. Battery
5. Air cleaner
6. Fuse/fusible link holder

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory stopped to cool the components in Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-
with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine the engine compartment. When the freeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and cooling fan is operating, be sure low the coolant manufacturer’s
50% water to provide year-round anti-freeze that hands or other items do not get instructions to maintain minimum
and coolant protection. The antifreeze solution caught in it. antifreeze protection to -348F
contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional (-378C). The use of other types of
engine cooling system additives are not neces- coolant solutions other than Genu-
sary. ine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/
CAUTION Coolant (blue) or equivalent may
damage the engine cooling system.
WARNING . Never use any cooling system ad-
ditives such as radiator sealer. Ad- . The life expectancy of the factory-fill
. Never remove the radiator or cool- ditives may clog the cooling system coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000
ant reservoir cap when the engine is and cause damage to the engine, km) or 7 years. Mixing any other
hot. Wait until the engine and transmission and/or cooling sys- type of coolant other than Genuine
radiator cool down. Serious burns tem. NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Cool-
could be caused by high pressure ant (blue) , including Genuine
. When adding or replacing coolant,
fluid escaping from the radiator. NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Cool-
be sure to use only Genuine
See precautions in “If your vehicle ant (green), or the use of non-
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Cool-
overheats” found in the “6. In case distilled water will reduce the life
ant (blue) or equivalent. Genuine
of emergency” section of this man- expectancy of the factory-fill cool-
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Cool-
ual. ant. Refer to the NISSAN Service
ant (blue) is pre-diluted to provide
and Maintenance Guide for more
. The radiator is equipped with a antifreeze protection to -348F
details.
pressure type radiator cap. To pre- (-378C). If additional freeze protec-
vent engine damage, use only a tion is needed due to weather where
genuine NISSAN radiator cap. you operate your vehicle, add Gen-
. If the engine was stopped soon uine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/
when the engine is hot, the cooling Coolant (blue) concentrate follow-
fan may operate for approximately ing the directions on the container.
10 minutes after the engine was If an equivalent coolant other than

ENGINE OIL
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

Major cooling system repairs should be per-
formed by a NISSAN dealer. The service
procedures can be found in the appropriate
NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheat-
ing.
WARNING
. To avoid the danger of being
SDI2173 scalded, never change the coolant SDI2174
when the engine is hot.
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when . Never remove the radiator cap when
the engine is hot. Serious burns 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below the parking brake.
the MIN level * 2 , open the reservoir cap and
could be caused by high pressure
2. Run the engine until it reaches operating
add coolant up to the MAX level * 1 . If the
fluid escaping from the radiator.
. Avoid direct skin contact with used temperature.
reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the
radiator when the engine is cold. If there is coolant. If skin contact is made, 3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10
insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator wash thoroughly with soap or hand minutes for the oil to drain back into
with coolant up to the filler opening and also add cleaner as soon as possible. the oil pan.
it to the reservoir up to the MAX level * 1 . . Keep coolant out of reach of chil- 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
If the cooling system frequently requires dren and pets. Reinsert it all the way.
coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN 5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil
dealer. Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. level. It should be within the range * 1 . If the
Check your local regulations. oil level is below *2 , remove the oil filler cap
and pour recommended oil through the
opening. Do not overfill *
3 . 4. Raise and support the vehicle using a
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick. suitable floor jack and safety jack stands.
. Place the safety jack stands under the
It is normal to add some oil between oil
vehicle jack-up points.
maintenance intervals or during the break-
. A suitable adapter should be attached to
in period, depending on the severity of
operating conditions. the jack stand saddle.
CAUTION CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Make sure the correct lifting and sup-
Operating the engine with an insuffi- port points are used to avoid vehicle
cient amount of oil can damage the damage.
engine, and such damage is not cov-
ered by the warranty.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

Change the engine oil and filter according to the
maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service
and Maintenance Guide.
Vehicle set-up SDI2175
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
minutes.

7. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean
CAUTION engine oil.
8. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the resistance is felt, then tighten additionally
engine oil is hot. more than 2/3 turn.
Oil filter tightening torque:
. Waste oil must be disposed of 11 to 15 ft-lb (14.7 to 20.5 N·m)
properly.
. Check your local regulations. 9. Install the plastic cover.
Perform steps 4 to 9 when the engine oil 10. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a
filter change is needed. new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug
with a wrench.
4. Remove the plastic cover over the oil filter
location by removing the small plastic clips Drain plug tightening torque:
as illustrated. 22 to 29 ft-lb (29 to 39 N·m)
5. Loosen the oil filter *
C with an oil filter Do not use excessive force.
wrench. Remove the oil filter by turning it by 11. Refill engine with recommended oil through
hand. the oil filler opening, and install the oil filler
6. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface cap securely.
with a clean rag. See “Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants” in the “9. Technical and con-
SDI2355
sumer information” section for drain and refill
CAUTION capacity. The drain and refill capacity
Engine oil and filter depends on the oil temperature and drain
1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug Be sure to remove any old gasket
time. Use these specifications for reference
*A .
material remaining on the mounting
surface of the engine. Failure to do so
only. Always use the dipstick to determine
2. Remove the oil filler cap *
B .
could lead to engine damage.
the proper amount of oil in the engine.
3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench and 12. Start the engine and check for leakage
completely drain the oil. around the drain plug and the oil filter.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
POWER STEERING FLUID
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID
Correct as required.
13. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 CAUTION
minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.
Add engine oil if necessary. . Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid
NS-3. Do not mix with other fluids.
After the operation
. Using transmission fluid other than
1. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3
2. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly. will damage the CVT, which is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle
limited warranty.
WARNING
When checking or replacement is required, we
. Prolonged and repeated contact
recommend a NISSAN dealer for servicing. SDI2177
with used engine oil may cause skin
cancer.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir.
. Try to avoid direct skin contact with
The fluid level should be checked using the HOT
used oil. If skin contact is made,
range (* 1 : HOT MAX., * 3 : HOT MIN.) at fluid
wash thoroughly with soap or hand
temperatures of 122 to 1768F (50 to 808C) or
cleaner as soon as possible.
using the COLD range (* 2 : COLD MAX., * 3 :
. Keep used engine oil out of reach of COLD MIN.) at fluid temperatures of 32 to 868F
children. (0 to 308C).
If the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine
NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Remove the cap
and fill through the opening.

BRAKE FLUID
For additional brake fluid information, see

CAUTION “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants”
in the “9. Technical and consumer information”
. Do not overfill. section of this manual.
. Use Genuine NISSAN PSF or
equivalent. WARNING
. Use only new fluid from a sealed
container. Old, inferior or contami-
nated fluid may damage the brake
system. The use of improper fluids
can damage the brake system and
affect the vehicle’s stopping ability.
SDI2178
. Clean the filler cap before removing.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is
. Brake fluid is poisonous and should
below the MIN line * 2 or the brake warning
be stored carefully in marked con-
light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super
tainers out of the reach of children.
Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3
fluid up to the MAX line * 1 . If fluid must be
added frequently, the system should be checked
CAUTION by a NISSAN dealer.
Do not spill the fluid on any painted

surfaces. This will damage the paint. If
fluid is spilled, immediately wash the
surface with water.

WINDOW WASHER FLUID BATTERY
Recommended fluid: . Keep the battery surface clean and dry.

Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concen- Clean the battery with a solution of baking
trate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent soda and water.
. Make certain the terminal connections are
clean and securely tightened.
CAUTION . If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or
longer, disconnect the negative (−) battery
. Do not substitute engine anti-freeze terminal cable to prevent discharging it.
coolant for window washer solution.
NOTE:
This may result in damage to the
paint. Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
SDI2179 1. Installation or extended use of electro-
Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodi- methyl alcohol based washer fluid
power when the engine is not running
cally. Add window washer fluid when the low concentrates may permanently stain
(Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players,
window washer fluid warning appears on the dot the grille if spilled while filling the
etc.)
matrix liquid crystal display. window washer reservoir tank.
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the . Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
only driven short distances.
cap and pour the window washer fluid into the with water to the manufacturer’s
reservoir opening. recommended levels before pouring In these cases, the battery may need to be
the fluid into the window washer charged to maintain battery health.
Add a washer solvent to the water for better reservoir tank. Do not use the
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield window washer reservoir tank to
washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s mix the washer fluid concentrate
WARNING
instructions for the mixture ratio. and water. . Do not expose the battery to flames
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving
or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas
conditions require an increased amount of
generated by the battery is explo-
window washer fluid.
sive. Do not allow battery fluid to

contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or
painted surfaces. After touching a
battery or battery cap, do not touch
or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash
your hands. If the acid contacts your
eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for at least 15
minutes and seek medical attention.
. Do not operate the vehicle if the
fluid in the battery is low. Low
battery fluid can cause a higher load
on the battery which can generate
heat, reduce battery life, and in DI0137MA SDI1480C
some cases lead to an explosion.
. When working on or near a battery, Check the fluid level in each cell. (Remove the 1. Remove the cell plugs *
A .
always wear suitable eye protection battery cover if it is necessary.) It should be 2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER LEVEL
and remove all jewelry. between the UPPER LEVEL * 1 and LOWER
*1 line.
LEVEL * 2 lines.
. Battery posts, terminals and related If the side of the battery is not clear, check
accessories contain lead and lead If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled the distilled water level by looking directly
compounds. Wash hands after water to bring the level to the indicator in each above the cell; the condition * 1 indicates
handling. filler opening. Do not overfill. OK and the conditions * 2 needs more to
. Keep the battery out of the reach of be added.

children. 3. Tighten cell plugs *
A .
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL
DRIVE BELT
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting” CAUTION
in the “6. In case of emergency” section. If the
engine does not start by jump starting, the . Do not ground accessories directly
battery may have to be replaced. Contact a to the battery terminal. Doing so will
NISSAN dealer. bypass the variable voltage control
system and the vehicle battery may
not charge completely.
. Use electrical accessories with the
engine running to avoid discharging
the vehicle battery.
The variable voltage control system measures SDI2186

the amount of electrical discharge from the
battery and controls voltage generated by the 1. Power steering oil pump
generator. 2. Alternator
3. Drive belt auto-tensioner
4. Crankshaft pulley
5. Air conditioner compressor
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
or LOCK position before servicing drive
belt. The engine could rotate unexpect-
edly.
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual

wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is
SPARK PLUGS
in poor condition or loose, have it replaced

or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer. WARNING
2. Have the belt condition checked regularly.
Be sure the engine and ignition switch
are off and that the parking brake is
engaged securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to
remove the spark plugs. An incorrect
socket can damage the spark plugs. SDI2020
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS Iridium-tipped spark plugs

If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer It is not necessary to replace the platinum-
for servicing. tipped spark plugs as frequently as the conven-
tional type spark plugs since they will last much
longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do
not reuse spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.
Always replace spark plugs with recom-
mended or equivalent ones.

AIR CLEANER
isn’t there, and the engine backfires,

you could be burned. Do not drive
with the air cleaner removed, and be
careful when working on the engine
with the air cleaner removed.
. Never pour fuel into the throttle
body or attempt to start the engine
with the air cleaner removed. Doing
so could result in serious injury.
SDI2180
Pull the tabs *

1 and pull out the cover *
2 .
The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and

reused. Replace it according to the maintenance
log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Main-
tenance Guide”. When replacing the filter, wipe
the inside of the air cleaner housing and the
cover with a damp cloth.
WARNING
. Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or
others to be burned. The air cleaner
not only cleans the air, it stops
flame if the engine backfires. If it
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters
when running, wax or other material may be on
the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
washer solution or a mild detergent. Your
windshield is clean if beads do not form when
rinsing with clear water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent.
Then rinse the blade with clear water. If your
windshield is still not clear after cleaning the SDI2048
blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.
REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. CAUTION
CAUTION 1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
.
2. Push and hold the release tab *A , and
After wiper blade replacement, re-
Worn windshield wiper blades can turn the wiper arm to its original
damage the windshield and impair move the wiper blade down the wiper arm
driver vision. *1 .
position; otherwise it may be da-
maged when the hood is opened.
3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper
. Make sure the wiper blades contact
arm until a click sounds.
the glass; otherwise the arm may be
4. Rotate the wiper blade so that the dimple is damaged from wind pressure.
in the groove.
Contact a NISSAN dealer for wiper blade rubber
replacement.

REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE (if so
BRAKES
equipped)
Contact a NISSAN dealer if checking or If the brakes do not operate properly, have the
replacement is required. brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.
SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the
brake pedal is applied.
WARNING
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake
system check if the brake pedal height
does not return to normal.
BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING

The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-
ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it
will make a high pitched scraping sound when
the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will
SDI2199
first occur only when the brake pedal is
depressed. After more wear of the brake pad,
Be careful not to clog the washer nozzle * A . the sound will always be heard even if the brake
This may cause improper windshield washer pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes
operation. If the nozzle is clogged, remove any checked as soon as possible if the wear warning
objects with a needle or small pin * B . Be sound is heard.
careful not to damage the nozzle. Under some driving or climate conditions,
occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise
may be heard. Occasional brake noise during
FUSES
light to moderate stops is normal and does not 2. Open the engine hood.
affect the function or performance of the brake 3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder cover by
system. pushing the tab *
1 .
Proper brake inspection intervals should 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller located
be followed. For additional information, see the in the passenger compartment fuse box.
maintenance log section of your “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide”.
SDI2181
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than that specified on
the fuse box cover. This could damage
the electrical system or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are turned off.

SDI1754 SDI2196
5. If the fuse is open *

A , replace it with a new PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 2. Pull to remove the fuse box cover * 1 .
fuse * B . Spare fuses are stored in the
3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller * 2 .
passenger compartment fuse box.
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
CAUTION 4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse.
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN 5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.
amperage rating than that specified on dealer.
Fusible links the fuse box cover. This could damage
If any electrical equipment does not operate and the electrical system or cause a fire.
fuses are in good condition, check the fusible
links. If any of these fusible links are melted, If any electrical equipment does not operate,
replace only with genuine NISSAN parts. check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are turned off.

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY
REPLACEMENT
check for an open fuse.

NOTE: CAUTION
If the extended storage fuse switch mal-
functions, or if the fuse is open, it is not Be careful not to allow children to
necessary to replace the switch. In this swallow the battery and removed parts.
case, remove the extended storage fuse
switch and replace it with a new fuse of the
same rating.
How to remove the extended storage fuse
switch:
1. To remove the extended storage fuse switch,
be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or
SDI2704 LOCK position.
Example 2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF
Extended storage fuse switch position.
To reduce battery drain, the extended storage 3. Remove the fuse box cover.
fuse switch comes from the factory switched off. 4. Pinch the locking tabs * 1 found on each
Prior to delivery of your vehicle, the switch is side of the storage fuse switch.
pushed in (switched on) and should always
5. Pull the storage fuse switch straight out from
the fuse box *
remain on. 2 .
If the extended storage fuse switch is not
pushed in (switched on), the “SHIPPING MODE
ON, PUSH STORAGE FUSE” warning may
appear on the dot matrix liquid crystal display.
See “Dot matrix liquid crystal display” in the “2.
Instruments and controls” section.
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
remove the extended storage fuse switch and
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery:
CR2032 or equivalent
. Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as doing so could
cause a malfunction.
. Hold the battery by the edges. Holding
the battery across the contact points will
seriously deplete the storage capacity.
. Make sure that the + side faces the
bottom case.
SDI2452
4. Align the tips of the upper and lower parts

* 1 , and then push them together *
2 until it
is securely closed.
5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.
See a NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance
for replacement.
SDI2451 FCC Notice:
Replace the battery as follows: For USA:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the key. This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the
following two conditions: (1) This device
corner and twist it to separate the upper part
may not cause harmful interference, and
from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect
the casing.
ence received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and
ence, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.

LIGHTS
HARDTOP MODELS
1. Front turn signal/parking light* or Front turn
signal light**
2. Headlight (high-beam)* or Front parking light**
3. Headlight (low-beam)* or Headlight (low-beam,
high-beam)**
4. Side marker light
5. Front map light
6. Rear personal light
7. Front fog light (if so equipped)
8. Step light
9. High-mounted stop light
10. Back-up light
11. Rear stop/tail light
12. Rear side marker light
13. License plate light
14. Cargo light
15. Rear turn signal light
*: Halogen headlight model
**: Xenon headlight model
JVM0092X

CROSSCABRIOLET MODELS
1. Front turn signal light
2. Front parking light
3. Headlight (low-beam, high-beam)
4. Front side marker light
5. Front map light
6. Front fog light
7. Step light
8. High-mounted stop light
9. Back-up light
10. Rear turn signal light
11. Rear side marker light
12. Trunk light
13. License plate light
14. Rear stop/tail light
SDI2723

HEADLIGHTS
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the CAUTION
exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A
temperature difference between the inside and . Do not leave the bulb out of the
the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is headlight reflector for a long period
not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc.
inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer. entering the headlight body may
affect bulb performance.
Replacing
. High pressure halogen gas is sealed
If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer. inside the halogen bulb. The bulb
Xenon headlight model: may break if the glass envelope is
scratched or the bulb is dropped.
. Only touch the plastic base when
WARNING handling the bulb. Never touch the
glass envelope.
HIGH VOLTAGE
. Aiming is not necessary after repla-
When xenon headlights are on, they
cing the bulb. When aiming adjust-
produce a high voltage. To prevent an
ment is necessary, contact a
electric shock, never attempt to modify
NISSAN dealer.
or disassemble. Always have your xe-
non headlights replaced at a NISSAN
Use the same number and wattage as originally SDI2183
dealer. For additional information, see
installed as shown in the chart.
“Headlight and turn signal switch” in Disconnect the battery negative cable before
the “2. Instruments and controls” sec- replacing bulbs.
tion.
To replace the headlight bulb, if necessary,
remove the rubber cover by pulling out the two
Halogen headlight model (if so equipped): clips *
1 .
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which *
A High-beam bulb
uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb.
*
B Low-beam bulb

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS *: See a NISSAN dealer for replacement.
**: Xenon headlight model
Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.
NOTE: Always check with the Parts Department
Headlight
at a NISSAN dealer for the latest information
High/Low beams (Xenon)* 35 D2S about parts.
High beam (Halogen) (Hardtop) 65 HB3
Low beam (Halogen) (Hardtop) 55 H11
Front turn signal/parking light* 27/8 1157NA
Front turn signal light** 21 WY21W
Front parking light** 5 W5W
Front fog light (if so equipped) 35 H8
Front side marker 5 WY5W
Rear combination light*
turn signal (Hardtop) 21 WY21W
turn signal (CrossCabriolet) 21 W21W
stop/tail LED —
side marker 5 W5W
back-up 16 W16W
License plate light* 5 W5W
Front map light 8 —
Rear personal light (if so equipped) 8 —
Vanity mirror light (if so equipped) 2 —
Step light * 2.7 161
High-mounted stop light* LED —
Cargo light (Hardtop) 8 —
Trunk light (CrossCabriolet) 5 W5W
Glove box light* 3.4 —
Mood light (if so equipped)* LED —

Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C, D, E or F.
When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens
and/or cover.
SDI2200
Side marker light (Halogen headlight model)
1. Remove the rubber cover. (See “Headlights”
earlier in this section.)
2. Remove the bulb as illustrated.
SDI1679

SDI2030 SDI1500B
Front map light Cargo light (Hardtop models)
SDI2184
Front fog light (if so equipped)
SDI2031 SDI1451B
Rear personal light (if so equipped) Trunk light (CrossCabriolet models)

WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the Tire inflation pressure
“6. In case of emergency” section. Check the pressure of the tires (including
TIRE PRESSURE the spare) often and always prior to long
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) distance trips. The recommended tire
pressure specifications are shown on the
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire
Tire and Loading Information label under
pressure of all tires except the spare. When the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire
the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the and Loading Information label is affixed to
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning appears on the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures
the dot matrix liquid crystal display, one or more should be checked regularly because:
of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
. Most tires naturally lose air over time.
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is
SDI2032 . Tires can lose air suddenly when driven
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h).
Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)
Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop
over potholes or other objects or if the
in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while vehicle strikes a curb while parking.
driving). The tire pressures should be checked
For more details, see “Low tire pressure warning when the tires are cold. The tires are
light” in the “2. Instruments and controls” considered COLD after the vehicle has
section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven
(TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate
and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” speeds.
in the “6. In case of emergency” section.
Incorrect tire pressure, including un-
der inflation, may adversely affect tire
life and vehicle handling.

level.
WARNING
. For additional information re-
. Improperly inflated tires can fail garding tires, refer to “Important
suddenly and cause an accident. Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-
. The Gross Vehicle Weight rating
da) in the Warranty Information
(GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.
Booklet.
S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-
bel. The vehicle weight capacity
is indicated on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do
not load your vehicle beyond
this capacity. Overloading your
vehicle may result in reduced
tire life, unsafe operating condi-
tions due to premature tire fail-
ure, or unfavorable handling
characteristics and could also
lead to a serious accident. Load-
ing beyond the specified capa-
city may also result in failure of
other vehicle components.
. Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure
gauge to ensure that the tire
pressures are at the specified
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km) at moderate speeds. The recom-
mended cold tire inflation is set by the
manufacturer to provide the best
balance of tire wear, vehicle handling,
driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the
vehicle’s GVWR.
*
5 Tire size — see “Tire labeling” later in
this section.
*
6 Spare tire size or compact spare tire
size (if so equipped)
SDI2503
Tire and Loading Information label *

3 Original size: The size of the tires
*
1 Seating capacity: The maximum num- originally installed on the vehicle at the
ber of occupants that can be seated in factory.
the vehicle. *
4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to
*
2 Vehicle load limit: See “Vehicle load- this pressure when the tires are cold.
ing information” in the “9. Technical Tires are considered COLD after the
and consumer information” section. vehicle has been parked for 3 or more
tion shown on the Tire and Loading Hardtop models:
Information label. COLD TIRE
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too SIZE INFLATION
much air is added, press the core of the PRESSURE
valve stem briefly with the tip of the P235/65R18 230 kPa,
gauge stem to release pressure. Re- FRONT 104T 33 PSI
check the pressure and add or release ORIGINAL
air as needed. P235/55R20 230 kPa,
TIRE
102T 33 PSI
6. Install the valve stem cap.
P235/65R18 230 kPa,
7. Check the pressure of all other tires, REAR 104T 33 PSI
including the spare. ORIGINAL
SDI1949 P235/55R20 230 kPa,
TIRE
102T 33 PSI
Checking the tire pressure
230 kPa,
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the Original tire 33 PSI
SPARE
tire.
TIRE T165/90D18 420 kPa,
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto 107M 60 PSI
the valve stem. Do not press too hard or
force the valve stem sideways, or air will
escape. If the hissing sound of air
escaping from the tire is heard while
checking the pressure, reposition the
gauge to eliminate this leakage.
3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge
stem and compare it to the specifica-
CrossCabriolet models:
COLD TIRE
INFLATION
SIZE PRES-
SURE
FRONT P235/55R20 230 kPa,
ORIGINAL 102T 33 PSI
TIRE
REAR P235/55R20 230 kPa,
ORIGINAL 102T 33 PSI
TIRE
SDI1575 SDI1606
Example Example
TIRE LABELING *
1 Tire size (example: P215/60R16 94H)
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to 1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed
place standardized information on the side- for passenger vehicles. (Not all tires
wall of all tires. This information identifies have this information.)
and describes the fundamental character- 2. Three-digit number (215): This number
istics of the tire and also provides the tire gives the width in millimeters of the tire
identification number (TIN) for safety stan- from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.
dard certification. The TIN can be used to 3. Two-digit number (60): This number,
identify the tire in case of a recall. known as the aspect ratio, gives the
tire’s ratio of height to width.
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
5. Two-digit number (16): This number is
the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
6. Two- or three-digit number (94): This 5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture
number is the tire’s load index. It is a 6. Four numbers represent the week and
measurement of how much weight each year the tire was built. For example, the
tire can support. You may not find this numbers 3103 means the 31st week of
information on all tires because it is not 2003. If these numbers are missing,
required by law. then look on the other sidewall of the
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not tire.
drive the vehicle faster than the tire *3 Tire ply composition and material
speed rating. The number of layers or plies of
rubber-coated fabric in the tire.
Tire manufacturers also must indicate
SDI1607
the materials in the tire, which include
Example steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
*
2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a *4 Maximum permissible inflation pres-
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX sure
XXXX) This number is the greatest amount of
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department air pressure that should be put in the
of Transportation”. The symbol can be tire. Do not exceed the maximum
placed above, below or to the left or permissible inflation pressure.
right of the Tire Identification Number. *5 Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identifi- load in kilograms and pounds that can
cation mark be carried by the tire. When replacing
3. Two-digit code: Tire size the tires on the vehicle, always use a
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Op- tire that has the same load rating as
tional) the factory installed tire.

*
6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type” TYPES OF TIRES All season tires
Indicates whether the tire requires an
NISSAN specifies all season tires on some
inner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tube- models to provide good performance all year,
less”). WARNING
including snowy and icy road conditions. All
*7 The word “radial”
. When changing or replacing tires, Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON
The word “radial” is shown, if the tire and/or M&S (Mud and Snow) on the tire
be sure all four tires are of the same
has radial structure. type (Example: Summer, All Season sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction
*8 Manufacturer or brand name or Snow) and construction. A than All Season tires and may be more appro-
Manufacturer or brand name is shown. NISSAN dealer may be able to help priate in some areas.
Other tire-related terminology: you with information about tire type, Summer tires
In addition to the many terms that are size, speed rating and availability.
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some
defined throughout this section, Intended . Replacement tires may have a lower models to provide superior performance on dry
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that speed rating than the factory roads. Summer tire performance is substantially
equipped tires, and may not match reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering
the potential maximum vehicle have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire
or bears manufacturer, brand and/or model speed. Never exceed the maximum sidewall.
name molding that is higher or deeper than speed rating of the tire.
the same molding on the other sidewall of If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or
. Replacing tires with those not ori- icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of
the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall ginally specified by NISSAN could SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four
of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular affect the proper operation of the wheels.
side that must always face outward when TPMS.
mounted on a vehicle. . For additional information regard-
Snow tires
ing tires, refer to “Important Tire If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select
Safety Information” (US) or “Tire tires equivalent in size and load rating to the
Safety Information” (Canada) in the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can
Warranty Information Booklet. adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Generally, snow tires will have lower speed
ratings than factory equipped tires and may not
match the potential maximum vehicle speed. . ONLY use spare tires specified for chain must be secured or removed to prevent
Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the the AWD model. the possibility of whipping action damage to the
tire. fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully
If you install snow tires, they must be the same If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom- loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In
size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all mended that all four tires be replaced with tires addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise,
four wheels. of the same size, brand, construction and tread your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle
pattern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment handling and performance may be adversely
For additional traction on icy roads, studded
should also be checked and corrected as affected.
tires may be used. However, some U.S. states
and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. necessary. Contact a NISSAN dealer. Tire chains must be installed only on the
Check local, state and provincial laws before front wheels and not on the rear wheels.
TIRE CHAINS
installing studded tires. Skid and traction cap- Use of tire chains may be prohibited according Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE
abilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry to location. Check the local laws before instal- ONLY spare tire.
surfaces, may be poorer than that of non- ling tire chains. When installing tire chains, make Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with
studded snow tires. sure they are the proper size for the tires on your tire chains in such conditions can cause damage
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models vehicle and are installed according to the chain to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE some overstress.
Class S chains. Class “S” chains are used on
CAUTION vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.
Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are
. Always use tires of the same type, designed to meet the SAE standard minimum
size, brand, construction (bias, bias- clearances between the tire and the closest
belted or radial), and tread pattern vehicle suspension or body component required
on all four wheels. Failure to do so to accommodate the use of a winter traction
may result in a circumference differ- device (tire chains or cables). The minimum
ence between tires on the front and clearances are determined using the factory
rear axles which will cause exces- equipped tire size. Other types may damage
sive tire wear and may damage the your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when re-
transmission, transfer case and dif- commended by the tire chain manufacturer to
ferential gears. ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire

tened to the specification at all times.
It is recommended that wheel nuts be
tightened to the specification at each
tire rotation interval.
WARNING
. After rotating the tires, check
and adjust the tire pressure.
. Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
SDI1662 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in SDI1663
cases of a flat tire, etc.). 1. Wear indicator
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
. Do not include the spare tire or 2. Wear indicator location mark
Tire rotation any other small size spare tire in Tire wear and damage
NISSAN recommends rotating the tires the tire rotation.
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). (See “Flat
. For additional information re- WARNING
tire” in the “6. In case of emergency”
garding tires, refer to “Important
section for tire replacing procedures.)
Tire Safety Information” (US) or . Tires should be periodically in-
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel “Tire Safety Information” (Cana- spected for wear, cracking, bul-
nuts to the specified torque with a da) in the Warranty Information ging or objects caught in the
torque wrench. Booklet. tread. If excessive wear, cracks,
Wheel nut tightening torque: bulging or deep cuts are found,
80 ft-lb (108 N·m) the tire(s) should be replaced.
The wheel nuts must be kept tigh-

. The original tires have built-in Replacing wheels and tires loss of vehicle control in some
tread wear indicators. When When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread driving conditions and cause an
wear indicators are visible, the design, speed rating and load carrying capacity accident and personal injury.
as originally equipped. (See “Specifications” in . If the wheels are changed for any
tire(s) should be replaced.
the “9. Technical and consumer information” reason, always replace with wheels
. Tires degrade with age and use. section for recommended types and sizes of which have the same off-set dimen-
Have tires, including the spare, tires and wheels.) sion. Wheels of a different off-set
over 6 years old checked by a could cause premature tire wear,
qualified technician, because WARNING degrade vehicle handling character-
some tire damage may not be istics and/or interference with the
obvious. Replace the tires as . The use of tires other than those brake discs/drums. Such interfer-
necessary to prevent tire failure recommended or the mixed use of ence can lead to decreased braking
tires of different brands, construc- efficiency and/or early brake pad/
and possible personal injury.
tion (bias, bias-belted or radial), or shoe wear. See “Wheels and tires”
. Improper service of the spare in the “9. Technical and consumer
tread patterns can adversely affect
tire may result in serious perso- the ride, braking, handling, ground information” section of this manual
nal injury. If it is necessary to clearance, body-to-tire clearance, for wheel off-set dimensions.
repair the spare tire, contact a tire chain clearance, speedometer . When a spare tire is mounted or a
NISSAN dealer. calibration, headlight aim and bum- wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not
. For additional information re- per height. Some of these effects function and the low tire pressure
may lead to accidents and could warning light will flash for approxi-
garding tires, refer to “Important
result in serious personal injury. mately 1 minute. The light will
Tire Safety Information” (US) or remain on after 1 minute. Contact
“Tire Safety Information” (Cana- . For Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models,
if your vehicle was originally your NISSAN dealer as soon as
da) in the Warranty Information possible for tire replacement and/
equipped with 4 tires that were the
Booklet. same size and you are only repla- or system resetting.
cing 2 of the 4 tires, install the new . Replacing tires with those not ori-
tires on the rear axle. Placing new ginally specified by NISSAN could
tires on the front axle may cause affect the proper operation of the
TPMS. Wheel balance Spare tire (if so equipped)
. Do not install a damaged or de- Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling When a spare tire is mounted (TEMPORARY
formed wheel or tire even if it has and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can USE ONLY or conventional), the TPMS will not
been repaired. Such wheels or tires get out of balance. Therefore, they should be function.
could have structural damage and balanced as required. Observe the following precautions if the TEM-
could fail without warning. Wheel balance service should be per- PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used,
. The use of retread tire is not re- formed with the wheels off the vehicle. otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or
commended. Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle involved in an accident.
could lead to mechanical damage.
. For additional information regard-
ing tires, refer to “Important Tire For additional information regarding tires, refer WARNING
Safety Information” (US) or “Tire to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or
Safety Information” (Canada) in the “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the War- . The TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
Warranty Information Booklet. ranty Information Booklet. tire should be used for emergency
Care of wheels use. It should be replaced with the
standard tire at the first opportunity
. Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle
to avoid possible tire or differential
CAUTION to maintain their appearance.
damage.
. Clean the inner side of the wheels when the
Always use tires of the same type, size, wheel is changed or the underside of the . Drive carefully while the TEMPOR-
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted vehicle is washed. ARY USE ONLY spare tire is in-
or radial), and tread pattern on all four stalled. Avoid sharp turns and
. Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing
wheels. Failure to do so may result in a abrupt braking while driving.
the wheels.
circumference difference between tires
. Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or . Periodically check spare tire infla-
on the front and rear axles which will tion pressure. Always keep the
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of
cause excessive tire wear and may pressure of the TEMPORARY USE
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
damage the transmission, transfer case ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420 kPa,
and differential gears (AWD models). . NISSAN recommends that the road wheels
4.2 bar). Always keep the pressure
be waxed to protect against road salt in
of the full size spare tire (if so
areas where it is used during winter.
equipped) at the recommended

pressure for standard tires, as infor more details.
dicated on the Tire and Loading CAUTION
Information label.
. Do not use tire chains on a TEM-
. With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
PORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire
spare tire installed do not drive your
chains will not fit properly and may
vehicle at speeds faster than 50
cause damage to the vehicle.
MPH (80 km/h).
. Because the TEMPORARY USE
. When driving on roads covered with
ONLY spare tire is smaller than the
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
original tire, ground clearance is
ONLY spare tire should be used on
reduced. To avoid damage to the
the rear wheels and original tire
vehicle, do not drive over obstacles.
used on the front wheels (drive
Also do not drive the vehicle
wheels). Use tire chains only on
through an automatic car wash
the front (original) tires.
since it may get caught.
. Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster EMERGENCY TIRE PUNCTURE RE-
rate than the standard tire. Replace
PAIR KIT (if so equipped)
the spare tire as soon as the tread
wear indicators appear. The emergency tire puncture repair kit (Emer-
gency Tire Sealant) is supplied with the vehicle
. Do not use the spare tire on other
instead of a spare tire. It can be used to
vehicles.
temporarily repair minor tire punctures.
. Do not use more than one spare tire
If possible, have the vehicle towed to a facility
at the same time.
that can repair or replace the flat tire. Using the
. Do not tow a trailer while the emergency tire puncture repair kit may cause a
TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire malfunction of the tire pressure sensor and
is installed. cause the low tire pressure warning light to
illuminate.
See “Flat tire” in the “6. In case of emergency”
MEMO

9 Technical and consumer information
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ................... 9-2 Vehicle loading information ................................................. 9-13
Fuel recommendation ......................................................... 9-3 Terms ................................................................................. 9-13
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation ....................... 9-5 Vehicle load capacity .................................................... 9-13
Air conditioning system refrigerant and Securing the load (Hardtop models) ........................ 9-15
lubricant recommendations ............................................... 9-6 Loading tips ..................................................................... 9-16
Specifications ............................................................................. 9-7 Measurement of weights .............................................. 9-16
Engine .................................................................................... 9-7 Towing a trailer (Hardtop models) .................................... 9-16
Wheels and tires ................................................................. 9-7 Maximum load limits ...................................................... 9-17
Dimensions and weights ................................................... 9-8 Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)/maximum
When traveling or registering your vehicle in Gross Axle Weight (GAW) ......................................... 9-18
another country .......................................................................... 9-8 Towing load/specification ............................................ 9-21
Vehicle identification ................................................................. 9-8 Towing safety .................................................................. 9-21
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate ..................... 9-8 Flat towing ....................................................................... 9-25
Vehicle identification number (chassis number) .......... 9-9 Uniform tire quality grading ................................................. 9-26
Engine serial number .......................................................... 9-9 Treadwear ........................................................................ 9-26
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label .................... 9-10 Traction AA, A, B and C .............................................. 9-26
Emission control information label ............................... 9-10 Temperature A, B and C .............................................. 9-26
Tire and Loading Information label .............................. 9-10 Emission control system warranty ..................................... 9-27
Air conditioner specification label ................................ 9-11 Reporting safety defects ..................................................... 9-27
Installing front license plate ................................................. 9-12 Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test ......... 9-28
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................................. 9-29
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information ..... 9-30
CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure
instructed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate) Recommended specifications
US measure Imp measure Liter
Fuel 21-5/8 gal 18 gal 82 See “Fuel recommendation” later in this section.
Engine oil*1
Drain and refill
With oil filter change 4-7/8 qt 4 qt 4.6 . Engine oil with API Certification Mark*2, *3
Without oil filter change 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt 4.3 . Viscosity SAE 5W-30*2, *3
Cooling system
With reservoir 10 qt 8-1/4 qt 9.4
Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (Blue) or equivalent
Reservoir 7/8 qt 3/4 qt 0.8
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3*4
Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5 Viscosity SAE
Differential gear oil — — —
80W-90*5
Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5 Viscosity SAE
Transfer oil — — —
80W-90
Power steering fluid (PSF) Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the “8. Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent*6
Brake fluid Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section. Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*7 or equivalent DOT 3
Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)*8
Air conditioning system lubricants — — — NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or exact equivalent
Window washer fluid 1-1/4 gal 1 gal 4.5 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent
*1: For additional information, see “Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil.
*2: For additional information, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” later in this section.
*3: NISSAN recommends Genuine NISSAN Ester Engine Oil available at a NISSAN dealer.
*4: Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle
limited warranty.
*5: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 328F (08C).
*6: DEXRONTM VI type ATF may also be used.
*7: Available in mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer.
*8: For additional information, see “Vehicle identification” later in this section for air conditioner specification label.
9-2 Technical and consumer information

FUEL RECOMMENDATION . Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your Reformulated gasoline
Hardtop models vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed Some fuel suppliers are now producing refor-
to run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E- mulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
15 or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)
specifically designed for E-15 or E- supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-
number (Research octane number 91).
85 fuel can adversely affect the gests that you use reformulated gasoline when
CrossCabriolet models emission control devices and sys- available.
NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded tems of the vehicle. Damage caused
by such fuel is not covered by the Gasoline containing oxygenates
premium gasoline with an octane rating of at
NISSAN new vehicle limited war- Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing
least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Re-
ranty. oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and metha-
search octane number 96).
nol with or without advertising their presence.
If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, . U.S. government regulations require
NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels
you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an ethanol dispensing pumps to be
of which the oxygenate content and the fuel
octane rating of at least 87 AKI number identified by a small, square, orange
compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily
(Research octane number 91), but you may and black label with the common
determined. If in doubt, ask your service station
notice a decrease in performance. abbreviation or the appropriate per-
manager.
centage for that region.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take
CAUTION the following precautions as the usage of such
Gasoline specifications fuels may cause vehicle performance problems
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets and/or fuel system damage.
. Using a fuel other than that speci-
the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) speci-
fied could adversely affect the emis- . The fuel should be unleaded and have
fications where it is available. Many of the
sion control system, and may also an octane rating no lower than that
automobile manufacturers developed this spe-
affect warranty coverage. recommended for unleaded gasoline.
cification to improve emission control system
. Under no circumstances should a and vehicle performance. Ask your service . If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a
leaded gasoline be used, because station manager if the gasoline meets the methanol blend, is used, it should
this will damage the three-way cat- WWFC specifications. contain no more than 10% oxygenate.
alyst. (MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%.)
Technical and consumer information 9-3

. E-15 fuel contains more than 10% E-15 fuel to the fuel system and engine.
oxygenate. E-15 fuel will adversely E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel
affect the emission control devices Octane rating tips
ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can
and systems of the vehicle and should Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-
not be used. Damage caused by such rating lower than recommended can cause
15 fuel. Do not use E-15 in your vehicle. U.S.
fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new persistent, heavy “spark knock”. (Spark
government regulations require fuel ethanol
vehicle limited warranty. knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If
dispensing pumps to be identified with small,
. If a methanol blend is used, it should severe, this can lead to engine damage. If
square, orange and black label with the common
contain no more than 5% methanol you detect a persistent heavy spark knock
abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol) . It even when using gasoline of the stated
that region.
should also contain a suitable amount octane rating, or if you hear steady spark
of appropriate cosolvents and corro- E-85 fuel knock while holding a steady speed on
sion inhibitors. If not properly formu- E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel level roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct
lated with appropriate cosolvents and ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can the condition. Failure to correct the condi-
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do tion is misuse of the vehicle, for which
blends may cause fuel system damage not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. U.S. govern- NISSAN is not responsible.
and/or vehicle performance problems. ment regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing Incorrect ignition timing will result in spark
At this time, sufficient data is not pumps to be identified by a small, square, knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may
available to ensure that all methanol orange and black label with the common cause excessive fuel consumption or engine
blends are suitable for use in NISSAN abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for damage. If any of the above symptoms are
vehicles. that region. encountered, have your vehicle checked at a
If any driveability problems such as engine NISSAN dealer.
Aftermarket fuel additives
stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced However, now and then you may notice
after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately NISSAN does not recommend the use of any light spark knock for a short time while
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a
low blend of MTBE. injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve cause for concern, because you get the
deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commer- greatest fuel benefit when there is light
Take care not to spill gasoline during
cially. Many of these additives intended for gum, spark knock for a short time under heavy
refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates
varnish or deposit removal may contain active engine load.
can cause paint damage.
solvent or similar ingredients that can be harmful

Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes
with temperature. Because of this, it is important
to select the engine oil viscosity based on the
temperatures at which the vehicle will be
operated before the next oil change. Choosing
an oil viscosity other than that recommended
could cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When
replacing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its
JVT0159X equivalent for the reason described in “Change
1. API certification mark intervals”.
tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval
2. API service symbol Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis- Change intervals
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RE- cosity standard. These oils have the API The oil and oil filter change intervals for your
COMMENDATION certification mark on the front of the container. engine are based on the use of the specified
Oils which do not have the specified quality quality oils and filters. Using an engine oil and
Selecting the correct oil label should not be used as they could cause filter other than the specified quality, or exceed-
It is essential to choose the correct grade, engine damage. ing recommended oil and filter change intervals
quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensure could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine
satisfactory engine life and performance, see Oil additives
caused by improper maintenance or use of
“Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is
earlier in this section. NISSAN recommends the additives. The use of an oil additive is not
not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited
use of an energy conserving oil in order to necessary when the proper oil type is used and
warranty.
improve fuel economy. maintenance intervals are followed.
Your engine was filled with a high quality engine
Select only engine oils that meet the American Oil which may contain foreign matter or has
oil when it was built. You do not have to change
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna- been previously used should not be used.
the oil before the first recommended change
interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend system components.
upon how you use your vehicle.
Operation under the following conditions may The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
require more frequent oil and filter changes. NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earth’s ozone
. repeated short distance driving at cold layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect
outside temperatures the earth’s atmosphere, certain governmental
. driving in dusty conditions regulations require the recovery and recycling of
. extensive idling any refrigerant during automotive air condition-
ing system service. A NISSAN dealer has the
. towing a trailer
trained technicians and equipment needed to
. stop and go commuting recover and recycle your air conditioning system
Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance refrigerant.
Guide” for the maintenance schedule.
Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM RE- air conditioning system.
FRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RE-
COMMENDATIONS
The air conditioning system in your
NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the
refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil,
NISSAN A/C system oil Type S or the exact
equivalents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil
will cause severe damage to the air
conditioning system and will require
the replacement of all air conditioner

SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE WHEELS AND TIRES

Model VQ35DE Road wheel
Type Gasoline, 4-cycle Type Size Offset in (mm)
Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 608 18 6 7-1/2J 1.97 (50)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.760 6 3.205 (95.5 6 81.4) Conventional
20 6 7-1/2J 1.97 (50)
Displacement cu in (cm3) 213.45 (3,498) Spare 186 4T 0.98 (25)
Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6
Idle speed rpm Tire
No adjustment is necessary.
Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) degree/rpm Pressure PSI
Type Size
Spark plug Standard FXE22HR-11 (kPa) [Cold]
Spark plug gap (Normal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) P235/65R18
Camshaft operation Timing chain 104T
Conventional 33 (230)
P235/55R20
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002. 102T
T165/90D18
107M 60 (420)
Spare (T-type)
-*1
*1: CrossCabriolet models (Emergency tire repair

kit)

WHEN TRAVELING OR
REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
ANOTHER COUNTRY
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS When planning to travel in another coun-
try, you should first find out if the fuel available is
189.9 (4,822)*1 suitable for your vehicle’s engine.
Overall length in (mm)
190.1 (4,828)*2
74.1 (1,883)*1 Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low
Overall width in (mm) may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles
74.5 (1,893)*2
Overall height in (mm) 67.0 (1,703)*1 must be operated with unleaded gasoline.
68.0 (1,728)*1, *3
Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas
where appropriate fuel is not available.
66.2 (1,681)*2
When transferring the registration of your
Front tread in (mm) 63.4 (1,610) vehicle to another country, state, province
Rear tread in (mm) 63.4 (1,610) or district, it may be necessary to modify the
Wheelbase in (mm) 111.2 (2,825) vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
Gross vehicle weight The laws and regulations for motor vehicle
lb (kg)
rating See the F.M.V.S.S. STI0334
emission control and safety standards vary
Gross axle weight /C.M.V.S S. certi-
rating according to the country, state, province or VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
fication label on
the driver’s side district; therefore, vehicle specifications may (VIN) PLATE
Front lb (kg)
lock pillar. differ.
lb (kg)
The vehicle identification number plate is at-
Rear When any vehicle is to be taken into tached as shown. This number is the identifica-
another country, state, province or district tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle
*1:Hardtop models
and registered, its modifications, transpor- registration.
*2:CrossCabriolet models tation, and registration are the responsi-
*3:With roof rack rail bility of the user. NISSAN is not
responsible for any inconvenience that
may result.

STI0374 STI0562 STI0448
Hardtop models
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
(chassis number) The number is stamped on the engine as shown.
The vehicle identification number is located as
shown.
Remove the cover to access the number.
STI0819

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION
LABEL
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification
label is affixed as shown. This label contains
valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross
Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of
manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), etc. Review it carefully.
STI0563 STI0373
EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL LABEL
The emission control information label is at- The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and
tached to the underside of the hood as shown. Loading Information label affixed to the pillar as
illustrated.

STI0339
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL
The air conditioner specification label is at-
tached as shown.

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
Use the following steps to mount the license

plate:
Before mounting the license plate, confirm that
the following parts are enclosed in the plastic
bag.
. License plate bracket
. Screw 6 2
1. Park the vehicle on flat, level ground.
2. Line up the tabs * B on the license plate
bracket under the top of the front bumper
*A . Hold the license plate bracket in place.
3. Install the license plate bracket with screws.

4. Install the license plate with screws (sold
separately).
Use a screw of 1/4 inch (6mm) in diameter and
approximately 3/4 inch (20mm) in length.
STI0821

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue
WARNING weight plus the combined weight of weight must be included as part of the
passengers and cargo. cargo load. This information is located
. It is extremely dangerous to ride . GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) on the Tire and Loading Information
in a cargo area inside the vehi- - maximum total combined weight of the label.
cle. In a collision, people riding unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, . Cargo capacity - permissible weight of
in these areas are more likely to hitch, trailer tongue load and any other cargo, the subtracted weight of occu-
be seriously injured or killed. optional equipment. This information is pants from the load limit.
. Do not allow people to ride in located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
any area of your vehicle that is label. Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle
not equipped with seats and . GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - shown as “The combined weight of occu-
seat belts. maximum weight (load) limit specified pants and cargo” on the Tire and Loading
. Be sure everyone in your vehicle for the front or rear axle. This informa- Information label. Do not exceed the
is in a seat and using a seat belt tion is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V. number of occupants shown as “Seating
properly. S.S. label. Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Informa-
. GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rat- tion label.
TERMS ing) - The maximum total weight rating To get “the combined weight of occupants
It is important to familiarize yourself with the of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and and cargo”, add the weight of all occu-
following terms before loading your vehicle: trailer. pants, then add the total luggage weight.
. Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, Examples are shown in the following
. Curb Weight (actual weight of your
Total load capacity - maximum total illustration.
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:
weight limit specified of the load
standard and optional equipment,
(passengers and cargo) for the vehicle.
fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire
This is the maximum combined weight
assembly. This weight does not in-
of occupants and cargo that can be
clude passengers and cargo.
loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is

Steps for determining correct load limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the XXX
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs) or
(640 − 340 (5 x 70) = 300 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
STI0445 luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, lb. (98 N) to a single hook *
A or 7 lb. (31 N)
load from your trailer will be transferred to a single hook * B when securing cargo.
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to

determine how this reduces the avail- WARNING
able cargo and luggage load capacity
of your vehicle. . Properly secure all cargo with ropes
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
sliding or shifting. Do not place
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle cargo higher than the seatbacks. In
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle a sudden stop or collision, unse-
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. cured cargo could cause personal
(See “Measurement of weights” later in this injury.
section.) . The child restraint top tether strap
Also check tires for proper inflation pres- may be damaged by contact with
sures. See the Tire and Loading Information items in the cargo area. Secure any
label. items in the cargo area. Your child
could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision if the top tether strap is
damaged.
. Do not load your vehicle any heavier
SIC3596 than the GVWR or the maximum
front and rear GAWRs. If you do,
SECURING THE LOAD (Hardtop mod- parts of your vehicle can break, tire
els) damage could occur, or it can
There are tie down hooks located in the cargo change the way your vehicle han-
area as shown. The tie down hooks can be used dles. This could result in loss of
to secure cargo with ropes or other types of control and cause personal injury.
straps.
Do not apply a total load of more than 22
TOWING A TRAILER (Hardtop
models)
LOADING TIPS . Overloading not only can short-

. The GVW must not exceed GVWR or en the life of your vehicle and WARNING
GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./ the tire, but can cause unsafe
C.M.V.S.S. certification label. Overloading or improper loading of a
vehicle handling and longer trailer and its cargo can adversely affect
. Do not load the front and rear axle to braking distances. This may vehicle handling, braking and perfor-
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the cause a premature tire failure, mance and may lead to accidents.
GVWR. which could result in a serious
accident and personal injury.
WARNING Failures caused by overloading
CAUTION
are not covered by the vehicle’s
. Properly secure all cargo with warranty. . Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy
ropes or straps to help prevent it load for the first 500 miles (800 km).
from sliding or shifting. Do not MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS Your engine, axle or other parts
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts could be damaged.
place cargo higher than the
seatbacks. In a sudden stop or that could affect the balance of your . For the first 500 miles (800 km) that
collision, unsecured cargo could vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive you tow a trailer, do not drive over
to a scale and weigh the front and the rear 50 MPH (80 km/h) and do not make
cause personal injury.
starts at full throttle. This helps the
. Do not load your vehicle any wheels separately to determine axle loads.
engine and other parts of your
heavier than the GVWR or the Individual axle loads should not exceed vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
maximum front and rear either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings
GAWRs. If you do, parts of your (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should Your new vehicle was designed to be used
vehicle can break, tire damage not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Re-
could occur, or it can change the Rating (GVWR). These ratings are given member that towing a trailer places additional
on the vehicle certification label. If weight loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain, steer-
way your vehicle handles. This ing, braking and other systems.
could result in loss of control ratings are exceeded, move or remove
and cause personal injury. items to bring all weights below the ratings. A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available
on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This
guide includes information on trailer towing outside temperatures on graded roads can
capability and the special equipment required affect engine performance and cause overheat-
for proper towing. ing. The transmission high fluid temperature
CrossCabriolet models: protection mode, which helps reduce the
chance of transmission damage, could activate
Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.
and automatically decrease engine power.
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS Vehicle speed may decrease under high load.
Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and
Maximum trailer loads
vehicle load, weather and road conditions.
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the
value specified in the “Towing Load/Specifica-
tion” chart. The total trailer load equals trailer WARNING
weight plus its cargo weight.
. When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lbs STI0541 Overheating can result in reduced en-
(454 kg) or more, trailers with a brake gine power and vehicle speed. The
system MUST be used. The GCWR equals the combined weight of the reduced speed may be lower than other
towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo) traffic, which could increase the chance
The maximum GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater of a collision. Be especially careful
Rating) should not exceed the value specified in
than these or using improper towing equipment when driving. If the vehicle cannot
the following “Towing Load/Specification” chart.
could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking maintain a safe driving speed, pull to
and performance. the side of the road in a safe area.
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not Allow the engine to cool and return to
only related to the maximum trailer loads, but normal operation. See “If your vehicle
also the places you plan to tow. Tow weights overheats” in the “6. In case of emer-
appropriate for level highway driving may have to gency” section of this manual.
be reduced on very steep grades or for low
traction situations (for example, on slippery boat
ramps).
Temperature conditions can also affect towing.
For example, towing a heavy trailer in high
CAUTION
Vehicle damage resulting from impro-
per towing procedures are not covered
by NISSAN warranties.
STI0542 TI1012M
Tongue load MAXIMUM GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT

When using a weight carrying or a weight
(GVW)/MAXIMUM GROSS AXLE
distributing hitch, keep the tongue load between WEIGHT (GAW)
10 to 15% of the total trailer load within the The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed
maximum tongue load limits shown in the the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
following “Towing Load/Specification” chart. If shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange label. The GVW equals the combined weight of
cargo to allow for proper tongue load. the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,
hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must
not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
Towing capacities are calculated assuming a
base vehicle with driver and any options
required to achieve the rating. Additional pas- 2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the . Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Tow-
sengers, cargo and/or optional equipment, such GCWR. The remaining amount is the avail- ing Load/Specification” chart - 3,500 lb.
as the trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle able maximum towing capacity. (1,588 kg).
and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh 5,263 lb. (2,387 kg) GVWR
capacity and trailer tongue load. your trailer on a scale with all equipment and − 4,926 lb. (2,234 kg) GVW
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is Available for tongue
confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front towed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not = 337 lb. (152 kg) weight
GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating
Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity. shown on the trailer and is not more than the 8,300 lb. (3,765 kg) GCWR
All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured calculated available maximum towing capacity. − 4,926 lb. (2,234 kg) GVW
using platform type scales commonly found at Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale Capacity available for
= 3,374 lb. (1,530 kg) towing
truck stops, highway weigh stations, building to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and
supply centers or salvage yards. Rear Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front
337 lb. (152 kg) / Available tongue weight
To determine the available payload capacity for Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight
3,374 lb. (1,530 kg) Available capacity
tongue load, use the following procedure. on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
= 10 % tongue weight
The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to
1. Locate the GVWR on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.
be moved or removed to meet the specified The available towing capacity may be less than
S.S. certification label.
ratings. the maximum towing capacity due to the
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of passenger and cargo load in the vehicle.
Example:
the passengers and cargo that are normally
in the vehicle when towing a trailer. . Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-
on a scale - including passengers, cargo tween 10 to 15% of the trailer weight. If the
3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange the
and hitch - 4,926 lb. (2,234 kg).
GVWR. The remaining amount is the avail- cargo to obtain the proper tongue load. Do not
. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from
able maximum tongue load. exceed the 10 to 15% tongue weight specifica-
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -
To determine the available towing capacity, use 5,263 lb. (2,387 kg). tion even if the calculated available tongue
the following procedure. weight is greater than 15%. If the calculated
. Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the from “Towing Load/Specification” chart - tongue weight is less than 10%, reduce the total
“Towing Load/Specification” chart found 8,300 lb. (3,765 kg). trailer weight to match the available tongue
later in this section. weight.

Always verify that available capacities are within
the required ratings.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION TOWING SAFETY
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART Trailer hitch
Unit: lb (kg)
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and
MODEL VQ35DE trailer. A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is
WEIGHT CVT available from a NISSAN dealer. Make sure the
MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT*1 3,500 (1,588) trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle to
MAXIMUM TONGUE LOAD 350 (159) help avoid personal injury or property damage
GROSS COMBINED WEIGHT RATING 8,300 (3,765) due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road
RECOMMENDED EQUIPMENT*2 Sway Control Device (SCD) surfaces or passing trucks.
1: All towing above 1,000 lb (454 kg) requires the use of trailer brakes. NISSAN recommends the use of a
tandem axle trailer whenever towing above 3,000 lb (1,361 kg). WARNING
2: A sway control device is recommended for all towing above 2,000 lb (907 kg). Sway control devices are not
offered by NISSAN. See a professional trailer/hitch outlet for a properly designed sway control device for Trailer hitch components have specific
your trailer. weight ratings. Your vehicle may be
capable of towing a trailer heavier than
the weight rating of the hitch compo-
nents. Never exceed the weight rating
of the hitch components. Doing so can
cause serious personal injury or prop-
erty damage.
Hitch ball
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and
weight rating for your trailer:
. The required hitch ball size is stamped on
most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also
have the size printed on top of the ball.

. Choose the proper class hitch ball based on Class I hitch cal, remove the hitch and/or recei-
the trailer weight. Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball ver when not in use. After the hitch
. The diameter of the threaded shank of the mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers is removed, seal the bolt holes to
hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (907 kg). prevent exhaust fumes, water or
hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should dust from entering the passenger
be no more than 1/16´´ smaller than the hole Class II hitch compartment.
in the ball mount. Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
. Regularly check that all trailer hitch
. The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers
mounting bolts are securely
long enough to be properly secured to the of a maximum weight of 3,500 lb (1,588 kg).
mounted.
ball mount. There should be at least 2
threads showing beyond the lock washer
and nut. CAUTION Tire pressures
. When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle
Sway control device . Special hitches which include frame
reinforcements are required for tow-
tires to the recommended cold tire
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts and buffeting
ing above 2,000 lb (907 kg). Suitable pressure indicated on the Tire and
caused by other vehicles can affect trailer
handling. Sway control devices may be used to genuine NISSAN hitches for pickup Loading Information label.
help control these affects. If you choose to use trucks and sport utility vehicles are . Trailer tire condition, size, load rating
one, contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to available at a NISSAN dealer. and proper inflation pressure should be
make sure the sway control device will work with . The hitch should not be attached to in accordance with the trailer and tire
the vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake or affect the operation of the im- manufacturers’ specifications.
system. Follow the instructions provided by the pact-absorbing bumper.
manufacturer for installing and using the sway . Do not use axle-mounted hitches.
Safety chains
control device. Always use a suitable chain between your
. Do not modify the vehicle exhaust
vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should
system, brake system, etc. to install
be crossed and should be attached to the hitch,
a trailer hitch.
not to the vehicle bumper or axle. The safety
. To reduce the possibility of addi- chains can be attached to the bumper if the
tional damage if your vehicle is hitch ball is mounted to the bumper. Be sure to
struck from the rear, where practi- leave enough slack in the chains to permit
turning corners. Trailer brakes . Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure,
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system, vehicle tire pressure, trailer light operation,
Trailer lights and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you
make sure it conforms to federal and/or local
regulations and that it is properly installed. attach a trailer to the vehicle.
CAUTION . Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to
all federal, state or local regulations. If not,
When splicing into the vehicle electrical WARNING install any mirrors required for towing before
system, a commercially available driving the vehicle.
power-type module/converter must be Never connect a trailer brake system . Determine the overall height of the vehicle
used to provide power for all trailer directly to the vehicle brake system. and trailer so the required clearance is
lighting. This unit uses the vehicle known.
battery as a direct power source for all Pre-towing tips
trailer lights while using the vehicle tail Trailer towing tips
. Be certain your vehicle maintains a level In order to gain skill and an understanding of the
light, stoplight and turn signal circuits
position when a loaded or unloaded trailer is vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,
as a signal source. The module/con-
hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an stopping and backing up in an area which is free
verter must draw no more than 15
abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition; from traffic. Steering stability, and braking
milliamps from the stop and tail lamp
check for improper tongue load, overload, performance will be somewhat different than
circuits. Using a module/converter that
worn suspension or other possible causes under normal driving conditions.
exceeds these power requirements may
of either condition.
damage the vehicle’s electrical system. . Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
See a reputable trailer dealer to obtain . Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
the proper equipment and to have it load shift while driving.
. Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or
installed. . Keep the cargo load as low as possible in
lock to prevent the coupler from inadver-
the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity
tently becoming unlatched.
low.
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or . Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.
local regulations. For assistance in hooking up . Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the
trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in . Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or
the back half. Also make sure the load is . Do not use the Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
reputable trailer dealer.
balanced side to side. system (if so equipped).

. Do not use the Lane Departure Warning absorb the vehicle load. . Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal
(LDW) system (if so equipped). 4. Apply the parking brake. circumstances.
. Always drive your vehicle at a moderate . Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles
5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).
speed. Some states or provinces have (800 km).
6. Turn off the engine.
specific speed limits for vehicles that are . Have your vehicle serviced more often than
towing trailers. Obey the local speed limits. To drive away: at intervals specified in the recommended
. When backing up, hold the bottom of the 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal. maintenance schedule in the NISSAN Ser-
steering wheel with one hand. Move your 2. Start the engine. vice and Maintenance Guide.
hand in the direction in which you want the . When making a turn, your trailer wheels will
trailer to go. Make small corrections and 3. Shift the transmission into gear.
be closer to the inside of the turn than your
back up slowly. If possible, have someone 4. Release the parking brake. vehicle wheels. To compensate for this,
guide you when you are backing up. 5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are make a larger than normal turning radius
Always block the wheels on both vehicle and clear from the blocks. during the turn.
trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not 6. Apply and hold the brake pedal. . Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely
recommended; however, if you must do so: affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-
7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.
ing vehicle sway. When being passed by
. When going down a hill, shift into a lower larger vehicles, be prepared for possible
CAUTION gear and use the engine braking effect. changes in crosswinds that could affect
When going up a long grade, downshift the vehicle handling. If swaying does occur,
If you move the shift lever to the P transmission to a lower gear and reduce firmly grip the steering wheel, steer straight
(Park) position before blocking the speed to reduce chances of engine over- ahead, and immediately (but gradually)
wheels and applying the parking brake, loading and/or overheating. reduce vehicle speed. This combination will
transmission damage could occur. . If the engine coolant rises to an extremely help stabilize the vehicle. Never increase
high temperature when the air conditioning speed.
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal. system is on, turn off the air conditioner. Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:
2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill Coolant heat can be additionally vented by
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to
side of the vehicle and trailer wheels. opening the windows, switching the fan
allow the vehicle to coast and steer as
3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly control to high and setting the temperature
straight ahead as the road conditions allow.
release the brake pedal until the blocks control to the HOT position.
This combination will help stabilize the

vehicle. . Some states or provinces have specific FLAT TOWING
. Do not correct trailer sway by steering or regulations and speed limits for vehicles Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
applying the brakes. that are towing trailers. Obey the local ground is sometimes called flat towing. This
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply speed limits. method is sometimes used when towing a
the brakes and pull to the side of the road in . Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a
a safe area. connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after motor home.
50 miles (80 km) of travel and at every
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is
break.
balanced as described earlier in this section. CAUTION
. When stopped in traffic for long periods of
. Be careful when passing other vehicles. time in hot weather, put the vehicle in the P
Passing while towing a trailer requires (Park) position. . Failure to follow these guidelines
considerably more distance than normal can result in severe transmission
. When launching a boat, don’t allow the
passing. Remember the length of the trailer damage.
water level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or
must also pass the other vehicle before you . Whenever flat towing your vehicle,
rear bumper.
can safely change lanes. always tow forward, never back-
. Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights
. Down shift the transmission to a lower gear ward.
before backing the trailer into the water or
for engine braking when driving down steep
the trailer lights may burn out. . DO NOT tow any continuously vari-
or long hills. This will help slow the vehicle
When towing a trailer, the transmission able transmission vehicle with all
without applying the brakes.
fluid should be changed more frequently. four wheels on the ground (flat
. Avoid holding the brake pedal down too towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE
For additional information, see the “8.
long or too frequently. This could cause the internal transmission parts due to
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced lack of transmission lubrication.
earlier in this manual.
braking efficiency.
. DO NOT tow an All-Wheel Drive
. Increase your following distance to allow for
(AWD) vehicle with any of the
greater stopping distances while towing a
wheels on the ground. Doing so
trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
may cause serious and expensive
. Do not use cruise control while towing a damage to the powertrain.
trailer.
. For emergency towing procedures
refer to “Towing recommended by
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality

NISSAN” in the “6. In case of
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to WARNING
emergency” section of this manual.
federal safety requirements in addition to these
grades. The traction grade assigned to this tire
Continuously Variable Transmission Quality grades can be found where applicable is based on straight-ahead braking
(CVT) on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and traction tests, and does not include
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models: maximum section width. For example: acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
Do not tow an AWD vehicle with any of the Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A or peak traction characteristics.
wheels on the ground. TREADWEAR
Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models:
TEMPERATURE A, B AND C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
To tow a vehicle equipped with a Continuously based on the wear rate of the tire when tested The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and
under controlled conditions on a specified C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
Variable Transmission (CVT), an appropriate
government test course. For example, a tire generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed
vehicle’s driving wheels. Always follow the dolly graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 heat when tested under controlled conditions on
manufacturer’s recommendations when using 1/2) times as well on the government course as a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tained high temperature can cause the material
their product.
tires depends upon actual conditions of their of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
use, however, and may depart significantly from excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
the norm due to variations in driving habits, failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
service practices and differences in road char- performance which all passenger car tires must
acteristics and climate. meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
TRACTION AA, A, B AND C higher levels of performance on the laboratory
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are test wheel than the minimum required by law.
AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on spe-
cified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
WARRANTY
Your NISSAN is covered by the following For USA
WARNING emission warranties.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
For USA: which could cause a crash or could cause
The temperature grade for this tire is . Emission Defects Warranty injury or death, you should immediately
established for a tire that is properly
. Emissions Performance Warranty inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, under-inflation, or excessive Details of these warranties may be found with Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
loading, either separately or in combi- other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In- notifying NISSAN.
nation, can cause heat build-up and formation Booklet which comes with your
NISSAN. If you did not receive a Warranty If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
possible tire failure. may open an investigation, and if it finds
Information Booklet, or it has become lost, you
may obtain a replacement by writing to: that a safety defect exists in a group of
. Nissan North America, Inc. vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
Consumer Affairs Department campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-
P.O. Box 685003 come involved in individual problems be-
Franklin, TN 37068-5003 tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
For Canada: To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Emission Control System Warranty Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-
Details of these warranties may be found with
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In- http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Ad-
formation Booklet which comes with your ministrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,
NISSAN. If you did not receive a Warranty SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
Information Booklet, or it has become lost, you also obtain other information about motor
may obtain a replacement by writing to: vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.
. Nissan Canada Inc. gov.
5290 Orbitor Drive You may notify NISSAN by contacting our
Mississauga, Ontario, Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at
L4W 4Z5 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261).
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
For Canada (French speakers).

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns WARNING
which could cause a crash or could cause please contact our Consumer Information
A vehicle equipped with All-Wheel Drive
injury or death, you should immediately Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.
(AWD) should never be tested using a
inform Transport Canada in addition to two wheel dynamometer (such as the
notifying NISSAN. dynamometers used by some states for
If Transport Canada receives complaints, it emissions testing), or similar equip-
may open an investigation, and if it finds ment. Make sure you inform test facility
that a safety defect exists in a group of personnel that your vehicle is equipped
with AWD before it is placed on a
vehicles, it may request that NISSAN
dynamometer. Using the wrong test
conduct a recall campaign. However, equipment may result in transmission
Transport Canada cannot become involved damage or unexpected vehicle move-
in individual problems between you, your ment which could result in serious
dealer, or NISSAN. vehicle damage or personal injury.
You may contact Transport Canada’s De-
fect Investigations and Recalls Division toll Due to legal requirements in some states/areas
free at 1-800-333-0510. You may also or provinces, your vehicle may be required to be
in what is called the “ready condition” for an
report safety defects online at:
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emis-
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/ sion control system.
PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when
Additional information concerning motor it is driven through certain driving patterns.
vehicle safety may be obtained from Trans- Usually, the “ready condition” can be obtained
port Canada’s Road Safety Information by ordinary usage of the vehicle.
Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at If a powertrain system component is repaired or
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speak- the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be
ers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere reset to a “not ready condition”. Before taking

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
the I/M test, check the vehicle’s inspection/ This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data of personally identifying data routinely acquired
maintenance test readiness condition. Place the Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is during a crash investigation.
ignition switch in the ON position without to record, in certain crash or near crash-like To read data recorded by an EDR, special
starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator situations, such as an air bag deployment or equipment is required and access to the vehicle
Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test understanding how a vehicle’s systems per- manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties,
condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not formed. The EDR is designed to record data such as law enforcement, that have the special
blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems equipment, can read the information if they have
“ready”. for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will
Contact a NISSAN dealer to set “ready condi- or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle
tion” or to prepare the vehicle for testing. record such data as: owner or lessee or as otherwise required or
. How various systems in your vehicle were permitted by law.
operating;
. Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
. How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was traveling.
. Sounds are not recorded.
These data can help provide a better under-
standing of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data
are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g. name,
gender, age and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this
model year and prior can be purchased. A
genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
source of service and repair information for your
vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the
factory trained technicians working at NISSAN
dealerships. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Man-
uals can also be purchased.
For USA:
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:
1-800-450-9491
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:
1-800-247-5321
For Canada:
To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN
Service Manual or Owner’s Manual for this
model year and prior, contact a NISSAN dealer.
For the phone number and location of a NISSAN
dealer in your area call the NISSAN Information
Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual
NISSAN representative will assist you.

10 Index
A Audible reminders....................................................... 2-20 Brake system......................................................... 5-37
Audio operation precautions.................................... 4-46 Parking brake operation ..................................... 5-19
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ............................ 5-38 Audio system................................................................ 4-46 Warning light......................................................... 2-13
Advanced air bag system ......................................... 1-52 Steering wheel audio controls.......................... 4-86 Break-in schedule....................................................... 5-31
Air bag system Auto closure................................................................. 3-24 Brightness control
Advanced air bag system .................................. 1-52 Autochanger, Compact Disc (CD)......................... 4-62 Display ON/OFF button........................................ 4-9
Door-mounted curtain side-impact and Autolight system.......................................................... 2-38 Instrument panel................................................... 2-40
rollover supplemental air bag system ............. 1-58 Automatic Bulb check/instrument panel ................................... 2-12
Front passenger air bag and status light....... 1-54 Door locks................................................................. 3-7 Bulb replacement........................................................ 8-25
Front-seat mounted side-impact Drive positioner..................................................... 3-51
supplemental air bag system ............................ 1-58 Seat positioner...................................................... 3-51
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and C
AUX (Auxiliary) button................................................ 4-63
rollover supplemental air bag system ............. 1-58 Avoiding collision and rollover................................... 5-7 Cabin air filter............................................................... 4-45
Air bag warning labels............................................... 1-61
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants....... 9-2
Air bag warning light...................................... 1-61, 2-16
Air cleaner housing filter ........................................... 8-17 B Car phone or CB radio ............................................. 4-88
Cargo cover.................................................................. 2-52
Air conditioner
Back door (See lift gate) .......................................... 3-20 Cargo floor box............................................................ 2-50
Air conditioner operation.................................... 4-41
Battery............................................................................ 8-13 Cargo lights.................................................................. 2-63
Air conditioner service........................................ 4-45
Battery saver system........................................... 2-39 Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst................... 5-4
Air conditioner specification label.................... 9-11
Intelligent Key........................................................ 8-22 CD/CF/USB memory care and cleaning.............. 4-84
Air conditioning system refrigerant and
Variable voltage control system........................ 8-15 Center multi-function control panel.......................... 4-3
lubricant recommendations....................... 4-45, 9-6
Before starting the engine........................................ 5-14 Child restraints............................................................. 1-29
In-cabin microfilter ............................................... 4-45
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) light (green)............. 2-17 Booster seats........................................................ 1-42
Alarm, How to stop alarm (see vehicle
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) light (orange)........... 2-13 LATCH system...................................................... 1-31
security system)........................................................... 2-31
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system....................... 5-20 Precautions on child restraints......................... 1-29
Alcohol, drugs and driving.......................................... 5-8
Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Lane Departure Child safety................................................................... 1-27
All-wheel drive (AWD)............................................... 5-33
Warning (LDW) systems........................................... 5-20 Child safety rear door lock......................................... 3-8
All-wheel drive (AWD) warning light...................... 2-12
Bluetooth® hands-free phone system Chimes, Audible reminders ...................................... 2-20
Antenna.......................................................................... 4-87
(models with navigation system)............................. 4-88 Cigarette lighter and ashtray.................................... 2-46
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ............................ 5-38
Bluetooth® hands-free phone system Circuit breaker, Fusible link...................................... 8-21
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning light..... 2-12
(models without navigation system)....................... 4-99 Clean Rear Camera warning.................................... 2-22
Appearance care
Bluetooth® streaming audio..................................... 4-76 Cleaning exterior and interior............................ 7-2, 7-5
Exterior appearance care...................................... 7-2 Booster seats............................................................... 1-42 Clock.............................................................................. 2-44
Interior appearance care....................................... 7-5 Brake Coat hooks................................................................... 2-55
Armrest .......................................................................... 1-15 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ..................... 5-38 Cold weather driving.................................................. 5-41
Ashtray (See cigarette lighter and ashtray) ......... 2-46
Brake fluid.............................................................. 8-12
Compact Disc (CD) changer (See Cold weather driving........................................... 5-41 If your vehicle overheats..................................... 6-17
audio system)............................................................... 4-62 Driving with CVT (Continuously Starting the engine.............................................. 5-15
Compact Disc (CD) player (See Variable Transmission) ........................................ 5-16 Entry/exit function, Automatic drive positioner .... 3-51
audio system)............................................................... 4-67 On-pavement and off-road driving..................... 5-7 Event Data Recorders (EDR)................................... 9-29
Compass......................................................................... 2-8 Precautions when starting and driving.............. 5-3 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)................................ 5-3
Console box ................................................................. 2-49 Safety precautions.................................................. 5-9 Extended storage fuse warning............................... 2-23
Continuously Variable Transmission Dual pop-up roll bar system..................................... 1-62
(CVT) fluid..................................................................... 8-11 DVD player operation................................................. 4-69 F
Coolant
Capacities and E F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ............... 9-10
recommended fuel/lubricants............................... 9-2 Filter
Changing engine coolant...................................... 8-8 Economy, Fuel.............................................................. 5-33 Air cleaner housing filter .................................... 8-17
Checking engine coolant level............................. 8-8 Elapsed time................................................................. 2-26 Changing engine oil and filter.............................. 8-9
Corrosion protection .................................................... 7-7 Emergency tire puncture repair kit ............. 6-11, 8-43 Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch)....... 6-2
Cover, Cargo cover.................................................... 2-52 Emission control information label.......................... 9-10 Flat tire............................................................................. 6-3
Cruise control............................................................... 5-30 Emission control system warranty........................... 9-27 Flat towing.................................................................... 9-25
Cup holders.................................................................. 2-47 Engine Floor mat cleaning........................................................ 7-5
CVT, Driving with CVT (Continuously Before starting the engine................................. 5-14 Fluid
Variable Transmission) ............................................... 5-16 Break-in schedule................................................ 5-31 Brake fluid.............................................................. 8-12
Capacities and Capacities and
D recommended fuel/lubricants............................... 9-2 recommended fuel/lubricants............................... 9-2
Changing engine coolant...................................... 8-8 Continuously Variable Transmission
Daytime running light system................................... 2-40 Changing engine oil and filter.............................. 8-9 (CVT) fluid.............................................................. 8-11
Defroster switch, Rear window and outside mirror Checking engine coolant level............................. 8-8 Engine coolant......................................................... 8-7
defroster switch........................................................... 2-36 Checking engine oil level...................................... 8-8 Engine oil................................................................... 8-8
Dimensions and weights............................................. 9-8 Coolant temperature gauge ................................. 2-7 Power steering fluid............................................. 8-11
Display controls (See center multi-function Emergency engine shut off................................ 5-13 Window washer fluid.......................................... 8-13
control panel)................................................................. 4-3 Engine block heater............................................. 5-42 FM-AM radio with Compact Disc
Door/lift gate open warning...................................... 2-23 Engine compartment check locations................ 8-6 (CD) changer............................................................... 4-60
Door/trunk open warning.......................................... 2-23 Engine cooling system........................................... 8-7 FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc
Dot matrix liquid crystal display............................... 2-20 Engine oil................................................................... 8-8 (CD) player................................................................... 4-65
Drive belt....................................................................... 8-15 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation........... 9-5 Fog light switch........................................................... 2-41
Drive positioner............................................................ 3-51 Engine oil replacement indicator...................... 2-24 Front manual seat adjustment.................................... 1-3
Driver assistance settings......................................... 4-16 Engine oil viscosity.................................................. 9-5 Front passenger air bag and status light.............. 1-54
Driver’s seatback release............................................ 1-8 Engine serial number.............................................. 9-9 Front power seat adjustment..................................... 1-4
Driving Engine specifications............................................. 9-7 Front seat, Front seat adjustment............................. 1-3
All-wheel drive (AWD)........................................ 5-33 Engine start operation indicator....................... 2-21 Front-seat active head restraint............................... 1-14
10-2
Fuel Head restraints............................................................ 1-11 Interior light control switch....................................... 2-61
Capacities and Headlights Interior light replacement........................................... 8-29
recommended fuel/lubricants............................... 9-2 Bulb replacement................................................. 8-27 Interior lights................................................................. 2-60
Fuel economy........................................................ 5-33 Headlight switch................................................... 2-37 iPod® player operation............................................... 4-81
Fuel economy information (display)................. 4-11 Xenon headlights.................................................. 2-37 ISOFIX child restraint................................................. 1-31
Fuel octane rating................................................... 9-3 Heated seats................................................................ 2-42
Fuel recommendation............................................. 9-3 Heated steering wheel............................................... 2-41 J
Fuel-filler cap......................................................... 3-44 Heater
Fuel-filler door....................................................... 3-44 Engine block heater............................................. 5-42 Jump starting................................................................ 6-15
Gauge........................................................................ 2-8 Heater and air conditioner operation.............. 4-41
LOOSE FUEL CAP warning............................. 3-45 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver........................... 2-63 K
Fuel efficient driving tips........................................... 5-32 Hood release................................................................ 3-20
Fuses.............................................................................. 8-20 Hook Keyless entry (See remote keyless
Fusible links.................................................................. 8-21 Coat hooks............................................................ 2-55 entry system)................................................................ 3-16
Luggage hook....................................................... 2-53 Keys.................................................................................. 3-3
G Horn................................................................................ 2-41 For Intelligent Key system............................ 3-3, 3-8
Garage door opener, HomeLink® I L

Universal Transceiver.................................................. 2-63
Gas cap......................................................................... 3-44 Ignition switch (Push-button)................................... 5-11 Labels
Gauge.............................................................................. 2-5 Immobilizer system...................................................... 2-31 Air bag warning labels........................................ 1-61
Engine coolant temperature gauge.................... 2-7 In-cabin microfilter ...................................................... 4-45 Air conditioner specification label.................... 9-11
Fuel gauge................................................................ 2-8 Indicator Emission control information label................... 9-10
Odometer.................................................................. 2-6 Dot matrix display................................................. 2-20 Engine serial number.............................................. 9-9
Speedometer............................................................ 2-6 Lights....................................................................... 2-17 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ........ 9-10
Tachometer............................................................... 2-7 INFO button.................................................................... 4-9 Tire and Loading information label....... 8-34, 9-10
Trip computer........................................................ 2-25 Inside mirror.................................................................. 3-48 Vehicle identification number (VIN).................... 9-8
General maintenance................................................... 8-2 Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test.......................... 9-28 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) light (green) .... 2-18
Glove box...................................................................... 2-49 Instrument brightness control .................................. 2-40 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) light (orange).... 2-14
Instrument panel............................................................ 2-4 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system.............. 5-20
H Intelligent Key system ......................................... 3-3, 3-8 LATCH system............................................................. 1-31
Battery replacement ............................................ 8-22 License plate, Installing front license plate .......... 9-12
Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth® Key operating range............................................ 3-10 Lift gate.......................................................................... 3-20
(models with navigation system)............................. 4-88 Key operation........................................................ 3-11 Light
Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth® Warning light......................................................... 2-14 Air bag warning light........................................... 1-61
(models without navigation system)....................... 4-99 Warning signals.................................................... 3-14 Bulb replacement................................................. 8-25
Hazard warning flasher switch................................... 6-2 Intelligent Key warning light...................................... 2-14 Cargo lights........................................................... 2-63
10-3
Fog light switch.................................................... 2-41 M No key warning............................................................ 2-22
Headlight switch................................................... 2-37
Headlights bulb replacement............................ 8-27 Maintenance O
Indicator lights....................................................... 2-17 Battery..................................................................... 8-13
Interior light control switch................................ 2-61 General maintenance............................................. 8-2 Odometer........................................................................ 2-6
Interior lights.......................................................... 2-60 Inside the vehicle .................................................... 8-3 Off-road recovery.......................................................... 5-7
Map lights .............................................................. 2-60 Maintenance indicators....................................... 2-24 Oil
Mood lights............................................................ 2-62 Maintenance precautions...................................... 8-5 Capacities and
Personal lights ...................................................... 2-61 Maintenance requirements.................................... 8-2 recommended fuel/lubricants............................... 9-2
Replacement.......................................................... 8-25 Outside the vehicle................................................. 8-2 Changing engine oil and filter.............................. 8-9
Trunk light............................................................... 2-63 Seat belt maintenance........................................ 1-26 Checking engine oil level...................................... 8-8
Vanity mirror lights ............................................... 2-62 Malfunction indicator light (MIL).............................. 2-18 Engine oil................................................................... 8-8
Warning/indicator lights and Manual command selection................................... 4-101 Engine oil viscosity.................................................. 9-5
audible reminders................................................. 2-12 Manual front seat adjustment..................................... 1-3 Oil filter replacement indicator ......................... 2-24
Xenon headlights.................................................. 2-37 Map lights ..................................................................... 2-60 Opening the soft top.................................................. 3-28
Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement..... 8-29 Master warning light................................................... 2-16 Operation, Operational indicators........................... 2-21
Loading information (See vehicle Mechanical key (Intelligent Key system) ................. 3-4 Outside air temperature display.............................. 2-27
loading information).................................................... 9-13 Memory storage, Automatic drive positioner ....... 3-52 Outside mirrors............................................................ 3-49
Lock Meter, Trip computer.................................................. 2-25 Overdrive OFF switch................................................ 5-18
Automatic door locks............................................. 3-7 Meters and gauges....................................................... 2-5 Overheat, If your vehicle overheats........................ 6-17
Door locks................................................................. 3-5 Instrument brightness control ........................... 2-40 Owner’s Manual/Service Manual
Lift gate lock.......................................................... 3-20 Mirror order information......................................................... 9-30
Power door lock...................................................... 3-5 Inside mirror........................................................... 3-48
Trunk lid.................................................................. 3-25 Outside mirrors..................................................... 3-49 P
Locking with mechanical key...................................... 3-5 Vanity mirror........................................................... 3-51
Low fuel warning......................................................... 2-22 Monitor, Rearview monitor........................................ 4-23 Panic alarm................................................................... 3-18
Low tire pressure warning light............................... 2-14 Mood lights................................................................... 2-62 Parking
Low tire pressure warning system Moonroof....................................................................... 2-58 Brake break-in....................................................... 5-37
(See tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)) .... 5-4 Moving Object Detection (MOD) function........... 4-37 Parking brake operation ..................................... 5-19
Low washer fluid warning......................................... 2-23 Multi-function controller............................................... 4-5 Parking brake release warning ......................... 2-22
Luggage cover............................................................. 2-53 Parking on hills ..................................................... 5-36
Luggage hooks............................................................ 2-53 Personal lights ............................................................. 2-61
Luggage side box ....................................................... 2-51
N
Phone
New vehicle break-in.................................................. 5-31 Bluetooth® hands-free phone system
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System..................... 2-31 (models with navigation system)...................... 4-88
NISSAN voice recognition system ...................... 4-112 Bluetooth® hands-free phone system
(models without navigation system)................ 4-99
10-4
Car phone or CB radio ...................................... 4-88 Rear center seat belt ................................................. 1-23 Seat belt hooks .................................................... 1-22
Power Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock........... 3-8 Seat belt maintenance........................................ 1-26
Front seat adjustment............................................ 1-4 Rear seats....................................................................... 1-9 Seat belt warning light........................................ 2-16
Power door lock...................................................... 3-5 Rear window and outside mirror Seat belts............................................................... 1-15
Power outlet.......................................................... 2-45 defroster switch........................................................... 2-36 Seat belts with pretensioners........................... 1-59
Power steering fluid............................................. 8-11 Rear window wiper and washer switch................ 2-35 Shoulder belt height adjustment...................... 1-22
Power steering system....................................... 5-37 Rearview monitor......................................................... 4-23 Small children........................................................ 1-28
Power windows.................................................... 2-55 Recorders, Event data............................................... 9-29 Three-point type................................................... 1-18
Precautions Registering your vehicle in another country........... 9-8 Seat(s)
Audio operation.................................................... 4-46 Remote keyless entry system................................... 3-16 Driver-side memory.............................................. 3-51
Braking precautions............................................. 5-37 Repairing flat tire (CrossCabriolet models) ......... 6-10 Heated seats......................................................... 2-42
Child restraints...................................................... 1-29 Reporting safety defects (US only)........................ 9-27 Seats.......................................................................... 1-2
Cruise control........................................................ 5-30 Rollover............................................................................ 5-7 Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
Driving safety............................................................ 5-9 Roof, Roof rack............................................................ 2-54 System), Engine start................................................. 2-31
Maintenance............................................................. 8-5 Roof, Soft top .............................................................. 3-28 Security system, Vehicle security system............. 2-30
On-pavement and off-road driving..................... 5-7 Servicing air conditioner............................................ 4-45
Seat belt usage.................................................... 1-15 S SETTING button.......................................................... 4-13
Supplemental restraint system.......................... 1-46 Shift lever
When starting and driving .................................... 5-3 Safety Shift lock release.................................................. 5-19
Push starting................................................................ 6-17 Child seat belts .................................................... 1-27 Shift lock release, Transmission.............................. 5-19
“PUSH” warning.......................................................... 2-22 Reporting safety defects (US only)................. 9-27 SHIFT “P” warning...................................................... 2-22
Push-button ignition switch.......................... 5-11, 5-12 Towing safety......................................................... 9-21 Shifting, CVT (Continuously
Satellite radio operation ............................................ 4-66 Variable Transmission) ............................................... 5-16
R Seat adjustment Shoulder belt height adjustment............................. 1-22
Front manual seat adjustment.............................. 1-3 Soft top
Radio.............................................................................. 4-46 Front power seat adjustment............................... 1-4 Care and cleaning (CrossCabriolet models).... 7-3
Car phone or CB radio ...................................... 4-88 Front seats................................................................ 1-3 If the top does not open or close.................... 3-38
FM-AM radio with Compact Disc Seat belt(s) Soft top indicator light............................. 2-19, 3-33
(CD) changer........................................................ 4-60 Child safety............................................................ 1-27 Soft top operation................................................ 3-28
FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc Infants...................................................................... 1-28 SOURCE select switch............................................. 4-86
(CD) player............................................................ 4-65 Injured persons..................................................... 1-18 Spare tire.............................................................. 8-42, 9-7
Rain-sensing auto wiper system............................. 2-34 Larger children...................................................... 1-28 Spark plugs .................................................................. 8-16
Rapid air pressure loss................................................ 5-8 Precautions on seat belt usage........................ 1-15 Speedometer.................................................................. 2-6
Readiness for inspection/maintenance Pregnant women.................................................. 1-18 Starting
(I/M) test........................................................................ 9-28 Rear center seat belt .......................................... 1-23 Before starting the engine................................. 5-14
Rear and rear-wide view monitor with Moving Seat belt cleaning................................................... 7-6 Jump starting......................................................... 6-15
Object Detection (MOD) .......................................... 4-30 Seat belt extenders.............................................. 1-26 Precautions when starting and driving.............. 5-3
10-5
Push starting......................................................... 6-17 T TPMS, Tire pressure warning system...................... 6-3
Starting the engine.............................................. 5-15 Trailer towing................................................................ 9-16
STATUS button.............................................................. 4-9 Tachometer..................................................................... 2-7 Transceiver, HomeLink® Universal Transceiver.... 2-63
Status light, Front passenger air bag.................... 1-54 Temperature display.................................................... 2-27 Transmission
Steering Temperature gauge, Engine coolant Continuously Variable Transmission
Heated steering wheel........................................ 2-41 temperature gauge........................................................ 2-7 (CVT) fluid.............................................................. 8-11
Power steering fluid............................................. 8-11 Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), Driving with CVT (Continuously
Power steering system....................................... 5-37 Engine start................................................................... 2-31 Variable Transmission) ........................................ 5-16
Steering-wheel-mounted controls Three-way catalyst........................................................ 5-4 Transmission shift lever lock release............... 5-19
for audio ................................................................. 4-86 Tilt/telescopic steering............................................... 3-46 Transmitter (See remote keyless entry system).... 3-16
Tilt/telescopic steering........................................ 3-46 Tire Traveling or registering your vehicle in
Storage.......................................................................... 2-47 Pressure, Low tire pressure warning light..... 2-14 another country.............................................................. 9-8
Storage box.................................................................. 2-50 Tire replacement indicator................................. 2-24 Trip computer............................................................... 2-25
Sun visors..................................................................... 3-47 Tires Trip odometer............................................................... 2-26
Sunglasses holder...................................................... 2-48 Emergency tire puncture repair kit .................. 8-43 Trunk
Supplemental air bag warning labels..................... 1-61 Flat tire....................................................................... 6-3 Trunk lid.................................................................. 3-25
Supplemental air bag warning light............ 1-61, 2-16 Low tire pressure warning system...................... 5-4 Trunk lid release switch...................................... 3-25
Supplemental restraint system................................. 1-46 Tire and Loading information label....... 8-34, 9-10 Trunk light...................................................................... 2-63
Precautions on supplemental Tire chains.............................................................. 8-39 Turn signal switch....................................................... 2-40
restraint system..................................................... 1-46 Tire dressing............................................................. 7-4
Switch Tire pressure ......................................................... 8-32 U
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) lock switch................ 5-33 Tire pressure monitoring
Autolight switch.................................................... 2-38 system (TPMS)............................................... 5-4, 6-3 Underbody cleaning ..................................................... 7-3
Fog light switch.................................................... 2-41 Tire rotation............................................................ 8-40 Uniform tire quality grading ...................................... 9-26
Hazard warning flasher switch............................. 6-2 Types of tires......................................................... 8-38 USB memory operation............................................. 4-72
Headlight switch................................................... 2-37 Uniform tire quality grading ............................... 9-26
Overdrive OFF switch......................................... 5-18 Wheel/tire size......................................................... 9-7 V
Power door lock switch......................................... 3-7 Wheels and tires.................................................. 8-32
Rear window and outside mirror Tonneau cover (see cargo cover)........................... 2-52 Vanity mirror.................................................................. 3-51
defroster switch.................................................... 2-36 Top, Soft top................................................................ 3-28 Vanity mirror lights ...................................................... 2-62
Turn signal switch................................................ 2-40 Touch screen system................................................... 4-5 Variable voltage control system............................... 8-15
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch..... 2-44 Towing Vehicle
Warning systems switch.................................... 2-43 Flat towing............................................................. 9-25 Dimensions and weights....................................... 9-8
Tow truck towing.................................................. 6-19 Identification number (VIN)................................... 9-8
Towing a trailer..................................................... 9-16 Loading information............................................. 9-13
Towing safety......................................................... 9-21 Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) .................. 6-22
TPMS, Tire pressure monitoring system................. 5-4 Security system.................................................... 2-30
10-6
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch..... 2-44 Washing........................................................................... 7-2
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system.......... 5-39 Waxing............................................................................. 7-3
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) Weights (See dimensions and weights)................. 9-8
warning light.......................................................... 2-16 Wheel/tire size............................................................... 9-7
Vehicle information and settings (display)........ 4-9 Wheels and tires......................................................... 8-32
Ventilators...................................................................... 4-40 Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels......................... 7-4
Voice command (Bluetooth® Hands-Free Window washer fluid................................................. 8-13
Phone System) ......................................................... 4-104 Window(s)
Voice command (NISSAN voice Cleaning .................................................................... 7-3
recognition system) ................................... 4-118, 4-127 Power windows.................................................... 2-55
Windshield wiper and washer switch.................... 2-32
W Wiper
Rain-sensing auto wiper system...................... 2-34
Walk-in function............................................................. 1-4 Rear window wiper and washer switch......... 2-35
Warning Rear window wiper blade.................................. 8-19
Dot matrix display................................................. 2-20 Windshield wiper and washer switch............. 2-32
Hazard warning flasher switch............................. 6-2 Wiper blades......................................................... 8-18
Lights....................................................................... 2-12
Tire pressure monitoring X
system (TPMS)............................................... 5-4, 6-3
Warning/indicator lights and Xenon headlights......................................................... 2-37
audible reminders................................................. 2-11
Warning labels, Air bag warning labels................. 1-61
Warning light
Air bag warning light................................ 1-61, 2-16
All-wheel drive (AWD) warning light............... 2-12
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
warning light.......................................................... 2-12
AWD warning light.............................................. 5-35
Brake warning light.............................................. 2-13
Intelligent Key warning light............................... 2-14
Low tire pressure warning light........................ 2-14
Seat belt warning light........................................ 2-16
Warranty, Emission control system warranty....... 9-27
Washer switch
Rear window wiper and washer switch......... 2-35
Windshield wiper and washer switch............. 2-32
10-7
GAS STATION INFORMATION
FUEL RECOMMENDATION: recommendation.

. Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your
vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed COLD TIRE PRESSURES:
Hardtop models
to run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E- The label is typically located on the driver side
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
15 or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not center pillar or on the driver’s door. For
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)
specifically designed for E-15 or E- additional information, see “Wheels and tires”
number (Research octane number 91). in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
85 fuel can adversely affect the
CrossCabriolet models emission control devices and sys- section.
NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded tems of the vehicle. Damage caused NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCE-
premium gasoline with an octane rating of at by such fuel is not covered by the DURES RECOMMENDATION:
NISSAN new vehicle limited war-
least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Re- During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of
ranty.
search octane number 96). vehicle use, follow the recommendations out-
. U.S. government regulations require lined in the “Break-in schedule” in the “5.
If unleaded premium gasoline is not available,
you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an ethanol dispensing pumps to be Starting and driving” section of this Owner’s
identified by a small, square, orange Manual. Follow these recommendations for the
octane rating of at least 87 AKI number
and black label with the common future reliability and economy of your new
(Research octane number 91), but you may
abbreviation or the appropriate per- vehicle.
notice a decrease in performance.
centage for that region.
CAUTION For additional information, see “Capacities and

recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Techni-
. Using a fuel other than that speci- cal and consumer information” section.
fied could adversely affect the emis- ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
sion control system, and may also
. Engine oil with API Certification Mark
affect warranty coverage.
. Viscosity SAE 5W-30
. Under no circumstances should a
See “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubri-
leaded gasoline be used, because
cants” in the “9. Technical and consumer
this will damage the three-way cat-
information” section for engine oil and oil filter
alyst.
Printing : November 2012 (31)
Publication No.: OM0E
OM14E0L32U2
0Z51U0
Printed in U.S.A.
TOOUM-1SX5D Z51-W

2014 Murano Owner Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2014 Murano Owner Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2014 Murano Owner Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

®

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVI-

NISSAN CARES ...

Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3

Starting and driving 5

Appearance and care 7

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8

Technical and consumer information 9

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

CROSSCABRIOLET MODELS 5. Supplemental front-impact air bags (P.1-46)

8. License plate installation (P.9-12)

HARDTOP MODELS — Rain-sensing auto wiper system* (P.2-34)

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

CROSSCABRIOLET MODELS — Blade replacement (P.8-18)

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

Object Detection (MOD)* (P.4-30)

HARDTOP MODELS 3. Rear window defroster (P.2-36)

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

CROSSCABRIOLET MODELS — Intelligent Key system (P.3-8)

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

10. Sunglasses holder (P.2-48)

HARDTOP MODELS — Power door lock switch (P.3-7)

CROSSCABRIOLET MODELS 3. Sun visors (P.3-47)

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

7. TRIP/RESET switch (P.2-6)

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

— Bluetooth ® Hands-Free Phone System

1. Side ventilator (P.4-40) 6. Heater/air conditioner control (P.4-41) or Center

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

1. Instrument brightness control switch (P.2-40) — Trip computer (P.2-40)

Illustrated table of contents 0-13

VQ35DE ENGINE 7. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-13)

Brake warning light 2-13 Exterior light indicator 2-17

Illustrated table of contents 0-15

0-16 Illustrated table of contents

. The seatback should not be reclined

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Seat lifter (if so equipped): Lumbar support (if so equipped):

1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Forward and backward:

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

This feature makes it easier to get in and out of

Driver’s seatback release (CrossCabrio-

1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

REAR SEATS (Hardtop models) To return the seatbacks:

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

The illustration shows the seating positions Components Adjustment

1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

Install Front-seat Active Head Restraint

1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system